Mercedes Benz C250 Car Full Manual

C-ClassOperator's Manual

SymbolsRegistered trademarks:RBabySmart™ is a registered trademark of

the Siemens Automotive Corp.RBluetooth® is a registered trademark of the

Bluetooth SIG Inc.RDTS is a registered trademark of DTS, Inc.RDolby and MLP are registered trademarks

of Dolby Laboratories.RESP® and PRE-SAFE® are registered

trademarks of Daimler AG.RHomeLink® is a registered trademark of

Prince, a Johnson Controls Company.RiPod® and iTunes® are registered

trademarks of Apple Inc., registered in theUSA and in other countries.RLogic 7® is a registered trademark of

Harman International Industries,Incorporated.RMicrosoft® is a registered trademark of the

Microsoft Corporation in the USA and inother countries.RSIRIUS and associated brands are

registered trademarks of SIRIUS XM RadioInc.RHD Radio and associated brands are

registered trademarks of the iBiquityDigital Corporation.RWindows Media® is a registered trademark

of the Microsoft Corporation in the USA andin other countries.RGracenote® is a registered trademark of

Gracenote, Inc.RZagatSurvey® and associated brands are

registered trademarks of Zagat.In this Operator's Manual, you will find thefollowing symbols:

G WARNINGWarning notes draw your attention to hazardsthat endanger your health or life, or the healthor life of others.

! These warning notes draw your attentionto hazards that could cause damage to yourvehicle.

i This symbol indicates useful instructionsor further information that could be helpfulto you.

X This symbol designates aninstruction you must follow.

X Several consecutive symbolsindicate an instruction with severalsteps.

Y Page This symbol tells you where youcan find further information on atopic.

YY This symbol indicates a warning oran instruction that is continued onthe next page.

Display This font indicates a displaymessage in the multifunctiondisplay/COMAND display.

Parts of the software in the vehicle aresubject to copyright according to © 2005The FreeType Projecthttp://www.freetype.org. All rightsreserved.

Welcome to the world of Mercedes-BenzBefore you drive off, please familiarizeyourself with your vehicle and read thismanual, especially the safety and warningnotes. This will help you to obtain themaximum pleasure from your vehicle andavoid endangering yourself and others.The equipment or model designation of yourvehicle may differ according to:RmodelRorderRcountry variantRavailabilityMercedes-Benz is constantly updating itsvehicles to the state of the art.Mercedes-Benz therefore reserves the rightto introduce changes in the following areas:RdesignRequipmentRtechnical featuresTherefore, you cannot base any claims on theillustrations or text content in this Operator'sManual.The following are integral components of thevehicle:ROperator's ManualRService BookletREquipment-dependent supplementsKeep these documents in the vehicle at alltimes. When you sell the vehicle, always passthe documents on to the new owner.The technical documentation team atDaimler AG wishes you safe and pleasantmotoring.Mercedes-Benz USA, LLCMercedes-Benz Canada, Inc.A Daimler Company

2045843582 É2045843582ÇËÍ

Index ....................................................... 4

Introduction ......................................... 21

At a glance ........................................... 27

Safety ................................................... 35

Opening/closing ................................. 69

Seats, steering wheel and mirrors .... 91

Lights and windshield wipers .......... 105

Climate control ................................. 121

Driving and parking .......................... 135

On-board computer and displays .... 193

Stowing and features ....................... 253

Maintenance and care ...................... 277

Breakdown assistance ..................... 291

Wheels and tires ............................... 309

Technical data ................................... 341

Contents 3

1, 2, 3 ...115 V socket ...................................... 26312 V socket

see Sockets 4ETS

see ETS/4ETS (ElectronicTraction System)

4MATIC (permanent four-wheeldrive) .................................................. 1754MATIC off-road system ................... 175

AABS (Anti-lock Braking System)

Display message ............................ 214Function/notes ................................ 59Important safety notes .................... 59Warning lamp ................................. 242

Activating/deactivating coolingwith air dehumidification ................. 126Active Blind Spot Assist

Activating/deactivating (on-board computer) ............................ 205Function/information .................... 187

Active Driving Assistance package . 187Active Lane Keeping Assist

Activating/deactivating (on-board computer) ............................ 205Display message ............................ 229Function/information .................... 190

Active light function ......................... 110Active Light System

Display message ............................ 224Active service system PLUS

see ASSYST PLUS service intervaldisplay

ADAPTIVE BRAKE ................................. 64Adaptive Highbeam Assist

Display message ............................ 225Function/notes ............................. 110Switching on/off (on-boardcomputer) ...................................... 207

Additives (engine oil) ........................ 349Air bags

Display message ............................ 221Front air bag (driver, frontpassenger) ....................................... 39

Important safety notes .................... 38Knee bag .......................................... 40PASSENGER AIR BAG OFFindicator lamp .................................. 42Pelvis air bag ................................... 41Safety guidelines ............................. 37Side impact air bag .......................... 40Window curtain air bag .................... 42

Air-conditioning systemsee Climate control

AIR FLOW ........................................... 127Air pressure

see Tire pressure Air vents

Glove box ....................................... 132Important safety notes .................. 131Rear ............................................... 133Setting ........................................... 131Setting the center air vents ........... 132Setting the side air vents ............... 132

Alarm systemsee ATA (Anti-Theft Alarm system)

Alertness Assistantsee ATTENTION ASSIST

AMG menu (on-board computer) ..... 210Anti-lock Braking System

see ABS (Anti-lock Braking System) Anti-Theft Alarm system

see ATA (Anti-Theft Alarm system) Ashtray ............................................... 262Assistance menu (on-boardcomputer) .......................................... 204ASSYST PLUS


ATA (Anti-Theft Alarm system)Activating/deactivating ................... 67Function ........................................... 67Switching off the alarm .................... 67

ATTENTION ASSISTActivating/deactivating ................. 205Display message ............................ 228Function/notes ............................. 182

Audio menu (on-board computer) .... 201Audio system

see separate operating instructions

4 Index

Authorized Mercedes-Benz Centersee Qualified specialist workshop

AUTO lightsDisplay message ............................ 225see Lights

Automatic headlamp mode .............. 108Automatic transmission

Automatic drive program ............... 146Changing gear ............................... 144Display message ............................ 236Driving tips .................................... 144Emergency running mode .............. 149Kickdown ....................................... 144Manual drive program .................... 147Problem (malfunction) ................... 149Program selector button ................ 144Pulling away ................................... 139Releasing the parking lockmanually ........................................ 149Selector lever ................................ 142Shift ranges ................................... 146Starting the engine ........................ 139Steering wheel paddle shifters ...... 145Transmission position display ........ 143Transmission positions .................. 143

Automatic transmissionemergency mode ............................... 149

BBack support

see Lumbar support Backup lamp

Changing bulbs .............................. 116Display message ............................ 224

Bag hook ............................................ 258BAS (Brake Assist System) ................. 59Basic settings

see Settings BAS PLUS (Brake Assist SystemPLUS) .................................................... 60Battery (SmartKey)

Checking .......................................... 74Important safety notes .................... 74Replacing ......................................... 74

Battery (vehicle)Charging ........................................ 300Display message ............................ 227

Important safety notes .................. 298Jump starting ................................. 301

Beltsee Seat belts

Blind Spot AssistActivating/deactivating ................. 205Notes/function .............................. 183see Active Blind Spot Assist

Brake Assist Systemsee BAS (Brake Assist System)

Brake fluidDisplay message ............................ 217Notes ............................................. 350

Brake fluid level ................................ 282Brake lamps

Changing bulbs .............................. 116Display message ............................ 223

BrakesABS .................................................. 59BAS .................................................. 59BAS PLUS ........................................ 60Brake fluid (notes) ......................... 350Display message ............................ 214Driving tips .................................... 156High-performance brake system .... 158Important safety notes .................. 156Maintenance .................................. 157Parking brake ................................ 154Warning lamp ................................. 241

Breakdownsee Flat tire see Towing away/tow-starting

Bulbssee Changing bulbs

CCalifornia

Important notice for retailcustomers and lessees .................... 22

Calling up a malfunctionsee Display messages

Capacitiessee Technical data

Carsee Vehicle

Index 5

CareCarpets .......................................... 289Car wash ........................................ 284Display ........................................... 288Exterior lights ................................ 287Gear or selector lever .................... 288Matte finish ................................... 285Notes ............................................. 283Paint .............................................. 285Plastic trim .................................... 288Power washer ................................ 284Rear view camera .......................... 287Roof lining ...................................... 289Seat belt ........................................ 289Seat cover ..................................... 288Sensors ......................................... 287Steering wheel ............................... 288Tail pipes ....................................... 287Trim pieces .................................... 288Washing by hand ........................... 284Wheels ........................................... 285Windows ........................................ 286Wiper blades .................................. 286Wooden trim .................................. 288

Cargo tie down rings ......................... 258Car wash (care) ................................. 284CD player/CD changer (on-boardcomputer) .......................................... 202Cell phone

see Mobile phone Center console ..................................... 32Central locking

Automatic locking (on-boardcomputer) ...................................... 208Locking/unlocking (SmartKey) ........ 70

Changing bulbsBrake lamps ................................... 116Cornering light function ................. 115High-beam headlamps ................... 115Important safety notes .................. 113Low-beam headlamps .................... 114Overview of bulb types .................. 114Parking lamps ................................ 115Reversing lamps ............................ 116Standing lamps (front) ................... 115

Child-proof locksImportant safety notes .................... 57Rear doors ....................................... 57

ChildrenIn the vehicle ................................... 53Restraint systems ............................ 53

Child seatLATCH-type (ISOFIX) child seatanchors ............................................ 55Special seat belt retractor ............... 55Top Tether ....................................... 56

Cigarette lighter ................................ 262Climate control

Automatic climate control (3-zone) .............................................. 125Controlling automatically ............... 127Cooling with air dehumidification . . 126Defrosting the windows ................. 130Defrosting the windshield .............. 129Dual-zone automatic climatecontrol ........................................... 123Important safety notes .................. 122Indicator lamp ................................ 127Maximum cooling .......................... 130Notes on using automatic climatecontrol ................................... 124, 126Overview of systems ...................... 122Problems with cooling with airdehumidification ............................ 127Problem with the rear windowdefroster ........................................ 130Rear control panel ......................... 125Refrigerant ..................................... 350Setting the air distribution ............. 128Setting the airflow ......................... 129Setting the air vents ...................... 131Setting the climate mode (AIRFLOW) ............................................ 127Setting the temperature ................ 128Switching air-recirculation modeon/off ............................................ 130Switching on/off ........................... 126Switching residual heat on/off ...... 131Switching the rear windowheating on/off ............................... 130Switching the ZONE function on/off .................................................. 129

CockpitOverview .......................................... 28see Instrument cluster

6 Index

COMANDsee separate operating instructions

Combination switch .......................... 109Compass

Calibrating ..................................... 276Calling up ....................................... 275Setting ........................................... 275

Consumption statistics (on-boardcomputer) .......................................... 199Convenience closing feature .............. 84Convenience opening feature ............ 84Coolant (engine)

Checking the level ......................... 280Display message ............................ 225Notes ............................................. 350Temperature (on-board computer) . 210Temperature gauge ........................ 194Warning lamp ................................. 247

Coolingsee Climate control

Cornering light functionChanging bulbs .............................. 115Display message ............................ 222Function/notes ............................. 110

Crash-responsive emergencylighting ............................................... 113Cruise control

Cruise control lever ....................... 160Deactivating ................................... 161Display message ............................ 233Driving system ............................... 159Function/notes ............................. 159Important safety notes .................. 159LIM indicator lamp ......................... 160Setting a speed .............................. 160Storing and maintaining currentspeed ............................................. 160

Cup holderCenter console .............................. 260Important safety notes .................. 259Rear compartment ......................... 260

Customer Assistance Center (CAC) ... 25Customer Relations Department ....... 25

DDashboard

see Cockpit Data

see Technical data Daytime running lamps

Display message ............................ 224Switching on/off (on-boardcomputer) ...................................... 207Switching on/off (switch) .............. 107

Delayed switch-offExterior lighting (on-boardcomputer) ...................................... 207Interior lighting .............................. 208

Digital speedometer ......................... 199Display (cleaning instructions) ........ 288Display messages

Calling up (on-board computer) ..... 213Driving systems ............................. 228Engine ............................................ 225General notes ................................ 213Hiding (on-board computer) ........... 213KEYLESS-GO .................................. 238Lights ............................................. 222Safety systems .............................. 214Service interval display .................. 282SmartKey ....................................... 238Tires ............................................... 233Vehicle ........................................... 236

Distance display (on-boardcomputer) .......................................... 204Distance recorder ............................. 199

see Odometer see Trip odometer

Distance warning (warning lamp) .... 249DISTRONIC PLUS

Deactivating ................................... 169Display message ............................ 231Displays in the multifunctiondisplay ........................................... 168Driving tips .................................... 170Function/notes ............................. 161Important safety notes .................. 161Setting the specified minimumdistance ......................................... 168Warning lamp ................................. 249

Index 7

DoorsAutomatic locking (on-boardcomputer) ...................................... 208Automatic locking (switch) ............... 78Central locking/unlocking(SmartKey) ....................................... 70Control panel ................................... 34Display message ............................ 237Emergency locking ........................... 79Emergency unlocking ....................... 79Important safety notes .................... 77Opening (from inside) ...................... 78

Drinking and driving ......................... 155Drinks holder

see Cup holder Drive program

Automatic ...................................... 146Display ........................................... 143Manual ........................................... 147SETUP (on-board computer) .......... 210

Drive program selector ..................... 145Driver's door

see Doors Driver's seat

see Seats Driving abroad

Mercedes-Benz Service ................. 283Symmetrical low beam .................. 106

Driving lampssee Daytime running lamps

Driving on flooded roads .................. 158Driving safety systems

ABS (Anti-lock Braking System) ....... 59ADAPTIVE BRAKE ............................. 64BAS (Brake Assist System) .............. 59BAS PLUS (Brake Assist SystemPLUS) ............................................... 60Electronic brake force distribution ... 64ESP® (Electronic StabilityProgram) .......................................... 61ETS/4ETS (Electronic TractionSystem) ........................................... 61Important safety information ........... 59Overview .......................................... 58PRE-SAFE® Brake ............................. 65

Driving systemsActive Blind Spot Assist ................. 187Active Driving Assistancepackage ......................................... 187Active Lane Keeping Assist ............ 190ATTENTION ASSIST ........................ 182Blind Spot Assist ............................ 183Cruise control ................................ 159Display message ............................ 228DISTRONIC PLUS ........................... 161Dynamic handling package withsports mode .................................. 171HOLD function ............................... 172Lane Keeping Assist ...................... 185Lane Tracking package .................. 183Parking Guidance ........................... 178PARKTRONIC ................................. 175RACE START (AMG vehicles) .......... 174Rear view camera .......................... 181

Driving tipsAutomatic transmission ................. 144Brakes ........................................... 156Break-in period .............................. 136DISTRONIC PLUS ........................... 170Downhill gradient ........................... 156Drinking and driving ....................... 155Driving abroad ............................... 106Driving in winter ............................. 158Driving on flooded roads ................ 158Driving on wet roads ...................... 158Exhaust check ............................... 156Fuel ................................................ 155General .......................................... 155Hydroplaning ................................. 158Icy road surfaces ........................... 159Limited braking efficiency onsalted roads ................................... 157Pedals ............................................ 155Snow chains .................................. 313Symmetrical low beam .................. 106Wet road surface ........................... 156

DVD audio (on-board computer) ...... 202DVD video (on-board computer) ...... 202Dynamic handling package withsports mode ....................................... 171

8 Index

EEASY-ENTRY feature

Activating/deactivating ................. 209Function/notes ............................. 100

EASY-EXIT featureCrash-responsive ........................... 101Function/notes ............................. 100Switching on/off ........................... 209

EBD (electronic brake forcedistribution)

Display message ............................ 216Function/notes ................................ 64

Electrical fusessee Fuses

Electronic brake force distributionsee EBD (electronic brake forcedistribution)

Electronic Stability Programsee ESP® (Electronic Stability Program)

Electronic Traction Systemsee ETS/4ETS (ElectronicTraction System)

Emergency releaseDriver's door .................................... 79Fuel filler flap ................................. 151Trunk ............................................... 82Vehicle ............................................. 79

Emergency spare wheelStorage location ............................ 293

Emergency Tensioning DevicesFunction ........................................... 52Safety guidelines ............................. 37

Emissions purificationService and warranty information .... 21

EngineCheck Engine warning lamp ........... 246Display message ............................ 225Emergency starting ........................ 305Engine number ............................... 344Irregular running ............................ 141Starting problems .......................... 141Starting the engine with theSmartKey ....................................... 139Starting with KEYLESS-GO ............. 139Switching off .................................. 153

Engine electronicsProblem (malfunction) ................... 141

Engine oilAdding ........................................... 279Additives ........................................ 349Checking the oil level ..................... 279Checking the oil level using thedipstick .......................................... 279Display message ............................ 227Filling capacity ............................... 346Notes about oil grades ................... 349Notes on oil level/consumption .... 279Temperature (on-board computer) . 210Viscosity ........................................ 349

ESP® (Electronic StabilityProgram)

AMG menu (on-board computer) . . . 210Deactivating/activating (AMGvehicles) .......................................... 62Deactivating/activating (exceptAMG vehicles) ................................ 204Deactivating/activating (notes;except AMG vehicles) ...................... 62Display message ............................ 214ETS/4ETS ........................................ 61Function/notes ................................ 61Important safety information ........... 61Warning lamp ................................. 243

ETS/4ETS (Electronic TractionSystem) ................................................ 61Exhaust check ................................... 156Exhaust tail pipe (cleaninginstructions) ...................................... 287Exterior lighting

see Lights Exterior mirrors

Adjusting ....................................... 101Dipping (automatic) ....................... 102Folding in/out (automatically) ....... 102Folding in/out (electrically) ........... 101Folding in when locking (on-boardcomputer) ...................................... 209Out of position (troubleshooting) ... 102Setting ........................................... 102Storing settings (memoryfunction) ........................................ 103Storing the parking position .......... 102

Eyeglasses compartment ................. 255

Index 9

FFiller cap

see Fuel filler flap First-aid kit ......................................... 292Flat tire

Changing a wheel/mounting thespare wheel ................................... 293MOExtended run-flat system ......... 297Preparing the vehicle ..................... 293Raising the vehicle ......................... 295

Floormat ............................................. 276Frequencies

Garage door opener ....................... 275Front fog lamps ................................. 108

Display message ............................ 223Switching on/off ........................... 108

Front windshieldsee Windshield

FuelAdditives ........................................ 348Consumption statistics .................. 199Displaying the currentconsumption .................................. 199Displaying the range ...................... 199Driving tips .................................... 155Flexible fuel vehicles ...................... 347Fuel gauge ....................................... 29Important safety notes .................. 347Premium-grade unleaded gasoline . 347Problem (malfunction) ................... 153Refueling ........................................ 150Specifications ................................ 348Tank content/reserve fuel ............. 346

Fuel filler flapEmergency release ........................ 151Opening/closing ............................ 151

Fuel levelCalling up the range (on-boardcomputer) ...................................... 199

Fuel tankCapacity ........................................ 346Problem (malfunction) ................... 153

Fuse allocation chart (vehicle toolkit) ...................................................... 292Fuses

Allocation chart ............................. 305Before changing ............................. 305

Dashboard fuse box ....................... 305Fuse box in the enginecompartment ................................. 306Fuse box in the trunk ..................... 306Important safety notes .................. 305

GGarage door opener

Clearing the memory ..................... 274Frequencies ................................... 275Notes ............................................. 270Opening/closing the garage door .. 273Programming (button in the rear-view mirror) ................................... 271

Gasoline ............................................. 150Gear indicator (on-boardcomputer) .......................................... 210Gear or selector lever (cleaningguidelines) ......................................... 288Genuine Mercedes-Benz parts ......... 342Glove box ........................................... 254

HHandbrake

see Parking brake Hazard warning lamps ...................... 109Headlamp cleaning system

Notes ............................................. 351Headlamps

Adding fluid to cleaning system ..... 281Cleaning system (function) ............ 109Fogging up ..................................... 112see Automatic headlamp mode

Head restraintsAdjusting ......................................... 95Adjusting (electrically) ..................... 96Adjusting (manually) ........................ 95Adjusting (rear) ................................ 96Installing/removing (rear) ................ 97Luxury .............................................. 96see NECK-PRO head restraints see NECK-PRO head restraints/NECK-PRO luxury head restraints

Heatingsee Climate control

10 Index

High-beam headlampsChanging bulbs .............................. 115Display message ............................ 223Switching Adaptive HighbeamAssist on/off ................................. 110Switching on/off ........................... 109

Hill start assist .................................. 140HOLD function

Display message ............................ 228Function/notes ............................. 172

HoodClosing ........................................... 279Display message ............................ 237Opening ......................................... 278

Hydroplaning ..................................... 158

IIgnition lock

see Key positions Immobilizer .......................................... 66Indicator lamps

see Warning and indicator lamps Indicators

see Turn signals Instrument cluster

Overview .......................................... 29Settings ......................................... 206Warning and indicator lamps ........... 30

Instrument cluster lighting ................ 29Instrument lighting

see Instrument cluster lighting Interior lighting ................................. 112

Automatic control .......................... 112Delayed switch-off (on-boardcomputer) ...................................... 208Emergency lighting ........................ 113Manual control ............................... 113Overview ........................................ 112Reading lamp ................................. 112

JJack

Storage location ............................ 292Using ............................................. 295

Jump starting (engine) ...................... 301

KKey

see SmartKey KEYLESS-GO

Convenience closing feature ............ 85Display message ............................ 238Locking ............................................ 71Start/Stop button .......................... 137Starting the engine ........................ 139Unlocking ......................................... 71

Key positionsKEYLESS-GO .................................. 137SmartKey ....................................... 137

KickdownDriving tips .................................... 144Manual drive program .................... 148

Knee bag .............................................. 40

LLamps

see Warning and indicator lamps Lane-change assistant

see Blind Spot Assist Lane detection (automatic)

see Lane Keeping Assist Lane Keeping Assist

Activating/deactivating ................. 205Display message ............................ 229Function/information .................... 185

Lane Tracking package ..................... 183Lap time (RACETIMER) ...................... 211LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child seatanchors ................................................ 55Lighting

see Lights Lights

Activating/deactivating theinterior lighting delayed switch-off . 208Active light function ....................... 110Automatic headlamp mode ............ 108Cornering light function ................. 110Display message ............................ 222Driving abroad ............................... 106Fog lamps ...................................... 108Hazard warning lamps ................... 109High beam flasher .......................... 109

Index 11

High-beam headlamps ................... 109Light switch ................................... 106Low-beam headlamps .................... 107Parking lamps ................................ 106Rear fog lamp ................................ 108Switching Adaptive HighbeamAssist on/off ................................. 207Switching the daytime runninglamps on/off (on-boardcomputer) ...................................... 207Switching the daytime runninglamps on/off (switch) .................... 107Switching the exterior lightingdelayed switch-off on/off (on-board computer) ............................ 207Switching the surround lightingon/off (on-board computer) .......... 207Turn signals ................................... 109see Changing bulbs see Interior lighting

Light sensor (display message) ....... 225LIM indicator lamp

Cruise control ................................ 160DISTRONIC PLUS ........................... 164

Loading guidelines ............................ 254Locking

see Central locking Locking (doors)

Automatic ........................................ 78Emergency locking ........................... 79From inside (central lockingbutton) ............................................. 78

Locking centrallysee Central locking

Locking verification signal (on-board computer) ............................... 208Low-beam headlamps

Changing bulbs .............................. 114Display message ............................ 222Setting for driving abroad(symmetrical) ................................. 106Switching on/off ........................... 107

Lumbar supportAdjusting ......................................... 97Adjusting the 4-way lumbarsupport ............................................ 97

Luxury head restraints ....................... 96

MM+S tires ............................................ 312Maintenance


Malfunction messagesee Display messages

Matte finish (cleaninginstructions) ...................................... 285mbrace

Call priority .................................... 268Display message ............................ 218Downloading destinations(COMAND) ..................................... 269Emergency call .............................. 266Important safety notes .................. 264Locating a stolen vehicle ............... 270MB info call button ........................ 268Remote vehicle locking .................. 270Roadside Assistance button .......... 267Search & Send ............................... 269Self-test ......................................... 265System .......................................... 265Vehicle remote unlocking .............. 269

Mechanical keyFunction/notes ................................ 73Locking vehicle ................................ 79Unlocking the driver's door .............. 79

Memory card (audio) ......................... 202Memory function ............................... 103Message memory (on-boardcomputer) .......................................... 213Messages

see Display messages Mirrors

see Exterior mirrors see Rear-view mirror see Vanity mirror

Mobile phoneMenu (on-board computer) ............ 202

Modifying the programming(SmartKey) ........................................... 73MOExtended run-flat system ........... 297MP3

Operation ....................................... 202see separate operating instructions

12 Index

Multifunction displayFunction/notes ............................. 196Permanent display ......................... 206

Multifunction steering wheelOperating the on-board computer . 195Overview .......................................... 31

Multifunction steering wheel (4buttons)

see 4-button multifunctionsteering wheel

NNavigation

Menu (on-board computer) ............ 200see separate operating instructions

NECK-PRO head restraintsOperation ......................................... 47Resetting after being triggered ........ 47

NECK-PRO luxury head restraintsOperation ......................................... 47Resetting after being triggered ........ 47

Notes on breaking-in a newvehicle ................................................ 136

OOccupant Classification System(OCS)

Faults ............................................... 46Operation ......................................... 42System self-test ............................... 45

Occupant safetyChildren in the vehicle ..................... 53System overview .............................. 36

Octane number (fuel) ........................ 348Odometer ........................................... 199

see Trip odometer Oil

see Engine oil On-board computer

AMG menu ..................................... 210Assistance menu ........................... 204Audio menu ................................... 201Convenience submenu .................. 209Displaying a service message ........ 283Display messages .......................... 213DISTRONIC PLUS ........................... 168

Factory settings submenu ............. 210Important safety notes .................. 194Instrument cluster submenu .......... 206Lighting submenu .......................... 207Menu overview .............................. 198Message memory .......................... 213Navigation menu ............................ 200Operation ....................................... 195RACETIMER ................................... 211Service menu ................................. 206Settings menu ............................... 206Standard display ............................ 199Telephone menu ............................ 202Trip menu ...................................... 199Vehicle submenu ........................... 208Video DVD operation ..................... 202

On-board diagnostics interface .......... 24Opening and closing the side trimpanels ................................................. 115Operating safety

On-board diagnostics interface ........ 24Operating system

see On-board computer Outside temperature display ........... 195Overhead control panel ...................... 33Override feature

Rear side windows ........................... 57

PPaint code number ............................ 343Paintwork (cleaning instructions) . . . 285Panic alarm .......................................... 58Panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel

Opening/closing .............................. 87Opening/closing the rollersunblind ........................................... 88Problem (malfunction) ..................... 89Resetting ......................................... 88

Panorama sliding sunroofImportant safety notes .................... 86

Parcel net ........................................... 256Parking ............................................... 153

Important safety notes .................. 153Parking brake ................................ 154

Index 13

Position of exterior mirror, front-passenger side ............................... 102Rear view camera .......................... 181see PARKTRONIC

Parking aidParking Guidance ........................... 178see Exterior mirrors see PARKTRONIC

Parking brakeDisplay message ............................ 216Notes/function .............................. 154

Parking GuidanceDisplay message ............................ 230Important safety notes .................. 178

Parking lamps (changing bulbs) ...... 115PARKTRONIC

Deactivating/activating ................. 177Driving system ............................... 175Function/notes ............................. 175Problem (malfunction) ................... 178Range of the sensors ..................... 176Warning display ............................. 177

PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicatorlamp ...................................................... 42Pedals ................................................. 155Permanent four-wheel drive

see 4MATIC (permanent four-wheel drive)

Plastic trim (cleaning instructions) . 288Power washers .................................. 284Power windows

see Side windows PRE-SAFE® Brake (vehicles withDISTRONIC PLUS)

Display message ............................ 218Function/notes ................................ 65Switching on/off ........................... 205Warning lamp ................................. 249

Preventive occupant safetysystem

see PRE-SAFE® (Preventiveoccupant safety system)

Product information ............................ 21Program selector button .................. 144Pulling away

Automatic transmission ................. 139

QQualified specialist workshop ........... 24

RRACE START (AMG vehicles) ............. 174RACETIMER (on-board computer) .... 211Radar sensor system

Activating/deactivating ................. 208Display message ............................ 229

RadioSelecting a station ......................... 201see separate operating instructions

Reading lamp ..................................... 112Rear compartment

Setting the airflow ......................... 129Setting the air vents ...................... 133

Rear fog lampDisplay message ............................ 223Switching on/off ........................... 108

Rear seatDisplay message ............................ 237Folding the backrest forwards/back ............................................... 257

Rear view cameraCleaning instructions ..................... 287Function/notes ............................. 181

Rear-view mirrorAnti-glare (manual) ........................ 101Dipping (automatic) ....................... 102

Rear window blind ............................ 261Rear window defroster

Problem (malfunction) ................... 130Rear window heating

Switching on/off ........................... 130Rear window wiper

Replacing the wiper blade .............. 118Switching on/off ........................... 117

RefuelingFuel gauge ....................................... 29Important safety notes .................. 150Refueling process .......................... 151see Fuel

Releasing the parking lockmanually (automatictransmission) ..................................... 149

14 Index

Remote controlGarage door opener ....................... 270

Reporting safety defects .................... 25Reserve (fuel tank)

see Fuel Reserve fuel

Display message ............................ 228Warning lamp ................................. 246see Fuel

Residual heat (climate control) ........ 131Restraint system

see SRS (Supplemental RestraintSystem)

Reverse gearEngaging (automatictransmission) ................................. 142

Roadside Assistance (breakdown) . . . . 22Roller blind

see Roller sunblind Roller sunblind

Panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel ..................................... 88Rear side windows ......................... 261Rear window .................................. 261

Roof carrier ........................................ 259Roof lining and carpets (cleaningguidelines) ......................................... 289Roof load (maximum) ........................ 351Route

see Route guidance (navigation) Route guidance (navigation) ............ 200

SSafety

Children in the vehicle ..................... 53Child restraint systems .................... 53Occupant Classification System(OCS) ............................................... 42Overview of occupant safetysystems ........................................... 36

Safety systemssee Driving safety systems

Seat beltsAdjusting the height ......................... 51Belt force limiters ............................ 52Cleaning ......................................... 289Correct usage .................................. 49

Emergency Tensioning Devices ........ 52Fastening ......................................... 50Important safety guidelines ............. 48Releasing ......................................... 51Safety guidelines ............................. 37Special seat belt retractor ............... 55Warning lamp ................................. 239Warning lamp (function) ................... 51

SeatsAdaptive seat backrests (AMGvehicles) .......................................... 97Adjusting (electrically) ..................... 94Adjusting (manually andelectrically) ...................................... 94Adjusting lumbar support ................ 97Adjusting the 4-way lumbarsupport ............................................ 97Adjusting the head restraint ............ 95Cleaning the cover ......................... 288Correct driver's seat position ........... 92Important safety notes .................... 93Seat heating problem ...................... 98Seat ventilation problem .................. 99Storing settings (memoryfunction) ........................................ 103Switching seat heating on/off ......... 98Switching seat ventilation on/off . . . . 98

Sensors (cleaning instructions) ....... 287Service


Service interval displayDisplaying service messages ......... 283Hiding service messages ............... 283Notes ............................................. 283Service messages .......................... 282

Service menu (on-board computer) . 206Service products

Brake fluid ..................................... 350Capacities ...................................... 346Coolant (engine) ............................ 350Engine oil ....................................... 349Fuel ................................................ 347Important safety notes .................. 344Refrigerant (air-conditioningsystem) .......................................... 350Washer fluid ................................... 351

Index 15

SettingsFactory (on-board computer) ......... 210On-board computer ....................... 206

Setting the air distribution ............... 128Setting the airflow ............................ 129SETUP (on-board computer) ............. 210Side impact air bag ............................. 40Side marker lamp (displaymessage) ............................................ 224Side windows

Convenience closing feature ............ 84Convenience opening feature .......... 84Important safety information ........... 83Opening/closing .............................. 83Problem (malfunction) ..................... 86Resetting ......................................... 85

Sliding sunroofImportant safety notes .................... 86Opening/closing .............................. 87Problem (malfunction) ..................... 89Resetting ......................................... 87see Panorama roof with powertilt/sliding panel

SmartKeyChanging the battery ....................... 74Changing the programming ............. 73Checking the battery ....................... 74Convenience closing feature ............ 84Convenience opening feature .......... 84Display message ............................ 238Door central locking/unlocking ....... 70Important safety notes .................... 70Loss ................................................. 76Mechanical key ................................ 73Positions (ignition lock) ................. 137Problem (malfunction) ..................... 76Starting the engine ........................ 139

Snow chains ...................................... 313Sockets

Points to observe before use ......... 263Rear compartment ......................... 263

Spare wheelNotes/data .................................... 337Storage location ............................ 293see Emergency spare wheel

Specialist workshop ............................ 24Speed, controlling

see Cruise control

SpeedometerDigital ............................................ 199In the Instrument cluster ................. 29Segments ...................................... 195Selecting the unit ofmeasurement ................................ 206see Instrument cluster

SPORT handling modeActivating/deactivating (AMGvehicles) .......................................... 62Warning lamp ................................. 244

SRS (Supplemental RestraintSystem)

Display message ............................ 219Introduction ..................................... 36Warning lamp ................................. 245Warning lamp (function) ................... 36

Standing lampsChanging bulbs .............................. 115Display message ............................ 224Switching on/off ........................... 106

Starting (engine) ................................ 138Station

see Radio Steering (display message) .............. 237Steering wheel

Adjusting (electrically) ................... 100Adjusting (manually) ........................ 99Button overview ............................... 31Buttons (on-board computer) ......... 195Cleaning ......................................... 288Important safety notes .................... 99Paddle shifters ............................... 145Storing settings (memoryfunction) ........................................ 103

Steering wheel paddle shifters ........ 145Stopwatch (RACETIMER) ................... 211Stowage compartments

Armrest (under) ............................. 255Cup holders ................................... 259Eyeglasses compartment ............... 255Glove box ....................................... 254Important safety information ......... 254Parcel net ...................................... 256Rear ............................................... 256Under driver's seat/front-passenger seat .............................. 256

16 Index

Stowage well beneath the trunkfloor .................................................... 258Summer opening

see Convenience opening feature Summer tires ..................................... 312Sun visor ............................................ 260Supplemental Restraint System

see SRS (Supplemental RestraintSystem)

Surround lighting (on-boardcomputer) .......................................... 207Switching air-recirculation modeon/off ................................................. 130Switching off the alarm (ATA) ............ 67

TTachometer ........................................ 195Tail lamps

Display message ............................ 223Tank

see Fuel tank Tank content

Fuel gauge ....................................... 29Technical data

Notes ............................................. 342Tires/wheels ................................. 335Vehicle data ................................... 351

TELEAIDCall priority .................................... 268Display message ............................ 218Downloading destinations(COMAND) ..................................... 269Emergency call .............................. 266Important safety notes .................. 264Locating a stolen vehicle ............... 270MB info call button ........................ 268Remote vehicle locking .................. 270Roadside Assistance button .......... 267Search & Send ............................... 269Self-test ......................................... 265System .......................................... 265Vehicle remote unlocking .............. 269

TelephoneAccepting a call ............................. 203Display message ............................ 237Menu (on-board computer) ............ 202Number from the phone book ........ 203

Redialing ........................................ 203Rejecting/ending a call ................. 203

TemperatureCoolant .......................................... 194Coolant (on-board computer) ......... 210Engine oil (on-board computer) ...... 210Outside temperature ...................... 195Setting (climate control) ................ 128

Theft deterrent systemsATA (Anti-Theft Alarm system) ......... 67Immobilizer ...................................... 66

Through-loading feature ................... 256Tilt/sliding sunroof

see Sliding sunroof Timing (RACETIMER) ......................... 211Tiredness assistant

see ATTENTION ASSIST Tire pressure

Calling up (on-board computer) ..... 319Checking manually ........................ 317Display message ............................ 233Maximum ....................................... 316Notes ............................................. 315Pressure loss warning .................... 317Recommended ............................... 313

Tire pressure monitoring systemFunction/notes ............................. 319Restarting ...................................... 321Warning lamp ................................. 250

TiresAspect ratio (definition) ................. 333Average weight of the vehicleoccupants (definition) .................... 331Bar (definition) ............................... 331Characteristics .............................. 331Checking ........................................ 311Definition of terms ......................... 331Direction of rotation ...................... 334Display message ............................ 233Distribution of the vehicleoccupants (definition) .................... 334DOT, Tire Identification Number(TIN) ............................................... 330DOT (Department ofTransportation) (definition) ............ 331GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating)(definition) ..................................... 332

Index 17

GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight)(definition) ..................................... 332GVWR (Gross Vehicle WeightRating) (definition) ......................... 332Important safety notes .................. 310Increased vehicle weight due tooptional equipment (definition) ...... 332Kilopascal (kPa) (definition) ........... 332Labeling (overview) ........................ 327Load bearing index (definition) ...... 333Load index ..................................... 330Load index (definition) ................... 332Maximum loaded vehicle weight(definition) ..................................... 332Maximum load on a tire(definition) ..................................... 333Maximum permissible tirepressure (definition) ....................... 333Maximum tire load ......................... 325Maximum tire load (definition) ....... 333Optional equipment weight(definition) ..................................... 333PSI (pounds per square inch)(definition) ..................................... 333Replacing ....................................... 334Service life ..................................... 311Sidewall (definition) ....................... 333Speed rating (definition) ................ 332Storing ........................................... 335Structure and characteristics(definition) ..................................... 331Temperature .................................. 327TIN (Tire Identification Number)(definition) ..................................... 333Tire bead (definition) ...................... 333Tire pressure (definition) ................ 333Tire pressures (recommended) ...... 331Tire size (data) ............................... 335Tire size designation, load-bearingcapacity, speed rating .................... 328Tire tread ....................................... 311Tire tread (definition) ..................... 333Total load limit (definition) ............. 334Traction ......................................... 326Traction (definition) ....................... 334Tread wear ..................................... 326Uniform Tire Quality GradingStandards ...................................... 326

Uniform Tire Quality GradingStandards (definition) .................... 331Unladen weight (definition) ............ 332Wear indicator (definition) ............. 334Wheel rim (definition) .................... 332see Flat tire

Top Tether ............................................ 56Towing

Important safety guidelines ........... 302Installing the towing eye ................ 303Removing the towing eye ............... 304With the rear axle raised ................ 304

Towing awayWith both axles on the ground ....... 304

Tow-startingEmergency engine starting ............ 305Important safety notes .................. 302

Transmissionsee Automatic transmission

Transporting the vehicle .................. 304Trim pieces (cleaning instructions) . 288Trip computer (on-boardcomputer) .......................................... 199Trip meter

see Trip odometer Trip odometer

Calling up ....................................... 199Resetting (on-board computer) ...... 200

TrunkEmergency release .......................... 82Important safety guidelines ............. 80Locking separately ........................... 82Opening (automatically frominside) .............................................. 81Opening (automatically fromoutside) ............................................ 81

Trunk lidDisplay message ............................ 236Opening/closing .............................. 80

Turn signalsDisplay message ............................ 222Switching on/off ........................... 109

Type identification platesee Vehicle identification plate

18 Index

UUnlocking

Emergency unlocking ....................... 79From inside the vehicle (centralunlocking button) ............................. 78

VVanity mirror (in sun visor) .............. 260Vehicle

Correct use ...................................... 24Data acquisition ............................... 25Display message ............................ 236Equipment ....................................... 21Individual settings .......................... 206Limited Warranty ............................. 25Loading .......................................... 322Locking (in an emergency) ............... 79Locking (SmartKey) .......................... 71Lowering ........................................ 297Maintenance .................................... 22Parking for a long period ................ 154Pulling away ................................... 139Raising ........................................... 295Reporting problems ......................... 24Towing away .................................. 302Transporting .................................. 304Unlocking (in an emergency) ........... 79Unlocking (SmartKey) ...................... 71Vehicle data ................................... 351

Vehicle batterysee Battery (vehicle)

Vehicle data ....................................... 351see Technical data

Vehicle dimensions ........................... 351Vehicle emergency locking ................ 79Vehicle identification number

see VIN Vehicle identification plate .............. 343Vehicle tool kit .................................. 292Video (DVD) ........................................ 202VIN ...................................................... 343

WWarning and indicator lamps

ABS ................................................ 242Brakes ........................................... 241

Check Engine ................................. 246Coolant .......................................... 247Cruise control ................................ 160Distance warning ........................... 249DISTRONIC PLUS ........................... 249ESP® .............................................. 243ESP® OFF ....................................... 244Fuel tank ........................................ 246LIM (DISTRONIC PLUS) .................. 164Overview .......................................... 30PASSENGER AIR BAG OFFindicator lamp .................................. 42Reserve fuel ................................... 246Seat belt ........................................ 239SPORT handling mode ................... 244SRS ................................................ 245Tire pressure monitor .................... 250

Warranty ............................................ 343Washer fluid

Display message ............................ 237see Windshield washer system

Wheel bolt tightening torque ........... 297Wheel chock ...................................... 294Wheels

Changing a wheel .......................... 293Checking ........................................ 311Cleaning ......................................... 285Important safety notes .................. 310Interchanging/changing ................ 334Mounting a wheel .......................... 296Removing a wheel .......................... 296Storing ........................................... 335Tightening torque ........................... 297Wheel size/tire size ....................... 335

Window curtain air bagDisplay message ............................ 219Operation ......................................... 42

WindowsCleaning ......................................... 286see Side windows

WindshieldDefrosting ...................................... 129

Windshield washer system .............. 281Notes ............................................. 351

Windshield wipersProblem (malfunction) ................... 119Rear window wiper ........................ 117

Index 19

Replacing the wiper blades ............ 118Switching on/off ........................... 116

Winter drivingImportant safety notes .................. 312Slippery road surfaces ................... 159Snow chains .................................. 313

Winter tiresM+S tires ....................................... 312

Wiper bladesCleaning ......................................... 286Important safety notes .................. 118Replacing (rear window) ................ 118Replacing (windshield) ................... 118

Wooden trim (cleaninginstructions) ...................................... 288

20 Index

Product information

Mercedes-Benz recommends that you usegenuine Mercedes-Benz parts, conversionparts and accessories that have beenapproved for the type of vehicle.Mercedes-Benz tests genuine parts as well asconversion parts and accessories which havebeen specifically approved for your vehicle fortheir reliability, safety and suitability. Despiteongoing market research, Mercedes-Benz isunable to assess other parts. Therefore,Mercedes-Benz accepts no responsibility forthe use of such parts in Mercedes-Benzvehicles, even if they have beenindependently or officially approved. The useof non-approved parts could affect yourvehicle's operating safety. Mercedes-Benztherefore recommends that you use genuineMercedes-Benz parts, conversion parts andaccessories that have been approved for thetype of vehicle. Genuine Mercedes-Benzparts, approved conversion parts andaccessories are available from any authorizedMercedes-Benz Center. Here, you will receiveadvice about permissible technicalmodifications, and the parts will beprofessionally installed.

Operator's Manual

Notes on the Operator's ManualThis Operator's Manual contains a great dealof helpful information. We urge you to read itcarefully and familiarize yourself with thevehicle before driving.For your own safety and longer service life ofthe vehicle, we urge you to follow theinstructions and warnings contained in thisOperator's Manual. Ignoring them couldresult in damage to the vehicle or personalinjury to you or others. Vehicle damagecaused by failure to follow instructions is notcovered by the Mercedes-Benz LimitedWarranty.

Vehicle equipmentThis Operator's Manual describes all modelsand all standard and optional equipment ofyour vehicle available at the time ofpublication of the Operator's Manual.Country-specific differences are possible.Please note that your vehicle may not beequipped with all features described. Thisalso applies to safety-related systems andfunctions. The equipment in your vehicle maytherefore differ from that shown in thedescriptions and illustrations. All the systemsfound in your vehicle are listed in the originalpurchase agreement of your vehicle. Shouldyou have any questions concerningequipment and operation, please consult anauthorized Mercedes-Benz Center.The Operating Instructions and theMaintenance Booklet are importantdocuments and should be kept in the vehicle.

Service and vehicle operation

Service and literatureYour vehicle is covered under the terms of thewarranties printed in the Service andWarranty Information booklet. Yourauthorized Mercedes-Benz Center willexchange or repair any defective partsoriginally installed in the vehicle inaccordance with the terms of the followingwarranties:RNew Vehicle Limited WarrantyREmission Systems WarrantyREmission Performance WarrantyRCalifornia, Connecticut, Maine,

Massachusetts, New York, Pennsylvania,Rhode Island and Vermont EmissionControl Systems WarrantyRState Warranty Enforcement Laws (Lemon

Laws)

Introduction 21

Information for customers inCalifornia

Under California law you may be entitled to areplacement of your vehicle or a refund of thepurchase price or lease price, if after areasonable number of repair attemptsMercedes-Benz USA, LLC and/or itsauthorized repair or service facilities fail to fixone or more substantial defects ormalfunctions in the vehicle that are coveredby its express warranty. During the period of18 months from original delivery of thevehicle or the accumulation of 18 000 miles(approximately 29 000 km) on the odometerof the vehicle, whichever occurs first, areasonable number of repair attempts ispresumed for a retail buyer or lessee if one ormore of the following occurs:(1) the same substantial defect or

malfunction results in a condition that islikely to cause death or serious bodilyinjury if the vehicle is driven, that defector malfunction has been subject to repairtwo or more times, and you have directlynotified Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC inwriting of the need for its repair.

(2) the same substantial defect ormalfunction of a less serious nature thancategory (1) has been subject to repairfour or more times and you have directlynotified Mercedes-Benz in writing of theneed for its repair.

(3) the vehicle is out of service by reason ofrepair of the same or different substantialdefects or malfunctions for a cumulativetotal of more than 30 calendar days.

Please send your written notice to:Mercedes-Benz USA, LLCCustomer Assistance CenterOne Mercedes DriveMontvale, NJ 07645-0350

MaintenanceThe Service and Warranty Booklet describesall the necessary maintenance work whichshould be done at regular intervals.Always have the Service and WarrantyBooklet with you when you bring the vehicleto an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. Theservice advisor will record every service foryou in the Service and Warranty Booklet.

Roadside AssistanceThe Mercedes-Benz Roadside AssistanceProgram offers technical help in the event ofa breakdown. Calls to the toll-free RoadsideAssistance Hotline are answered by ouragents 24 hours a day, 365 days a year.1-800-FOR-MERCedes(1-800-367-6372) (USA) 1-800-387-0100 (Canada)For additional information, refer to theMercedes-Benz Roadside AssistanceProgram brochure (USA) or the "RoadsideAssistance" section in the Service andWarranty booklet (Canada). You will find bothin your vehicle literature portfolio.

Change of address or change ofownership

In the event of a change of address, pleasesend us the "Change of Address Notice"found in the Service and WarrantyInformation Booklet, or simply call theMercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center(in the USA) at the hotline number1-800-FOR-MERCedes(1-800-367-6372) orCustomer Service Center (in Canada) at1-800-387-0100. This will assist us incontacting you in a timely manner should theneed arise.If you sell your Mercedes, please leave theentire literature in the vehicle so that it isavailable to the next owner.

22 Introduction

If you bought this vehicle used, be sure tosend in the "Notice of Purchase of Used Car"found in the Service and WarrantyInformation Booklet, or call the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center (in theUSA) at1-800-FOR-MERCedes(1-800-367-6372) orCustomer Service (in Canada) at1-800-387-0100.

Vehicle operation outside the USAand Canada

If you plan to operate your vehicle in foreigncountries, please be aware that:Rservice facilities or replacement parts may

not be readily available.Runleaded fuel for vehicles with a catalytic

converter may not be available. Leaded fuelmay cause damage to the catalyticconverter.Rthe fuel may have a considerably lower

octane rating. Unsuitable fuel can causeengine damage.

Some Mercedes-Benz models are availablefor delivery in Europe through our EuropeanDelivery Program. For details, consult anauthorized Mercedes-Benz Center or write toone of the following addresses.

In the USAMercedes-Benz USA, LLCEuropean Delivery DepartmentOne Mercedes DriveMontvale, NJ 07645-0350

In CanadaMercedes-Benz Canada, Inc.European Delivery Department98 Vanderhoof AvenueToronto, Ontario M4G 4C9

Operating safety

Safety notes

G WARNINGWork improperly carried out on electroniccomponents and associated software couldcause them to cease functioning. Because thevehicle's electronic components areinterconnected, any modifications made mayproduce an undesired effect on othersystems. Electronic malfunctions couldseriously impair the operating safety of yourvehicle.Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Centerfor repairs or modifications to electroniccomponents.Other improper work or modifications on thevehicle could also have a negative impact onthe operating safety of the vehicle.Some safety systems only function when theengine is running. You should therefore neverturn off the engine while driving.

G WARNINGHeavy blows against the vehicle underbody ortires/wheels may cause serious damage andimpair the operating safety of your vehicle.Such blows can be caused, for example, byrunning over an obstacle, road debris or apothole.If you feel a sudden significant vibration orride disturbance, or you suspect that damageto your vehicle has occurred:Rturn on your hazard warning flashers.Rslow down carefully.Rdrive with caution to an area which is a safe

distance from the road.Inspect the vehicle underbody and tires/wheels for possible damage. If the vehicleappears unsafe, have it towed to the nearestauthorized Mercedes-Benz Center or otherqualified maintenance or repair facility forfurther inspection or repairs.

Introduction 23

Z

On-board diagnostics interface

G WARNINGIf you connect equipment to the on-boarddiagnostics interface, it can affect theoperation of the vehicle systems. This canimpair the operating safety of your vehiclewhile driving. There is a risk of accident.Do not connect any equipment to the on-board diagnostics interface.

G WARNINGLoose equipment or equipment cables whichare connected to the on-board diagnosticsinterface can obstruct the area around thepedals. The equipment or the cables could getbetween the pedals in the event of suddenbraking or acceleration. You may then nolonger be able to brake, operate the clutch oraccelerate as intended. There is a risk ofaccident.Do not attach any equipment or cables in thedriver footwell.

Connecting equipment to the on-boarddiagnostics interface can lead to emissionsmonitoring information being reset. This maylead to the vehicle failing to meet therequirements at the next special emissionstest or main inspection.If the engine is switched off and equipmenton the on-board diagnostic interface is used,the starter battery may discharge.The on-board diagnostics interface is onlyintended for the connection of diagnosticequipment at a qualified specialist workshop.

Qualified specialist workshopAn authorized Mercedes-Benz Center is aqualified specialist workshop. It has thenecessary specialist knowledge, tools andqualifications to correctly carry out the workrequired on your vehicle. This is especially thecase for work relevant to safety.Observe the notes in the service booklet.

Always have the following work carried out atan authorized Mercedes-Benz Center:Rwork relevant to safetyRservice and maintenance workRrepair workRalterations, installation work and

modificationsRwork on electronic components

Proper use

G WARNINGThere are various warning stickers affixed toyour vehicle. Their purpose is to alert you andothers to various dangers. Therefore, do notremove any warning stickers unless thesticker clearly states that you may do so.If you remove any warning stickers, you orothers could fail to recognize certain dangersand be injured.

The proper use of the vehicle requires thatyou familiarize yourself with the followinginformation and rules:Rsafety notes in this Operator's ManualRtechnical data in this Operator's ManualRtraffic rules and regulationsRlaws and safety standards pertaining to

motor vehicles

Problems with your vehicleIf you should experience a problem with yourvehicle, particularly one that you believe mayaffect its safe operation, we urge you tocontact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Centerimmediately to have the problem diagnosedand rectified. If the problem is not resolved toyour satisfaction, please discuss the problemagain with a Mercedes-Benz Center orcontact us at one of the following addresses.

24 Introduction

In the USACustomer Assistance CenterMercedes-Benz USA, LLCOne Mercedes DriveMontvale, NJ 07645-0350

In CanadaCustomer Relations DepartmentMercedes-Benz Canada, Inc.98 Vanderhoof AvenueToronto, Ontario M4G 4C9

Reporting malfunctions relevant tosafety

USA only:The following text is reproduced as requiredof all manufacturers according to Title 49,Code of U.S. Federal Regulations, Part 575pursuant to the National Traffic and MotorVehicle Safety Act of 1966.

Reporting safety defectsIf you believe that your vehicle has a defectwhich could cause a crash or could causeinjury or death, you should immediatelyinform the National Highway Traffic SafetyAdministration (NHTSA) in addition tonotifying Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC.If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it mayopen an investigation, and if it finds that asafety defect exists in a group of vehicles, itmay order a recall and remedy campaign.However, NHTSA cannot become involved inindividual problems between you, yourdealer, or Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC.To contact NHTSA, you may call the VehicleSafety Hotline toll-free at1-888-327-4236(TTY: 1-800-424-9153); goto http://www.safercar.gov; or write to:Administrator, NHTSA Headquarters,

1200 New Jersey Avenue, SE, West Building,Washington, DC 20590.You can obtain additional information aboutvehicle safety from:http://www.safercar.gov.

Limited Warranty! Follow the instructions in this manual

about the proper operation of your vehicleas well as about possible vehicle damage.Damage to your vehicle that arises fromculpable contraventions against theseinstructions are not covered either byMercedes-Benz Limited Warranty or by theNew or Used-Vehicle Warranty ofDaimler AG.

Data stored in the vehicle

Information about electronic dataacquisition in the vehicle

(Including notice pursuant to California Code§ 9951)Your vehicle records electronic data. If yourvehicle is equipped with mbrace1, data istransmitted in the event of an accident.This information helps, for example, to testvehicle systems after an accident and tocontinually improve vehicle safety.Daimler AG can access this data and submitit:Rfor safety research or vehicle diagnosis

purposesRwith the consent of the vehicle ownerRon the instruction of prosecuting

authoritiesRfor use in arbitration of disputes that

involve Daimler AG, its affiliates or its salesand service organizationsRas otherwise required or permitted by law.

1 The system is called TELE AID in Canada.

Introduction 25

Z

Please observe the mbrace1 purchaseagreement for further details on the recordingand transfer of data by this system.

1 The system is called TELE AID in Canada.

26 Introduction

Cockpit ................................................. 28Instrument cluster .............................. 29Multifunction steering wheel ............. 31Center console .................................... 32Overhead control panel ...................... 33Door control panel .............................. 34

27

At a

gla

nce

Cockpit

Function Page: Steering wheel paddle

shifters 145

; Cruise control lever 160

= Instrument cluster 29

? Horn

A PARKTRONIC warningdisplay (Canada only) 175

B Overhead control panel 33

C Climate control systems 122

D Ignition lock 137Start/Stop button 137

Function PageE Adjusts the steering wheel

manually 99

F Adjusts the steering wheelelectrically 99

G Combination switch 109

H Parking brake 154

I On-board diagnosticinterface 24

J Opens the hood 278

K Releases the parking brake 154

L Light switch 106

28 CockpitAt

a g

lanc

e

Instrument cluster

Displays and controls

Function Page: Fuel gauge

; Coolant temperature 194

= Speedometer withsegments 195

? Multifunction display 196

Function PageA Tachometer 195

B Instrument cluster lightingbrightness control: turnclockwise or counter-clockwise

Instrument cluster 29

At a

gla

nce

Warning and indicator lamps

Function Page: ÷ ESP® 243

M SPORT handlingmode in AMG vehicles 244

; Distance warning 249

= ESP® OFF 243

? Brakes (USA only) 241

A Brakes (Canada only) 241

B Turn signal 109

C ABS 242

D SRS 245

E Check engine 246

Function PageF Tire pressure monitor 250

G Seat belt 239

H ESP® on AMG vehicles 243

I Coolant 247

J Rear fog lamp 108

K High-beam headlamps 109

L Low-beam headlamps 107

M Front fog lamps 108

N Reserve fuel 246

30 Instrument clusterAt

a g

lanc

e

Multifunction steering wheel

Function Page: Multifunction display 196

; Audio system/COMAND;see the separate operatinginstructions

= ?

Switches on the VoiceControl System; see theseparate operatinginstructions

? ~

Rejects or ends a call 202Exits phone book/redialmemory6

Makes or accepts a callSwitches to the redialmemoryWX

Adjusts the volume8

Mute

Function PageA =;

Selects a menu 1989:

Selects the submenu orscrolls through lists 198a

Confirms selections andhides display messages

B %

Back or deactivates theVoice Control System

Multifunction steering wheel 31

At a

gla

nce

Center console

Function Page: Audio system/COMAND;

see the separate operatinginstructions

; c Seat heating 98

= s Seat ventilation 98

? 5 PARKTRONIC(Canada only) 175

A £ Hazard warninglamps 109

B 45 Indicator lamp 42

C u Rear window rollersunblind 261

Function PageD M Dynamic driving

package with sports mode 171

E Stowage compartment 254Ashtray 262Cigarette lighter 262Power socket 263

F Selector lever 142

G Cup holder 259

H Stowage compartment 254

I Audio/COMAND controller

J Selects the drive program 144

32 Center consoleAt

a g

lanc

e

Overhead control panel

Function Page: u Switches the rear

interior lighting on/off 113

; | Switches theautomatic interior lightingcontrol on/off 112

= p Switches the right-hand reading lamp on/off 112

? 3 Opens/closes thesliding sunroof 873 Opens/closes thepanorama roof with powertilt/sliding panel and rollersunblinds 87

A ï Button for MB Info call(mbrace system) 268

B G SOS button (mbracesystem) 266

Function PageC Rear-view mirror 101

D Integrated electroniccompass 275

E Buttons for the garage dooropener 273

F Microphone for mbrace(emergency call system),telephone and the VoiceControl System2

G F Roadside Assistancebutton (mbrace system) 267

H p Switches the left-hand reading lamp on/off 112

I c Switches the frontinterior lighting on/off 113

2 The Voice Control System is only available together with COMAND. Observe the additional operatinginstructions.

Overhead control panel 33

At a

gla

nce

Door control panel

Function Page: Opens the door 78

; %& Unlocks/locksthe vehicle 78

= Adjusts the seat electrically 94

? r45=Stores settings for the seat,exterior mirrors andsteering wheel 103

A 7Zö\Adjusts and folds theexterior mirrors in/outelectrically 101

B W Opens/closes theside windows 83

C n Activates/deactivates the overridefeature for the sidewindows in the rearcompartment 57

D o Opens the trunk lid 81

34 Door control panelAt

a g

lanc

e

Useful information .............................. 36Occupant safety .................................. 36Children in the vehicle ........................ 53Panic alarm .......................................... 58Driving safety systems ....................... 58Theft deterrent locking systems ....... 66

35

Safe

ty

Useful information

i This Operator's Manual describes allmodels and all standard and optionalequipment of your vehicle available at thetime of publication of the Operator'sManual. Country-specific differences arepossible. Please note that your vehicle maynot be equipped with all featuresdescribed. This also applies to safety-related systems and functions.

i Please read the information on qualifiedspecialist workshops (Y page 24).

Occupant safety

Overview of occupant safetyIn this section, you will learn the mostimportant facts about the restraint systemcomponents of the vehicle.The restraint system consists of:Rseat beltsRchild restraint systemsRLATCH-type (ISOFIX) child seat anchorsAdditional protection is provided by:RSRS (Supplemental Restraint System)RNECK-PRO head restraints/NECK-PRO

luxury head restraintsRAir bag system components with:

- PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp- front-passenger seat with Occupant

Classification System (OCS)The different air bag systems workindependently of each other. The protectivefunctions of the system work in conjunctionwith each other. Not all air bags are deployedin an accident.

G WARNINGModifications to or work improperlyconducted on restraint system componentsor their wiring, as well as tampering withinterconnected electronic systems, can lead

to the restraint systems no longer functioningas intended.Air bags or Emergency Tensioning Devices(ETDs), for example, could deployinadvertently or fail to deploy in accidentsalthough the deceleration threshold for airbag deployment is exceeded. Therefore,never modify the restraint systems. Do nottamper with electronic components or theirsoftware.

i See "Children in the vehicle"(Y page 53) for more information oninfants and children traveling with you inthe vehicle and restraints for infants andchildren.

SRS (Supplemental Restraint System)

IntroductionSRS consists of:Rthe 6 SRS warning lampRair bagsRair bag control unit (with crash sensors)REmergency Tensioning DevicesRbelt force limitersSRS reduces the risk of occupants cominginto contact with the vehicle's interior in theevent of an accident. It can also reduce theeffect of the forces to which occupants aresubjected during an accident.

SRS warning lampSRS functions are checked regularly whenyou switch on the ignition and when theengine is running. Therefore, malfunctionscan be detected in good time.The 6 SRS warning lamp in the instrumentcluster lights up when the ignition is switchedon. It goes out no later than a few secondsafter the engine is started.The SRS components are in operationalreadiness when the 6 SRS warning lampis not lit while the engine is running .

36 Occupant safetySa

fety

G WARNINGThe SRS self-check has detected amalfunction if the 6 SRS warning lamp:Rdoes not come on at allRfails to go out approximately 4 seconds

after the engine was startedRcomes on after the engine was started or

while drivingFor your safety, Mercedes-Benz stronglyrecommends that you have the systemchecked as soon as possible at an authorizedMercedes-Benz Center. Otherwise the SRSmay not be activated when it is needed in anaccident, which could result in serious or fatalinjury. The SRS might also deployunexpectedly and unnecessarily which couldalso result in injury.In addition, improper work on the SRS createsa risk of rendering the SRS inoperative orcausing unintended air bag deployment. Workon the SRS must therefore only be performedby qualified technicians. Contact anauthorized Mercedes-Benz Center.If it is necessary to modify an air bag systemto accommodate a person with disabilities,contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Centerfor details. USA only: Call our CustomerAssistance Center at 1-800-FOR-MERCedes(1-800-367-6372) for details.

Safety guidelines for seat belts,Emergency Tensioning Devices (ETDs)and air bags

G WARNINGRDamaged seat belts or seat belts that have

been subjected to stress in an accidentmust be replaced. Their anchoring pointsmust also be checked. Only use seat beltsinstalled or supplied by an authorizedMercedes-Benz Center.RAir bags and pyrotechnic Emergency

Tensioning Devices (ETDs) containperchlorate material, which may requirespecial handling and regard for the

environment. Check your national disposalguidelines. California residents, seewww.dtsc.ca.gov/HazardousWaste/Perchlorate/index.cfm.RAir bags and ETDs are designed to function

on a one-time-only basis. An air bag or ETDthat has deployed must be replaced.RDo not pass seat belts over sharp edges.

They could tear.RDo not make any modification that could

change the effectiveness of the seat belts.RDo not bleach or dye seat belts as this may

severely weaken them. In a crash they maynot be able to provide adequate protection.RNo modifications of any kind may be made

to any components or wiring of the SRS.RDo not change or remove any component

or part of the SRS.RDo not install additional trim material, seat

covers, badges, etc. over the steeringwheel hub, front-passenger front air bagcover, outer sides of the seat backrests,door trim panels, or door frame trims.RDo not install additional electrical/

electronic equipment on or near SRScomponents and wiring.RKeep area between air bags and occupants

free of objects (e.g. packages, purses,umbrellas, etc.).RDo not hang items such as coat hangers

from the coat hooks or handles over thedoor. These items may be thrown around inthe vehicle and cause head and otherinjuries when the window curtain air bag isdeployed.RAir bag system components will be hot after

an air bag has inflated. Do not touch them.RNever place your feet on the instrument

panel, dashboard, or on the seat. Alwayskeep both feet on the floor in front of theseat.RImproper repair work on the SRS creates a

risk of rendering the SRS inoperative orcausing unintended air bag deployment.Work on the SRS must therefore only be

Occupant safety 37

Safe

ty

Z

performed by qualified technicians.Contact an authorized Mercedes-BenzCenter.RFor your protection and the protection of

others, when scrapping the air bag unit orETD, our safety instructions must befollowed. These instructions are availablefrom any authorized Mercedes-BenzCenter.RGiven the considerable deployment speed,

required inflation volume, and the materialof the air bags, there is the possibility ofabrasions or other, potentially more seriousinjuries resulting from air bag deployment.

If you sell your vehicle, Mercedes-Benzstrongly recommends that you inform thesubsequent owner that the vehicle isequipped with SRS. Also, refer them to theapplicable section in the Operator's Manual.

Air bags

Important safety notes

G WARNINGAir bags are designed to reduce the incidenceof injuries and fatalities in certain situations:Rfrontal impacts (driver's and front-

passenger front air bags and driver's kneebag)Rside impacts (side impact air bags, window

curtain air bags and pelvis air bags)However, no system available today cancompletely eliminate injuries and fatalities.When the air bags are deployed, a smallamount of powder is released. The powdergenerally does not constitute a health hazardand does not indicate that there is a fire in thevehicle. In order to prevent potentialbreathing difficulties, you should leave thevehicle as soon as it is safe to do so. If youhave any breathing difficulty but cannot getout of the vehicle after the air bag inflates,then get fresh air by opening a window ordoor.

G WARNINGTo reduce the risk of injuries during front airbag inflation, the driver and front-passengermust always be seated correctly and havetheir seat belts fastened accordingly.For maximum protection in the event of acollision, you must always be in the normalseat position with your back against thebackrest. Fasten your seat belt and make surethat it is correctly positioned on your body.Since the air bag inflates with considerablespeed and force, a proper seating positionand correct positioning of the hands on thesteering wheel will help to keep you at a safedistance from the air bag. Occupants who arenot wearing their seat belt, are not seatedproperly or are too close to the air bag can beseriously injured or killed by an air bag as itinflates with great force instantaneously:RSit with the seat belt properly fastened in a

position that is as upright as possible withyour back against the seat backrest.RMove the driver's seat as far back as

possible, still permitting proper operationof vehicle controls. The distance from thecenter of the driver's chest to the center ofthe air bag cover on the steering wheelmust be at least 10 inches (25 cm) or more.You should be able to accomplish this byadjusting the seat and steering wheel. Ifyou have any difficulties, please contact anauthorized Mercedes-Benz Center.RDo not lean your head or chest close to the

steering wheel or dashboard.ROnly hold the steering wheel by the rim.

Placing hands and arms inside the rim canincrease the risk and potential severity ofhand/arm injury when the driver front airbag inflates.RAdjust the front-passenger seat as far back

as possible from the dashboard when theseat is occupied.ROccupants, especially children, should

never place their bodies or lean their headsin the area of the door where the sideimpact air bag inflates. This could result in


fety

serious injuries or death should the sideimpact air bag be deployed. Always sit asupright as possible, wear the seat beltproperly and use an appropriately sizedchild restraint, infant restraint or boosterseat recommended for the size and weightof the child.

Failure to follow these instructions can resultin severe injuries to you or other occupants.If you sell your vehicle, it is important that youmake the buyer aware of this safetyinformation. Be sure to give the buyer thisOperator's Manual.

G WARNINGAccident research shows that the safest placefor children in an automobile is in a rear seat.A side impact air bag related injury may occurif occupants, especially children, are notproperly seated or restrained when next to aside impact air bag which needs to deployrapidly in a side impact in order to do its job.To help avoid the possibility of injury, pleasefollow these guidelines:

(1) Always sit as upright as possibleand use the seat belts properly.Make sure that children 12 yearsold and under use an appropriatelysized child restraint, infantrestraint, or booster seatrecommended for the size andweight of the child.

(2) Always wear seat belts properly.

The air bags are only deployed if the air bagcontrol unit detects the need for deployment.Only in the event of such a situation will theyprovide their supplemental protection.The driver and passenger should always weartheir seat belts. Otherwise, it is not possiblefor the air bags to provide their supplementalprotection.In the event of other types of impacts andimpacts below air bag deploymentthresholds, the air bags will not deploy. Thedriver and passengers will then be protected

to the extent possible by a properly fastenedseat belt. A properly fastened seat belt is alsoneeded to provide the best possibleprotection in a rollover.Air bags provide additional protection; theyare not, however, a substitute for seat belts.All vehicle occupants must fasten their seatbelts regardless of whether your vehicle isequipped with air bags or not.It is important for your safety and that of yourpassenger to have deployed air bags replacedand to have any malfunctioning air bagsrepaired. This will help to make sure the airbags continue to perform their protectivefunction for the vehicle occupants in theevent of a crash.

Front air bagsThe front air bags increase protection for thedriver's and front-passenger's head andchest.

Driver's air bag : deploys in front of thesteering wheel; front-passenger front airbag ; deploys in front of and above the glovebox.They are deployed:Rin the event of certain frontal impactsRif the system determines that air bag

deployment can offer additional protectionto that provided by the seat beltRif the seat belt is fastenedRindependently of other air bags in the

vehicle

Occupant safety 39

Safe

ty

Z

Your vehicle has adaptive, two-stage front airbags. In the event of a collision, the air bagcontrol unit evaluates the vehicledeceleration. In the first deployment stage,the front air bag is filled with enoughpropellant gas to reduce the risk of injuries.The front air bag is fully deployed if a seconddeployment threshold is exceeded within afew milliseconds.The deployment of the front-passenger frontair bag is also influenced by the weightcategory of the front passenger, which isdetermined by the Occupant ClassificationSystem (OCS) (Y page 42).The lighter the passenger side occupant, thehigher the vehicle deceleration rate required(predicted at the start of the impact) forsecond stage inflation of the front-passengerfront air bag. In the second stage, the frontair bags are inflated with the maximumamount of propellant gas available.The front air bags are not deployed insituations where a low impact severity ispredicted. You will then be protected by thefastened seat belt.The front-passenger front air bag will onlydeploy if:Rthe system, based on the OCS weight

sensor readings, detects that the front-passenger seat is occupied.Rthe 45 indicator lamp in the center

console is not lit, (Y page 42).Rthe air bag control unit predicts a high

impact severity.

Driver's knee bag

Driver's knee bag : provides additionalprotection for the driver against:Rknee injuriesRthigh injuriesRlower leg injuriesDriver's knee bag : deploys below thesteering wheel. During a frontal impact, if thesystem determines that air bag deploymentcan offer additional protection to thatprovided by the seat belt, driver's kneebag : is deployed along with the driver's airbag. The driver's knee bag : operates bestin conjunction with a properly positioned andfastened seat belt.

Side impact air bags

G WARNINGThe pressure sensors for side impact air bagcontrol are located in the doors. Do notmodify any components of the doors or doortrim panels including, for example, theaddition of door speakers.Improper repair work on the doors or themodification or addition of components to thedoors create a risk of rendering the sideimpact air bags inoperative or causingunintended air bag deployment. Work on thedoors must therefore only be performed byqualified technicians. Contact an authorizedMercedes-Benz Center.


fety

G WARNINGOnly use seat covers which have been testedand approved by Mercedes-Benz for yourvehicle model. Using seat covers or other seatcoverings can cause a malfunction of the sideimpact air bags and/or the pelvis air bags.Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Centerfor availability.

When deployed, the side impact air bags offeradditional protection for the thorax of thevehicle occupants on the side of the vehicleon which the impact occurs. However, theydo not protect the:RheadRneckRarms

Front side impact air bags : and rear sideimpact air bags ; deploy next to the outerseat cushions.The side impact air bags are deployed:Ron the side on which an impact occursRat the start of an accident with a high rate

of lateral vehicle deceleration oracceleration, e.g. in a side impactRindependently of seat belt useRindependently of the front air bagsRindependently of the ETDsSide impact air bags will not deploy in sideimpacts which do not exceed the system'spreset deployment thresholds for lateralacceleration/deceleration. You will then beprotected by the fastened seat belt.

If the OCS detects that the front-passengerseat is not occupied and the front-passengerseat belt is not fastened (the belt tongue isnot engaged in the seat belt buckle), the sideimpact air bag on the front-passenger sidewill not deploy. The side impact air bag on thefront-passenger side will deploy if the front-passenger seat belt is fastened, regardless ofwhether the front-passenger seat is occupiedor not.

Pelvis air bagsPelvis air bags are not available for AMGvehicles.

G WARNINGOnly use seat covers which have been testedand approved by Mercedes-Benz for yourvehicle model. Using seat covers or other seatcoverings can cause a malfunction of the sideimpact air bags and/or the pelvis air bags.Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Centerfor availability.

Pelvis air bag deployment enhances the levelof protection of the vehicle occupants on theside of the vehicle on which the impactoccurs.

Pelvis air bags : deploy next to and belowthe outer seat cushions. They are deployed:Ron the side on which an impact occursRat the start of an accident with a high rate

of lateral vehicle deceleration oracceleration, e.g. in a side impactRindependently of seat belt use

Occupant safety 41

Safe

ty

Z

Rindependently of the front air bagsRindependently of the ETDsPelvis air bags : will not deploy in sideimpacts which do not exceed the system'spreset deployment thresholds for lateralacceleration/deceleration. You will then beprotected by the fastened seat belt.If the OCS detects that the front-passengerseat is not occupied and the front-passengerseat belt is not fastened (the belt tongue isnot engaged in the seat belt buckle), thepelvis air bag on the front-passenger side willnot deploy. The pelvis air bag on the front-passenger side will deploy if the front-passenger seat belt is fastened, regardless ofwhether the front-passenger seat is occupiedor not.

Window curtain air bagsThe window curtain air bags enhance the levelof protection for the head, but not chest orarms, of the vehicle occupants on the side ofthe vehicle on which the impact occurs.The window curtain air bags are integratedinto the side of the roof frame and deploy inthe area from the A-pillar to the C-pillar.

Window curtain air bags : are deployed:Ron the side on which an impact occursRat the start of an accident with a high rate

of lateral vehicle deceleration oracceleration, e.g. in a side impactRregardless of whether the front-passenger

seat is occupied

Rindependently of seat belt useRindependently of the front air bagsWindow curtain air bags : will not deploy inimpacts with deceleration rates which do notexceed the system's preset deploymentthresholds for vehicle deceleration oracceleration. You will then be protected bythe fastened seat belt.

Occupant Classification System(OCS)

How the occupant classificationsystem worksThe Occupant Classification System (OCS)categorizes the occupant on the front-passenger seat by means of a weight sensor.The front-passenger front air bag isdeactivated automatically for certain weightcategories. The 45 indicator lampshows you the current status. If the45 indicator lamp is illuminated, thefront-passenger front air bag is deactivated.The system does not deactivate:Rthe side impact air bagRthe pelvis air bagRthe window curtain air bagRthe Emergency Tensioning DevicesTo be classified correctly, the front passengermust sit:Rwith the seat belt fastened correctlyRin a position that is as upright as possible

with their back against the seat backrestRwith their feet on the floorIf the front-passenger's weight is transferredto another object in the vehicle (e.g. byleaning on armrests), OCS may not be able toapproximate the occupant's weight category.If the front-passenger seat, the seat cover orthe seat cushion are damaged, have thenecessary repair work carried out at anauthorized Mercedes-Benz Center.


fety

For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benzrecommends that you only use seataccessories which have been approved byMercedes-Benz.Both the driver and the passenger shouldalways use the 45 indicator lamp asan indication of whether or not the passengeris properly positioned.

G WARNINGIf the 45 indicator lamp illuminateswhen an adult or someone larger than a smallindividual is in the front passenger seat, havethe front passenger reposition himself orherself in the seat until the 45indicator lamp goes out.In the event of a collision, the air bag controlunit will not allow front passenger front air bagdeployment when the OCS has classified thefront passenger seat occupant as weighing asmuch as or less than a typical 12-month-oldchild in a standard child restraint or if the frontpassenger seat is classified as being empty.When the OCS senses that the frontpassenger seat occupant is classified asbeing up to or less than the weight of a typical12-month-old child in a standard childrestraint, the 45 indicator lamp willilluminate when the engine is started andremain illuminated. This indicates that thefront passenger front air bag is deactivated.When the OCS senses that the frontpassenger seat is classified as being empty,the 45 indicator lamp will illuminatewhen the engine is started and remainilluminated. This indicates that the frontpassenger front air bag is deactivated.When the OCS senses that the frontpassenger seat occupant is classified asbeing heavier than the weight of a typical 12-month-old child seated in a standard childrestraint or as being a small individual (suchas a young teenager or a small adult), the45 indicator lamp will illuminate forapproximately 6 seconds when the engine isstarted. Depending on occupant weightsensor readings from the seat, it will then

remain illuminated or go out. With the45 indicator lamp illuminated, thefront passenger front air bag is deactivated.With the 45 indicator lamp out, thefront passenger front air bag is activated.When the OCS senses that the frontpassenger seat occupant is classified as anadult or someone larger than a smallindividual, the 45 indicator lamp willilluminate for approximately six secondswhen the engine is started and then go out.This indicates that the front passenger frontair bag is activated.If the 45 indicator lamp is illuminated,the front passenger front air bag isdeactivated and will not be deployed.If the 45 indicator lamp is notilluminated, the front passenger front air bagis activated and will be deployedRin the event of certain frontal impactsRif the impact exceeds a predetermined

triggering thresholdRindependent of the side impact air bag or

pelvis air bagIf the front passenger front air bag isdeployed, the rate of inflation will beinfluenced byRthe rate of vehicle deceleration as assessed

by the air bag control unitRthe front passenger's weight category as

identified by the OCS

For further information, see "Air bag displaymessages" (Y page 221).

G WARNINGAccording to accident statistics, children aresafer when properly restrained on the rearseats than on the front-passenger seat. Thus,we strongly recommend that children beplaced in the rear seats whenever possible.Regardless of seating position, children 12years old and under must be seated andproperly secured in an appropriate infantrestraint, toddler restraint, or booster seat

Occupant safety 43

Safe

ty

Z

recommended for the size and weight of thechild.The infant or child restraint must be properlysecured with the vehicle's seat belt, the seatbelt and Top Tether strap, or lower anchorsand Top Tether strap, fully in accordance withthe child seat manufacturer's instructions.Occupants, especially children, should alwayssit as upright as possible, wear the seat beltproperly and use an appropriately sized infantrestraint, toddler restraint, or booster seatrecommended for the size and weight of thechild.Children can be killed or seriously injured byan inflating air bag. Note the followingimportant information when circumstancesrequire you to place a child in the front-passenger seat:RYour vehicle is equipped with air bag

technology designed to deactivate thefront-passenger front air bag in your vehiclewhen the system senses the weight of atypical 12-month-old child or less alongwith the weight of a standard appropriatechild restraint on the front-passenger seat.RA child in a rear-facing child restraint on the

front-passenger seat will be seriouslyinjured or even killed if the front-passengerfront air bag inflates in a collision whichcould occur under some circumstances,even with the air bag technology installedin your vehicle. The only means to eliminatethis risk completely is never to place a childin a rear-facing child restraint in the front-passenger seat. We therefore stronglyrecommend that you always place a childin a rear-facing child restraint on the rearseat.RIf you install a rear-facing child restraint on

the front-passenger seat, make sure the45 indicator lamp is illuminated,indicating that the front-passenger front airbag is deactivated. Should the 45indicator lamp not illuminate or go out whilethe restraint is installed, please checkinstallation. Periodically check the

45 indicator lamp while driving tomake sure that the 45 indicatorlamp is illuminated. If the 45indicator lamp goes out or remains out, donot transport a child on the front-passengerseat until the system has been repaired.A child in a rear-facing child restraint on thefront-passenger seat will be seriouslyinjured or even killed if the front-passengerfront air bag inflates.RIf you place a child in a forward-facing child

restraint on the front-passenger seat:- move the seat as far back as possible- use the proper child restraint

recommended for the age, size andweight of the child

- secure child restraint with the vehicle'sseat belt according to the child seatmanufacturer's instructions

RFor children larger than the typical 12-month-old child, the front-passenger frontair bag may or may not be activated.

If the driver's air bag deploys, this does notmean that the front-passenger front air bagalso has to deploy.The OCS may have detected that the seat:Rwas empty or occupied by a person with a

weight of up to or less than that of a typical12-month-old child seated in a standardchild restraintRwas occupied by a small individual, such as

a young teenager or a small adultRwas occupied by a child in a child restraint

system, whose weight is greater than thatof a typical 12-month-old child.

These are examples of when the OCSdeactivates the front-passenger front air bag.Deactivation takes place although thecollision fulfills the criteria for deploying thedriver's air bag.


fety

If the SmartKey has been removed from theignition lock or is in position 0, indicator lamp45: does not light up.

G WARNINGIf the red 6 SRS warning lamp in theinstrument cluster and the 45indicator lamp light up simultaneously, theOCS is malfunctioning. The front passengerfront air bag will be deactivated in this case.Have the system checked by qualifiedtechnicians as soon as possible. Contact anauthorized Mercedes-Benz Center.Only have the seat repaired or replaced at anauthorized Mercedes-Benz Center.In order to ensure proper operation of the airbag system and OCS:RSit with the seat belt properly fastened in a

position that is as upright as possible withyour back against the seat backrest.RWhen seated, a passenger should not

position him/herself in such a way as tocause the passenger's weight to be liftedfrom the seat cushion as this may result inthe OCS being unable to correctlyapproximate the passenger's weightcategory.RRead and observe all warnings in this

chapter.

System self-testThe 45 indicator lamp illuminateswhen you:Rturn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in the

ignition lockRon vehicles with KEYLESS-GO, press the

Start/Stop button once or twiceIf an adult occupant is properly sitting on thepassenger seat and the OCS classifies theoccupant as an adult, the 45 indicatorlamp illuminates and goes out again afterapproximately 6 seconds.If the seat is not occupied and the OCSclassifies the front passenger seat as beingunoccupied, the 45 indicator lampwill illuminate and not go out.

G WARNINGIf the 4 5 indicator lamp does notilluminate, the system is not functioning. Youmust contact an authorized Mercedes-BenzCenter before seating any child on the frontpassenger seat.

For more information, see "Problems with theOccupant Classification System"(Y page 46).

G WARNINGNever place anything between seat cushionand child seat (e.g. a pillow), since it reducesthe effectiveness of the OCS. The undersideand rear side child restraint system must beplaced entirely on the seat cushion and thebackrest of the front-passenger seatbackrest.If necessary, adjust the tilt of the passengerseat backrest.An incorrectly mounted child seat could causeinjuries to the child in case of an accident,instead of increasing protection for the child.Follow the manufacturer's instructions forinstallation of child restraint systems.

Occupant safety 45

Safe

ty

Z

Problems with the occupant classification system

Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

The 45indicator lampilluminates andremains illuminated.The person on thefront-passenger seat:Rhas the weight of a

typical adultRhas been determined

by the system not tobe a child.

The OCS is malfunctioning.X Have the OCS checked as soon as possible at an authorized

Mercedes-Benz Center.X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction

display (Y page 221).

G WARNINGIf the 45 indicator lamp illuminates and remains illuminated when the weight of a typicaladult or someone larger than a small individual has been detected on the passenger seat, do notallow any occupant to use the passenger seat until the system has been repaired.


The 45indicator lamp does notilluminate and/or doesnot remain illuminated.The front-passengerseat is:RunoccupiedRoccupied with a

weight up to or lessthan a typical 12-month-old child in astandard childrestraint system

The OCS is malfunctioning.X Make sure there is nothing between the seat cushion and the

child seat.X Check the installation of the child restraint system.X Make sure that no objects are applying additional weight onto

the seat.X If the 45 indicator lamp does not illuminate, have the

OCS checked as soon as possible at an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. Do not transport a child on the front-passengerseat as long as the OCS is not functioning.

X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunctiondisplay (Y page 221).

G WARNINGIf the 45 indicator lamp does not illuminate or remains out with the weight of a typical12-month-old child in a standard child restraint or less, or is unoccupied, on the front-passengerseat, do not transport a child on the front-passenger seat until the system has been repaired.


fety

NECK-PRO head restraints/NECK-PRO luxury head restraints (exceptAMG vehicles)

NECK-PRO head restraints/NECK-PRO luxuryhead restraints increase protection of thedriver's and front-passenger's head andneck. In the event of a rear collision of acertain severity, the NECK-PRO headrestraints/NECK-PRO luxury head restraintson the driver's and front-passenger seats aremoved forwards and upwards. This providesbetter head support.

G WARNINGDo not attach any objects (e.g. a coat hanger)to the NECK-PRO head restraints/NECK-PROluxury head restraints. Otherwise, the NECK-PRO head restraints/NECK-PRO luxury headrestraints may not function properly and inthe event of a rear-end collision may not offerthe protection they are designed to provide.

G WARNINGSeat or head restraint covers can cause amalfunction when the NECK-PRO headrestraints/NECK PRO luxury head restraintsare activated or when the side impact air bagsor pelvis air bags are deployed, or they canprevent this completely. The NECK-PRO headrestraints/NECK PRO luxury head restraintsor side impact air bags/pelvis air bags cantherefore not provide the intended protection.Do not use any seat or head restraint covers.

If the NECK-PRO head restraints/NECK-PROluxury head restraints have been triggered inan accident, reset the NECK-PRO headrestraints/NECK-PRO luxury head restraintson the driver's and front-passenger seats(Y page 47). Otherwise, the additionalprotection will not be available in the event ofanother rear-end collision. NECK-PRO headrestraints/NECK-PRO luxury head restraintsthat have been triggered are moved forwardsand can no longer be adjusted.

G WARNINGFor your protection, drive only with properlypositioned head restraints.Adjust the head restraint so that it is as closeto the head as possible and the center of thehead restraint supports the back of the headat eye level. This will reduce the potential forinjury to the head and neck in the event of anaccident or similar situation.

Resetting triggered NECK-PRO headrestraints/NECK-PRO luxury headrestraints


G WARNINGFor reasons of safety, have the NECK-PROhead restraints/NECK-PRO luxury headrestraints checked at an authorizedMercedes-Benz Center after a rear-endcollision.

G WARNINGWhen pushing back the NECK-PRO headrestraint cushion, make sure your fingers donot become caught between the headrestraint cushion and the cover. Failure toobserve this could result in injuries.

NECK-PRO head restraintsi Resetting the NECK-PRO head restraints

requires a lot of strength. If you havedifficulty resetting the NECK-PRO headrestraints, have this work carried out at aqualified specialist workshop, e.g. anauthorized Mercedes-Benz Center.

Occupant safety 47

Safe

ty

Z

X Tilt the top of the NECK-PRO head restraintcushion forwards in the direction ofarrow :.

X Push the NECK-PRO head restraint cushiondown in the direction of arrow ; as far asit will go.

X Firmly push the NECK-PRO head restraintcushion back in the direction of arrow =until the cushion engages.

X Repeat this procedure for the secondNECK-PRO head restraint.

NECK-PRO luxury head restraintsi If you have difficulty resetting the NECK-

PRO luxury head restraints, have this workcarried out at a qualified specialistworkshop, e.g. an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.

X Remove resetting tool : from the vehicledocument wallet.

X Slide resetting tool : into guide ;between the NECK-PRO luxury head

restraint and the rear cover of the headrestraint.

X Push resetting tool : downwards until youhear the head restraint deploymentmechanism engage.

X Pull out resetting tool :.X Firmly press the NECK-PRO luxury head

restraint cushion back = until it engages.X Repeat this procedure for the second

NECK-PRO luxury head restraint.X Put resetting tool : back into the vehicle

document wallet.

Seat belts

Important safety notesThe use of seat belts and infant and childrestraint systems is required by law in all 50states, the District of Columbia, the U.S.territories and all Canadian provinces.Even where this is not the case, all vehicleoccupants should have their seat beltsfastened when the vehicle is in motion.

i For further information on infants andchildren traveling in the vehicle and oninfant and child restraint systems, see"Children in the vehicle" (Y page 53).

G WARNINGAlways fasten your seat belt before driving off.Always make sure all of your passengers areproperly restrained. You and your passengersshould always wear seat belts.Failure to wear and properly fasten andposition your seat belt greatly increases yourrisk of injuries and their likely severity in anaccident.If you are ever in an accident, your injuries canbe considerably more severe without yourseat belt properly buckled. Without your seatbelt buckled, you are much more likely to hitthe interior of the vehicle or be ejected fromit. You can be seriously injured or killed.


fety

In the same crash, the possibility of injury ordeath is lessened if you are properly wearingyour seat belt. The air bags can only protectas intended if the occupants are properlywearing their seat belts.

G WARNINGNever ride in a moving vehicle with the seatbackrest in an excessively reclined position asthis can be dangerous. You could slide underthe seat belt in a collision. If you slide underit, the seat belt would apply force at theabdomen or neck. That could cause seriousor even fatal injuries. The seat backrest andseat belt provide the best restraint when thewearer is in a position that is as upright aspossible and the seat belt is properlypositioned on the body.

G WARNINGNever let more people ride in the vehicle thanthere are seat belts available. Make sureeveryone riding in the vehicle is correctlyrestrained with a separate seat belt. Neveruse a seat belt for more than one person at atime.

G WARNINGDamaged seat belts or seat belts that havebeen subjected to stress in an accident mustbe replaced and their anchoring points mustalso be checked.Only use seat belts which have been approvedby Mercedes-Benz.Do not make any modifications to the seatbelts. This can lead to unintended activationof the ETDs or to their failure to activate whennecessary.Do not bleach or dye seat belts as this mayseverely weaken them. In a crash they maynot be able to provide adequate protection.Have all work carried out only by qualifiedtechnicians. Contact an authorizedMercedes-Benz Center.

Correct use of the seat belts

G WARNINGUSE SEAT BELTS PROPERLYRSeat belts can only work when used

properly. Never wear seat belts in any otherway than as described in this section, asthat could result in serious injuries in theevent of an accident.REach occupant should wear their seat belt

at all times, because seat belts help reducethe likelihood of and potential severity ofinjuries in accidents, including rollovers.The integrated restraint system includesSRS (driver front air bag, driver's side kneebag, front-passenger front air bag, sideimpact air bags, pelvis air bags, windowcurtain air bags for the side windows),Emergency Tensioning Devices, seat beltforce limiters, and front seat knee bolsters.The system is designed to enhance theprotection offered to properly beltedoccupants in certain frontal (front air bags,driver's side knee bag, and ETDs) and side(side impact air bags, pelvis air bags,window curtain air bags, and ETDs) impactswhich exceed preset deploymentthresholds.RNever wear the shoulder belt under your

arm, across your neck or off your shoulder.In a frontal crash, your body would movetoo far forward. That would increase thechance of head and neck injuries. The seatbelt would also apply too much force to theribs or abdomen, which could severelyinjure internal organs such as your liver orspleen.Adjust the seat belt so that the shouldersection is located as close as possible tothe middle of the shoulder. It should nottouch the neck. Never pass the shoulderportion of the seat belt under your arm.RPosition the lap belt as low as possible on

your hips and not across the abdomen. Ifthe lap belt is positioned across your

Occupant safety 49

Safe

ty

Z

abdomen, it could cause serious injuries ina crash.RNever wear seat belts over rigid or

breakable objects in or on your clothing,such as eyeglasses, pens, keys etc., asthese might cause injuries.RMake sure the seat belt is always fitted

snugly. Take special care of this whenwearing loose clothing.RNever use a seat belt for more than one

person at a time. Do not fasten a seat beltaround a person and another person orother objects at the same time.RSeat belts should not be worn twisted. In a

crash, you would not have the full width ofthe seat belt to distribute impact forces.The twisted seat belt against your bodycould cause injuries.RPregnant women should also always use a

lap-shoulder belt. The lap belt portionshould be positioned as low as possible onthe hips to avoid any possible pressure onthe abdomen.RPlace the seat backrest in a position that is

as upright as possible.RCheck your seat belt during travel to make

sure it is properly positioned.RNever place your feet on the instrument

panel, dashboard, or on the seat. Alwayskeep both feet on the floor in front of theseat.RWhen using a seat belt to secure infant

restraints, toddler restraints, or children inbooster seats, always follow the child seatmanufacturer's instructions.

G WARNINGDo not pass seat belts over sharp edges. Theycould tear.Do not allow the seat belt to get caught in thedoor or in the seat adjustment mechanism.This could damage the seat belt.Never attempt to make modifications to seatbelts. This could impair the effectiveness ofthe seat belts.

Fastening seat belts

G WARNINGAccording to accident statistics, children aresafer when properly restrained on the rearseats than on the front-passenger seat. Thus,we strongly recommend that children beplaced in the rear seat whenever possible.Regardless of seating position, children 12years old and under must be seated andproperly secured in an appropriately sizedchild restraint system or booster seatrecommended for the size and weight of thechild. For additional information, see the"Children in the vehicle" section.A child's risk of serious or fatal injuries issignificantly increased if the child restraintsare not properly secured in the vehicle and/or the child is not properly secured in the childrestraint.

X Adjust the seat and move the backrest toan almost vertical position (Y page 92).

X Pull the seat belt smoothly through beltsash guide :.

X Without twisting it, guide the shouldersection of the seat belt across the middleof your shoulder and the lap section acrossyour hips.

X Engage belt tongue ; in buckle =.


fety

X If necessary, adjust the seat belt to theappropriate height (Y page 51).

X If necessary, pull upwards on the shouldersection of the seat belt to tighten the beltacross your body.

All seat belts except the driver's seat belt areequipped with a special seat belt retractor tosecurely fasten child restraint systems in thevehicle. For further information on specialseat belt retractors, see (Y page 55).For more information about releasing the seatbelt with release button ?, see "Releasingseat belts" (Y page 51).

Belt height adjustmentYou can adjust the seat belt height on thedriver's seat and the front-passenger seat.

Adjust the height so that the upper part of theseat belt is routed across the center of yourshoulder.X To raise: slide the belt sash guide upwards.

The belt sash guide engages in variouspositions.

X To lower: press and hold belt sash guiderelease :.

X Slide the belt sash guide downwards.X Release belt sash guide release : and

make sure that the belt sash guide hasengaged.

Releasing seat beltsX Press release button ?(Y page 50) and

guide belt tongue ; back towards beltsash guide :.

! Make sure that the seat belt is fully rolledup. Otherwise, the seat belt or belt tonguewill be trapped in the door or in the seatmechanism. This could damage the door,the door trim panel and the seat belt.Damaged seat belts can no longer fulfilltheir protective function and must bereplaced. Consult an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.

Belt warning for the driver and frontpassengerRegardless of whether the driver and frontpassenger have fastened their seat beltsalready, the 7 seat belt warning lamplights up for 6 seconds after every enginestart. It then goes out if the driver and thefront passenger have fastened their seatbelts.If the driver's seat belt is not fastened afterthe engine is started, an additional warningtone will sound. The warning tone goes outafter approximately six seconds or once thedriver's seat belt is fastened.If the driver or front passenger have notfastened their seat belt after 6 seconds andthe doors are closed, the 7 seat beltwarning lamp lights up.Runtil the driver or the front passenger have

fastened their seat beltsRif a vehicle speed of 15 mph (25 km/h) is

exceeded once, a warning tone withincreasing intensity sounds additionally fora maximum of 60 seconds or until the driveror front passenger have fastened their seatbelts.

If the driver or front passenger undo their seatbelts during the journey, the 7 seat beltwarning lamp lights up and the warning tonesounds again.

Occupant safety 51

Safe

ty

Z

The warning tone ceases even if the driver orfront passenger have still not fastened theirseat belt after 60 seconds. The 7 seat beltwarning lamp stops flashing but continues tobe lit.Once the vehicle is stationary, the warningtone is reactivated and the 7 seat beltwarning lamp starts to flash again if thevehicle speed exceeds 15 mph (25 km/h)once.The 7 seat belt warning lamp only goesout if:Rboth the driver and the front passenger

have fastened their seat belts.orRthe vehicle is stationary and a door is open.

i For more information on the 7 seatbelt warning lamp, see "Warning andindicator lamps in the instrument cluster,seat belt" (Y page 239).

Emergency Tensioning Devices, beltforce limitersThe front seat belts and the outer seat beltsin the rear are equipped with ETDs and seatbelt force limiters.The ETDs tighten the seat belts in an accident,pulling them close against the body.The ETDs do not correct incorrect seatpositions or incorrectly fastened seat belts.The ETDs do not pull vehicle occupants backtowards the backrest.Seat belt force limiters, when triggered, helpto reduce the peak force exerted by the seatbelt on the vehicle occupant.The seat belt force limiters for the front seatsare synchronized with the front air bags.These take on a part of the deceleration force.Thus, the force exerted on the occupant isdistributed over a greater area.The ETDs can only be activated when:Rthe ignition is switched on.Rthe restraint systems are operational; see

"SRS warning lamp" (Y page 36).

Rthe belt tongue is engaged in the buckle oneach of the lap-shoulder belts in the front.Rthe front-passenger seat is occupied and

the belt tongue is engaged in the buckle onthe front-passenger side.

The ETDs on the outside seats in the rearcompartment are triggered independently ofthe lock status of the seat belts.The ETDs are triggered depending on the typeand severity of an accident:Rif, in the event of a head-on or rear-end

collision, the vehicle decelerates oraccelerates rapidly in a longitudinaldirection during the initial stages of theimpactRif, in the event of a side impact, on the side

opposite the impact the vehicledecelerates or accelerates rapidly in alateral direction

If the air bags are deployed, you will hear abang, and a small amount of powder may alsobe released. Only in rare cases will the bangaffect your hearing. The powder that isreleased generally does not constitute ahealth hazard. The 6 SRS warning lamplights up.

G WARNINGPyrotechnic ETDs that were activated must bereplaced.For your safety, when disposing of thepyrotechnic ETDs always follow our safetyinstructions. These are available at anyauthorized Mercedes-Benz Center.

! If the front-passenger seat is notoccupied, do not engage the seat belttongue in the buckle on the front-passenger seat. Otherwise, the EmergencyTensioning Device could be triggered in theevent of an accident.


fety

Children in the vehicle

Child restraint systems

Important safety notesWe recommend that all infants and childrenbe properly secured in an infant or childrestraint system at all times while the vehicleis in motion.The use of seat belts and infant and childrestraint systems is required by law in all 50states, the District of Columbia, the U.S.territories and all Canadian provinces.Infants and children must always be seated inan appropriate infant or child restraint systemrecommended for the size and weight of thechild. The infant or child restraint systemmust be properly secured in accordance withthe manufacturer's instructions. All infant orchild restraint systems must meet U.S.Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards 213and 225 and Canadian Motor Vehicle SafetyStandards 213 and 210.2.An information label on the child restraintsystem indicates whether it meets thesestandards. This information is also providedin the installation instructions supplied withthe child restraint system.Always read and follow the manufacturer'sinstructions when using an infant or childrestraint system or booster seat.Observe all warning signs in the vehicleinterior and on the infant or child restraint.

G WARNINGAccording to accident statistics, children aresafer when properly restrained in the rearseating positions than in the front seatingposition. Thus, we strongly recommend thatchildren be placed in the rear seats wheneverpossible. Regardless of seating position,children 12 years old and under must beseated and properly secured in an appropriateinfant restraint, toddler restraint, or boosterseat recommended for the size and weight ofthe child.

The infant or child restraint must be properlysecured with the vehicle's seat belt, the seatbelt and top tether strap, or lower anchors andtop tether strap, fully in accordance with thechild seat manufacturer's instructions.Occupants, especially children, should alwayssit as upright as possible, wear the seat beltproperly and use an appropriately sized infantrestraint, toddler restraint, or booster seatrecommended for the size and weight of thechild.Children can be killed or seriously injured byan inflating air bag. Note the followingimportant information when circumstancesrequire you to place a child in the frontpassenger seat:RYour vehicle is equipped with air bag

technology designed to deactivate the frontpassenger front air bag in your vehiclewhen the system senses the weight of atypical 12-month-old child or less alongwith the weight of a standard appropriatechild restraint on the front passenger seat.RFor children larger than the typical

12-month-old child, the front passengerfront air bag may or may not be activated.Always make sure the 4 5 indicatorlamp is illuminated, indicating that the frontpassenger front air bag is deactivated.RA child in a rear-facing child restraint on the

front passenger seat will be seriouslyinjured or even killed if the front passengerfront air bag inflates in a collision whichcould occur under some circumstances,even with the air bag technology installedin your vehicle. The only means tocompletely eliminate this risk is to neverplace a child in a rear-facing child restraintin the front seat. We therefore stronglyrecommend that you always place a childin a rear-facing child restraint in a backseat.RIf you must install a rear-facing child

restraint on the front passenger seatbecause circumstances require you to doso, make sure the 4 5 indicatorlamp is illuminated, indicating that the front

Children in the vehicle 53

Safe

ty

Z

passenger front air bag is deactivated.Should the 4 5 indicator lamp notilluminate or go out while the restraint isinstalled, please check installation.Periodically check the 4 5 indicatorlamp while driving to make sure the 45 indicator lamp is illuminated. If the4 5 indicator lamp goes out orremains out, do not transport a child on thefront passenger seat until the system hasbeen repaired.A child in a rear-facing child restraint on thefront passenger seat will be seriouslyinjured or even killed if the front passengerfront air bag inflates.RIf you have to place a child in a forward-

facing child restraint on the front passengerseat, move the seat as far back as possible,use the proper child restraintrecommended for the age, size and weightof the child, and secure child restraint withthe vehicle's seat belt according to thechild seat manufacturer's instructions.

G WARNINGInfants and small children should never sharea seat belt with another occupant. During anaccident, they could be crushed between theoccupant and seat belt.A child's risk of serious or fatal injuries issignificantly increased if the child restraintsare not properly secured in the vehicle and/or the child is not properly secured in the childrestraint.Children too big for a toddler restraint mustride in seats using regular seat belts. Positionthe shoulder belt across the chest andshoulder, not face or neck. A booster seatmay be necessary to achieve proper seat beltpositioning for children over 41 lb (18 kg) untilthey reach a height where a lap/shoulder beltfits properly without a booster.When the child restraint is not in use, removeit from the vehicle or secure it with the seatbelt to prevent the child restraint from

becoming a projectile in the event of anaccident.

If an infant or child is traveling in the vehicle:X Secure the infant or child with an

appropriate infant or child restraintrecommended for the child's age andweight.

X Make sure that the infant or child isproperly secured at all times while thevehicle is in motion.

G WARNINGWhen leaving the vehicle, always remove theSmartKey from the ignition lock. Always takethe SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle.Do not leave children unattended in thevehicle, even if they are secured in a childrestraint system, or with access to anunlocked vehicle. A child's unsupervisedaccess to a vehicle could result in an accidentand/or serious personal injury. The childrencould:Rinjure themselves on parts of the vehicleRbe seriously or fatally injured through

excessive exposure to extreme heat or coldRinjure themselves or cause an accident with

vehicle equipment that can be operatedeven if the SmartKey is removed from theignition lock or removed from the vehicle,such as seat adjustment, steering wheeladjustment, or the memory function

If children open a door, they could injure otherpersons or get out of the vehicle and injurethemselves or be injured by following traffic.Do not expose the child restraint system todirect sunlight. The child restraint system'smetal parts, for example, could become veryhot, and the child could be burned on theseparts.

G WARNINGDo not carry heavy or hard objects in thepassenger compartment or trunk unless theyare firmly secured in place.

54 Children in the vehicleSa

fety

Unsecured or improperly positioned cargoincreases a child's risk of injury in the eventofRstrong braking maneuversRsudden changes of directionRan accident

Special seat belt retractorAll seat belts except the driver's seat belt areequipped with a special seat belt retractor.When activated, the special seat beltretractor ensures the seat belt will notslacken once the child restraint system hasbeen secured.Installing a child restraint system:X Always comply with the manufacturer's

installation instructions.X Pull the seat belt smoothly from the inertia

reel.X Engage the seat belt tongue in the belt

buckle.

Activating the special seat belt retractor:X Pull the seat belt out fully and let the inertia

reel retract it again.While the seat belt is retracting, you shouldhear a ratcheting sound. The special seatbelt retractor is enabled.

X Push down on the child restraint system totake up any slack.

Removing a child restraint system/deactivating the special seat belt retractor:X Always comply with the manufacturer's

installation instructions.X Press the seat belt release button and

guide the belt tongue to the belt outlet.The special seat belt retractor isdeactivated.

G WARNINGNever release the seat belt buckle while thevehicle is in motion, since the special seat beltretractor will be deactivated.

LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child seat anchorsin the rear

G WARNINGChildren that are too large for a child restraintmust travel in seats using normal seat belts.Position shoulder belt across the chest andshoulder, not face or neck.In order to attain the correct seating positionfor children weighing over 41 lb (18 kg), it maybe necessary to use a booster seat until theyreach a height where a normal lap/shoulderseat belt lies properly across their bodieswithout the need for a booster seat.Install the child restraint system according tothe manufacturer's instructions.The child restraint system must be installedfirmly on both brackets.An incorrectly installed child restraint systemcan come loose in the event of an accident,causing the child to be severely or fatallyinjured.Child restraint systems/child restraintretaining brackets that are damaged or havesuffered damage due to an impact must bereplaced.

LATCH-type (ISOFIX) is a standardizedsecuring system for specially designed childrestraint systems on the rear seats. Securingrings for two LATCH-type (ISOFIX) childrestraint systems are installed on the left andright of the rear seats.Secure non LATCH-type (ISOFIX) childrestraint systems using the vehicle's seat beltsystem. Always install child restraint systemsaccording to the manufacturer's instructions.

! When installing the child restraint system,make sure that the seat belt for the centerseat does not get trapped. Otherwise, theseat belt could be damaged.


Safe

ty

Z

Vehicles without rear-seat through-loading facility

Installation instructions : indicate theinstallation location of securing rings =.X Remove covers ; from securing rings =

by pulling in the direction of the arrow.

Vehicles with rear-seat through-loading facilityX Install the LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child

restraint system. Comply with themanufacturer's instructions wheninstalling the LATCH-type (ISOFIX) childrestraint system.

Top Tether

G WARNINGAlways lock the rear seat backrests in theirupright position when the rear seats areoccupied by passengers. Lock the rear seatbackrests in their upright position beforeinstalling the Top Tether straps or when thecargo compartment is not in use. Make surethat rear seat backrests are secured properlyby pushing and pulling on the seat backrests.If the seat backrest is not locked properly, the

seat backrest could fold forward. The childrestraint system is no longer supportedproperly or held in position and can no longerfulfill its function. This could cause serious oreven fatal injuries.

Top Tether provides an additional connectionbetween the child restraint system securedwith ISOFIX and the rear seat. It helps reducethe risk of injury even further.The Top Tether anchorage points are locatedin the rear compartment behind the headrestraints.

X Move head restraint : upwards.X Fold up cover ; of Top Tether anchorage=.

X Route Top Tether belt A under headrestraint : between the two head restraintbars.

X Hook Top Tether hook ? into Top Tetheranchorage =.

X Make sure that Top Tether belt A is nottwisted.

56 Children in the vehicleSa

fety

X Fold down cover ; of Top Tetheranchorage =.

X Move head restraint : back down againslightly if necessary (Y page 96). Makesure that you do not interfere with thecorrect routing of Top Tether belt A.

X Install the LATCH-type (ISOFIX) childrestraint system with Top Tether. Complywith the manufacturer's installationinstructions when doing so. Make sure thatTop Tether belt A is tight.

Child-proof locks






Child-proof locks for the rear doors

G WARNINGChildren could open a rear door from insidethe vehicle. This could result in seriousinjuries or an accident. Therefore, whenchildren ride in the rear always secure the reardoors with the child-proof locks.

You secure each door individually with thechild-proof locks on the rear doors. A doorsecured with a child-proof lock cannot beopened from inside the vehicle. When thevehicle is unlocked, the door can be openedfrom the outside.

X To activate: press the child-proof locklever up in the direction of arrow :.

X Make sure that the child-proof locks areworking properly.

X To deactivate: press the child-proof locklever down in the direction of arrow ;.

Override feature for the rear sidewindows

G WARNINGWhen children ride on the vehicle's rear seats,activate the override switch. Otherwise, thechildren could be injured, e.g. by trappingthemselves in the rear side window.


Safe

ty

Z

X To activate/deactivate: press button ;.If indicator lamp : is lit, operation of therear side windows is deactivated.Operation is only possible using theswitches in the driver's door. If indicatorlamp : is off, operation is possible usingthe switches in the rear compartment.

Panic alarm

X To activate: press ! button : for atleast one second.An alarm sounds and the exterior lightingflashes.

X To deactivate: press ! button :again.

orX Insert the SmartKey into the ignition lock.orX Press the KEYLESS-GO Start/Stop button.

The KEYLESS-GO key must be in thevehicle.

i USA only:This device complies with Part 15 of theFCC Rules. Operation is subject to thefollowing two conditions:1. This device may not cause harmfulinterference, and2. this device must accept any interferencereceived, including interference that maycause undesired operation.Any unauthorized modification to thisdevice could void the user's authority tooperate the equipment.The product label with FCC ID and ICcertification number can be found in thebattery case of the SmartKey.

i Canada only:This device complies with RSS-Gen ofIndustry Canada. Operation is subject tothe following two conditions:1. This device may not cause interference,and2. this device must accept any interferencereceived, including interference that maycause undesired operation.Any unauthorized modification to thisdevice could void the user's authority tooperate the equipment.The product label with FCC ID and ICcertification number can be found in thebattery case of the SmartKey.

Driving safety systems

Driving safety systems overviewIn this section, you will find information aboutthe following driving safety systems:RABS (Anti-lock Braking System)RBAS (Brake Assist System)RBAS PLUS (Brake Assist System Plus*)RESP® (Electronic Stability Program)REBD (Electronic Brake force Distribution)RADAPTIVE BRAKERPRE-SAFE® Brake

58 Driving safety systemsSa

fety

Important safety notesIf you fail to adapt your driving style, thedriving safety systems can neither reduce therisk of accident nor override the laws ofphysics. Driving safety systems are merelyaids designed to assist driving. You areresponsible for the distance to the vehicle infront, for vehicle speed and for braking ingood time. Always adapt your driving style tosuit the prevailing road/weather conditions,as well as the traffic conditions and maintaina safe distance to the vehicle in front. Drivecarefully.

i Please note that the driving safetysystems described only work as effectivelyas possible when there is adequate contactbetween the tires and the road surface. Payparticular attention to the informationregarding tires, recommended minimumtire tread depths etc. in the "Wheels andtires" section (Y page 310).In wintry driving conditions, always usewinter tires (M+S tires) and if necessary,snow chains. Only in this way will thedriving safety systems described in thissection work as effectively as possible.

ABS (Anti-lock Braking System)

Important safety notesi Observe the "Important safety notes"

section (Y page 59).ABS regulates brake pressure in such a waythat the wheels do not lock when you brake.This allows you to continue steering thevehicle when braking.ABS works from a speed of about 5 mph(8 km/h) upwards, regardless of road-surfaceconditions. ABS works on slippery surfaces,even when you only brake gently.

G WARNINGIf the ABS malfunctions, other driving systemssuch as the BAS or the ESP® are also switchedoff. Observe indicator and warning lamps that

may come on as well as messages in themultifunction display that may appear.If the ABS malfunctions, the wheels may lockduring hard braking, reducing the steeringcapability and extending the braking distance.

The ! warning lamp in the instrumentcluster lights up when the ignition is switchedon. It goes out when the engine is running.

BrakingIf ABS intervenes when braking, you will feela pulsing in the brake pedal.X If ABS intervenes: continue to depress the

brake pedal with force until the brakingsituation is over.

X To make a full brake application:depress the brake pedal with full force.

The pulsating brake pedal can be anindication of hazardous road conditions, andfunctions as a reminder to take extra carewhile driving.

G WARNINGDo not pump the brake pedal. Use firm, steadybrake pedal pressure instead. Pumping thebrake pedal defeats the purpose of the ABSand significantly reduces brakingeffectiveness.

BAS (Brake Assist System)i Observe the "Important safety notes"

section (Y page 59).BAS operates in emergency brakingsituations. If you depress the brake pedalquickly, BAS automatically boosts the brakingforce, thus shortening the stopping distance.X Keep the brake pedal firmly depressed until

the emergency braking situation is over.ABS prevents the wheels from locking.

The brakes will function as usual once yourelease the brake pedal. BAS is deactivated.

Driving safety systems 59

Safe

ty

Z

G WARNINGIf the BAS malfunctions, the brake system stillfunctions, but without the additional brakeboost available that the BAS would normallyprovide in an emergency braking maneuver.Therefore, the braking distance may increase.

BAS PLUS (Brake Assist System Plus)BAS PLUS is only available in vehiclesequipped with DISTRONIC PLUS.

i Observe the "Important safety notes"section (Y page 59).

At speeds above approximately20 mph (30 km/h), BAS PLUS assists youwhen braking in hazardous situations anduses the radar sensor system to evaluate thetraffic conditions.

i This device has been approved by the FCCas a "Vehicular Radar System". The radarsensor is intended for use in an automotiveradar system only. Removal, tampering, oraltering of the device will void anywarranties, and is not permitted by theFCC. Do not tamper with, alter, or use inany non-approved way.Any unauthorized modification to thisdevice could void the user's authority tooperate the equipment.

With the help of the radar sensor system, BASPLUS can detect obstacles that are in thepath of your vehicle for an extended period oftime.At speeds up to approximately40 mph (70 km/h), BAS PLUS can also detectstationary obstacles, for example stopped orparked vehicles.Should you approach an obstacle and BASPLUS has detected a risk of collision, BASPLUS calculates the braking force necessaryto avoid a rear-end collision. Should you applythe brakes forcefully, BAS PLUS canautomatically increase the braking force to alevel suitable for the traffic conditions.

X Keep the brake pedal depressed until theemergency braking situation is over.ABS prevents the wheels from locking.

The brakes will work normally again if:Ryou release the brake pedal.Rthere is no longer any danger of a rear-end

collision.Rno obstacle is detected in front of your

vehicle.BAS PLUS is then deactivated.For BAS PLUS to assist you when driving, theradar sensor system must be switched on andoperational, see "Radar sensor system" in theindex.

G WARNINGBAS PLUS cannot always clearly identifyobjects and complex traffic situations. BASPLUS cannot intervene in these cases.There is a risk of an accident. Always paycareful attention to the traffic situation and beready to brake.

In particular, the detection of obstacles canbe impaired if there is:Rdirt on the sensors or anything else

covering the sensorsRsnow or heavy rainRinterference by other radar sourcesRthe possibility of strong radar reflections,

for example in parking garagesRa narrow vehicle traveling in front, e.g. a

motorbikeRa vehicle traveling in front on a different line

G WARNINGBAS PLUS does not react:Rto people or animalsRto oncoming vehiclesRto crossing trafficRin curvesAs a result, BAS PLUS cannot intervene incritical situations. There is a risk of an


fety

accident. Always pay careful attention to thetraffic situation and be ready to brake.

Following damage to the front end of thevehicle, have the configuration and operationof the radar sensors checked at a qualifiedspecialist workshop. This also applies tocollisions at low speeds where there is novisible damage to the front of the vehicle.If BAS PLUS is not available due to amalfunction in the radar sensor system, thebrake system remains available with fullbrake boosting effect and BAS.

ESP® (Electronic Stability Program)

Important safety notesi See the "Important safety notes" section

(Y page 59).

If ESP® detects that the vehicle is deviatingfrom the direction desired by the driver, oneor more wheels are braked to stabilize thevehicle. If necessary, the engine output is alsomodified to keep the vehicle on the desiredcourse within physical limits. ESP® assiststhe driver when pulling away on wet orslippery roads. ESP® can also stabilize thevehicle during braking.If ESP® intervenes, the ÷ ESP® warninglamp flashes in the instrument cluster.

G WARNINGUnder no circumstances should youdeactivate ESP® when the ÷ ESP®

warning lamp in the instrument clusterflashes. Proceed as follows:Rwhen driving off, apply as little throttle as

possible.Rwhile driving, ease up on the accelerator

pedal.Radapt your speed to suit the prevailing road

and weather conditions.Failure to observe these guidelines couldcause the vehicle to skid. ESP® cannot

prevent accidents resulting from excessivespeed.

! Vehicles without 4MATIC: switch theignition off when:Rthe parking brake is being tested using a

dynamometerRthe vehicle is being towed with the front

axle raisedApplication of the brakes by ESP® mayotherwise destroy the brake system.

! Vehicles with 4MATIC: switch off theignition when the parking brake is beingtested on a brake dynamometer.Application of the brakes by ESP® mayotherwise destroy the brake system.

! Vehicles with 4MATIC: function orperformance tests may only be carried outon a 2-axle dynamometer. If you wish tooperate the vehicle on such adynamometer, please consult anauthorized Mercedes-Benz Center inadvance. You could otherwise damage thedrive train or the brake system.

i Only use wheels with the recommendedtire sizes. Only then will ESP® functionproperly.

ETS/4ETS (Electronic Traction System)

G WARNINGObserve "Important safety notes"(Y page 58).

Traction control is part of ESP®.Traction control brakes the drive wheelsindividually if they spin. This enables you topull away and accelerate on slippery surfaces,for example if the road surface is slippery onone side. On vehicles with 4MATIC, moredrive torque is also transferred to the wheelor wheels with traction.Traction control remains active if youdeactivate ESP®.


Safe

ty

Z

Deactivating/activating ESP® (exceptAMG vehicles)

G WARNINGESP® should not be deactivated duringnormal driving other than in thecircumstances described below. Disablingthe system will reduce vehicle stability indriving maneuvers.Do not deactivate ESP® when the emergencyor spare wheel is mounted.

ESP® is activated automatically when theengine is started.It may be best to deactivate ESP® in thefollowing situations:Rwhen using snow chainsRin deep snowRon sand or gravel

G WARNINGSwitch on ESP® immediately if one of thepreviously stated conditions is no longer met.Otherwise, ESP® cannot stabilize the vehicleif it begins to lurch or when a wheel spins.

If you deactivate ESP®:RESP® no longer improves driving stability.Rthe engine's torque is no longer limited and

the drive wheels can spin. The spinning ofthe wheels results in a cutting action, whichprovides better grip.Rtraction control is still activated.RESP® still provides support when you

brake.If ESP® is deactivated and one or more wheelsstart to spin, the ÷ ESP® warning lamp inthe instrument cluster flashes. In suchsituations, ESP® will not stabilize the vehicle.X To deactivate:(Y page 204).

The å ESP® OFF warning lamp in theinstrument cluster lights up.

G WARNINGWhen the å ESP® OFF warning lamp is lit,ESP® is deactivated.If the ÷ ESP® warning lamp and theå ESP® OFF warning lamp remain lit,ESP® is not available due to a malfunction.When ESP® is deactivated or not operational,vehicle stability in standard drivingmaneuvers is reduced.Adapt your speed and driving to the prevailingroad conditions and to the non-operatingstatus of the ESP®.

! Avoid spinning the driven wheels for anextended period with ESP® deactivated.You could otherwise damage the drivetrain.

X To activate:(Y page 204).The å ESP® OFF warning lamp in theinstrument cluster goes out.

Deactivating/activating ESP® (AMGvehicles)

Activating/deactivating SPORT handlingmodeG WARNINGThe SPORT handling mode should not beswitched on during normal driving.Switching on the SPORT handling mode willresult in the following:Rno restriction to the engine torqueRsystem supported traction control is

limitedThe SPORT handling mode is designed fordriving on closed tracks when the vehicle'sown natural oversteer and understeercharacteristics are desired and requires ahighly skilled and experienced driver able tohandle these critical driving situations.You could lose control of your vehicle andcause an accident.Please be aware of these limits when youswitch on the SPORT handling mode.


fety

Do not switch on the SPORT handling when aspare wheel is mounted.

ESP® is activated automatically when theengine is started.It may be best to activate SPORT handlingmode in the following situations:Rwhen using snow chainsRin deep snowRon sand or gravel

G WARNINGSwitch off the SPORT handling mode andswitch on the ESP® immediately if theaforementioned circumstances do not applyanymore. Otherwise the SPORT handlingmode will only stabilize the vehicle to a limitedextent when it is starting to skid or a wheel isspinning.

When SPORT handling mode is activated:RESP® only improves driving stability to a

limited degree.Rthe engine's torque is restricted only to a

limited degree and the drive wheels canspin. The spinning of the wheels results ina cutting action, which provides better grip.Rtraction control is still activated.RESP® still provides support when you brake

firmly.If SPORT handling mode is activated and oneor more wheels start to spin, the ÷ ESP®

warning lamp in the instrument clusterflashes. ESP® only stabilizes the vehicle to alimited degree.

X To activate: briefly press button :.The M SPORT handling mode warninglamp in the instrument cluster lights up.The SPORT handling mode messageappears in the multifunction display.

X To deactivate: briefly press button :.The M SPORT handling mode warninglamp in the instrument cluster goes out.

Activating/deactivating ESP®

G WARNINGThe ESP® should not be switched off duringnormal driving.Disabling of the system will result in thefollowing:Rno restriction to engine torqueRloss of system-supported traction control"ESP® OFF" is designed for driving on closedtracks when the vehicle's natural oversteerand understeer characteristics are desiredand requires a highly skilled and experienceddriver able to handle these critical drivingsituations.You could lose control of your vehicle andcause an accident.Please be aware of these limits when youswitch off the ESP®.Do not switch off the ESP® when a sparewheel is mounted.

ESP® is activated automatically when theengine is started.It may be best to deactivate ESP® in thefollowing situations:Rwhen using snow chainsRin deep snowRon sand or gravel

G WARNINGSwitch on ESP® immediately if one of thepreviously stated conditions is no longer met.Otherwise, ESP® cannot stabilize the vehicleif it begins to lurch or when a wheel spins.


Safe

ty

Z

If you deactivate ESP®:RESP® no longer improves driving stability.Rthe engine's torque is no longer limited and

the drive wheels are able to spin. Thespinning of the wheels results in a cuttingaction, which provides better grip.Rtraction control is still activated.RPRE-SAFE® Brake is no longer available,

nor is it activated if you brake firmly andESP® intervenes.RESP® still provides support when you brake

firmly.If ESP® is deactivated and one or more wheelsstart to spin, the ÷ ESP® warning lamp inthe instrument cluster does not flash. In suchsituations, ESP® will not stabilize the vehicle.

X To deactivate: press button : until theå ESP® OFF warning lamp lights up inthe instrument cluster.The ÷OFF message appears in themultifunction display.

G WARNINGWhen the å ESP® OFF warning lamp is lit,ESP® is deactivated.If the ÷ ESP® warning lamp and theå ESP® OFF warning lamp remain lit,ESP® is not available due to a malfunction.When ESP® is deactivated or not operational,vehicle stability in standard drivingmaneuvers is reduced.

Adapt your speed and driving to the prevailingroad conditions and to the non-operatingstatus of the ESP®.

! Avoid spinning the driven wheels for anextended period with ESP® deactivated.You could otherwise damage the drivetrain.

X To activate: briefly press button :.The å ESP® OFF warning lamp in theinstrument cluster goes out. The ÷ONmessage appears in the multifunctiondisplay.

EBD (electronic brake forcedistribution)


EBD monitors and controls the brakepressure on the rear wheels to improvedriving stability while braking.

G WARNINGIf EBD has malfunctioned, the braking systemremains available with full brake boostingeffect. However, the rear wheels can still lock,e.g. under full braking. This could cause youto lose control of your vehicle and cause anaccident. You should therefore adapt yourdriving style to the different handlingcharacteristics.

X Observe the notes on warning and indicatorlamps (Y page 242) as well as displaymessages (Y page 216).

ADAPTIVE BRAKEADAPTIVE BRAKE enhances braking safetyand offers increased braking comfort. Inaddition to the braking function, ADAPTIVEBRAKE also has the HOLD function(Y page 172) and hill start assist(Y page 140). For further information, seeDriving tips (Y page 156).


fety

PRE-SAFE® BrakePRE-SAFE® Brake is only available in vehicleswith DISTRONIC PLUS.


PRE-SAFE® Brake can help you to minimizethe risk of a frontal collision with a vehicleahead or reduce the effects of such acollision. If PRE-SAFE® Brake has detected arisk of collision, you will be warned visuallyand acoustically as well as by automaticbraking. PRE-SAFE® Brake cannot prevent acollision without your intervention.At speeds above approximately20 mph (30 km/h), this function warns youwhen you are rapidly approaching the vehiclein front. An intermittent warning tone willthen sound and the · distance warninglamp in the instrument cluster will light up.X Brake immediately in order to increase the

distance from the vehicle in front.orX Take evasive action provided it is safe to do

so.If the driver and front passenger have theirseat belt fastened, PRE-SAFE® Brake can alsobrake the vehicle automatically at speedsfrom approximately 20 mph (30 km/h) toapproximately 124 mph (200 km/h).Due to the nature of the system, particularlycomplicated driving conditions may causeunnecessary warnings or the unnecessaryintervention of PRE-SAFE® Brake. To stop thebraking action, you can either depress theaccelerator pedal further, activate kickdownor release the brake pedal.The braking action of PRE-SAFE® Brake isended automatically if:Ryour speed drops below approximately

9 mph (15 km/h).Ryou maneuver to avoid the obstacle.

Rthere is no longer any danger of a rear-endcollision.Rthere is no longer an obstacle detected in

front of your vehicle.

i USA only: this device has been approvedby the FCC as a "Vehicular Radar System".The radar sensor is intended for use in anautomotive radar system only. Removal,tampering, or altering of the device will voidany warranties, and is not permitted by theFCC. Do not tamper with, alter, or use inany non-approved way.Any unauthorized modification to thisdevice could void the user's authority tooperate the equipment.

i Canada only: this device complies withRSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation issubject to the following two conditions:1. This device may not cause interference,and2. this device must accept any interferencereceived, including interference that maycause undesired operation of the device.Removal, tampering, or altering of thedevice will void any warranties, and is notpermitted. Do not tamper with, alter, or usein any non-approved way.Any unauthorized modification to thisdevice could void the user's authority tooperate the equipment.

With the help of the radar sensor system,PRE-SAFE® Brake can detect obstacles thatare in front of your vehicle for an extendedperiod of time.At speeds up to approximately 40 mph(70 km/h), PRE-SAFE® Brake can also reactto stationary obstacles, for example stoppedor parked vehicles.If you approach an obstacle and PRE-SAFE®

Brake detects a risk of collision, the systemwill initially alert you both visually andacoustically. If you do not brake or takeevasive action, the system will warn you byautomatically braking the vehicle gently. Ifthe risk of collision remains and you do not


Safe

ty

Z

brake, take evasive action or acceleratesignificantly, the vehicle may performautomatic emergency braking. Automaticemergency braking is not performed untilimmediately prior to an accident that can nolonger be avoided.

G WARNINGEven if PRE-SAFE® Brake slows the vehiclebefore an imminent rear-end collision, thesystem cannot avert a collision without theintervention of the driver. There is a risk of anaccident. Brake according to the situation ortake evasive action. Delayed intervention bythe driver can lead to an accident.

G WARNINGPRE-SAFE® Brake cannot always detectcomplex traffic situations properly.In these cases, PRE-SAFE(R) Brake may:Rgive an unnecessary warning and then

brake the vehicleRneither give a warning nor interveneThere is a risk of an accident. Always payparticular attention to the traffic situation andbe ready to brake, especially if PRE-SAFE(R)Brake warns you. Terminate the interventionin a non-critical driving situation.

In particular, the detection of obstacles canbe impaired if there is:Rdirt on the sensors or anything else

covering the sensorsRsnow or heavy rainRinterference by other radar sourcesRthe possibility of strong radar reflections,

for example in parking garagesRa narrow vehicle traveling in front, e.g. a

motorbikeRa vehicle traveling in front on a different line

G WARNINGPRE-SAFE® Brake does not react:Rto people or animalsRto oncoming vehicles

Rto crossing trafficRin curvesAs a result, PRE-SAFE® Brake cannotintervene in critical situations. There is a riskof an accident. Always pay careful attentionto the traffic situation and be ready to brake.

In order to maintain the appropriate distanceto the vehicle in front and thus prevent acollision, you must apply the brakes yourself.X To activate/deactivate: activate or

deactivate PRE-SAFE® Brake in the on-board computer (Y page 205).The Ä symbol appears in themultifunction display as long as the HOLDfunction is not activated (Y page 172).On vehicles with Parking Guidance, theÄ symbol is displayed whentransmission position P is selected or if youdrive faster than 22 mph (35 km/h).

For PRE-SAFE® Brake to assist you whendriving, the radar sensor system must beswitched on (Y page 208) and operational.Following damage to the front end of thevehicle, have the configuration and operationof the radar sensors checked at a qualifiedspecialist workshop. This also applies tocollisions at low speeds where there is novisible damage to the front of the vehicle.

Theft deterrent locking systems

ImmobilizerThe immobilizer prevents your vehicle frombeing started without the correct SmartKey.When leaving the vehicle, always take theSmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Theengine can be started by anyone with a validSmartKey that is left inside the vehicle.X To activate with the SmartKey: remove

the SmartKey from the ignition lock.X To activate with KEYLESS-GO: switch the

ignition off and open the driver's door.X To deactivate: switch on the ignition.

66 Theft deterrent locking systemsSa

fety

i The immobilizer is always deactivatedwhen you start the engine.In the event that the engine cannot bestarted when the starter battery is fullycharged, the immobilizer may be faulty.Contact an authorized Mercedes-BenzCenter or call 1-800-FOR-MERCedes (inUSA) or 1-800-387-0100 (in Canada).

ATA (Anti-Theft Alarm system)A visual and audible alarm is triggered if thealarm system is armed and you open:Ra doorRthe vehicle with the mechanical keyRthe trunk lidRthe hoodThe alarm is not switched off, even if youclose the open door that has triggered it, forexample.

i If the alarm stays on for more than 30seconds, the emergency call systemmbrace (USA only) or TELE AID (Canadaonly) initiates a call to the CustomerAssistance Center automatically. Theemergency call system initiates the callprovided that:Ryou have subscribed to the mbrace/

TELE AID service.Rthe mbrace/TELE AID service has been

activated properly.Rthe required mobile phone, power supply

and GPS are available.

X To arm: lock the vehicle with the SmartKeyor KEYLESS-GO.Indicator lamp : flashes. The alarmsystem is armed after approximately 15seconds.

X To deactivate: unlock the vehicle with theSmartKey or KEYLESS-GO.

X To stop the alarm using the SmartKey:insert the SmartKey into the ignition lock.The alarm is switched off.

orX Press the % or & button on the

SmartKey.The alarm is switched off.

X To stop the alarm using KEYLESS-GO:grasp the outside door handle. TheSmartKey must be outside the vehicle.The alarm is switched off.

orX Press the Start/Stop button on the

dashboard. The SmartKey must be insidethe vehicle.The alarm is switched off.

Theft deterrent locking systems 67

Safe

ty

Z

Useful information .............................. 70SmartKey ............................................. 70Doors .................................................... 77Trunk .................................................... 80Side windows ...................................... 83Sliding sunroof .................................... 86

69

Open

ing/

clos

ing

Useful information



SmartKey


G WARNINGWhen leaving the vehicle, always remove theSmartKey from the ignition lock. Always takethe SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle.Do not leave children unsupervised in thevehicle, even if they are secured in a childrestraint system, and do not give them accessto an unlocked vehicle. A child's unsupervisedaccess to a vehicle could result in an accidentand/or serious personal injury. They could:Rinjure themselves on vehicle partsRbe seriously or fatally injured by extreme

heat or coldRinjure themselves or have an accident with

vehicle equipment that may still be inoperation even after the SmartKey hasbeen removed from the ignition, such as theseat adjustment, steering wheeladjustment or memory function.

If children open a door, they could causesevere or even fatal injury to other persons; ifthey get out of the vehicle, they could injurethemselves when doing so or be seriously oreven fatally injured by any passing traffic.Do not expose the child restraint system todirect sunlight. The child restraint system'smetal parts, for example, could become very

hot, and a child could be burned on theseparts.

G WARNINGIf a key ring is too heavy or too large, theweight acting on the SmartKey could cause itto turn in the ignition lock or catch on thesteering wheel. This could cause the engineto be switched off suddenly. You could losecontrol of the vehicle and cause an accident.Do not attach any heavy or large key rings tothe SmartKey that is inserted in the ignition.

General notesIf you cannot lock or unlock the vehicle withthe SmartKey, either the battery in theSmartKey is discharged, the SmartKey isfaulty or the starter battery is discharged.X Check the battery in the SmartKey and

replace it if necessary (Y page 74).X Unlock the driver's door using the

mechanical key (Y page 79).X Lock the vehicle using the mechanical key

(Y page 79).X Have the starter battery and the battery

contacts checked at a qualified specialistworkshop.

If the SmartKey is faulty, contact RoadsideAssistance or a qualified specialist workshop.

SmartKey functions

General notesi USA only:

This device complies with Part 15 of theFCC Rules. Operation is subject to thefollowing two conditions:1. This device may not cause harmfulinterference, and2. this device must accept any interferencereceived, including interference that maycause undesired operation.

70 SmartKeyOp

enin

g/cl

osin

g

Any unauthorized modification to thisdevice could void the user’s authority tooperate the equipment.The Product label with FCC ID and ICcertification number can be found in thebattery case of the SmartKey.

i Canada only:This device complies with RSS-210 ofIndustry Canada. Operation is subject tothe following two conditions:1. This device may not cause interference,and2. this device must accept any interferencereceived, including interference that maycause undesired operation of the device.Any unauthorized modification to thisdevice could void the user’s authority tooperate the equipment.The Product label with FCC ID and ICcertification number can be found in thebattery case of the SmartKey.

Locking and unlocking centrallyThe SmartKey centrally locks/unlocks:Rthe doorsRthe trunk lidRthe fuel filler flap

: & Locks the vehicle; F Unlocks the trunk lid= % Unlocks the vehicle

When unlocking, the turn signals flash once.When locking, they flash three times.

When it is dark, the surround lighting alsocomes on if it is activated in the on-boardcomputer (Y page 207).If you activate the acoustic lockingconfirmation function, you will hear thefollowing, depending on the date ofproduction of the vehicle:Ran acoustic signal when locking

orRone acoustic signal when unlocking and

three when locking.The audible signal can be activated anddeactivated using the on-board computer(Y page 208).X To unlock centrally: press the %

button.

If you do not open the vehicle withinapproximately 40 seconds of unlocking:Rthe vehicle is locked again.Rthe theft deterrent locking system is armed

again.X To lock centrally: press the & button.

KEYLESS-GO

General notesi USA only:

This device complies with Part 15 of theFCC Rules. Operation is subject to thefollowing two conditions:1. This device may not cause harmfulinterference, and2. this device must accept any interferencereceived, including interference that maycause undesired operation.Any unauthorized modification to thisdevice could void the user’s authority tooperate the equipment.The Product label with FCC ID and ICcertification number can be found in thebattery case of the SmartKey.

i Canada only:

SmartKey 71

Open

ing/

clos

ing

Z

This device complies with RSS-210 ofIndustry Canada. Operation is subject tothe following two conditions:1. This device may not cause harmfulinterference, and2. this device must accept any interferencereceived, including interference that maycause undesired operation.Any unauthorized modification to thisdevice could void the user’s authority tooperate the equipment.The Product label with FCC ID and ICcertification number can be found in thebattery case of the SmartKey.

Important notes on the use of KEYLESS-GORThe KEYLESS-GO key can be used like a

conventional key.RYou can combine KEYLESS-GO functions

with those of a conventional key, e.g.unlock with KEYLESS-GO and lock with the& button.RAlways carry your KEYLESS-GO key on your

person.RDo not keep the KEYLESS-GO key together

with:- electronic devices, e.g. a mobile phone

or another key- metallic objects, e.g. coins or metal foil.This can affect the functionality ofKEYLESS-GO.RWhen locking and unlocking using

KEYLESS-GO, the distance between theSmartKey and the corresponding doorhandle must not exceed 3 ft (1 m).RIf the KEYLESS-GO key is removed from the

vehicle, it is possible that the system maynot recognize the SmartKey. The vehicle

can then not be locked or started usingKEYLESS-GO.RIf the KEYLESS-GO key has been removed

from the vehicle, e.g. if a passenger leavesthe vehicle with a KEYLESS-GO key:- if the start/stop button is pressed or if

an attempt is made to lock the vehiclewith the locking button on the outer doorhandle, the Key Not Detected messageappears in the multifunction display

- when the engine is running, the red Key Not Detected message appears in themultifunction display as you pull away.Find the KEYLESS-GO key and change itsposition in the vehicle. Carry theKEYLESS-GO key in your shirt pocket, forexample.

RIf you have started the engine with theStart/Stop button, you can switch it offagain by:- pressing the Start/Stop button again- inserting the KEYLESS-GO key into the

ignition lock if the vehicle is stationaryand the automatic transmission is in parkposition P.

RYou could unlock the vehicle by mistake ifthe distance between the KEYLESS-GO keyand the vehicle is less than 3 ft (1 m) and:- an exterior door handle is hit by a water

jetor

- you clean an exterior door handle.RBear in mind that the engine can be started

by any of the vehicle occupants if there isa KEYLESS-GO key in the vehicle.

72 SmartKeyOp

enin

g/cl

osin

g

X To unlock the vehicle: touch the innersurface of the door handle.

X To lock the vehicle: touch sensorsurface :.

X Convenience closing feature: touchrecessed sensor surface ; for anextended period (Y page 85).

If you pull on the handle of the trunk lid, onlythe trunk of the vehicle is unlocked.

Changing the settings of the lockingsystem

You can change the setting of the lockingsystem in such a way that only the driver'sdoor and the fuel filler flap are unlocked. Thisis useful if you frequently travel on your own.X To change the setting: press and hold

down the % and & buttonssimultaneously for approximately sixseconds until the battery check lamp(Y page 74) flashes twice.

i If the setting of the locking system ischanged within the signal range of thevehicle, pressing the & or % buttonlocks or unlocks the vehicle.

The SmartKey now functions as follows:X To unlock the driver's door: press the% button once.

X To unlock centrally: press the %button twice.

X To lock centrally: press the & button.

The KEYLESS-GO function is changed asfollows:X To unlock the driver's door: touch the

inner surface of the door handle on thedriver's door.

X To unlock centrally: touch the innersurface of the door handle on the front-passenger door or the rear door.

X To lock centrally: touch the outer sensorsurface on one of the door handles.

Restoring the factory settingsX Press the % and & buttons

simultaneously for approximately sixseconds until the battery check lampflashes twice.

Mechanical key

General notesIf the vehicle can no longer be locked orunlocked with the SmartKey, use themechanical key.If you use the mechanical key to unlock andopen the driver's door or the trunk lid, theanti-theft alarm system will be triggered(Y page 67).There are several ways to turn off the alarm:X To turn the alarm off with the

SmartKey: press the % or & buttonon the SmartKey.

orX Insert the SmartKey into the ignition lock.orX To deactivate the alarm with KEYLESS-

GO: press the Start/Stop button in theignition lock. The SmartKey must be in thevehicle.

orX Lock or unlock the vehicle using KEYLESS-

GO. The SmartKey must be outside thevehicle.

If you unlock the vehicle using the mechanicalkey, the fuel filler flap will not be unlockedautomatically.X To unlock the fuel filler flap: insert the

SmartKey in the ignition lock.

SmartKey 73

Open

ing/

clos

ing

Z

Removing the mechanical key

X Push release catch : in the direction ofthe arrow and at the same time, removemechanical key ; from the SmartKey.

SmartKey battery

Important safety notesHave the batteries changed at a qualifiedspecialist workshop.

G WARNINGBatteries contain toxic substances.Swallowing batteries can lead to serioushealth issues or death.Keep batteries out of the reach of children.Seek medical attention immediately if abattery is swallowed.

G WARNINGThe SmartKey batteries contain perchloratematerial, which may require special handlingand regard for the environment. Observegovernment disposal guidelines. Californiaresidents, see www.dtsc.ca.gov/HazardousWaste/Perchlorate/index.cfm.

Checking the battery

X Press the & or % button.The battery is working properly if batterycheck lamp : lights up briefly

If battery check lamp : does not light upbriefly during the test, the battery isdischarged.X Changing the battery (Y page 74)

i You can obtain the battery at a qualifiedspecialist workshop.

i If the SmartKey battery is checked withinthe signal reception range of the vehicle,pressing the & or % button locks orunlocks the vehicle.

Changing the batteryYou require a CR 2025 3 V cell battery.X Take the mechanical key out of the

SmartKey (Y page 73).

X Press mechanical key ; into the openingin the SmartKey in the direction of the

74 SmartKeyOp

enin

g/cl

osin

g

arrow until battery tray cover : opens.When doing so, do not hold cover : shut.

X Remove battery tray cover :.

X Repeatedly tap the SmartKey against yourpalm until battery = falls out.

X Insert the new battery with the positiveterminal facing upwards. Use a lint-freecloth to do so.

X Make sure that the surface of the battery isfree from lint, grease and all other forms ofcontamination.

X Insert the front tabs of battery traycover : and then press to close it.

X Insert the mechanical key into theSmartKey.

X Check the function of all SmartKey buttonson the vehicle.

SmartKey 75

Open

ing/

clos

ing

Z

Problems with the SmartKey


You cannot lock orunlock the vehicleusing the SmartKey.

The SmartKey battery is discharged or nearly discharged.X Try again to lock/unlock the vehicle using the remote control

function of the SmartKey. Point the tip of the SmartKey at thedriver's door handle from close range and press the %/& button.

If this does not work:X Check the SmartKey battery (Y page 74) and replace it if

necessary (Y page 74).X Lock (Y page 79) or unlock (Y page 79) the vehicle using

the mechanical key.

The SmartKey is faulty.X Lock (Y page 79) or unlock (Y page 79) the vehicle using

the mechanical key.X Have the SmartKey checked at a qualified specialist workshop.

You can no longer lockor unlock the vehicleusing KEYLESS-GO.

There is interference from a powerful source of radio waves.X Lock/unlock the vehicle using the remote control function of

the SmartKey. Point the tip of the SmartKey at the driver's doorhandle from close range and press the %/& button.

There is a malfunction with KEYLESS-GO.X Lock/unlock the vehicle using the remote control function of

the SmartKey. Point the tip of the SmartKey at the driver's doorhandle from close range and press the %/& button.

X Have KEYLESS-GO checked at a qualified specialist workshop.If this does not work:X Check the SmartKey battery (Y page 74) and replace it if

necessary (Y page 74).X Lock (Y page 79) or unlock (Y page 79) the vehicle using

the mechanical key.

You have lost aSmartKey.

X Have the SmartKey deactivated at a qualified specialistworkshop.

X Report the loss immediately to the vehicle insurers.X If necessary, have the locks changed as well.

You have lost themechanical key.

X Report the loss immediately to the vehicle insurers.X If necessary, have the locks changed as well.

76 SmartKeyOp

enin

g/cl

osin

g


The engine cannot bestarted using theSmartKey.

The on-board voltage is too low.X Switch off non-essential consumers, e.g. seat heating or interior

lighting, and try to start the engine again.If this does not work:X Check the starter battery and charge it if necessary

(Y page 298).orX Jump-start the vehicle (Y page 301).orX Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

The engine cannot bestarted using theSmartKey.

The steering lock is mechanically blocked.X Remove the SmartKey and reinsert it into the ignition lock. While

doing this, turn the steering wheel in both directions.

The engine cannot bestarted using KEYLESS-GO. The SmartKey is inthe vehicle.

A door is open. Therefore, the SmartKey cannot be detected aseasily.X Close the door and try to start the vehicle again.

There is interference from a powerful source of radio waves.X Start your vehicle with the SmartKey in the ignition lock.

Doors




vehicle equipment that may still be inoperation even after the SmartKey has

been removed from the ignition, such as theseat adjustment, steering wheeladjustment or memory function.

If children open a door, they could causesevere or even fatal injury to other persons; ifthey get out of the vehicle, they could injurethemselves when doing so or be seriously oreven fatally injured by any passing traffic.Do not expose the child restraint system todirect sunlight. The child restraint system'smetal parts, for example, could become veryhot, and a child could be burned on theseparts.

G WARNINGDo not carry heavy or hard objects in thepassenger compartment or trunk unless theyare firmly secured in place.

Doors 77

Open

ing/

clos

ing

Z

Unsecured or improperly positioned cargoincreases a child's risk of injury in the eventofRstrong braking maneuversRsudden changes of directionRan accident

Unlocking and opening doors frominside

You can open a door from inside the vehicleeven if it has been locked. You can only openthe rear doors from inside the vehicle if theyare not secured by the child-proof locks(Y page 57).Only open the door when the traffic situationpermits.If the vehicle was previously locked with theSmartKey or with KEYLESS-GO, opening thevehicle from the inside will activate the anti-theft alarm system. Switch off the alarm(Y page 67).

X Pull door handle ;.If the door is locked, locking knob : popsup. The door is unlocked and can beopened.

Centrally locking and unlocking thevehicle from the inside

You can centrally lock or unlock the vehiclefrom the inside.

The central locking/unlocking button doesnot lock or unlock the fuel filler flap.

i You cannot unlock the vehicle centrallyfrom the inside if the vehicle has beenlocked with the SmartKey or KEYLESS-GO.

i It is only possible to lock the vehiclecentrally if the front-passenger door isclosed.

X To unlock: press button :.X To lock: press button ;.

If the front-passenger door is closed, thevehicle locks.

You can open a front door from inside thevehicle even if it has been locked. Only openthe door when the traffic situation permits.If the vehicle has been locked with the centrallocking button:Rand the SmartKey is set to its factory

setting, the entire vehicle is unlocked if afront door is opened from the insideRand the SmartKey is set to an individual

setting, only the front door that is openedfrom inside the vehicle is unlocked.

If the vehicle has been locked centrally withthe SmartKey or with KEYLESS-GO, it is notunlocked when the release button for thecentral locking is used.

Automatic locking featureThe vehicle locks automatically when theignition is switched on and the wheels of the

78 DoorsOp

enin

g/cl

osin

g

vehicle are turning at a speed of more than9 mph (15 km/h).You could therefore be locked out when:Rthe vehicle is being pushed.Rthe vehicle is being towed.Rthe vehicle is being tested on a

dynamometer.

X To deactivate: press and hold button :for about five seconds until a tone sounds.

X To activate: press and hold button ; forabout five seconds until a tone sounds.

i If you press one of the two buttons anddo not hear a tone, the relevant setting hasalready been selected.

You can also switch the automatic lockingfunction on and off using the on-boardcomputer (Y page 208).

Unlocking the driver's door(mechanical key)

If the vehicle can no longer be unlocked withthe SmartKey, use the mechanical key.If you use the mechanical key to unlock andopen the driver's door, the anti-theft alarmsystem will be triggered (Y page 67).X Take the mechanical key out of the

SmartKey (Y page 73).X Insert the mechanical key into the lock of

the driver's door as far as it will go.

X Turn the mechanical key counterclockwiseto position 1.The door is unlocked.

X Turn the mechanical key back and removeit.


Locking the vehicle (mechanical key)If the vehicle can no longer be locked with theSmartKey, use the mechanical key.X Open the driver's door.X Close the front-passenger door, the rear

doors and the trunk lid.X Press the locking button (Y page 78).X Check whether the locking knobs on the

front-passenger door and the rear doorsare still visible. Press down the lockingknobs by hand, if necessary.

X Close the driver's door.X Take the mechanical key out of the

SmartKey (Y page 73).X Insert the mechanical key into the lock of

the driver's door as far as it will go.

Doors 79

Open

ing/

clos

ing

Z

X Turn the mechanical key clockwise as faras it will go to position 1.

X Turn the mechanical key back and removeit.

X Make sure that the doors and the trunk lidare locked.


i If you lock the vehicle as described above,the fuel filler flap is not locked. The anti-theft alarm system is not armed.

Trunk

Important safety notesDo not leave the SmartKey in the trunk. Youcould otherwise lock yourself out.



vehicle equipment that may still be inoperation even after the SmartKey has

been removed from the ignition, such as theseat adjustment, steering wheeladjustment or memory function.

If children open a door, they could causesevere or even fatal injury to other persons; ifthey get out of the vehicle, they could injurethemselves when doing so or be seriously oreven fatally injured by any passing traffic.Do not expose the child restraint system todirect sunlight. The child restraint system'smetal parts, for example, could become veryhot, and a child could be burned on theseparts.

G WARNINGDo not carry heavy or hard objects in thepassenger compartment or trunk unless theyare firmly secured in place.Unsecured or improperly positioned cargoincreases a child's risk of injury in the eventofRstrong braking maneuversRsudden changes of directionRan accident

G WARNINGMake sure the trunk lid is closed when theengine is running and while driving. Amongother dangers, deadly carbon monoxide (CO)gases may enter the vehicle interior resultingin unconsciousness and death.

! The trunk lid swings upwards whenopened. Therefore, make sure that there issufficient clearance above the trunk lid.

To open the trunk lid completely, a minimumclearance of 5.90 ft (1.80 m) above theground is necessary.The trunk lid can be:Ropened and closed manually from outsideRopened automatically from outsideRopened automatically from insideRlocked separately

80 TrunkOp

enin

g/cl

osin

g

Runlocked with the mechanical keyRopened with the emergency release button

Opening and closing manually

OpeningX Press the % button on the SmartKey.

X Pull handle :.X Raise the trunk lid.

Closing

G WARNINGTo prevent possible personal injury, alwayskeep hands and fingers away from the trunkopening when closing the trunk lid. Beespecially careful when small children arearound.

X Pull the trunk lid down using recess :.X If necessary, lock the vehicle with

the & button on the SmartKey

(Y page 70) or with KEYLESS-GO(Y page 71).

i If a KEYLESS-GO key is detected in thetrunk, the trunk lid cannot be locked andthen opens again.

Opening automatically from outside


G WARNINGMake sure the trunk lid is closed when theengine is running and while driving. Amongother dangers, deadly carbon monoxide (CO)gases may enter the vehicle interior resultingin unconsciousness and death.

! The trunk lid swings upwards whenopened. Therefore, make sure that there issufficient clearance above the trunk lid.

To open the trunk lid completely, a minimumclearance of 5.90 ft (1.80 m) above theground is necessary.

OpeningYou can open the trunk lid automaticallyusing the SmartKey or the handle in the trunklid.X Press and hold the F button on the

SmartKey until the trunk lid opens.orX When the trunk is unlocked, pull the trunk

lid handle and let it go again immediately.

Closing

Opening automatically from theinside

G WARNINGMake sure the trunk lid is closed when theengine is running and while driving. Amongother dangers, deadly carbon monoxide (CO)

Trunk 81

Open

ing/

clos

ing

Z

gases may enter the vehicle interior resultingin unconsciousness and death.

You can open the trunk lid from the driver'sseat when the vehicle is stationary andunlocked.

X To open: press the upper section of remoteoperating switch for trunk lid : until thetrunk lid opens.

Locking the trunk separatelyYou can lock the trunk separately. If you thenunlock the vehicle centrally, the trunkremains locked and cannot be opened.X Close the trunk lid.X Take the mechanical key out of the

SmartKey (Y page 73).

X Insert the mechanical key into the trunk lidlock as far as the stop.

X Turn the mechanical key clockwise fromposition 1 to position 2.

X Remove the mechanical key.X Insert the mechanical key into the

SmartKey.

Unlocking the trunk (mechanical key)! The trunk lid swings upwards when

opened. Therefore, make sure that there issufficient clearance above the trunk lid.

If the trunk cannot be unlocked with theSmartKey or KEYLESS-GO, use themechanical key.If you use the mechanical key to unlock andopen the trunk lid, the anti-theft alarm systemwill be triggered (Y page 67).X Take the mechanical key out of the

SmartKey (Y page 73).X Insert the mechanical key into the trunk lid

lock as far as the stop.

X Turn the mechanical key counter-clockwisefrom position 1 as far as it will go toposition 2.The trunk is unlocked.

X Turn the mechanical key back to position1 and remove it.


Trunk emergency releaseYou can open the trunk lid from inside thevehicle with the emergency release button.

82 TrunkOp

enin

g/cl

osin

g

X Briefly press emergency releasebutton :.The trunk lid unlocks and opens.

The trunk lid can be unlocked and openedwith the trunk lid emergency release whenthe vehicle is stationary or while driving.Trunk lid emergency release light:Remergency release button : flashes for

30 minutes after the trunk lid is opened.Remergency release button : flashes for

60 minutes after the trunk lid is closed.The trunk lid emergency release does notopen the trunk lid if the battery isdisconnected or discharged.

Side windows


G WARNINGWhen opening or closing the door windows,make sure that there is no danger of anyonebeing harmed by the opening/closingprocedure.The door windows are equipped withautomatic operation and the anti-entrapmentfeature. If in automatic mode a door windowencounters an obstruction that blocks itspath, the anti-entrapment feature will stop thedoor window and open it slightly.The door windows operate differently whenthe switch is pulled. See the "Problems withdoor windows" section for details.

The closing of the door windows can beimmediately halted by releasing the switch or,if the switch was pulled past the resistancepoint and released, by either pressing orpulling the respective switch.If a door window encounters an obstructionthat blocks its path in a circumstance whereyou are closing the windows by pressing andholding the & button on the SmartKey orby pressing and holding the lock button(vehicles with KEYLESS-GO) on an outsidedoor handle, the anti-entrapment feature willnot operate.Activate the override switch when childrenare riding in the back seats of the vehicle. Thechildren may otherwise injure themselves,e.g. by becoming trapped in the door windowopening.

G WARNINGDo not keep any part of your body up againstthe window pane when opening a window. Thedownward motion of the pane may pull thatpart of your body down between the windowpane and the door frame and trap it there. Ifthere is a risk of entrapment, release theswitch and pull it to close the window.

Opening and closing the sidewindows

: Front left; Front right= Rear right? Rear left

Side windows 83

Open

ing/

clos

ing

Z

The switches for all side windows are locatedon the driver's door. There is also a switch oneach door for the corresponding side window.The switches on the driver's door takeprecedence.

i The side windows cannot be operatedfrom the rear when the override feature forthe side windows is activated (Y page 57).

X Turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in theignition lock.

X To open: press the corresponding switch.X To close: pull the corresponding switch.i If you press the switch beyond the point

of resistance, an automatic opening/closing process is started in thecorresponding direction. You can stopautomatic operation by operating theswitch again.

i You can continue to operate the sidewindows after you switch off the engine orremove the SmartKey. This function isavailable for up to five minutes or until thedriver's or front-passenger door is opened.

Convenience opening featureYou can ventilate the vehicle before you startdriving. To do this, the key is used to carry outthe following functions simultaneously:Runlock the vehicleRopen the side windowsRopen the sliding sunroof or the panorama

roof with power tilt/sliding panel and theroller sunblinds

i The convenience opening feature canonly be operated using the SmartKey. TheSmartKey must be close to the driver'sdoor handle.

X Point the tip of the SmartKey at the driver'sdoor handle.

X Press and hold the % button until theside windows and the sliding sunroof or the

panorama roof with power tilt/slidingpanel are in the desired position.

If the roller sunblinds of the panorama roofwith power tilt/sliding panel are closed, theroller sunblinds are opened first.X Press and hold the % button again until

the panorama roof with power tilt/slidingpanel is in the desired position.

X To interrupt convenience opening:release the % button.

Convenience closing

General notesWhen you lock the vehicle, you cansimultaneously:Rclose the side windowsRclose the sliding sunroof or the panorama

roof with power tilt/sliding panelOn vehicles with a panorama roof with powertilt/sliding panel, you can then close theroller sunblinds.

G WARNINGWhen closing the door windows and thesliding sunroof or panorama roof with powertilt/sliding panel, make sure that there is nodanger of anyone being harmed by the closingprocedure.If potential danger exists, proceed as follows:RRelease the & button to stop the closing

procedure. To open, press and hold the% button. To continue the closingprocedure after making sure that there isno danger of anyone being harmed by theclosing procedure, press and hold the& button.

Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO:RRelease the sensor surface on the outside

door handle to stop the closing procedure.RImmediately pull on the same outside door

handle and hold firmly. The door windowsand the sliding sunroof or panorama roof

84 Side windowsOp

enin

g/cl

osin

g

with power tilt/sliding panel will open foras long as the door handle is held but thedoor is not opened.

Using the SmartKeyi The SmartKey must be close to the

driver's door handle.X Point the tip of the SmartKey at the driver's

door handle.X Press and hold the & button until the

side windows and the sliding sunroof or thepanorama roof with power tilt/slidingpanel are fully closed.

X Make sure that all the side windows and thesliding sunroof or panorama roof withpower tilt/sliding panel are closed.

On vehicles with a panorama roof with powertilt/sliding panel:X Press and hold the & button again until

the roller sunblinds of the panorama roofwith power tilt/sliding panel close.

X To interrupt convenience closing:release the & button.

Using KEYLESS-GOThe KEYLESS-GO key must be outside thevehicle. All the doors must be closed.

X Touch recessed sensor surface : on thedoor handle until the side windows and the

sliding sunroof or the panorama roof withpower tilt/sliding panel are fully closed.

i Make sure you only touch recessedsensor surface :.

X Make sure that all the side windows and thesliding sunroof or panorama roof withpower tilt/sliding panel are closed.

On vehicles with a panorama roof with powertilt/sliding panel:X Touch recessed sensor surface : on the

door handle again until the roller sunblindsof the panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel close.

X To interrupt convenience closing:release recessed sensor surface : on thedoor handle.

Resetting the side windowsYou must reset each side window if a sidewindow can no longer be closed fully.X Close all the doors.X Turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in the

ignition lock.X Pull the corresponding switch on the door

control panel until the side window iscompletely closed. (Y page 83)

X Hold the switch for an additional second.

If the side window opens again slightly:X Immediately pull the corresponding switch

on the door control panel until the sidewindow is completely closed (Y page 83).

X Hold the switch for an additional second.X If the corresponding side window remains

closed after the button has been released,the side window has been reset correctly.If this is not the case, repeat the stepsabove again.

Side windows 85

Open

ing/

clos

ing

Z

Problems with the side windowsProblem: a side window cannot be closed because it is blocked by objects, e.g. leaves in the window guide.X Remove the objects.X Close the side window.Problem: a side window cannot be closed and you cannot see the cause.

G WARNINGClosing the side windows with increased forceor without the anti-entrapment feature couldlead to serious or even fatal injury. Make surethat nobody can become trapped whenclosing the side windows.

If a side window is obstructed during closingand reopens again slightly:X Immediately after the window blocks, pull

the corresponding switch again until theside window has closed.The side window is closed with increasedforce.

If a side window is obstructed again duringclosing and reopens again slightly:X Immediately after the window blocks, pull

the corresponding switch again until theside window has closed.The side window is closed without the anti-entrapment feature.

G WARNINGPulling and holding the switch to close thedoor window immediately after it had beenblocked two times will cause the door windowto close without the anti-entrapment featurefor as long as you hold the switch.

Sliding sunroof

Important safety notesYour vehicle may be equipped with a slidingsunroof or a panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel. In the following section, the

term "sliding sunroof" refers to both types ofsliding sunroof.

G WARNINGWhen opening or closing the sliding sunroof,make sure that there is no danger of anyonebeing harmed by the opening/closingprocedure.The sliding sunroof is equipped withautomatic operation and the anti-entrapmentfeature. If the movement of the sliding sunroofis blocked during the closing procedure, thesliding sunroof will stop and open slightly.The sliding sunroof operates differently whenthe sliding sunroof switch is pressed and held.See the "Problems with the sliding sunroof"section for more details.The opening/closing procedure of the slidingsunroof can be immediately halted byreleasing the sliding sunroof switch or, if thesliding sunroof switch was moved past theresistance point and released, by moving thesliding sunroof switch in any direction.

G WARNINGThe sliding sunroof is made out of glass. In theevent of an accident, the glass may shatter.This may result in an opening in the roof.In a vehicle rollover, occupants not wearingtheir seat belts or not wearing them properlymay be thrown out of the opening. Such anopening also presents a potential for injury foroccupants wearing their seat belts properly,as entire body parts or portions of them mayprotrude from the passenger compartment.

! Only open the sliding sunroof if it is freeof snow and ice. Otherwise, malfunctionsmay occur.Do not allow anything to protrude from thesliding sunroof. Otherwise, the seals couldbe damaged.

! The weather can change abruptly. It couldstart to rain or snow. Make sure that thesliding sunroof is closed when you leave thevehicle. The vehicle electronics can be

86 Sliding sunroofOp

enin

g/cl

osin

g

damaged if water enters the vehicleinterior.

i Resonance noises can occur in additionto the usual airflow noises when the slidingsunroof is open. They are caused by minorpressure fluctuations in the vehicle interior.Change the position of the sliding sunroofor open a side window slightly to reduce oreliminate these noises.

Operating the sliding sunroof

Opening and closingi You can continue to operate the sliding

sunroof after switching off the engine orremoving the SmartKey from the ignitionlock. This function is available for up to fiveminutes or until the driver's or front-passenger door is opened.

Overhead control panel: To raise; To open= To close/lowerX Turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in the

ignition lock.X Press or pull the 3 switch in the

corresponding direction.i If you press the 3 switch beyond the

point of resistance, an automatic opening/closing process is started in thecorresponding direction. You can stopautomatic operation by operating theswitch again.

When opening and raising the roof,automatic operation is only available if thesliding sunroof is in the closed position.

The sun protection cover automatically opensalong with the sliding sunroof. You can openor close the sun protection cover manuallywhen the sliding sunroof is raised or closed.

ResettingReset the sliding sunroof if it does not movesmoothly.X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the

ignition lock.X Raise the sliding sunroof fully at the rear

(Y page 87).X Keep the 3 switch pressed for another

second.X Make sure that the sliding sunroof can be

fully opened and closed again (Y page 87).X If this is not the case, repeat the steps

above again.

! If the sliding sunroof still cannot beopened or closed fully after resetting,contact a qualified specialist workshop.

Operating the panorama roof withpower tilt/sliding panel

Opening and closing

Overhead control panel: To raise; To open= To close/lower

Sliding sunroof 87

Open

ing/

clos

ing

Z

The panorama roof with power tilt/slidingpanel can only be operated when the rollersunblind is open.X Turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in the

ignition lock.X Push or pull the 3 switch in the


point of resistance, an automatic opening/closing process is started in thecorresponding direction. You can stopautomatic operation by operating theswitch again.When raising the roof, automatic operationis only available if the panorama roof withpower tilt/sliding panel is in the closedposition.

Operating the sunblinds for thepanorama roof with power tilt/slidingpanel

General notesThe roller sunblinds shield the vehicle interiorfrom sunlight. The two roller sunblinds canonly be opened and closed together when thepanorama roof with power tilt/sliding panelis closed.

G WARNINGWhen opening or closing the roller sunblinds,make sure that no one can be injured.The roller sunblinds have automatic operationand an anti-entrapment feature. If the rollersunblinds are blocked during the closingprocedure, the anti-entrapment feature stopsthe roller sunblinds and they open againslightly.The opening and closing of the rollersunblinds can be terminated immediately byreleasing the button. In automatic operation,press the button briefly in any direction tostop the roller sunblinds.

Opening and closing

Overhead control panel: To open; To open= To closeX Turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in the

ignition lock.X Press or pull the 3 switch in the


point of resistance, an automatic opening/closing process is started in thecorresponding direction. You can stopautomatic operation by operating theswitch again.

Resetting the panorama roof withpower tilt/sliding panel and the rollersunblindsReset the panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel and the roller sunblinds if thepanorama roof with power tilt/sliding panelor the roller sunblinds do not move smoothly.X Turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in the

ignition lock.X Press the 3 switch to the point of

resistance in the direction of arrow ; andhold it until the panorama roof with powertilt/sliding panel has opened about 4 in(10 cm).

X Pull the 3 switch repeatedly to the pointof resistance in the direction of arrow =

88 Sliding sunroofOp

enin

g/cl

osin

g

until the panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel is fully closed.

X Keep the 3 switch pulled for anadditional second.

X Press the 3 switch to the point ofresistance in the direction of arrow ; andhold it until the sunblinds have openedabout 4 in (10 cm).

X Pull the 3 switch repeatedly to the pointof resistance in the direction of arrow =until the roller sunblinds are fully closed.

X Keep the 3 switch pulled for anadditional second.

X Make sure that the panorama roof withpower tilt/sliding panel and the rollersunblinds can be fully opened and closedagain (Y page 87).

X If this is not the case, repeat the stepsabove again.

! If the panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel and the roller sunblind cannotbe fully opened or closed after resetting,contact a qualified specialist workshop.

Problems with the sliding sunroofYour vehicle may be equipped with a slidingsunroof or a panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel. In the following section, theterm "sliding sunroof" refers to both types ofsliding sunroof.Problem: the sunroof cannot be closed and you cannot see the cause.

G WARNINGYou could be severely or even fatally injuredwhen closing the sliding sunroof withincreased closing force or if the anti-entrapment feature is deactivated. Make surethat nobody can become trapped whenclosing the sliding sunroof.

If the sliding sunroof is obstructed duringclosing and reopens again slightly:X Immediately after the sliding sunroof

blocks, pull the 3 switch in theoverhead control panel down to the pointof resistance and hold it until the slidingsunroof is closed.The sliding sunroof is closed with increasedforce.

If the sliding sunroof is obstructed againduring closing and reopens again slightly:X Immediately after the sliding sunroof

blocks, pull the 3 switch in theoverhead control panel down to the pointof resistance and hold it until the slidingsunroof is closed.The sliding sunroof is closed without theanti-entrapment feature.

G WARNINGPressing and holding the sliding sunroofswitch to close the sliding sunroofimmediately after it had been blocked twotimes will cause the sliding sunroof to closewithout the anti-entrapment feature for aslong as you hold the switch.

! If the sliding sunroof still cannot beopened or closed as a result of amalfunction, contact a qualified specialistworkshop.

Sliding sunroof 89

Open

ing/

clos

ing

Z

Useful information .............................. 92Correct driver's seat position ............ 92Seats .................................................... 93Steering wheel .................................... 99Mirrors ............................................... 101Memory function .............................. 103

91

Seat

s, s

teer

ing

whe

el a

nd m

irror

s

Useful information



Correct driver's seat position

Observe the safety guidelines on seatadjustment (Y page 93).X Check whether you have adjusted seat =

properly.Manual and electrical seat adjustment(Y page 94)Electrical seat adjustment (Y page 94)When adjusting the seat, make sure:Ryou are as far away from the driver's air

bag as possible.Ryou are sitting in a normal upright

position.

Ryou can fasten the seat belt properly.Ryou have moved the backrest to an

almost vertical position.Ryou have set the seat cushion angle so

that your thighs are gently supported.Ryou can depress the pedals properly.

X Check whether the head restraint isadjusted properly (Y page 95).When doing so, make sure that you haveadjusted the head restraint so that the backof your head is supported at eye level bythe center of the head restraint.

Observe the safety guidelines on steeringwheel adjustment (Y page 99).X Check whether steering wheel : is

adjusted properly.Adjusting the steering wheelmanually(Y page 99)Adjusting the steering wheel electrically(Y page 100)When adjusting the steering wheel, makesure:Ryou can hold the steering wheel with your

arms slightly bent.Ryou can move your legs freely.Ryou can see all the displays in the

instrument cluster clearly.Observe the safety guidelines for seat belts(Y page 48).X Check whether you have fastened seat

belt ; properly (Y page 50).The seat belt should:Rfit snugly across your bodyRbe routed across the middle of your

shoulderRbe routed in your pelvic area across the

hip jointsX Before starting off, adjust the rear-view

mirror and the exterior mirrors

92 Correct driver's seat positionSe

ats,

ste

erin

g w

heel

and

mirr

ors

(Y page 101) in such a way that you havea good view of road and traffic conditions.

X Vehicles with a memory function: savethe seat, steering wheel and exterior mirrorsettings (Y page 103).

Seats


G WARNINGIn order to avoid possible loss of vehiclecontrol, all seat, head restraint, steeringwheel and rear view mirror adjustments, aswell as fastening of seat belts, must be donebefore setting the vehicle in motion.

G WARNINGDo not adjust the driver's seat while driving.Adjusting the seat while driving could causethe driver to lose control of the vehicle.Never travel in a moving vehicle with the seatbackrest in an excessively reclined position asthis can be dangerous. You could slide underthe seat belt in a collision. If you slide underit, the seat belt would apply force at theabdomen or neck. This could cause serious orfatal injuries. The seat backrest and seat beltsprovide the best restraint when the wearer isin a position that is as upright as possible andseat belts are properly positioned on thebody.

G WARNINGYour seat belt must be adjusted so that youcan correctly fasten your seat belt.Observe the following points:Radjust the seat backrest until your arms are

slightly angled when holding the steeringwheel.Radjust the seat to a comfortable seating

position that still allows you to reach theaccelerator/brake pedal safely. Theposition should be as far back as possible

with the driver still able to operate thecontrols properly.Radjust the head restraint so that it is as

close to the head as possible and the centerof the head restraint supports the back ofthe head at eye level.Rnever place hands under the seat or near

any moving parts while a seat is beingadjusted.

Failure to do so could result in an accidentand/or serious personal injury.

G WARNINGThe electrically adjustable seats can beoperated at any time. Therefore, do not leavechildren unattended in the vehicle, or withaccess to an unlocked vehicle. A child'sunsupervised access to a vehicle could resultin an accident and/or serious personal injury.

G WARNINGAccording to accident statistics, children aresafer when properly restrained in the rearseating positions than in the front seatingposition. Thus, we strongly recommend thatchildren be placed in the rear seats wheneverpossible. Regardless of seating position,children 12 years old and under must beseated and properly secured in anappropriately sized infant restraint, toddlerrestraint, or booster seat recommended forthe size and weight of the child. For additionalinformation, see "Children in the vehicle".A child's risk of serious or fatal injuries issignificantly increased if the child restraintsare not properly secured in the vehicle and/or the child is not properly secured in the childrestraint.

G WARNINGFor your protection, drive only with properlypositioned head restraints.Adjust the head restraint so that it is as closeto the head as possible and the center of thehead restraint supports the back of the headat eye level. This will reduce the potential for

Seats 93

Seat

s, s

teer

ing

whe

el a

nd m

irror

s

Z

injury to the head and neck in the event of anaccident or similar situation.Do not drive the vehicle without the seat headrestraints. Head restraints are intended tohelp reduce injuries during an accident.

! To avoid damage to the seats and the seatheating, observe the following information:Rkeep liquids from spilling on the seats. If

liquid is spilled on the seats, dry them assoon as possible.Rif the seat covers are damp or wet, do not

switch on the seat heating. The seatheating should also not be used to drythe seats.Rclean the seat covers as recommended;

see the "Interior care" section.Rdo not transport heavy loads on the

seats. Do not place sharp objects on theseat cushions, e.g. knives, nails or tools.The seats should only be occupied bypassengers, if possible.Rwhen the seat heating is in operation, do

not cover the seats with insulatingmaterials, e.g. blankets, coats, bags,seat covers, child seats or booster seats.

! When you move the seats, make sure thatthere are no objects in the footwell orbehind the seats. Otherwise, you coulddamage the seats and the objects.

i The head restraints in the front seats areequipped with the NECK-PRO system(Y page 47). For this reason, it is notpossible to remove the head restraintsfrom the front seats.Vehicles without the through-loadingfeature: the head restraints cannot beremoved from the rear compartment seats.Please contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center for more information.

i Other topics:RRear bench seat through-loading feature

(Y page 256)

Adjusting the seats manually andelectrically

: Backrest angle; Seat height= Seat cushion angle? Seat fore-and-aft adjustment

i AMG vehicles are equipped with a seatwith an integrated head restraint. It istherefore not possible to set the height andangle of the head restraint.

i Adjust the seat cushion angle so that yourthighs are lightly supported.

Seat fore-and-aft adjustmentX Lift handle ? and slide the seat forwards

or backwards.X Release lever ? again.

Make sure that you hear the seat engage inposition.

Seat cushion angleX Turn handwheel = in the desired direction.

Adjusting the seats electricallyi Vehicles without Memory function: the

seats can be adjusted within three minutesof a front door being opened.

94 SeatsSe

ats,

ste

erin

g w

heel

and

mirr

ors

The time period starts over again if, withinthese three minutes, you:Ropen or close a front doorRinsert the SmartKey into the ignition lock

or remove it from the ignition lockRswitch the ignition on or offIf the SmartKey is in position 2 in theignition lock, the seats can be adjusted atany time.

Depending on the equipment, the seatadjustment buttons are either located on theside of the seat or on the door control panel.

: Head restraint height; Seat cushion angle= Seat height? Seat fore-and-aft adjustmentA Backrest angle

: Seat cushion angle; Seat height= Seat fore-and-aft adjustment? Backrest angle

i You can store the seat settings using thememory function (Y page 103).

i AMG vehicles are equipped with a seatfeaturing an integrated head restraint andthe head restraint adjustment button isdeactivated. It is therefore not possible toset the height and angle of the headrestraint.

Adjusting the head restraints

Adjusting the head restraints manually

Adjusting the head restraint height3

X To raise: pull the head restraint up to thedesired position.

X To lower: press release catch : in thedirection of the arrow and push the headrestraint down to the desired position.

Adjusting the angle of the head restraints

3 For vehicles without memory function only.

Seats 95

Seat

s, s

teer

ing

whe

el a

nd m

irror

s

Z

X Push or pull the lower edge of the headrestraint in the direction of the arrow.

Adjusting the head restraint heightelectrically4

X To adjust the head restraint height: slidethe switch for head restraint adjustment(Y page 94) up or down in the direction ofthe arrow.

Adjusting luxury head restraints

G WARNINGWhen folding back the side cushions, neverreach between the side cushion and themounting post. You could otherwise betrapped.

X To adjust the side bolsters of the head restraint: push or pull right and/or left-hand side bolster : into the desiredposition.

X To adjust the angle of the head restraint: push or pull the head restraint inthe direction of arrow ;.

Rear seat head restraints

G WARNINGFor safety reasons, always drive with the rearhead restraints in the upright position whenthe rear seats are occupied.

Keep the area around head restraints clear ofarticles (e.g. clothing) to not obstruct thefolding operation of the head restraints.

G WARNINGFor your protection, drive only with properlypositioned head restraints.Adjust the head restraint in such a way that itis as close to the head as possible and thecenter of the head restraint supports the backof the head at eye level. This will reduce thepotential for injury to the head and neck in theevent of an accident or similar situation.With a rear seat occupied, make sure to movethe respective head restraint up from thelowest non-use position and have theoccupant adjust the head restraint properly.Do not drive the vehicle without the seat headrestraints installed when the rear seats areoccupied. Head restraints are intended tohelp reduce injuries during an accident.

Adjusting the rear seat head restraintheight

If the head restraint is fully lowered, it isnecessary to press release catch :.X To raise: pull the head restraint up to the

desired position.X To lower: press release catch : and push

the head restraint down until it is in thedesired position.

4 For vehicles with memory function only.

96 SeatsSe

ats,

ste

erin

g w

heel

and

mirr

ors

Removing and installing rear headrestraints5

G WARNINGOccupants should only travel sitting on seatswhich have the head restraints installed. Inthe event of an accident, this reduces the riskof injury for passengers seated in the rearcompartment.

X Release the rear seat backrest and fold itslightly forwards (Y page 257).

X To remove: pull the head restraint up tothe stop.

X Press release catch : and pull the headrestraint out of the guides.

X To re-install: insert the head restraint sothat the notches on the bar are on the leftwhen viewed in the direction of travel.

X Push the head restraint down until you hearit engage in position.

X Fold back the rear seat backrest until itengages.

Adjusting the lumbar supportYou can adjust the contour of the front seatsso as to provide optimum support for yourback.

X Move adjustment lever : in the directionof the arrow until the desired backrestcontour is achieved.

Adjusting the four-way lumbarsupport

You can adjust the contour of the front seatbackrests individually to provide optimumsupport for your back.

: To raise the backrest contour; To soften the backrest contour= To lower the backrest contour? To harden the backrest contour

Adaptive backrest (AMG vehicle)You can adjust the contour of the front seatbackrests individually so as to provideoptimum support for your back.

5 Only for vehicles with through-loading facility.

Seats 97

Seat

s, s

teer

ing

whe

el a

nd m

irror

s

Z

: To adjust the upper back support; To adjust the contour of the backrest in

the lumbar region= To adjust the lateral structure and support

of the seatX Make sure that the SmartKey is in position

2 in the ignition lock.

i If, after a certain amount of time, the seatno longer has the desired contour, repeatthe adjustment.

Switching the seat heating on/off

Switching on/off

G WARNINGRepeatedly setting the seat heating to level3 may result in excessive seat temperatures.The health of passengers that have limitedtemperature sensitivity or a limited ability toreact to excessively high temperatures maybe affected or they may even suffer burn-likeinjuries. Therefore, do not use seat heatinglevel 3 repeatedly.

The three red indicator lamps in the buttonindicate the heating level you have selected.

i If the battery voltage is too low, the seatheating may switch off.

Driver's and front-passenger seat

The system automatically switches downfrom level 3 to level 2 after approximatelyeight minutes.The system automatically switches downfrom level 2 to level 1 after approximately tenminutes.The system automatically switches offapproximately 20 minutes after it is set tolevel 1.X Make sure that the SmartKey is in position

1 or 2 in the ignition lock.X To switch on: press button : repeatedly

until the desired heating level is set.X To switch off: press button : repeatedly

until all the indicator lamps go out.

Problems with the seat heatingThe seat heating has switched offprematurely or cannot be switched on. Thevehicle's electrical system voltage is too lowbecause too many electrical consumers areswitched on.X Switch off electrical consumers which you

do not need, such as the rear windowdefroster or interior lighting.

Switching the seat ventilation on/off

Switching on/offThe three blue indicator lamps in the buttonsindicate the ventilation level you haveselected.

98 SeatsSe

ats,

ste

erin

g w

heel

and

mirr

ors

i If the battery voltage is too low, the seatventilation may switch off.

X Make sure that the SmartKey is in position2 in the ignition lock.

X To switch on: press button : repeatedlyuntil the desired ventilation level is set.

i You can open the side windows and thesliding sunroof using the "Convenienceopening" feature (Y page 84). The seatventilation of the driver's seatautomatically switches to the highest level.

X To switch off: press button : repeatedlyuntil all the indicator lamps go out.

Problems with the seat ventilationThe seat ventilation has switched offprematurely or cannot be switched on. Thevehicle's electrical system voltage is too lowbecause too many electrical consumers areswitched on.X Switch off electrical consumers which you

do not need, such as the rear windowdefroster or interior lighting.

Steering wheel


G WARNINGDo not adjust the steering wheel while driving.Adjusting the steering wheel while driving, ordriving without the steering wheel adjustment

feature locked could cause the driver to losecontrol of the vehicle.The electrical steering wheel adjustmentfeature can be operated at any time.Therefore, do not leave children unattendedin the vehicle, or with access to an unlockedvehicle. A child's unsupervised access to avehicle could result in an accident and/orserious personal injury.

Adjusting the steering wheelmanually

: Release lever; To adjust the steering wheel height= To adjust the steering wheel position

(fore-and-aft adjustment)X Push release lever : down completely.

The steering column is unlocked.X Adjust the steering wheel to the desired

position.X Push release lever : up completely.

The steering column is locked.X Check if the steering column is locked.

When doing so, try to push the steeringwheel up or down or try to move it in thefore-and-aft direction.

Steering wheel 99

Seat

s, s

teer

ing

whe

el a

nd m

irror

s

Z

Adjusting the steering wheelelectrically

: To adjust the steering wheel height; To adjust the steering wheel position

(fore-and-aft adjustment)

i Other topics:REASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature

(Y page 100)Rstoring settings (Y page 103)

EASY-ENTRY/EXIT system

Important safety notesThe EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature makes gettingin and out of your vehicle easier.You can activate and deactivate the EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature in the on-boardcomputer (Y page 209).

G WARNINGYou must make sure no one can becometrapped or injured by the moving steeringwheel when the easy-entry/exit feature isactivated.To stop steering wheel movement, movesteering wheel adjustment stalk or press thememory position switch.Do not leave children unattended in thevehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle.Children could open the driver's door andunintentionally activate the easy-entry/exitfeature, which could result in an accidentand/or serious personal injury.

G WARNINGLet the system complete the adjustmentprocedure before setting the vehicle inmotion. All steering wheel adjustment mustbe completed before setting the vehicle inmotion. Driving off with the steering wheelstill adjusting could cause the driver to losecontrol of the vehicle.

Position of the steering wheel when theEASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature is activeThe steering wheel swings upwards whenyou:Rremove the SmartKey from the ignition lockRopen the driver's door and KEYLESS-GO is

in position 1Ropen the driver's door and the SmartKey is

in position 0 or 1 in the ignition lock

i The steering wheel only moves upwards ifit has not already reached the upper endstop.

Position of the steering wheel fordrivingThe steering wheel is moved to the lastselected position when:Rthe driver's door is closed.Ryou insert the SmartKey into the ignition

lock.orRyou press the Start/Stop button once on

vehicles with KEYLESS-GO.When you close the driver's door with theignition switched on, the steering wheel isalso automatically moved to the previouslyset position.The last position of the steering wheel isstored after each manual setting or when youstore the setting with the memory function(Y page 103).

100 Steering wheelSe

ats,

ste

erin

g w

heel

and

mirr

ors

Crash-responsive EASY-EXIT featureIf the crash-responsive EASY-EXIT feature istriggered in an accident, the steering columnwill move upwards when the driver's door isopened. This occurs irrespective of theposition of the SmartKey in the ignition lock.This makes it easier to exit the vehicle andrescue the occupants.The crash-responsive EASY-EXIT feature isonly operational if the EASY-EXIT/ENTRYfeature is activated in the on-board computer.

Mirrors

Rear-view mirror

Rear-view mirror (manual anti-glare)

X anti-glare mode: flick anti-glareswitch : forwards or back.

Exterior mirrors

Adjusting the exterior mirrors

G WARNINGExercise care when using the passenger-sideexterior rear view mirror. The mirror surfaceis convex (outwardly curved surface for awider field of view). Objects in mirror arecloser than they appear. Check your interiorrear view mirror and glance over yourshoulder before changing lanes.

The exterior mirrors are automatically heatedif the rear window defroster is switched onand the outside temperature is low.

X Make sure that the SmartKey is in position1 or 2 in the ignition lock.

X Press button : for the left-hand exteriormirror or button ; for the right-handexterior mirror.The indicator lamp in the correspondingbutton lights up in red.The indicator lamp goes out again aftersome time. You can adjust the selectedmirror using adjustment button = as longas the indicator lamp is lit.

X Press adjustment button = up, down, tothe right or to the left until the exteriormirror is set to a position that provides youwith a good overview of traffic conditions.

Folding the exterior mirrors in or outelectricallyThis function is only available in vehicles forCanada.

Mirrors 101

Seat

s, s

teer

ing

whe

el a

nd m

irror

s

Z

X Make sure that the SmartKey is in position1 or 2 in the ignition lock.

X Briefly press button :.Both exterior mirrors fold in or out.

i Make sure that the exterior mirrors arealways folded out fully while the vehicle isin motion, as they may otherwise vibrate.

i If you are driving faster than9 mph (15 km/h), you can no longer fold inthe exterior mirrors.

Setting the exterior mirrorsThis function is only available in vehicles forCanada.If the battery has been disconnected orcompletely discharged, the exterior mirrorsmust be reset. The exterior mirrors willotherwise not fold in when you select the"Fold in mirrors when locking" function in theon-board computer (Y page 209).X Make sure that the SmartKey is in

position 1 in the ignition lock.X Briefly press button :.

Folding the exterior mirrors in or outautomaticallyThis function is only available in vehicles forCanada.If the "Fold in mirrors when locking" functionis activated in the on-board computer(Y page 209):Rthe exterior mirrors fold in automatically as

soon as you lock the vehicle from theoutside.Rthe exterior mirrors fold out again

automatically as soon as you unlock thevehicle and then open the driver's or front-passenger door.

i The mirrors do not fold out if they havebeen folded in manually.

Exterior mirror out of positionIf an exterior mirror has been pushed out ofposition, proceed as follows:X Vehicles without electrically folding

exterior mirrors: move the exterior mirrorinto the correct position manually.

X Vehicles with electronically folding mirrors6: press the mirror-folding button(Y page 101) repeatedly until you hear themirror engage in position.The mirror housing is engaged again andyou can adjust the exterior mirrors as usual(Y page 101).

Automatic anti-glare mirrors

G WARNINGIf incident light from headlamps is preventedfrom striking the sensor in the rear-viewmirror, for instance, by luggage piled too highin the vehicle, the mirror's automatic anti-glare function will not operate.Incident light could then blind you. This maydistract you from the traffic conditions and,as a result, you may cause an accident.

The rear-view mirror and the exterior mirroron the driver's side automatically go into anti-glare mode if the ignition is switched on andincident light from headlamps strikes thesensor in the rear-view mirror.The mirrors do not go into anti-glare mode ifreverse gear is engaged or the interior lightingis switched on.

Parking position for the exteriormirror on the front-passenger side

Setting and storing the parking positionYou can position the front-passenger sideexterior mirror in such a way that you can seethe rear wheel on that side as soon as you

6 Canada only

102 MirrorsSe

ats,

ste

erin

g w

heel

and

mirr

ors

engage reverse gear. You can store thisposition.

X Make sure that the vehicle is stationary andthat the SmartKey is in position 2 in theignition lock.

X Press button ; for the exterior mirror onthe front-passenger side.

X Engage reverse gear.The exterior mirror on the front-passengerside moves to the preset parking position.

X Use adjustment button = to adjust theexterior mirror to a position that allows youto see the rear wheel and the curb.The parking position is stored.

i If you shift the transmission to anotherposition, the exterior mirror on the front-passenger side returns to the drivingposition.

i You can also store the parking positionusing memory button M ?.X Make sure that the SmartKey is in

position 2 in the ignition lock.X With the exterior mirror on the front-

passenger side activated, useadjustment button = to adjust theexterior mirror to a position whichallows you to see the rear wheel andthe curb.

X Press memory button M ? and one ofthe arrows on adjustment button =within three seconds.The parking position is stored if theexterior mirror does not move.

If the mirror moves out of position, repeatthe steps.

Calling up a stored parking positionsettingX Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the

ignition lock.X Adjust the exterior mirror on the front-

passenger side with the correspondingbutton (Y page 101).

X Engage reverse gear.The exterior mirror on the front-passengerside moves to the stored parking position.

The exterior mirror on the front-passengerside moves back to its original position:Ras soon as you exceed a speed of 6 mph

(10 km/h)Rabout ten seconds after you have

disengaged reverse gearRif you press button : for the exterior

mirror on the driver's side

Memory function

Storing settingsWith the memory function, you can store upto three different settings, e.g. for threedifferent people.The following settings are stored as a singlememory preset:Rposition of the seat, backrest and head

restraintRdriver's side: steering wheel positionRdriver's side: position of the exterior

mirrors on the driver's and front-passengersides

G WARNINGDo not activate the memory function whiledriving. Activating the memory function whiledriving could cause the driver to lose controlof the vehicle.

Memory function 103

Seat

s, s

teer

ing

whe

el a

nd m

irror

s

Z

X Adjust the seat (Y page 94).X On the driver's side, adjust the steering

wheel (Y page 100) and the exterior mirrors(Y page 101).

X Press memory button M and one of thestorage position buttons 1, 2 or 3 withinthree seconds.The settings are stored in the selectedpreset position. A tone sounds when thesettings have been completed.

Calling up a stored setting! If you want to move the seat from the fully

reclined position to a stored seat position,first raise the backrest. The seat couldotherwise be damaged.

X Press and hold the relevant storageposition button 1, 2 or 3 until the seat,steering wheel and exterior mirrors are inthe stored position.

i The setting procedure is interrupted assoon as you release the storage positionbutton.

104 Memory functionSe

ats,

ste

erin

g w

heel

and

mirr

ors

Useful information ............................ 106Exterior lighting ................................ 106Interior lighting ................................. 112Replacing bulbs ................................. 113Windshield wipers ............................ 116

105

Ligh

ts a

nd w

inds

hiel

d w

iper

s

Useful information



Exterior lighting

Important safety notesFor reasons of safety, Mercedes-Benzrecommends that you drive with the lightsswitched on even during the daytime. In somecountries, operation of the headlamps variesdue to legal requirements and self-imposedobligations.

Information about driving abroadConverting to symmetrical low beam when driving abroad: switch the headlampsto symmetrical low beam in countries inwhich traffic drives on the opposite side of theroad to the country where the vehicle isregistered. This prevents glare to oncomingtraffic. Symmetrical lights do not illuminateas large an area of the edge of the road.Have the headlamps converted at a qualifiedspecialist workshop, e.g. an authorizedMercedes-Benz Center, as close to the borderas possible before driving in these countries.Converting to asymmetrical low beam after returning: have the headlampsconverted back to asymmetrical low beam ata qualified specialist workshop, e.g. anauthorized Mercedes-Benz Center, as soon aspossible after crossing the border again.

Light switch

OperationDepending on the date of manufacture of yourvehicle, the c or Ã symbol for theautomatic headlamp mode/daytime runninglamps is located on the light switch.

Illustration: light switch with the Ã symbol forthe automatic headlamp mode/daytime runninglamps1W Left-hand standing lamps2X Right-hand standing lamps3T Parking lamps, license plate and

instrument cluster lighting4Ã Automatic headlamp mode/daytime

running lamps5L Low-beam/high-beam headlampsBR Rear fog lampCN Front fog lamps7

7 Only vehicles with front fog lamps have the fog lamps function.

106 Exterior lightingLi

ghts

and

win

dshi

eld

wip

ers

Illustration: light switch with the c symbol forthe automatic headlamp mode/daytime runninglamps1W Left-hand standing lamps2X Right-hand standing lamps3T Parking lamps, license plate and

instrument cluster lighting4c Automatic headlamp mode/daytime

running lamps5L Low-beam/high-beam headlampsBR Rear fog lampCN Front fog lamps7

The turn signals, high-beam headlamps andthe high-beam flasher are operated using thecombination switch (Y page 109).

! Switch off the parking lamps and standinglamps when you leave the vehicle. Thisprevents the battery from discharging.

The exterior lighting (except the parking/standing lamps) switches off automatically ifyou:Rremove the SmartKey from the ignition lockRopen the driver's door with the SmartKey

in position 0If you hear a warning tone when you leave thevehicle, the lights may still be switched on.X Turn the light switch to c or Ã.

Low-beam headlampsX To switch on the low-beam headlamps:

turn the SmartKey in the ignition lock toposition 2 or start the engine.

X Turn the light switch to L.The L indicator lamp in the instrumentcluster lights up.

Daytime running lamps

Daytime running lamps in CanadaThe daytime running lamps function isrequired by law in Canada. It cannot thereforebe deactivated.X Turn the light switch to c or Ã.

With the engine running: depending on theambient light, the daytime running lamps orthe low-beam headlamps are switched on.When the low-beam headlamps areswitched on, the L indicator lamp in theinstrument cluster lights up.

When the engine is running and the vehicle isstationary: if you move the selector lever froma drive position to P (vehicles with automatictransmission) or if the parking brake isapplied, the low-beam headlamps go out afterthree minutes.When the engine is running, the vehicle isstationary and in high ambient lightbrightness: if you turn the light switchto T, the daytime running lamps and theparking lamps are switched on.If the engine is running and you turn the lightswitch to L, the manual settings takeprecedence over the daytime running lamps.

Daytime running lamps in the USAThis function is only available on vehicles withdaytime running lamps.In the USA, the daytime running lamps aredeactivated upon delivery from the factory.X To activate the daytime running lamps

(vehicles with a luxury multifunction

7 Only vehicles with front fog lamps have the fog lamps function.

Exterior lighting 107

Ligh

ts a

nd w

inds

hiel

d w

iper

s

steering wheel): you can activate thedaytime running lamps function using theon-board computer (Y page 207).

X Turn the light switch to c or Ã.With the engine running: depending on theambient light, the daytime running lamps orthe low-beam headlamps are switched on.When the low-beam headlamps areswitched on, the L indicator lamp in theinstrument cluster lights up.

It is only possible to activate the high-beamheadlamps if the brightness of the ambientlight is at a low level.However, the high-beam flasher can alwaysbe used.If the engine is running and you turn the lightswitch to T or L, the manual settingstake precedence over the daytime runninglamps.

Automatic headlamp modeX To switch on automatic headlamp

mode: turn the light switch to c orÃ.SmartKey in position 1 in the ignition lock:the parking lamps are switched on or offautomatically depending on the brightnessof the ambient light.With the engine running: depending on thebrightness of the ambient light, the daytimerunning lamps8 or the low-beam headlampsare switched on or off automatically.When the low-beam headlamps areswitched on, the L indicator lamp in theinstrument cluster lights up.

G WARNINGIf the light switch is set to c or Ã, thelow-beam headlamps will not come onautomatically if it is foggy. This couldendanger you and others. Therefore, turn thelight switch to L in fog.

The automatic headlamp feature is only anaid. The driver is responsible for the vehicle'slighting at all times.

Front fog lampsOnly vehicles with front fog lamps have thefog lamps function.

G WARNINGIf you suspect that driving conditions will befoggy, turn the light switch to L before youstart your journey. Otherwise, your vehiclemay not be visible and you could endangeryourself and others.

X To switch on the front fog lamps: turnthe SmartKey in the ignition lock to position2 or start the engine.

X Turn the light switch to L or c orÃ.

X Press the N button.The green N indicator lamp in theinstrument cluster lights up.

X To switch off the front fog lamps: pressthe N button.The green N indicator lamp in theinstrument cluster goes out.

Rear fog lampX To switch on the rear fog lamp: turn the

SmartKey in the ignition lock to position 2or start the engine.

X Turn the light switch to L or c orÃ.If the light switch is set to c or Ã,the rear fog lamp only lights up if the low-beam headlamps are on.

8 Only if daytime running lamps have been activated via the on-board computer.


ghts

and

win

dshi

eld

wip

ers

X Press the R button.The yellow R indicator lamp in theinstrument cluster lights up.

X To switch off the rear fog lamp: press theR button.The yellow R indicator lamp in theinstrument cluster goes out.

Headlamp cleaning systemThe headlamps are cleaned automatically ifthe "Wipe with washer fluid" function isoperated ten times while the lights are on andthe engine is running (Y page 116).

Combination switch

Turn signals

: High-beam headlamps; Right turn signal= High-beam flasher? Left turn signalX To indicate briefly: press the combination

switch briefly to the pressure point in thedirection of arrow ; or ?.The corresponding turn signal flashes threetimes.

X To indicate: press the combination switchbeyond the pressure point in the directionof arrow ; or ?.

High-beam headlampsX To switch on the high-beam headlamps:

turn the SmartKey in the ignition lock toposition 2 or start the engine.

X Turn the light switch to L or c orÃ.

X Press the combination switch beyond thepressure point in the direction ofarrow :.In the c or Ã position, the high-beam headlamps are only switched onwhen it is dark and the engine is running.The K indicator lamp in the instrumentcluster lights up when the high-beamheadlamps are switched on.

X To switch off the high-beam headlamps: move the combination switchback to its normal position.The K indicator lamp in the instrumentcluster goes out.

High-beam flasherX To switch on: turn the SmartKey in the

ignition lock to position 1 or 2 or start theengine.

X Pull the combination switch in the directionof arrow =.

Hazard warning lamps


Ligh

ts a

nd w

inds

hiel

d w

iper

s

Z

The hazard warning lamps automaticallyswitch on if:Ran air bag is deployed.Rthe vehicle is slowed down severely from a

speed of over 45 mph (70 km/h) andcomes to a halt.

X To switch on the hazard warning lamps: press button :.All turn signals flash. If you now switch ona turn signal using the combination switch,only the turn signal lamp on thecorresponding side of the vehicle will flash.

X To switch off the hazard warning lamps: press button :.

The hazard warning lamps are deactivatedautomatically if the vehicle returns to a speedof over 6 mph (10 km/h) after a fullapplication of the brakes.

i The hazard warning lamps still operate ifthe ignition is switched off.

Active light function

The active light function is a system thatmoves the headlamps according to thesteering movements of the front wheels. Inthis way, relevant areas remain illuminatedwhile driving. This allows you to recognizepedestrians, cyclists and animals.Active: when the lights are switched on.

Cornering light function

The cornering light function improves theillumination of the road over a wide angle inthe direction you are turning, enabling bettervisibility in tight bends, for example. It canonly be activated when the low-beamheadlamps are switched on.Active: Rif you are driving at speeds below

25 mph (40 km/h) and switch on the turnsignals or turn the steering wheel.Rif you are driving at speeds between

25 mph (40 km/h) and45 mph (70 km/h) or turn the steeringwheel.

Not active: if you are driving at speeds above25 mph (40 km/h) or switch off the turnsignal or turn the steering wheel to thestraight-ahead position.The cornering light function may remain lit fora short time, but is automatically switched offafter no more than three minutes.

Adaptive Highbeam AssistYou can use this function to set theheadlamps to change between low beam andhigh beam automatically. The systemrecognizes vehicles with their lights on, eitherapproaching from the opposite direction ortraveling in front of your vehicle, andconsequently switches the headlamps fromhigh beam to low beam.


ghts

and

win

dshi

eld

wip

ers

The system automatically adapts the low-beam headlamp range depending on thedistance to the other vehicle. Once thesystem no longer detects any other vehicles,it reactivates the high-beam headlamps.The system's optical sensor is located behindthe windshield near the overhead controlpanel.

X To activate: activate the AdaptiveHighbeam Assist function using the on-board computer (Y page 207).

X Turn the light switch to c or Ã.X Press the combination switch beyond the

pressure point in the direction of arrow :(Y page 109).If it is dark and the light sensor activatesthe low-beam headlamps, the _indicator lamp in the instrument clusterlights up.If you drive faster than approximately28 mph (45 km/h):the headlamp range is set automaticallydepending on the distance between thevehicle and other road users.If you drive faster than approximately35 mph (55 km/h) and no other road usersare identified:the high-beam headlamps are switched onautomatically. The K indicator lamp inthe instrument cluster also lights up.

When you drive slower than approximately30 mph (45 km/h) or if other road usersare identified or if the roads are sufficientlyilluminated:the high-beam headlamps are switched offautomatically. The K indicator lamp inthe instrument cluster goes out. The _indicator lamp in the instrument clusterstays on.

X To deactivate: move the combinationswitch back to its normal position.The _ indicator lamp in the instrumentcluster goes out.

G WARNINGThe Adaptive Highbeam Assist is only an aidintended to support you while driving. Thedriver is and remains responsible for propervehicle lighting in accordance with theprevailing light, sight and traffic conditions.The system may be impaired or unavailablewhenRvisibility is poor, e.g. due to snow, rain, fog,

or heavy sprayRthe optical sensor area of the windshield is

dirty, fogged up, or covered by a sticker forexample

The system cannot recognize the followingroad users:RRoad users without a lighting system of

their own, e.g. pedestriansRRoad users with dim lighting of their own,

e.g. cyclistsRRoad users whose lighting is obstructed,

e.g. road users behind a guardrailRIn some seldom cases, even road users with

a lighting system of their own may berecognized too late or not at all.

The automatic high-beam headlamps will thennot be deactivated or it will be activated inspite of preceding or oncoming road users.This could endanger you and/or others andcause an accident. Always pay close attentionto the traffic situation and switch off the highbeam manually if necessary.


Ligh

ts a

nd w

inds

hiel

d w

iper

s

Z

Headlamps fogged up on the insideThe headlamps may fog up on the inside ifthere is high atmospheric humidity.X Drive with the headlamps switched on.

The level of moisture diminishes,depending on the length of the journey andthe weather conditions (humidity andtemperature).

If the level of moisture does not diminish:X Have the headlamps checked at a qualified

specialist workshop.

Interior lighting

Overview of interior lighting

Front overhead control panel: u Switches the rear interior lighting

on/off; | Switches the automatic interior

lighting control on/off= p Switches the right-hand front

reading lamp on/off? c Switches the front interior lighting

on/offA p Switches the left-hand front reading

lamp on/off

Rear-compartment overhead control panel: p Switches the right-hand reading

lamp on/off; p Switches the left-hand reading lamp

on/off

Interior lighting control

Important notesIn order to prevent the vehicle's battery fromdischarging, the interior lighting functions areautomatically deactivated after some timeexcept for when the SmartKey is in position2 in the ignition lock.

Automatic interior lighting controlX To switch on/off: press the | button.

When the automatic interior lightingcontrol is activated, the button is flush withthe overhead control panel.

The interior lighting automatically switcheson if you:Runlock the vehicleRopen a doorRremove the SmartKey from the ignition lockThe interior light is activated for a short whilewhen the SmartKey is removed from theignition lock. You can activate this delayedswitch-off using the on-board computer(Y page 208).

112 Interior lightingLi

ghts

and

win

dshi

eld

wip

ers

Manual interior lighting controlX To switch the front interior lighting on/

off: press the c button.X To switch the rear interior lighting on/

off: press the u button.X To switch the reading lamps on/off:

press the p button.

Crash-responsive emergency lightingThe interior lighting is activated automaticallyif the vehicle is involved in an accident.X To switch off the crash-responsive

emergency lighting: press the hazardwarning lamp button.

orX Lock and then unlock the vehicle using the

SmartKey.

Replacing bulbs


Xenon bulbsIf your vehicle is equipped with Xenon bulbs,you can recognize this by the following: thecone of light from the Xenon bulbs movesfrom the top to the bottom and back againwhen you start the engine. For this to beobserved, the lights must be switched onbefore starting the engine.

G DANGERXenon bulbs carry a high voltage. You couldget an electric shock and be seriously or evenfatally injured if you touch the electriccontacts on Xenon bulbs. Therefore, neverremove the cover from Xenon bulbs.Do not change Xenon bulbs yourself, but havethem replaced at a qualified specialistworkshop which has the necessary specialistknowledge and tools to carry out the workrequired.

Mercedes-Benz recommends that you use anauthorized Mercedes-Benz Center for thispurpose. In particular, work relevant to safetyor on safety-related systems must be carriedout at a qualified specialist workshop.

Bulbs and lamps are an important aspect ofvehicle safety. You must therefore make surethat these function correctly at all times.Have the headlamp setting checked regularly.

Other bulbsThere are bulbs other than the Xenon bulbsthat you cannot replace. Replace only thebulbs listed (Y page 114). Have the bulbs thatyou cannot replace yourself changed at aqualified specialist workshop.Mercedes-Benz recommends that you use anauthorized Mercedes-Benz Center for thispurpose. In particular, work relevant to safetyor on safety-related systems must be carriedout at a qualified specialist workshop.If you require assistance changing bulbs,consult a qualified specialist workshop.Do not touch the glass tube of new bulbs withyour bare hands. Even minor contaminationcan burn into the glass surface and reducethe service life of the bulbs. Always use a lint-free cloth or only touch the base of the bulbwhen installing.Only use bulbs of the correct type.If the new bulb still does not light up, consulta qualified specialist workshop.Bulbs and lamps are an important aspect ofvehicle safety. You must therefore make surethat these function correctly at all times.Have the headlamp setting checked regularly.

G WARNINGBulbs and lamps can be very hot. You shouldtherefore allow them to cool down before youchange them. Otherwise, you could be burnedif you touch them.Keep bulbs out of the reach of children.Otherwise, they could damage the bulbs, forexample, and injure themselves.

Replacing bulbs 113

Ligh

ts a

nd w

inds

hiel

d w

iper

s

Z

Never use a bulb which has been dropped.Such a bulb may break or even explode andinjure you.Halogen bulbs are pressurized and canexplode when you change them, particularlyif they are very hot. You should therefore weareye protection and gloves when you arechanging them.

Overview: changing bulbs/bulb typesYou can change the following bulbs. The bulbtype can be found in the legend.

Halogen headlamps: Parking lamp/standing lamp: W 5 W; High-beam headlamp: H7 55 W= Low-beam headlamp: H7 55 W

Bi-Xenon headlamps: Cornering lamp: H7 55 W

Tail lamp: Backup lamp: P 21 W; Brake lamp: P 21 W= Brake lamp/tail lamp: P 21 W

Changing the front bulbs

Low-beam headlamps (halogenheadlamps)

X Switch off the lights.X Open the hood.X Turn housing cover : counter-clockwise

and pull it out.X Turn bulb holder ; counter-clockwise and

pull it out.X Take the bulb out of bulb holder ;.X Insert the new bulb into bulb holder ;.X Insert bulb holder ; into the lamp and turn

it clockwise.X Align housing cover : and turn it

clockwise until it engages.

114 Replacing bulbsLi

ghts

and

win

dshi

eld

wip

ers

High-beam headlamps (halogenheadlamps)






Parking lamps/standing lamps(halogen headlamps)


and pull it out.X Pull out bulb holder ;.

X Take the bulb out of bulb holder ;.X Insert the new bulb into bulb holder ;.X Insert bulb holder ;.X Align housing cover : and turn it


Cornering light function (Bi-Xenonheadlamps)






Changing the rear bulbs

Opening and closing the side trimpanelsYou must open the side trim panel in the trunkand remove the first-aid kit before you canchange the bulbs in the tail lamps.

Replacing bulbs 115

Ligh

ts a

nd w

inds

hiel

d w

iper

s

Z

Left-hand side trim panel

Right-hand side trim panelX To open: turn rotary catch :90° in the

direction of the arrow and remove side trimpanel ;.

X To close: insert side trim panel ; and turnrelease knob : 90° in the oppositedirection to the arrow.

Tail lampX Switch off the lights.X Open the trunk.X Open the side trim panel (Y page 115).

X Remove the tail lamp connectorX Simultaneously press retaining lugs : in

the direction of the arrow and slightly pullout the bulb holder with the bulbs.

X Remove the connector for LED lightfunctions from the top of the bulb holder.

X Pull the bulb holder out with the bulbs.

: Backup lamp; Brake lamp= Parking lamp/brake lampX Press the respective bulb :, ; or = back

and turn it counter-clockwise to remove itfrom the bulb holder.

X Insert the new bulb into the bulb holder andturn it clockwise.

X Reinsert the connector for LED lightfunctions in the bulb holder.

X Insert the bulb holder again and lock it inplace.

X Insert the tail lamp connector.X Close the side trim panel (Y page 115).

Windshield wipers

Switching the windshield wipers on/off

G WARNINGWiper blades are components that are subjectto wear and tear. Replace the wiper bladestwice a year, preferably in the spring and fall.Otherwise the windshield will not be wipedproperly. As a result, you may not be able to

116 Windshield wipersLi

ghts

and

win

dshi

eld

wip

ers

observe surrounding traffic conditions andcould cause an accident.

! Do not operate the windshield wiperswhen the windshield is dry, as this coulddamage the wiper blades. Moreover, dustthat has collected on the windshield canscratch the glass if wiping takes place whenthe windshield is dry.

! If the windshield wipers leave smears onthe windshield after the vehicle has beenwashed in an automatic car wash, wax orother residues may be the reason for this.Clean the windshield using washer fluidafter washing the vehicle in an automaticcar wash.

Combination switch1 $ Windshield wipers off2 Ä Intermittent wipe, low9

3 Å Intermittent wipe, high10

4 ° Continuous wipe, slow5 ¯ Continuous wipe, fastB í Single wipe/ î To wipe the

windshield using washer fluidX Switch on the ignition.X Turn the combination switch to the

corresponding position.

! Intermittent wiping with rain sensor: dueto optical influences and the windshieldbecoming dirty in dry weather conditions,the windshield wipers may be activated

inadvertently. This could then damage thewindshield wiper blades or scratch thewindshield.For this reason, you should always switchoff the windshield wipers in dry weather.

In the Ä or Å position, the appropriatewiping frequency is set automaticallyaccording to the intensity of the rain. Inthe Å position, the rain sensor is moresensitive than in the Ä position, causingthe windshield wipers to wipe morefrequently.

Switching the rear window wiper on/off

Combination switch: è Switch2 ô To wipe with washer fluid3 I To switch on intermittent wiping4 0 To switch off intermittent wiping5 ô To wipe with washer fluidX Turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in the

ignition lock.X Turn switch : on the combination switch

to the corresponding position.When the rear window wiper is switched on,the icon appears in the instrument cluster.

9 Rain sensor set to low sensitivity.10 Rain sensor set to high sensitivity.

Windshield wipers 117

Ligh

ts a

nd w

inds

hiel

d w

iper

s

Z

Replacing the wiper blades


G WARNINGFor safety reasons, switch off the windshieldwipers and remove the key from the ignitionlock before changing the wiper blades(vehicles with KEYLESS-GO: make sure thatthe on-board electronics are in state 0).Otherwise, the wiper motor could be switchedon suddenly and cause injury.

! To avoid damaging the wiper blades,make sure that you touch only the wiperarm of the wiper.

! Never open the hood if a windshield wiperarm has been folded away from thewindshield.Never fold a windshield wiper arm withouta wiper blade back onto the windshield.Hold the windshield wiper arm firmly whenyou change the wiper blade. If you releasethe windshield wiper arm without a wiperblade and it falls onto the windshield, thewindshield may be damaged by the force ofthe impact.Mercedes-Benz recommends that you havethe wiper blades replaced by a qualifiedspecialist workshop, e.g. at an authorizedMercedes-Benz Center.

Replacing the windshield wiper blades

Removing the wiper bladesX Remove the SmartKey from the ignition

lock or turn it to position 0 (KEYLESS-GO).X Fold the wiper arm away from the

windshield until it engages.X Set the wiper blade at right angles to the

wiper arm.

X Remove the wiper blade from the retainingpin on the wiper arm in the direction of thearrow.

Installing the wiper bladesX Push the new wiper blade onto the

retaining pin on the wiper arm in theopposite direction to the arrow.Make sure that the wiper blade slides fullyonto the retaining pin on the wiper arm.

X Turn the wiper blade parallel to the wiperarm.

X Fold the wiper arm back onto thewindshield.

Replacing the rear window wiper blade

Removing the wiper blade

X Remove the SmartKey from the ignitionlock.

X Fold wiper arm : away from the rearwindow until it engages.

X Position wiper blade ; at a right angle towiper arm :.

118 Windshield wipersLi

ghts

and

win

dshi

eld

wip

ers

X Hold wiper arm : and press wiperblade ; in the direction of the arrow untilit releases.

X Remove wiper blade ;.

Installing the wiper bladeX Place new wiper blade ; onto wiper

arm :.X Hold wiper arm : and press wiper

blade ; in the opposite direction to thearrow until it engages.

X Make sure that wiper blade ; is seatedcorrectly.

X Position wiper blade ; parallel to wiperarm :.

X Fold wiper arm : back onto the rearwindow.

Problems with the windshield wipers

The windshield wipers are obstructedLeaves or snow, for example, may beobstructing the windshield wiper movement.The wiper motor has been deactivated.X For safety reasons, you should remove the

SmartKey from the ignition lock.orX Switch off the engine using the Start/Stop

button and open the driver's door.X Remove the cause of the obstruction.X Switch the windshield wipers back on.

The windshield wipers are inoperativeThe windshield wiper drive is malfunctioning.X Select another wiper speed on the

combination switch.X Have the windshield wipers checked at a

qualified specialist workshop.

The spray nozzles are misalignedThe windshield washer fluid from the spraynozzles no longer hits the center of thewindshield. The spray nozzles are misaligned.X Have the spray nozzles adjusted at a

qualified specialist workshop.

Windshield wipers 119

Ligh

ts a

nd w

inds

hiel

d w

iper

s

Z

Useful information ............................ 122Overview of climate control sys-tems ................................................... 122Operating the climate control sys-tem ..................................................... 126Setting the air vents ......................... 131

121

Clim

ate

cont

rol

Useful information



Overview of climate control systems


G WARNINGSevere conditions (e.g. strong air pollution)may require replacement of the filter beforeits scheduled replacement interval. A cloggedfilter will reduce the air volume to the interiorand the windows could fog up, impairingvisibility and endangering you and others.Have a blocked filter replaced at a Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as possible.

G WARNINGFollow the recommended settings for heatingand cooling given on the following pages.Otherwise, the windows could fog up,impairing visibility and endangering you andothers.

The automatic climate control adjusts thetemperature and the humidity of the vehicleinterior and filters undesired substances fromthe air.The automatic climate control is onlyoperational when the engine is running.11

Optimum operation is only achieved if youdrive with the side windows and sliding

sunroof/panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel closed.

i Ventilate the vehicle for a brief periodduring warm weather, e.g. using theconvenience opening feature (Y page 84).This will speed up the cooling process andthe desired vehicle interior temperaturewill be reached more quickly.

i The integrated filter can filter out mostparticles of dust and completely filters outpollen. A clogged filter reduces the amountof air supplied to the vehicle interior. Forthis reason, you should always observe theinterval for replacing the filter, which isspecified in the Service Booklet. As itdepends on environmental conditions, e.g.heavy air pollution, the interval may beshorter than stated in the Service Booklet.

i It is possible that the residual heatfunction may be activated automatically anhour after the SmartKey is removed. Thevehicle is then ventilated for 30 minutes todry the air-conditioning system.

11 Automatic climate control: the residual heat function can only be activated/deactivated when the ignitionis switched off.

122 Overview of climate control systemsCl

imat

e co

ntro

l

Control panel for dual-zone automatic climate control

Canada only: To set the temperature, left (Y page 128); To defrost the windshield (Y page 129)= To switch the ZONE function on/off (Y page 129)? To activate/deactivate cooling with air dehumidification (Y page 126)A To switch the rear window defroster on/off (Y page 130)B To set the temperature, right (Y page 128)C To activate/deactivate air-recirculation mode (Y page 130)D To set the air distribution (Y page 128)E To increase the airflow (Y page 129)F To reduce the airflow (Y page 129)G To switch climate control on/off (Y page 126)H To set climate control to automatic (Y page 127)

Overview of climate control systems 123

Clim

ate

cont

rol

Z

USA only: To set the temperature, left (Y page 128); To defrost the windshield (Y page 129)= To switch maximum cooling MAX COOL on/off (Y page 130)? To activate/deactivate cooling with air dehumidification (Y page 126)A To switch the rear window defroster on/off (Y page 130)B To set the temperature, right (Y page 128)C To activate/deactivate air-recirculation mode (Y page 130)D To set the air distribution (Y page 128)E To increase the airflow (Y page 129)F To reduce the airflow (Y page 129)G To switch climate control on/off (Y page 126)H To set climate control to automatic (Y page 127)

Notes on using dual-zone automaticclimate control

The following contains notes andrecommendations on optimum use of dual-zone automatic climate control.RActivate climate control using the Ã and¿ buttons. The indicator lamps in theÃ and ¿ buttons light up.RSet the temperature to 72 ‡ (22 †).ROnly use the "defrosting" function briefly

until the windshield is clear again.ROnly use "air-recirculation" mode briefly,

e.g. if there are unpleasant outside odors

or when in a tunnel. The windows couldotherwise fog up as, in air-recirculationmode, no fresh air is drawn into the vehicle.RUse the ZONE function to adopt the

temperature settings on the driver's sidefor the front-passenger side as well. Theindicator lamp in the á button goes out.

124 Overview of climate control systemsCl

imat

e co

ntro

l

Control panel for 3-zone automatic climate control

Canada onlyFront control panel

: To set the temperature, left (Y page 128); To defrost the windshield (Y page 129)= To activate/deactivate the residual heat function (Y page 131)? To activate/deactivate cooling with air dehumidification (Y page 126)A To switch the rear window defroster on/off (Y page 130)B To set the temperature, right (Y page 128)C To switch the ZONE function on/off (Y page 129)D To switch climate control on/off (Y page 126)E To set the air distribution (Y page 128)F To increase the airflow (Y page 129)G To reduce the airflow (Y page 129)H To adjust the climate control settings (AIR FLOW) (Y page 127)I To activate/deactivate air-recirculation mode (Y page 130)J To set climate control to automatic (Y page 127)

Rear control panel

K To increase the airflow (Y page 129)L To reduce the airflow (Y page 129)M DisplayN To reduce the temperature (Y page 128)O To increase the temperature (Y page 128)

Overview of climate control systems 125

Clim

ate

cont

rol

Z

Notes on using 3-zone automaticclimate control

The following contains instructions andrecommendations to enable you to get themost out of your automatic climate control.RActivate climate control using the Ã and¿ buttons. The indicator lamps in theÃ and ¿ buttons light up.RIn automatic mode, you can also use theñ button to set a climate mode(FOCUS/MEDIUM/DIFFUSE). TheMEDIUM level is recommended.RSet the temperature to 72 ‡ (22 †).ROnly use the "defrosting" function briefly

until the windshield is clear again.ROnly use "air-recirculation" mode briefly,

e.g. if there are unpleasant outside odorsor when in a tunnel. The windows couldotherwise fog up as, in air-recirculationmode, no fresh air is drawn into the vehicle.RUse the ZONE function to adopt the

temperature settings on the driver's sidefor the front-passenger side and the rearcompartment as well. The indicator lamp inthe á button goes out.RUse the residual heat function if you want

to heat or ventilate the vehicle interiorwhen the ignition is switched off. The"residual heat" function can only beactivated or deactivated with the ignitionswitched off.

Operating the climate control system

Activating/deactivating climatecontrol

Important information

G WARNINGWhen the climate control system isdeactivated, the outside air supply andcirculation are also deactivated. Only choosethis setting for a short time. Otherwise the

windows could fog up, impairing visibility andendangering you and others.

i Switch on climate control primarily usingthe Ã button (Y page 127).

Activating/deactivatingX Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the

ignition lock.X To switch on: press the Ã button.

The indicator lamp in the Ã button lightsup. Airflow and air distribution are set toautomatic mode.

orX Press the ^ button.

The indicator lamp in the ̂ button goesout. The previously selected settings comeinto effect again.

X To switch off: press the ^ button.The indicator lamp in the ̂ button lightsup.

Activating/deactivating the coolingwith air dehumidification function

Important informationThe cooling with air dehumidification functionis only available when the engine is running.The air inside the vehicle is cooled anddehumidified according to the temperatureselected.

G WARNINGIf you switch off the cooling function, thevehicle will not be cooled when weatherconditions are warm. The windows can fog upmore quickly. Window fogging may impairvisibility and endanger you and others.

Condensation may drip from the underside ofthe vehicle when it is in cooling mode. This isnormal and not a sign that there is amalfunction.

126 Operating the climate control systemCl

imat

e co

ntro

l

i The cooling with air dehumidificationfunction uses refrigerant R134a. Thiscoolant does not containchlorofluorocarbons, and therefore doesnot damage the ozone layer.

Activating/deactivatingX To activate: press the ¿ button.

The indicator lamp in the ¿ button lightsup.

X To switch off: press the ¿ button.The indicator lamp in the ¿ button goesout. The cooling with air dehumidificationfunction has a delayed switch-off feature.

Problems with the cooling with airdehumidification functionWhen you press the ¿ button, theindicator lamp in the button flashes threetimes or remains off. You can no longer switchon the cooling with air dehumidificationfunction.X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

Setting climate control to automatic

G WARNINGIf you switch off the cooling function, thevehicle will not be cooled when weatherconditions are warm. The windows can fog upmore quickly. Window fogging may impairvisibility and endanger you and others.

In automatic mode, the set temperature ismaintained automatically at a constant level.The system automatically regulates thetemperature of the dispensed air, the airflowand the air distribution.Automatic mode will achieve optimaloperation if cooling with air dehumidificationis also activated. If desired, cooling with airdehumidification can be deactivated.

X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in theignition lock.

X Set the desired temperature.X To activate: press the Ã button.

The indicator lamp in the Ã button lightsup. Automatic air distribution and airfloware activated.

i 3-zone automatic climate control: whenautomatic mode is activated, you canselect a climate mode setting(Y page 127).

X To switch off: press the _ button.orX Press the K or I button.

The indicator lamp in the Ã button goesout. Automatic air distribution and airfloware deactivated.

Adjusting the climate mode settings(AIR FLOW)

This function is only available with 3-zoneautomatic climate control.The climate mode settings are especiallyeffective at high temperatures.You can select the following climate modesettings in automatic mode:FOCUS high airflow that is set slightly

coolerMEDIUM medium airflow, standard settingDIFFUSE low airflow that is set slightly

warmer and with less draftX Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the

ignition lock.X Press the Ã button.X Press the ñ button repeatedly until the

desired climate mode appears in thedisplay.

Operating the climate control system 127

Clim

ate

cont

rol

Z

Setting the temperature

Dual-zone automatic climate controlDifferent temperatures can be set for thedriver's and front-passenger sides.X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the

ignition lock.X To increase/reduce: turn controls : andB clockwise or counter-clockwise(Y page 123).Only change the temperature setting insmall increments. Start at 72 ‡ (22 †).

3-zone automatic climate control

Automatic climate control climate zones

You can select different temperature settingsfor the driver's and front-passenger sides aswell as for the rear compartment.X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the

ignition lock.X To increase/reduce the temperature in

the front: turn controls : and Bclockwise or counter-clockwise(Y page 125).Only change the temperature setting insmall increments. Start at 72 ‡ (22 †).

X To increase/reduce the temperature in the rear compartment using the front control panel: press the á button.The indicator lamp in the á button goesout.

X Turn control : clockwise or counter-clockwise (Y page 125).Only change the temperature setting insmall increments. Start at 72 ‡ (22 †).

X To increase/reduce the temperature in the rear compartment using the rear control panel: press the r or sbutton on the rear control panel.Only change the temperature setting insmall increments. Start at 72 ‡ (22 †).

i If you leave the vehicle parked for longerthan 30 minutes, the temperature settingfor the rear compartment then switchesback to 22 ‡.

Setting the air distribution

Air distribution settingsP Directs air through the center and side

air ventsO Directs the airflow through the

footwell air ventsS Directs air through the center, side and

footwell vents¯ Directs air through the defroster ventsb Directs the airflow through the

defroster, center and side air vents12

a Directs air through the defroster andfootwell vents

_ Directs the airflow through thedefroster, center and side air vents aswell as the footwell air vents12

i Regardless of the air distribution setting,airflow is always directed through the sideair vents.. The side air vents can only beclosed when the controls on the side airvents are turned downwards.

12 Canada only.


imat

e co

ntro

l


X Press the _ button repeatedly until thedesired symbol appears in the display.The indicator lamp in the Ã button goesout. Automatic control is deactivated andthe air distribution is controlled accordingto the selected setting.

Setting the airflowX Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the

ignition lock.X To increase/reduce: press the K orI button.

i You can use automatic climate control toset the airflow in the rear compartmentseparately.

Switching the ZONE function on/offThis function is only available in vehicles forCanada.X To switch on: press the á button.

The indicator lamp in the á button lightsup.Dual-zone automatic climate control: thetemperature setting for the driver's side isnot adopted for the front-passenger side.3-zone automatic climate control: thetemperature setting for the driver's side isnot adopted for the front-passenger sideand the rear compartment.

When the buttons for temperature, airflow orair distribution are activated, the temperaturesetting for the driver's side is not adopted forthe other climate control zones.X To switch off: press the á button.

The indicator lamp in the á button goesout.Dual-zone automatic climate control: thetemperature setting for the driver's side isadopted for the front-passenger side.

3-zone automatic climate control: thetemperature setting for the driver's side isadopted for the front-passenger side andthe rear compartment.

Defrosting the windshieldYou can use this function to defrost thewindshield or to defrost the inside of thewindshield and the side windows.

i You should only select the defrostingfunction until the windshield is clear again.


X To activate: press the ¬ button.The indicator lamp in the ¬ button lightsup.The climate control system switches to thefollowing functions:Rcooling with air dehumidification onRhigh airflow13

Rhigh temperature13

Rair distribution to the windshield andfront side windowsRair-recirculation mode off

X To switch off: press the ¬ button.The indicator lamp in the ¬ button goesout. The previously selected settings comeinto effect again. The cooling with airdehumidification function remains on. Air-recirculation mode remains deactivated.

orX Press the Ã button.

The indicator lamp in the ¬ button goesout. Airflow and air distribution are set toautomatic mode.

orX Turn temperature control : or B

clockwise or counter-clockwise(Y page 123), (Y page 125).

13 Depending on the outside temperature.

Operating the climate control system 129

Clim

ate

cont

rol

Z

orX Press the K or I button.

MAX COOL maximum coolingThe MAX COOL function is only available invehicles for the USA.MAX COOL is only operational when theengine is running.When you activate MAX COOL, climatecontrol switches to the following functions:Rmaximum coolingRmaximum airflowRair-recirculation mode onX To activate: press the Ù button.

The indicator lamp in the button lights up.X To deactivate: press the Ù button

again.The indicator lamp goes out. The previouslyselected settings come into effect again.

Defrosting the windows

Windows fogged up on the insideX Activate the cooling with air

dehumidification function ¿.X Activate automatic mode Ã.X If the windows continue to fog up, activate

the defrosting function (Y page 129).

i You should only select this setting untilthe windshield is clear again.

Windows fogged up on the outsideX Switch on the windshield wipers.X Press the _ button repeatedly until theO or P symbol appears in thedisplay.

i You should only select this setting untilthe windshield is clear again.

Rear window defroster

Activating/deactivating

G WARNINGAny accumulation of snow and ice should beremoved from the rear window before driving.Visibility could otherwise be impaired,endangering you and others.

The rear window defroster has a high currentdraw. You should therefore switch it off assoon as the window is clear as it only switchesoff automatically after several minutes.If the battery voltage is too low, the rearwindow defroster may switch off.X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the

ignition lock.X Press the ¤ button.

The indicator lamp in the ¤ button lightsup or goes out.

Problems with the rear windowdefrosterThe rear window defroster has deactivateditself prematurely or cannot be activated.X Switch off any consumers that are not

required, e.g. reading lamps or interiorlighting.When the battery is sufficiently charged,the rear window defroster is activatedagain automatically.

Activating/deactivating air-recirculation mode

You can deactivate the flow of fresh air ifunpleasant odors are entering the vehiclefrom outside. The air already inside thevehicle will then be recirculated.The operation of air-recirculation mode is thesame for all control panels.

G WARNINGFogged windows impair visibility,endangering you and others. If the windows


imat

e co

ntro

l

begin to fog on the inside, switching off theair recirculation mode immediately shouldclear interior window fogging. If interiorwindow fogging persists, make sure the airconditioning is activated, or press the ¬button.


X To activate: press the g button.The indicator lamp in the g button lightsup.

i In the event of high pollution levels14 or athigh outside temperatures, air-recirculation mode is automaticallyactivated. When air-recirculation mode isactivated automatically, the indicator lampin the g button is not lit.Outside air is added after about 30minutes.

X To switch off: press the g button.The indicator lamp in the g button goesout.

i Air-recirculation mode deactivatesautomatically:Rafter approximately five minutes if

outside temperatures are less than about41 ‡ (5 †)Rafter approximately five minutes if

cooling with air dehumidification isdeactivatedRafter approximately 30 minutes if outside

temperatures are over about41 ‡ (5 †)

Activating/deactivating the residualheat function

The residual heat function is only available invehicles for Canada with automatic climatecontrol.

It is possible to make use of the residual heatof the engine to continue heating thestationary vehicle for up to 30 minutes afterthe engine has been switched off. The heatingtime depends on the temperature that hasbeen set.

i The blower will run at a low speedregardless of the airflow setting.

i If you activate the residual heat functionat high temperatures, only the ventilationwill be activated. The blower runs atmedium speed.

X Turn the SmartKey to position 0 in theignition lock or remove it.

X To activate: press the Ì button.The indicator lamp in the Ì button lightsup.

X To switch off: press the Ì button.The indicator lamp in the Ì button goesout.

i Residual heat is deactivatedautomatically:Rafter about 30 minutesRwhen the ignition is switched onRif the battery voltage dropsRif the coolant temperature is too low

Setting the air vents


G WARNINGWhen operating the climate control, the airthat enters the passenger compartmentthrough the air vents can be very hot or verycold (depending on the set temperature). Thiscould cause burns or frostbite to unprotectedskin in the immediate area of the air vents.Always keep sufficient distance betweenunprotected parts of the body and the airvents. If necessary, use the air distributionadjustment to direct the air to air vents in the

14 Automatic climate control only.

Setting the air vents 131

Clim

ate

cont

rol

Z

vehicle interior that are not in the immediatearea of unprotected skin.

In order to ensure the direct flow of fresh airthrough the air vents into the vehicle interior,please observe the following notes:Rkeep the air inlet between the windshield

and the hood free of blockages, such as ice,snow or leaves.Rnever cover the air vents or air intake grille

in the vehicle interior.

i For virtually draft-free ventilation, adjustthe sliders of the air vents to the centerposition.

Setting the center air vents

: Center air vent, left; Center air vent, right= Center vent thumbwheel, right? Center vent thumbwheel, leftX To open/close: turn thumbwheels =

and ? up or down.

Setting the side air vents

X To open/close: turn thumbwheel = to theleft or right.

i Side window defroster vent : is nevercompletely shut, even if side air vent ; isshut.

Setting the glove box air ventWhen automatic climate control is activated,the glove box can be ventilated, for instanceto cool its contents. The level of airflowdepends on the airflow and air distributionsettings.

! Close the air vent when heating thevehicle.At high outside temperatures, open the airvent and activate the "cooling with airdehumidification" function. Otherwise,temperature-sensitive items stored in theglove box could be damaged.

: Air vent thumbwheel; Air vent

132 Setting the air ventsCl

imat

e co

ntro

l

X To open/close: turn thumbwheel :clockwise or counter-clockwise.

Setting the rear-compartment airvents

Setting the center vents in the rearcompartment

: Rear-compartment air vent thumbwheel; Rear-compartment air vent, right= Rear control panel for automatic climate

control15

? Rear-compartment air vent, leftX To open/close: turn thumbwheel : up or

down.

15 Canada only.

Setting the air vents 133

Clim

ate

cont

rol

Z

Useful information ............................ 136Breaking-in notes .............................. 136Driving ............................................... 136Automatic transmission ................... 142Refueling ............................................ 150Parking ............................................... 153Driving tips ........................................ 155Driving systems ................................ 159

135

Driv

ing

and

park

ing

Useful information



Breaking-in notes

The first 1000 miles (1500 km)The more you look after the engine when it isnew, the more satisfied you will be with itsperformance in the future.RDrive at varying vehicle speeds and engine

speeds for the first 1000 miles (1500 km)for this reason.RAvoid overstraining the vehicle during this

period, e.g. driving at full throttle.RChange gear in good time, at the latest

when the tachometer needle is 2/3 of theway to the red area in the tachometerdisplay.RIf possible, drive in drive program E (in AMG

vehicles in drive program C) for the first1000 miles (1500 km).RDo not manually shift to a lower gear to

brake the vehicle.RIf possible, do not depress the accelerator

pedal past the point of resistance(kickdown).ROnly select shift ranges 3, 2 or 1 when

driving slowly, e.g. in mountainous terrain.After 1000 miles (1500 km), you can increasethe engine speed gradually and bring thevehicle up to full speed.

Additional breaking-in notes for AMGvehicles:Rdo not drive faster than 85 mph

(140 km/h) in the first 1000 miles(1500 km).Ronly allow the engine to reach a maximum

engine speed of 4500 rpm briefly.Rchange gear in good time.

i You should also observe these notes onrunning in if the engine or parts of the drivetrain on your vehicle have been replaced.

i Always observe the respective speedrestrictions.

AMG vehicles with rear axle lockingdifferential

Your vehicle is equipped with a self-lockingdifferential on the rear axle. For betterprotection of the differential on the rear axle,carry out an oil change after a breaking-inphase of 2000 miles (3000 km). This oilchange extends the service life of thedifferential. Have the oil change carried outat a qualified specialist workshop. Mercedes-Benz recommends that you use an authorizedMercedes-Benz Center for this purpose.

Driving


G WARNINGMake sure absolutely no objects areobstructing the pedals' range of movement.Keep the driver's footwell clear of allobstacles. If there are any floormats orcarpets in the footwell, make sure the pedalsstill have sufficient clearance.During sudden driving or braking maneuversthe objects could get caught between thepedals. You could then no longer brake oraccelerate. This could lead to accidents andinjury.

136 DrivingDr

ivin

g an

d pa

rkin

g

G WARNINGOn slippery road surfaces, never downshift inorder to obtain braking action. This couldresult in drive wheel slip and reduced vehiclecontrol. Your vehicle's ABS will not preventthis type of loss of control.

G WARNINGIt is dangerous to shift the automatictransmission out of parking position P orneutral position N if the engine speed ishigher than idle speed. If your foot is not firmlyon the brake pedal, the vehicle couldaccelerate quickly forward or in reverse. Youcould lose control of the vehicle and hitsomeone or something. Only shift into gearwhen the engine is idling normally and whenyour right foot is firmly on the brake pedal.

! Warm up the engine quickly. Do not usethe engine's full performance until it hasreached operating temperature.Only shift the automatic transmission tothe desired drive position when the vehicleis stationary.Where possible, avoid spinning the drivewheels when pulling away on slipperyroads. You could otherwise damage thedrive train.

! AMG vehicles: at low engine oiltemperatures (below 68 ‡ (+20 †), themaximum engine speed is restricted inorder to protect the engine. To protect theengine and maintain smooth engineoperation, avoid driving at full throttle whenthe engine is cold.

SmartKey positions

SmartKey

g To remove the SmartKeyVehicles with automatic transmission:shift the transmission to position P

1 Power supply for some consumers, suchas the windshield wipers

2 Ignition (power supply for all consumers)and drive position

3 To start the engine

If the SmartKey is in position 0 in the ignitionlock for an extended period of time, it can nolonger be turned in the ignition lock. Thesteering is then locked. To unlock, remove theSmartKey and reinsert it into the ignition lock.The steering is locked when you remove theSmartKey from the ignition lock.

i The SmartKey can be turned in theignition lock even if it is not the correctSmartKey for the vehicle. The ignition is notswitched on. The engine cannot be started.

KEYLESS-GO

General informationVehicles with KEYLESS-GO are equipped witha SmartKey featuring an integrated KEYLESS-GO function and a detachable Start/Stopbutton.The Start/Stop button must be inserted intothe ignition lock and the SmartKey must be inthe vehicle.

Driving 137

Driv

ing

and

park

ing

Z

Pressing the Start/Stop button several timesin succession corresponds to the differentSmartKey positions in the ignition lock. Thisis only the case if you are not depressing thebrake pedal.If you depress the brake pedal and press theStart/Stop button, the engine startsimmediately.The Start/Stop button can be removed fromthe ignition lock. Then, you can insert theSmartKey into the ignition lock.

i You do not have to remove the Start/Stopbutton from the ignition lock when youleave the vehicle. However, you shouldalways take the SmartKey with you whenleaving the vehicle. The vehicle can bestarted with the Start/Stop button if theSmartKey is in the vehicle.

: Start/Stop button; Ignition lockX Insert Start/Stop button : into ignition

lock ;.

i When you insert Start/Stop button :into ignition lock ;, the system requires adetection time of approximately twoseconds before you can use Start/Stopbutton :.

Start/Stop button= USA only? Canada onlyX Position 0: if Start/Stop button : has not

yet been pressed, this corresponds to theSmartKey being removed from the ignition.

X Position 1: press Start/Stop button :.You can now activate the windshieldwipers, for example.

i If you then open the driver's door when inthis position, the power supply isdeactivated.

X Position 2 (ignition): press Start/Stopbutton : twice.

i If you press Start/Stop button : oncewhen in this position and the driver's dooris open, the power supply is deactivatedagain.

As soon as the ignition is switched on, all theindicator lamps in the instrument cluster lightup. If an indicator lamp does not go out afterthe engine is started or if it lights up while thevehicle is in motion, see (Y page 241).

Starting the engine


G WARNINGInhalation of exhaust gas is hazardous to yourhealth. All exhaust gas contains carbonmonoxide (CO), and inhaling it can causeunconsciousness and possible death.

138 DrivingDr

ivin

g an

d pa

rkin

g

Do not run the engine in confined areas (suchas a garage) which are not properly ventilated.If you think that exhaust gas fumes areentering the vehicle while driving, have thecause determined and correctedimmediately. If you must drive under theseconditions, drive only with at least onewindow fully open at all times.

! Do not depress the accelerator pedalwhen starting the engine.

i The catalytic converter preheats for up to30 seconds after a cold start. The sound ofthe engine may change during this time.

Automatic transmissionX Shift the transmission to position P.

The transmission position display in themultifunction display shows P.

i You can also start the engine when thetransmission is in position N.

Starting procedure with the SmartKeyi To start the engine using the SmartKey

instead of KEYLESS-GO, pull the Start/Stop button out of the ignition lock.

X Turn the SmartKey to position 3 in theignition lock (Y page 137) and release it assoon as the engine is running.

Using KEYLESS-GO to start the engine

G WARNINGAs long as the SmartKey is in your vehicle, thevehicle can be started. Therefore, never leavechildren unattended in the vehicle, as theycould otherwise accidentally start the engine.When leaving the vehicle, always take theSmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Donot leave children unattended in the vehicle,or with access to an unlocked vehicle. Achild's unsupervised access to a vehicle couldresult in an accident and/or serious personalinjury.

i The Start/Stop button can be used tostart the vehicle without inserting theSmartKey into the ignition lock. The Start/Stop button must be inserted into theignition lock and the SmartKey must be inthe vehicle.

X Depress the brake pedal and keep itdepressed.

X Press the Start/Stop button (Y page 137)once.The engine starts.

Pulling away

Automatic transmission


i It is only possible to shift the transmissionfrom position P to the desired position ifyou depress the brake pedal. Only then isthe selector lever lock released.

X Depress the brake pedal and keep itdepressed.

X Shift the transmission to position D or R.X Release the parking brake (Y page 154).X Release the brake pedal.X Carefully depress the accelerator pedal.

! If a warning tone sounds and theRelease Park. Brake message appearsin the multifunction display, the parkingbrake is still applied. Release the parkingbrake.

Driving 139

Driv

ing

and

park

ing

Z

i The vehicle locks centrally once you havepulled away. The locking knobs in the doorsdrop down.You can open the doors from the inside atany time.You can also deactivate the automaticlocking feature (Y page 208).

i Upshifts take place at higher enginespeeds after a cold start. This helps thecatalytic converter to reach its operatingtemperature more quickly.

Hill start assistHill start assist helps you when pulling awayforwards or in reverse on an uphill gradient.It holds the vehicle for a short time after youhave removed your foot from the brake pedal.This gives you enough time to move your footfrom the brake pedal to the accelerator pedaland depress it before the vehicle begins toroll.

G WARNINGNever leave the vehicle when it is held by hillstart assist. After approximately one second,hill start assist will no longer brake yourvehicle and it could roll away.

X Take your foot off the brake pedal.i Once you have taken your foot off the

brake pedal, the vehicle is held for aroundone second.

X Pull away.Hill start assist will not function if:Ryou are pulling away on a level road or a

downhill gradient.Rthe transmission is in position N.Rthe parking brake is applied.RESP® is malfunctioning.

140 DrivingDr

ivin

g an

d pa

rkin

g

Problems with the engine


The engine does notstart. The starter motorcan be heard.

RThere is a malfunction in the engine electronics.RThere is a malfunction in the fuel supply.X Before attempting to start the engine again, turn the SmartKey

in the ignition back to position 0 or press the Start/Stop buttonrepeatedly until all indicator lamps in the instrument cluster goout.

X Try to start the engine again (Y page 138). Avoid excessivelylong and frequent attempts to start the engine as these will drainthe battery.

If the engine does not start after several attempts:X Consult a qualified specialist workshop, e.g. an authorized

Mercedes-Benz Center.

The engine does notstart. You cannot hearthe starter motor.

The on-board voltage is too low because the battery is too weakor discharged.X Jump-start the vehicle (Y page 301).If the engine does not start despite attempts to jump-start it:X Consult a qualified specialist workshop, e.g. an authorized


The starter motor was exposed to a thermal load that was too high.X Allow the starter motor to cool down for approximately two

minutes.X Try to start the engine again.If the engine still does not start:X Consult a qualified specialist workshop, e.g. an authorized


Driving 141

Driv

ing

and

park

ing

Z


The engine is notrunning smoothly andis misfiring.

There is a malfunction in the engine electronics or a mechanicalcomponent of the engine management system.X Only depress the accelerator pedal slightly.X Have the cause rectified immediately at a qualified specialist

workshop, e.g. an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.Otherwise, non-combusted fuel may get into the catalyticconverter and damage it.

The coolanttemperature gaugeshows a value above248 ‡ (120 †).

The coolant level is too low. The coolant is too hot and the engineis no longer being cooled sufficiently.X Stop as soon as possible and allow the engine and the coolant

to cool down.X Check the coolant level (Y page 280). Observe the warning

notes as you do so and add coolant if necessary.

Automatic transmission



G WARNINGKeep in mind that turning off the engine aloneonly will shift the automatic transmission intoneutral position N automatically.Always shift the automatic transmission intopark position P before turning off the engine.Otherwise the vehicle could roll away whichcould result in an accident and/or seriouspersonal injury.

Selector lever

Overview of transmission positions

Example: selector leverP Park position with selector lever lockR Reverse gearN NeutralD Drive

142 Automatic transmissionDr

ivin

g an

d pa

rkin

g

Transmission position and driveprogram display

: Transmission position display; Drive program display

The current position of the selector lever isshown by the indicators next to the selectorlever.The indicators light up when the SmartKey isinserted into the ignition lock. The indicatorsgo out when the SmartKey is removed fromthe ignition lock.

Transmission positions

B Park positionDo not shift the transmission intoposition P(Y page 153) unless thevehicle is stationary. The parkinglock should not be used as a brakewhen parking. In addition toengaging the parking lock, youmust always apply the parkingbrake to secure the vehicle.The SmartKey can only be removedif the transmission is in position P.If the SmartKey is removed fromthe ignition lock, the selector leveris locked.If the vehicle electronics aremalfunctioning, the selector levermay be locked in position P. Torelease the selector lever lock, see"Releasing the parking lockmanually" (Y page 149).

C Reverse gearOnly shift the transmission to Rwhen the vehicle is stationary.

Automatic transmission 143

Driv

ing

and

park

ing

Z

A NeutralDo not shift the transmission to Nwhile driving. The transmissioncould otherwise be damaged.No power is transmitted from theengine to the drive wheels.Releasing the brakes will allow youto move the vehicle freely, e.g. topush it or tow it.If ESP® is deactivated or faulty:only shift the transmission toposition N if the vehicle is in dangerof skidding, e.g. on icy roads.

! Rolling in neutral N can damagethe drive train.

7 DriveThe automatic transmissionchanges gear automatically. Allforward gears are available.

Changing gearThe automatic transmission shifts to theindividual gears automatically when it is intransmission position D. This automaticgearshifting behavior is determined by:Ra shift range restriction, if selectedRthe selected drive program (Y page 144)Rthe position of the accelerator pedalRthe road speed

Driving tips

AMG vehiclesWhen shifting down, the double-clutchfunction is active regardless of the currentlyselected drive program. The double-clutchfunction reduces load change reactions andis conducive to a sporty driving style. Thesound generated by the double-clutchfunction depends on the drive programselected.

KickdownUse kickdown for maximum acceleration.X Vehicles for USA (except AMG

vehicles): fully depress the acceleratorpedal.The transmission shifts to a lower geardepending on the engine speed.

X Vehicles for Canada and AMG vehicles:depress the accelerator pedal beyond thepressure point.The transmission shifts to a lower geardepending on the engine speed.

Working on the vehicle

G WARNINGWhen working on the vehicle, engage theparking brake and shift the automatictransmission into park position P. Otherwisethe vehicle could roll away which could resultin an accident and/or serious personal injury.

Program selector button

General informationThe program selector button allows you tochoose between different drivingcharacteristics.

Example: program selector button


ivin

g an

d pa

rkin

g

E Economy Comfortable, economicaldriving

S Sport Sporty driving style

M Manual Manual gearshifting

i For further information on the automaticdrive program, see (Y page 146).

Only change from automatic drive programE or S to manual drive program M when thevehicle is stationary.X Press program selector button :

repeatedly until the letter for the desiredgearshift program appears in themultifunction display.

i When the engine is started, the automatictransmission always switches to automaticdrive program E (drive program C in AMGvehicles).

AMG vehicles

Drive program selector with manual drive program

C ControlledEfficiency

Comfortable, economicaldriving

S Sport Sporty driving style

S+ SportPlus Extremely sporty drivingstyle

M Manual Manual gearshifting

RS RACESTART

Optimal vehicleacceleration from astandstill

i For further information on the automaticdrive program, see (Y page 146).

Only change from automatic drive program C,S or S+ to manual drive program M when thevehicle is stationary.X Turn drive program selector : until the

desired drive program appears in themultifunction display in the speedometer.The drive program indicator on driveprogram selector : lights up in red.

i The automatic transmission shifts toautomatic drive program C each time theengine is started.

i RS cannot be selected during normaldriving. For further information on RACESTART, see (Y page 174).

Steering wheel paddle shifters

: Left-hand steering wheel paddle shifter; Right-hand steering wheel paddle shifter

In the automatic drive program, you canrestrict or derestrict the shift range by usingthe steering wheel paddle shifters(Y page 146).In the manual drive program, you can changegear using the steering wheel paddle shiftersor the selector lever (Y page 147).

i You can only change gear with thesteering wheel paddle shifters when thetransmission is in position D.


Driv

ing

and

park

ing

Z

Automatic drive programDrive program E (drive program C on AMGvehicles) is characterized by the following:Rcomfort-oriented engine and automatic

transmission settingsRoptimal fuel consumption resulting from

the automatic transmission shifting upsoonerRthe vehicle pulling away more gently in

forward and reverse gears, unless theaccelerator pedal is depressed fullyRincreased sensitivity. This improves driving

stability on slippery road surfaces, forexampleRthe automatic transmission shifting up

sooner. This results in the vehicle beingdriven at lower engine speeds and thewheels being less likely to spin

Drive program S (drive programs S and S+ onAMG vehicles) is characterized by thefollowing:Rsporty engine and automatic transmission

settingsRthe vehicle pulling away in first gearRthe automatic transmission shifting up

laterRthe fuel consumption possibly being higher

as a result of the later automatictransmission shift points

Shift ranges

IntroductionWhen the automatic transmission is inposition D, it is possible to restrict orderestrict the shift range (Y page 146).The shift range selected is shown in themultifunction display. The automatictransmission shifts only as far as the selectedgear.

Shift range

= You can use the engine's brakingeffect.

5 To use the braking effect of theengine on downhill gradients andfor driving:Ron steep mountain roadsRin mountainous terrainRin arduous conditions

4 To use the braking effect of theengine on extremely steep downhillgradients and on long downhillstretches

Restricting the shift rangeX Press the selector lever to the left towards

D–.orX Pull the left-hand steering wheel paddle

shifter.The automatic transmission shifts downone gear and restricts the shift range to therelevant gear.

i If the engine exceeds the maximumengine speed when shifting down, theautomatic transmission protects againstengine damage by not shifting down.

i If the maximum engine speed for the shiftrange is reached and you continue toaccelerate, the automatic transmissionshifts up in order to prevent the enginefrom overrevving, even if the shift range isrestricted.

Derestricting the shift rangeX Briefly press the selector lever to the right

towards D+.orX Pull the right-hand steering wheel paddle

shifter.The shift range is derestricted.


ivin

g an

d pa

rkin

g

Clearing the shift range restrictionX Press and hold the selector lever towards

D+ until D is shown once more in themultifunction display.

orX Pull and hold the right-hand steering wheel

paddle shifter until D is shown again in themultifunction display.The automatic transmission shifts from thecurrent shift range directly to D.

Selecting the ideal shift rangeX Press the selector lever to the left towards

D– and hold it in position.orX Pull the left-hand steering wheel paddle

shifter and hold it in position.The automatic transmission shifts to thegear which allows optimum accelerationand deceleration. To do this, the automatictransmission shifts down one or moregears.

Manual drive program

Switching on the manual drive programThe manual drive program is only available forvehicles with the dynamic handling packageand for AMG vehicles.Manual drive program M is different fromdrive program S (in AMG vehicles, driveprograms S and S+) with regard tospontaneity, responsiveness andsmoothness of gear changes.Manual drive program M can be selectedusing the drive program selector or theprogram selector button. You can changegears using the steering wheel paddle shiftersor the selector lever in manual drive programM if the transmission is in position D.X Press the program selector button

(Y page 144) repeatedly until M appears inthe multifunction display.

X AMG vehicles: turn the drive programselector (Y page 145) until M appears in themultifunction display.The indicator M on the drive programselector lights up in red.

Upshiftingi Vehicles with the dynamic handling

package: if the maximum engine speed forthe shift range is reached and you continueto accelerate, the automatic transmissionshifts up, except when manual driveprogram M is selected.

X Briefly press the selector lever to the righttowards D+.

orX Pull the right-hand steering wheel paddle

shifter (Y page 145).The automatic transmission shifts up to thenext gear.

Vehicles with AMG engines! In manual drive program M, the automatic

transmission does not shift upautomatically even when the enginelimiting speed for the current gear isreached. When the engine limiting speed isreached, the fuel supply is cut to preventthe engine from overrevving. Always makesure that the engine speed does not reachthe red area of the tachometer. There isotherwise a risk of engine damage.

Before the engine speed reaches the red area,an upshift indicator appears in themultifunction display.

: Gear indicator; Upshift indicator


Driv

ing

and

park

ing

Z

DownshiftingX Briefly press the selector lever to the left

towards D–.orX Pull the left-hand steering wheel paddle

shifter (Y page 145).The automatic transmission shifts down tothe next gear.

i If you brake the vehicle or stop withoutshifting down, the automatic transmissionwill shift down to a gear that will allow thevehicle to accelerate or pull away again.

i Vehicles with the dynamic handling package: to avoid overrevving the enginewhen downshifting, the automatictransmission does not shift to a lower gearif this would result in the maximum enginespeed being exceeded.

i For maximum acceleration, push theselector lever to the left or pull and hold theleft-hand steering wheel paddle shifter untilthe transmission shifts to the optimal gearfor the current speed.

Kickdowni Vehicles with an AMG engine: it is not

possible to use kickdown in manual driveprogram M.

You can also use kickdown for maximumacceleration in manual drive program M.X Vehicles for USA: fully depress the

accelerator pedal.The transmission shifts to a lower geardepending on the engine speed.

X Vehicles for Canada: depress theaccelerator pedal beyond the pressurepoint.The transmission shifts to a lower geardepending on the engine speed.

i During kickdown, you cannot change gearusing the steering wheel paddle shifters orthe selector lever.

Switching off the manual drive programX Vehicles with the dynamic handling

package: press the program selectorbutton (Y page 144). M is no longer shownin the multifunction display.

X AMG vehicles: turn the drive programselector (Y page 145) until C, S or S+appears in the multifunction display.


ivin

g an

d pa

rkin

g

Problems with the transmission


The transmission hasproblems shifting gear.

The transmission is losing oil.X Have the transmission checked at a qualified specialist

workshop, e.g. an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center,immediately.

The acceleration abilityis deteriorating.The transmission nolonger changes gear.

The transmission is in emergency mode.It is only possible to shift into second gear and reverse gear.X Stop the vehicle.X Shift the transmission to position P.X Switch off the engine.X Wait at least 10 seconds before restarting the engine.X Shift the transmission to position D or R.

If D is selected, the transmission shifts into second gear; if R isselected, the transmission shifts into reverse gear.

X Have the transmission checked at a qualified specialistworkshop, e.g. an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center,immediately.

Releasing the parking lock manuallyIn the event of an electrical malfunction, it ispossible to release the selector lever lockmanually to move it out of position P, e.g. ifyou wish to tow the vehicle away.

! Do not use any sharp-edged objects toremove the selector lever gaiter from thecenter console. This could damage theselector lever gaiter.

X Apply the parking brake.X Pry off selector lever gaiter : with a flat,

blunt object, (e.g. a screwdriver wrapped incloth) from the right-hand edge, pulling itup and out.

X Press release buttons ; down andsimultaneously move the selector lever outof position P.The selector lever can now be moved freelyuntil it is returned to position P.

Transfer caseThis section is only valid for vehicles with 4-wheel drive (4MATIC). Power is alwaystransmitted to both axles.

! Performance tests may only be carriedout on a 2-axle dynamometer. The brakesystem or transfer case could otherwise bedamaged. Contact a qualified specialistworkshop for a performance test.Mercedes-Benz recommends that you use


Driv

ing

and

park

ing

Z

an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center forthis purpose.

! If the parking brake is being tested on abrake dynamometer, the ignition must beswitched off (SmartKey or Start/Stopbutton in position 0 or 1), as ESP® willotherwise automatically intervene. Thebrake system could otherwise be damaged.

Refueling


G WARNINGGasoline is highly flammable and poisonous.It burns violently and can cause seriouspersonal injury.Never allow sparks, flames or smokingmaterials near gasoline.Turn off the engine before refueling.Whenever you are around gasoline, avoidinhaling fumes and any skin or clothingcontact.Direct skin contact with fuels and theinhalation of fuel vapors are damaging to yourhealth.

G WARNINGOverfilling of the fuel tank may createpressure in the system which could cause agas discharge. This could cause the gasolineto spray back out when removing the fuelpump nozzle, which could cause personalinjury.

G WARNINGC 300 and C 300 Sport with automatictransmission:Flexible fuel vehicle (with Ethanol up to E85! sticker on the fuel filler flap):Ethanol fuel (E85) and its vapors are highlyflammable, poisonous and fast burning.Ethanol fuel can cause serious injury if ignited,or if you come into contact with it or inhale itsvapors. Avoid inhaling ethanol vapors. Avoid

skin contact with ethanol. Extinguish anynaked flames before refueling. Never allowsparks or smoking materials near ethanol.

! Do not use diesel to refuel vehicles with agasoline engine. Even small amounts of thewrong fuel result in damage to the fuelsystem and engine.

! Do not switch on the ignition if youaccidentally refuel with the wrong fuel.Otherwise, the fuel will enter the fuel lines.Notify a qualified specialist workshop andhave the fuel tank and fuel lines drainedcompletely.

Gasoline

Fuel grade! You should only refuel with premium-

grade unleaded gasoline, as this avoidsdamaging the catalytic converter.Flexible fuel vehicles, identifiable from thelabel inside the fuel filler flap, can berefueled with E85. For further informationon flexible fuel, see "Fuel".If engine running problems are apparent,have the cause checked immediately andrepaired. Excess unburned fuel canotherwise enter the catalytic converter,leading to overheating and possiblycausing a fire.

! Use a filter when refueling from a fuel can.Otherwise, the fuel lines and/or injectionsystem could be blocked by particles fromthe fuel can.

i Only refuel with premium-grade unleadedgasoline with a specified minimum octanenumber of 91 (average value of 96 RON/86 MON).You will usually find information about thefuel grade on the pump. If you cannot findthe label on the pump, ask the staff forassistance.

150 RefuelingDr

ivin

g an

d pa

rkin

g

C 300 and C 300 Sport with automatictransmission: you can tell a flexible fuelvehicle by the label inside the fuel filler flap.You can find more information under "Fuel"(Y page 347), or by contacting anauthorized Mercedes-Benz Service Centeror visiting http://www.mbusa.com (USAonly).

Refueling

Fuel filler flapThe fuel filler flap is unlocked or lockedautomatically when you open or close thevehicle with the SmartKey or using KEYLESS-GO.The position of the fuel filler cap is displayedin the instrument cluster 8. The arrownext to the filling pump indicates the side ofthe vehicle.

: To open the fuel filler flap; To insert the fuel filler cap= Tire pressure table? Fuel type

OpeningX Switch off the engine.X Remove the SmartKey from the ignition

lock.KEYLESS-GO: open the driver’s door. Thisswitches the ignition to position 0, whichcorresponds to having removed the

SmartKey. The driver’s door can be closedagain.

X Press the fuel filler flap in the direction ofarrow :.The fuel filler flap opens slightly.

X Open the fuel filler flap.X Turn the fuel filler cap counter-clockwise

and remove it.X Insert the fuel filler cap into the holder

bracket on the inside of filler flap ;.X Completely insert the pump nozzle into the

filler neck and refuel.X Only fill the tank until the pump nozzle

switches off.

! Overfilling the fuel tank could damage thefuel system.

ClosingX Replace the fuel filler cap and turn it

clockwise. The fuel filler cap audiblyengages.

X Close the fuel filler flap.

i If you drive with the fuel filler cap open,reserve fuel warning lamp 8 flashes. Inaddition, the ; Check Engine warninglamp may light up. A message appears inthe multifunction display (Y page 228).For further information on warning andindicator lamps in the instrument cluster,see (Y page 246).

i Close the fuel filler flap before locking thevehicle. A locking pin otherwise preventsthe fuel filler flap from closing after thevehicle has been locked.

Fuel filler flap emergency release

G WARNINGAvoid contact with the vehicle walls as theymay contain sharp edges. Otherwise, youcould injure yourself while releasing the fuelfiller flap.

Refueling 151

Driv

ing

and

park

ing

Z

The emergency release is located in the trunkbehind the side trim on the right-hand side,when viewed in the direction of travel.X Open the trunk lid.X Open the right-hand side trim panel

(Y page 306).

X Pull emergency release : in the directionof the arrow.The fuel filler flap is unlocked.

X Open the fuel filler flap.

152 RefuelingDr

ivin

g an

d pa

rkin

g

Problems with fuel and the fuel tank


Fuel is leaking from thevehicle.

G Risk of explosion or fireThe fuel line or the fuel tank is defective.X Turn the SmartKey to position 0(Y page 137) in the ignition lock

immediately and remove it.X Do not restart the engine under any circumstances.X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

The fuel filler flapcannot be opened.

The fuel filler flap is not unlocked.orThe SmartKey battery is discharged.X Unlock the vehicle using the mechanical key (Y page 73).X Open the trunk lid.X Manually unlock the fuel filler flap using the emergency release

(Y page 151).

The fuel filler flap is unlocked, but the opening mechanism isjammed.X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

Parking


G WARNINGDo not park this vehicle in areas wherecombustible materials can come into contactwith the hot exhaust system. Do not park thevehicle on dry grassland or harvested grainfields. Combustible materials, such as grass,hay or leaves could be ignited by the hotexhaust system and cause a vehicle fire.Unintended vehicle movement can causeserious personal injury or damage to thevehicle or the vehicle drivetrain. To reducesuch risks, always do the following beforeturning off the engine and leaving the vehicle:Rkeep your right foot on the brake pedal.Rengage the parking brake.Rshift the automatic transmission to park

position P.

Rslowly release the brake pedal.Rwhen parked on an incline, always turn the

front wheels towards the road curb.Rturn the SmartKey in the ignition lock to

position 0 and remove the SmartKey fromthe ignition lock, or press the KEYLESS-GOStart/Stop button.Rtake the SmartKey with you and lock the

vehicle when leaving.

Switching off the engine


G WARNINGDo not turn off the engine before the vehiclehas come to a complete stop. With the enginenot running, there is no power assistance forthe brake and steering systems. In this case,it is important to keep in mind that a

Parking 153

Driv

ing

and

park

ing

Z

considerably higher degree of effort isnecessary to brake and steer the vehicle.

Vehicles with automatic transmissionX Apply the parking brake firmly.X Shift the transmission to position P.

Using the SmartKeyX Turn the SmartKey to position 0 in the

ignition lock and remove it.The immobilizer is activated.

i The SmartKey can only be removed if thetransmission is in position P.

Using KEYLESS-GOX Press the Start/Stop button (Y page 137).

The engine stops and all the indicatorlamps in the instrument cluster go out.

i When the driver's door is closed, thiscorresponds to SmartKey position 1. Whenthe driver's door is open, it corresponds toSmartKey position 0 or "SmartKeyremoved".

If you attempt to switch off the engine whilethe selector lever is in a position other thanP, a message appears in the multifunctiondisplay and you hear a tone.

Parking brake

G WARNINGEngaging the parking brake while the vehicleis in motion can cause the rear wheels to lockup. You could lose control of the vehicle andcause an accident. In addition, the vehicle'sbrake lights do not light up when the parkingbrake is engaged.

G WARNINGWhen leaving the vehicle, always remove theSmartKey from the starter switch, take it withyou, and lock the vehicle. Do not leavechildren unattended in the vehicle, or withaccess to an unlocked vehicle. Children could

release the parking brake and/or shift theautomatic transmission out of park positionP, either of which could result in an accidentand/or serious personal injury.

X To apply: depress parking brake ; firmly.When the engine is running, the $ (USAonly) or J (Canada only) indicator lamplights up in the instrument cluster.

X To release: depress the brake pedal andkeep it depressed.

X Pull release handle :.When the ignition is switched on or theengine is running, the $ (USA only) orJ (Canada only) indicator lamp goes outin the instrument cluster.

Parking the vehicle for a long periodIf you leave the vehicle parked for longer thanfour weeks, the battery may be damaged byexhaustive discharge.X Connect a trickle charger.i You can obtain information about trickle

chargers from a qualified specialistworkshop, e.g. an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.

If you leave the vehicle parked for longer thansix weeks, the vehicle may suffer damage asa result of lack of use.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop and

seek advice.

154 ParkingDr

ivin

g an

d pa

rkin

g

Driving tips

General driving tips


G WARNINGAlways remember that you must concentrateprimarily on driving the vehicle. The driver'sconcentration must always be directedprimarily at road traffic. For your own safetyand that of others, we recommend that youstop the vehicle at a safe place and inaccordance with the traffic conditions beforemaking or accepting a phone call.Comply with all legal requirements if you usethe telephone while driving. Use the hands-free system and only use the telephone whenroad, weather and traffic conditions permit. Insome jurisdictions, it is forbidden for driversto use mobile phones while driving.Only operate the audio system or COMAND(Cockpit Management and Data System) incompliance with all legal requirements andwhen the road, weather and traffic conditionspermit. You may otherwise not be able toobserve the traffic conditions, endangeringyourself and others.Remember that your vehicle covers a distanceof 44 feet (approximately 14 m) a secondwhen it is traveling at only 30 mph(approximately 50 km/h).

Drive sensibly – save fuelObserve the following tips to save fuel:X The tires should always be inflated to the

recommended tire pressure.X Remove unnecessary loads.X Remove roof racks when they are not

needed.X Warm up the engine at low engine speeds.X Avoid frequent acceleration or braking.X Have all maintenance work carried out as

indicated by the service intervals in theService Booklet or by the service intervaldisplay.

Fuel consumption also increases whendriving in cold weather, in stop-and-go trafficand in mountainous terrain.

Drinking and driving

G WARNINGDrinking and driving and/or taking drugs anddriving are very dangerous combinations.Even a small amount of alcohol or drugs canaffect your reflexes, perceptions andjudgment.The possibility of a serious or even fatalaccident are greatly increased when you drinkor take drugs and drive.Do not drink or take drugs and drive or allowanyone to drive who has been drinking ortaking drugs.

Pedals

G WARNINGMake sure absolutely no objects areobstructing the pedals' range of movement.Keep the driver's footwell clear of allobstacles. If there are any floormats orcarpets in the footwell, make sure that thepedals still have sufficient clearance.During sudden driving or braking maneuvers,the objects could get caught between thepedals. You could then no longer brake oraccelerate. This could lead to accidents andinjury.

Rolling with the engine switched off

G WARNINGThere is no power assistance for the steeringand the brake when the engine is not running.Steering and braking requires significantlymore effort and you could lose control of thevehicle and cause an accident as a result.Do not turn off the engine while the vehicle isin motion.

Driving tips 155

Driv

ing

and

park

ing

Z

Exhaust check

G WARNINGInhalation of exhaust gas is hazardous to yourhealth. All exhaust gas contains carbonmonoxide (CO), and inhaling it can causeunconsciousness and possible death.Do not run the engine in confined areas (suchas a garage) which are not properly ventilated.If you think that exhaust gas fumes areentering the vehicle while driving, have thecause determined and correctedimmediately. If you must drive under theseconditions, drive only with at least onewindow fully open at all times.

Certain engine systems are designed to keepthe level of poisonous components in exhaustfumes within legal limits.These systems only work at peak efficiencywhen they are maintained exactly inaccordance with the manufacturer'sspecifications. For this reason, all work on theengine must be carried out only by qualifiedand authorized Mercedes-Benz technicians.The engine settings must not be changed inany circumstances. Furthermore, all specificservice work must be carried out at regularintervals and in accordance with theMercedes-Benz service requirements. Detailscan be found in the Service Booklet.

Brakes



G WARNINGMake sure that you do not endanger otherroad users when you apply the brakes.

Downhill gradients! On long and steep gradients, you must

reduce the load on the brakes by shiftingearly to a lower gear. This allows you to takeadvantage of the engine braking effect andhelps avoid overheating and excessivewear of the brakes.When you take advantage of the enginebraking effect, a drive wheel may not turnfor some time, e.g. on a slippery roadsurface. This could cause damage to thedrive train. This type of damage is notcovered by the Mercedes-Benz warranty.

Heavy and light loads

G WARNINGDepressing the brake pedal constantly resultsin excessive and premature wear to the brakepads.It may also cause the brakes to overheat,seriously impairing their effectiveness. It maythen not be possible to stop the vehicle insufficient time to avoid an accident.

If the brakes have been subjected to a heavyload, do not stop the vehicle immediately, butdrive on for a short while. This allows theairflow to cool the brakes more quickly.

Wet roads

G WARNINGAfter driving in heavy rain for some timewithout applying the brakes or through waterdeep enough to wet brake components, thefirst braking action may be somewhatreduced. You have to depress the brake pedalmore firmly. Maintain a safe distance fromvehicles in front.

After driving on a wet road or having thevehicle washed, brake firmly while payingattention to the traffic conditions. This willwarm up the brake discs, thereby drying themmore quickly and protecting them againstcorrosion.

156 Driving tipsDr

ivin

g an

d pa

rkin

g

Limited braking performance on salt-treated roads

G WARNINGThe layer of salt on the brake discs and thebrake pads/linings may cause a delay in thebraking effect, resulting in a significantlylonger braking distance, which could lead toan accident.To avoid this danger, you should:Roccasionally brake carefully, without

putting other road users at risk, when youare driving on salted roads. This helps toremove any salt that may have started tobuild up on the brake discs and the brakepads/linings.Rmaintain a greater distance to the vehicle

ahead and drive with particular care.Rcarefully apply the brakes at the end of a

trip and immediately after commencing anew trip, so that salt residues are removedfrom the brake discs.

Servicing the brakes! If the red brake warning lamp lights up in

the instrument cluster and you hear awarning tone while the engine is running,the brake fluid level may be too low.Observe additional warning messages inthe multifunction display.The brake fluid level may be too low due tobrake pad wear or leaking brake lines.Have the brake system checkedimmediately. This work should be carriedout at an authorized Mercedes-BenzCenter.

All checks and maintenance work on thebrake system must be carried out at aqualified specialist workshop. This workshould be carried out at an authorizedMercedes-Benz Center.Have the brake pads replaced and the brakefluid renewed at a qualified specialistworkshop, e.g. an authorized Mercedes-BenzCenter.

G WARNINGIf brake pads or brake fluid other than thoserecommended are used, the brakingproperties of the vehicle can be degraded toan extent that safe braking is substantiallyimpaired. This could result in an accident.

! Vehicles with 4MATIC: function orperformance tests may only be carried outon a 2-axle dynamometer. If you areplanning to have the vehicle tested on sucha dynamometer, contact an authorizedMercedes-Benz Center to obtain furtherinformation first. Otherwise, you coulddamage the drive train or the brake system.

! Vehicles with 4MATIC: as the ESP®

system operates automatically, the engineand the ignition must be switched off(SmartKey in position 0 or 1 in the ignitionlock or Start/Stop button in position 0 or1) while the parking brake is being testedon a brake dynamometer.Braking maneuvers triggered automaticallyby ESP® may seriously damage the brakesystem.

! Vehicles with 4MATIC: as the ESP®

system operates automatically, the engineand the ignition system must be switchedoff (SmartKey in position 0 or 1 in theignition lock or Start/Stop button inposition 0 or 1) when:Rtesting the parking brake on a brake

dynamometer.Ryou intend to have the vehicle towed with

the front axle raised.Braking maneuvers triggered automaticallyby ESP® may seriously damage the brakesystem.

If your brake system is subject only tomoderate loads, you should test thefunctionality of your brakes at regularintervals by pressing firmly on the brake pedalat high speeds. This improves the grip of thebrake pads.

Driving tips 157

Driv

ing

and

park

ing

Z


You can find a description of Brake Assist(BAS) on (Y page 59) or of BAS PLUS on(Y page 60).

High-performance brake system forAMG vehiclesThe high-performance brake system isinstalled only on the C 63 AMG.

G WARNINGNew vehicle brake pads and discs, andreplacement brake pads and discs may takeseveral hundred miles of driving until theyprovide optimum braking efficiency. Until thattime, you may need to use increased brakepedal pressure while braking. Please be awareof this and adjust your driving and brakingaccordingly during this break-in period.Excessive high-demand braking will causecorrespondingly high brake wear. Please beattentive to the brake warning lamp in theinstrument cluster and brake conditionmessages in the multifunction display.Especially for high performance driving, it isimportant to maintain and have the brakesystem checked regularly.

The high-performance brake system isdesigned for heavy loads. This may lead tonoise when braking. This will depend on:RspeedRbraking forceRenvironmental conditions, such as

temperature and humidityThe wear of individual components of thebrake system, such as the brake pads/liningsor brake discs, depends on the individualdriving style and operating conditions.For this reason, it is impossible to state amileage that will be valid under allcircumstances. An aggressive driving stylewill lead to high wear. You can obtain further

information about this from your authorizedMercedes-Benz Center.

Driving on wet roads

HydroplaningIf water has accumulated to a certain depthon the road surface, there is a danger ofhydroplaning occurring, even if:Ryou drive at low speeds.Rthe tires have adequate tread depth.For this reason, in the event of heavy rain orin conditions in which hydroplaning can occuryou must drive in the following manner:Rreduce your speedRavoid rutsRbrake carefully

Driving on flooded roads! Do not drive through flooded areas.

Check the depth of any water before drivingthrough it. Drive slowly through standingwater. Otherwise, water may enter thevehicle interior or the engine compartment.This can damage the electroniccomponents in the engine or the automatictransmission. Water can also be drawn inby the engine's air suction nozzles and thiscan cause engine damage.

Winter driving

General notes

G WARNINGIf the vehicle becomes trapped in snow,ensure that snow is kept away from theexhaust pipe and from around the vehicle aslong as the engine is running. Otherwise,poisonous carbon monoxide (CO) may enterthe vehicle, resulting in loss of consciousnessand even death.

158 Driving tipsDr

ivin

g an

d pa

rkin

g

To assure sufficient fresh air ventilation, opena window slightly on the side of the vehiclenot facing the wind.

At the onset of winter, have your vehiclewinterproofed at a qualified specialistworkshop, e.g. at an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.Observe the notes in the "Winter operation"section (Y page 312).

Driving with summer tiresObserve the notes in the "Winter operation"section (Y page 312).

Slippery road surfaces

G WARNINGThe outside temperature indicator is notdesigned to serve as an ice-warning deviceand is therefore unsuitable for that purpose.Indicated temperatures just above thefreezing point do not guarantee that the roadsurface is free of ice. The road may still be icy,especially in wooded areas or on bridges.


Drive particularly carefully on slippery roadsurfaces. Avoid sudden acceleration, steeringand braking maneuvers. Do not use cruisecontrol or DISTRONIC PLUS.If the vehicle threatens to skid or cannot bestopped when moving at low speed:X Shift the transmission to position N.

i For more information on driving withsnow chains, see (Y page 313).


Driving systems

Cruise control

Important safety notesCruise control maintains a constant roadspeed for you. It brakes automatically in orderto avoid exceeding the set speed. On long andsteep downhill gradients, especially if thevehicle is laden, you must select shift range1, 2 or 3 in good time. By doing so, you willmake use of the braking effect of the engine,which relieves the load on the brake systemand prevents the brakes from overheatingand wearing too quickly.Use cruise control only if road and trafficconditions make it appropriate to maintain asteady speed for a prolonged period. You canset any road speed above 20 mph(30 km/h).

G WARNINGThe cruise control is a convenience systemdesigned to assist the driver during vehicleoperation. The driver is and must alwaysremain responsible for the vehicle's speedand for safe brake operation.Only use the cruise control if the road, traffic,and weather conditions make it advisable totravel at a constant speed.RThe use of the cruise control can be

dangerous on winding roads or in heavytraffic because conditions do not allow safedriving at a constant speed.RThe use of the cruise control can be

dangerous on slippery roads. Rapidchanges in tire traction can result in wheelspin and loss of control.RDeactivate the cruise control when driving

in fog.The "Resume" function should only beoperated if the driver is fully aware of thepreviously set speed and wishes to resumethis particular preset speed.

Driving systems 159

Driv

ing

and

park

ing

Z

G WARNINGThe cruise control brakes automatically sothat the set speed is not exceeded.

Cruise control lever

: To switch on or to increase the speed; To switch on or to reduce the speed= To deactivate cruise control? To switch on with the current speed or

with the last stored speedWhen you activate cruise control, the storedspeed is shown in the multifunction displayfor five seconds. In the multifunction display,the segments between the stored speed andthe maximum speed light up.

Storing and maintaining the currentspeedYou can store the current speed if you aredriving faster than 20 mph (30 km/h).X Accelerate the vehicle to the desired

speed.X Briefly press the cruise control lever

up : or down ;.X Remove your foot from the accelerator

pedal.Cruise control is activated. The vehicleautomatically maintains the stored speed.

i Cruise control may be unable to maintainthe stored speed on uphill gradients. Thestored speed is resumed when the gradientevens out. Cruise control maintains the

stored speed on downhill gradients byautomatically applying the brakes.

Storing the current speed or calling upthe last stored speed

G WARNINGThe set speed stored in memory should onlybe set again if prevailing road conditions andlegal speed limits permit. Possibleacceleration or deceleration differencesarising from returning to the preset speedcould cause an accident and/or serious injuryto you and others.

X Briefly pull the cruise control lever towardsyou ?.

X Remove your foot from the acceleratorpedal.The first time cruise control is activated, itstores the current speed or regulates thespeed of the vehicle to the previouslystored speed.

Setting a speed

G WARNINGKeep in mind that it may take a brief momentuntil the vehicle has made the necessaryadjustments.Increase or decrease the set vehicle speed toa value that the prevailing road conditions andlegal speed limits permit. Otherwise, suddenand unexpected acceleration or decelerationof the vehicle could cause an accident and/or serious injury to you and others.

X Press the cruise control lever up : for ahigher speed or down ; for a lower speed.

X Keep the cruise control lever pressed untilthe desired speed is reached.

X Release the cruise control lever.The new speed is stored.

i Cruise control is not deactivated if youdepress the accelerator pedal. Forexample, if you accelerate briefly to

160 Driving systemsDr

ivin

g an

d pa

rkin

g

overtake, cruise control adjusts thevehicle's speed to the last speed storedafter you have finished overtaking.

Making adjustments in 1 mph (Canada:1 km/h) incrementsX Briefly press the cruise control lever to the

pressure point, up : for a higher speed ordown ; for a lower speed.The last speed stored is increased orreduced.

Making adjustments in 5 mph (Canada:10 km/h) incrementsX Briefly press the cruise control lever

beyond the pressure point, up : for ahigher speed or down ; for a lower speed.The last speed stored is increased orreduced.

Deactivating cruise controlThere are several ways to deactivate cruisecontrol:X Briefly press the cruise control lever

forwards =.orX Brake.Cruise control is automatically deactivated if:Ryou depress the parking brake.Ryou are driving below 20 mph (30 km/h).RESP® intervenes or you deactivate ESP®.Ryou shift the transmission to position N

while driving.If cruise control is deactivated, you will heara warning tone. You will see the Cruise Control Off message in the multifunctiondisplay for approximately five seconds.

i The last speed stored is cleared when youswitch off the engine.

DISTRONIC PLUS

Important safety notesDISTRONIC PLUS regulates the speed andautomatically helps you maintain thedistance to the vehicle detected in front. Itbrakes automatically in order to avoidexceeding the set speed.On long and steep downhill gradients,especially if the vehicle is laden, you mustselect shift range 1, 2 or 3 in good time. Bydoing so, you will make use of the brakingeffect of the engine, which relieves the loadon the brake system and prevents the brakesfrom overheating and wearing too quickly.If a slower-moving vehicle is detected in front,DISTRONIC PLUS causes your vehicle tobrake and maintain the preset distance to thevehicle in front.

G WARNINGThe DISTRONIC PLUS requires familiarity withits operational characteristics. We stronglyrecommend that you review the followinginformation carefully before operating thesystem.

G WARNINGThe DISTRONIC PLUS is a conveniencesystem. Its speed adjustment reductioncapability is intended to make cruise controlmore effective and usable when traffic speedsvary. It is not however, intended to, nor doesit, replace the need for extreme care.The responsibility for the vehicle's speed,distance to the preceding vehicle and, mostimportantly, brake operation to ensure a safestopping distance, always remains with thedriver.The DISTRONIC PLUS cannot take street andtraffic conditions into account.Complex driving situations are not alwaysfully recognized by the DISTRONIC PLUS. Thiscould result in wrong or missing distancewarnings.

Driving systems 161

Driv

ing

and

park

ing

Z

If you want DISTRONIC PLUS to assist you,the radar sensor system must be activated(Y page 208) and operational.If there is no vehicle driving in front of you,DISTRONIC PLUS functions like cruisecontrol at a speed range between 20 mph(Canada: 30 km/h) and 120 mph(Canada: 200 km/h). If a vehicle is driving infront of you, it functions at a speed rangebetween 0 mph (0 km/h) and 120 mph(Canada: 200 km/h).Do not use DISTRONIC PLUS while driving onroads with steep gradients.As DISTRONIC PLUS transmits radar waves,it can resemble the radar detectors of theresponsible authorities. You can refer to theapplicable section in the Operator's Manual ifthere are any questions concerning this.

i USA only:This device has been approved by the FCCas a “Vehicular Radar System”. The radarsensor is intended for use in an automotiveradar system only. Removal, tampering, oraltering of the device will void anywarranties, and is not permitted by theFCC. Do not tamper with, alter, or use inany non-approved way.Any unauthorized modification to thisdevice could void the user’s authority tooperate the equipment.

i Canada only: This device complies withRSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation issubject to the following two conditions:1. This device may not cause interference,and2. this device must accept any interferencereceived, including interference that maycause undesired operation of the device.Removal, tampering, or altering of thedevice will void any warranties, and is notpermitted. Do not tamper with, alter, or usein any non-approved way.Any unauthorized modification to thisdevice could void the user’s authority tooperate the equipment.

G WARNINGThe DISTRONIC PLUS adaptive cruise controlis not a substitute for active drivinginvolvement. It does not react to pedestriansor on stationary objects, nor does it recognizeor predict the curvature and lane layout or themovement of preceding vehicles. TheDISTRONIC PLUS can only apply a maximumof 40% of the vehicle's braking power.The DISTRONIC PLUS may not detect narrowvehicles possibly driving in front of you, suchas motorcycles and vehicles driving in anoffset formation.It is the driver's responsibility at all times tobe attentive to the road, weather and trafficconditions. Additionally, the driver mustprovide the steering, braking and other drivinginputs necessary to remain in control of thevehicle.High-frequency sources such as toll stations,speed measuring systems etc. can cause theDISTRONIC PLUS system to temporarilycease functioning.

G WARNINGThe DISTRONIC PLUS cannot take road andtraffic conditions into account. Only use theDISTRONIC PLUS if the road, weather andtraffic conditions make it advisable to travelat a constant speed.

G WARNINGUse of the DISTRONIC PLUS can bedangerous on slippery roads. Rapid changesin tire traction can result in wheel spin andloss of control.The DISTRONIC PLUS does not function inadverse sight and distance conditions. Do notuse the DISTRONIC PLUS during conditions offog, heavy rain, snow or sleet.


ivin

g an

d pa

rkin

g

G WARNINGThe DISTRONIC PLUS cannot take weatherconditions into account. Switch off theDISTRONIC PLUS or do not switch it on if:Rroads are slippery or covered with snow or

ice. The wheels could lose traction whilebraking or accelerating, and the vehiclecould skid.Rthe DISTRONIC PLUS system sensor covers

are dirty or visibility is diminished due tosnow, rain or fog, for example. The distancecontrol system functionality could beimpaired.

Always pay attention to surrounding trafficconditions even while the DISTRONIC PLUS isswitched on. Otherwise, you may not be ableto recognize dangerous situations until it istoo late. This could cause an accident in whichyou and/or others could be injured.

G WARNINGThe "Resume" function should only beoperated if the driver is fully aware of thepreviously set speed and wishes to resumethis particular preset speed.

G WARNINGYour undivided attention to street and trafficconditions is necessary at all times whetherDISTRONIC PLUS is active or not.The use of DISTRONIC PLUS can bedangerous on winding roads or in heavy trafficbecause conditions do not allow safe drivingat a constant speed.DISTRONIC PLUS does not react to stationaryobjects on the road (for example, a vehiclestopped in traffic or an abandoned vehicle).DISTRONIC PLUS likewise does not react tooncoming vehicles.

Deactivate DISTRONIC PLUS:Rwhen changing to the right lane, if the

vehicles in the left lane are driving slowerRwhen driving into a filter lane or an

expressway exitRin complex driving situations, for example

in construction sites on an expresswayIn these situations DISTRONIC PLUS willmaintain the set speed if it is not deactivated.DISTRONIC PLUS is intended only formaintaining a set speed and a set distancefrom the objects moving in front of thevehicle.

G WARNINGAn intermittent warning sounds and thedistance warning lamp · in the instrumentcluster is illuminated if the DISTRONIC PLUSsystem calculates that the distance to thevehicle ahead and your vehicle's currentspeed indicate that the DISTRONIC PLUS willnot be capable of slowing the vehiclesufficiently to maintain the preset followingdistance, which creates a danger of acollision.Immediately brake the vehicle to increaseyour distance to the preceding vehicle. Thewarning sound is intended as a final cautionin which you should intercede with your ownbraking inputs to avoid a potentiallydangerous situation. Do not wait for theoperation of the warning signal to intercedewith your own braking. This will result inpotentially dangerous emergency brakingwhich will not always result in an impact beingavoided.Tailgating increases the risk of an accident.

G WARNINGDISTRONIC PLUS brakes your vehicle with amaximum deceleration of 13 ft/s2(4 m/s2).This is equivalent to approximately 40 % ofyour vehicle's maximum possibledeceleration.

Driving systems 163

Driv

ing

and

park

ing

Z

You need to brake yourself to prevent acollision. DISTRONIC PLUS brakes the vehicleto restore the set distance from the vehicleahead or the set speed.

G WARNINGIf you do not receive visual or acousticwarning signals during a critical trafficsituation, DISTRONIC PLUS has either notrecognized the collision risk, has beendeactivated or is malfunctioning.Remember, whether or not DISTRONIC PLUSis operating, it is ultimately always the driversresponsibility to apply the brakes in order tocontrol the vehicle and avoid a collision.

Cruise control lever

: To store the current speed or a higherspeed

; To store the current speed or a lowerspeed

= To deactivate DISTRONIC PLUS? To store the current speed or to call up

the last stored speedA To set the specified minimum distance

Switching on DISTRONIC PLUS, storingthe current speed and maintaining it

Important safety notesG WARNINGThe vehicle can be braked when DISTRONICPLUS is activated. For this reason, deactivateDISTRONIC PLUS if the vehicle is to be set in

motion by other means (e.g. in a car wash orby towing).

In order to activate DISTRONIC PLUS, thefollowing conditions must be fulfilled:Rthe engine must be started. It may take up

to two minutes after pulling away beforeDISTRONIC PLUS is operational.Rthe parking brake must not be applied.RESP® must be activated but not

intervening.Rthe transmission must be in position D.Rthe hood must be closed.Rthe driver's door must be closed when you

shift from P to D or your seat belt must befastened.Rthe front-passenger door and rear doors

must be closed.Rthe vehicle must not skid.

Activating while drivingWhen driving at speeds below 20 mph(30 km/h), you can only activate DISTRONICPLUS if the vehicle in front has been detectedand is shown in the multifunction display. Ifthe vehicle in front is no longer detected andshown, DISTRONIC PLUS is deactivated anda warning tone sounds.X Briefly pull the cruise control lever towards

you ?, or briefly press up : or down ;.DISTRONIC PLUS is selected.

X Keep the cruise control lever pressedup : or down ; until the desired speedis set.

X Remove your foot from the acceleratorpedal.Your vehicle adapts its speed to that of thevehicle in front, but only up to the desiredstored speed.

i If you do not fully release the acceleratorpedal, the DISTRONIC PLUS Overridemessage is shown in the multifunctiondisplay. The set distance to a slower-moving vehicle in front will then not bemaintained. You will be driving at the speed


ivin

g an

d pa

rkin

g

you determine by the position of theaccelerator pedal.

Activating when driving towards astationary vehicleIf the vehicle in front of you is stationary, youcan only activate DISTRONIC PLUS once yourvehicle is stationary as well.X Briefly pull the cruise control lever towards

you ?, or briefly press up : or down ;.DISTRONIC PLUS is selected.

i DISTRONIC PLUS can only be activated atunder 20 mph (30 km/h) if a vehicle in fronthas been detected. Therefore, theDISTRONIC PLUS distance display in theinstrument cluster should be activated(Y page 204).

X Keep the cruise control lever pressedup : or down ; until the desired speedis set.

i You can use the cruise control lever to setthe stored speed and the control on thecruise control lever to set the specifiedminimum distance (Y page 168).

Pulling awayX If the vehicle in front pulls away: remove

your foot from the brake pedal.X Briefly pull the cruise control lever towards

you ?.orX Accelerate briefly.

Your vehicle pulls away and adapts itsspeed to that of the vehicle in front.

DrivingIf there is no vehicle in front, DISTRONICPLUS operates in the same way as cruisecontrol.If a slower-moving vehicle is detected in front,DISTRONIC causes your vehicle to brake. Thismaintains the preset distance to the vehiclein front.If DISTRONIC PLUS detects a faster-movingvehicle in front, it increases the driving speed

of your vehicle, but only up to the desiredspeed you have stored.

G WARNINGIf you depress the brake, DISTRONIC PLUS isdeactivated unless your vehicle is stationary.DISTRONIC PLUS then no longer brakes yourvehicle. In such cases, control the distancefrom vehicles travelling in front with the brakealone. You could otherwise cause an accidentand thereby injure yourself and others. Thedriver remains fully responsible for thevehicle's distance from other vehicles, thespeed being driven and for braking in goodtime.

Changing lanesIf you wish to change to the passing lane (inleft-hand-drive vehicles, the passing lane isthe left-hand lane), DISTRONIC PLUSsupports you if:Ryou are driving faster than 40 mph

(60 km/h).RDISTRONIC PLUS is maintaining the

distance to a vehicle in front.Ryou switch on the appropriate turn signals.RDISTRONIC PLUS does not detect a danger

of collision.If these conditions are met, your vehicle isaccelerated. Acceleration will be interruptedif changing lanes takes too long or if thedistance between your vehicle and thevehicle in front becomes too small.

G WARNINGDISTRONIC PLUS and Active Blind Spot Assistare only aids designed to assist driving.They do not relieve you of the responsibilityof paying attention. The driver remains fullyresponsible for the vehicle's distance fromother vehicles, the vehicle's speed and forbraking in good time. Always pay attention totraffic conditions and your surroundings.Otherwise, you may fail to recognize dangersin time, cause an accident and injure yourselfand others.

Driving systems 165

Driv

ing

and

park

ing

Z

Vehicles with COMANDi The following function is not operational

in all countries.DISTRONIC PLUS uses additional informationfrom your navigation system so that it canreact appropriately to certain trafficsituations. This is the case if, while followinga vehicle, DISTRONIC PLUS is active and you:Rapproach or drive through a traffic circleRapproach a T intersectionRturn off at a freeway exitEven if the vehicle in front leaves thedetection range, DISTRONIC PLUStemporarily maintains the current drivingspeed and does not accelerate. This is basedon the current map data in the navigationsystem.

Example: traffic circle

The current speed is maintained:Rapproximately 10 seconds before the

traffic circle/T intersection and forapproximately 1.5 seconds when driving onthe traffic circleRapproximately 12 seconds before reaching

a freeway exit and approximately4 seconds after the freeway exit

Afterwards, the vehicle accelerates back tothe set speed you specified.

StoppingG WARNINGNever get out of the vehicle when DISTRONICPLUS is activated.

DISTRONIC PLUS must also never beoperated, activated or deactivated by apassenger or from outside the vehicle.DISTRONIC PLUS does not replace theparking brake and must not be used forparking.The DISTRONIC PLUS braking effect iscanceled and the vehicle can start moving if:RDISTRONIC PLUS is deactivated using the

cruise control lever.Ryou accelerate.Rthere is a malfunction in the system or an

interruption in the power supply, e.g.battery failure.Rthe electrical system in the engine

compartment, the battery or the fuses aretampered with.Rthe battery is disconnected.If you wish to leave the vehicle or park it,deactivate DISTRONIC PLUS and secure thevehicle against rolling away.

If DISTRONIC PLUS detects that the vehiclein front is stopping, it brakes your vehicle untilit is stationary.Once your vehicle is stationary, it remainsstationary and you do not need to depress thebrake.

i Depending on the specified minimumdistance, your vehicle will come to astandstill at a sufficient distance behind thevehicle in front. The specified minimumdistance is set using the control on thecruise control lever.

You will see a warning message in themultifunction display if DISTRONIC PLUS isactivated and:Rthe driver's door is open and the driver's

seat belt is unfastened.Rthe engine is switched off.Rthe hood is opened.Shift to 'P'


ivin

g an

d pa

rkin

g

X Move the selector lever to P to prevent thevehicle from rolling away.DISTRONIC PLUS is deactivated. Thewarning message in the multifunctiondisplay disappears.

The horn will also sound at regular intervals ifDISTRONIC PLUS is activated and you:Rswitch the engine off, open the driver's

door and take off your seat beltRopen the hoodThe sounding of the horn alerts you to the factthat the vehicle has been parked whileDISTRONIC PLUS is still activated. The soundbecomes louder if you attempt to lock thevehicle. The vehicle is not locked untilDISTRONIC PLUS is deactivated.

i If the engine has been switched off, itcannot be started again until DISTRONICPLUS has been deactivated.

If DISTRONIC PLUS is activated and amalfunction occurs in the system or if thereis a disruption in the power supply, theBrake Immediately message is shown inthe multifunction display. Immediatelydepress the brake firmly until the warningmessage in the multifunction display goes outor shift the transmission to position P.DISTRONIC PLUS is then deactivated.

Setting a speed

G WARNINGKeep in mind that it may take a brief momentuntil the vehicle has made the necessaryadjustments.Increase or decrease the set vehicle speed toa value that the prevailing road conditions andlegal speed limits permit. Otherwise, suddenand unexpected acceleration or decelerationof the vehicle could cause an accident and/or serious injury to you and others.

X Press the cruise control lever up : for ahigher speed or down ; for a lower speed.

X Keep the cruise control lever pressed untilthe desired speed is reached.

X Release the cruise control lever.The new speed is stored. DISTRONIC PLUSis activated and adjusts the vehicle's speedto the new speed stored.

Making adjustments in 1 mph (Canada:1 km/h) incrementsX Briefly press the cruise control lever to the

pressure point, up : for a higher speed ordown ; for a lower speed.The last speed stored is increased orreduced.

Making adjustments in 5 mph (Canada:10 km/h) incrementsX Briefly press the cruise control lever

beyond the pressure point, up : for ahigher speed or down ; for a lower speed.The last speed stored is increased orreduced.

Storing the current speed or calling upa stored speed

G WARNINGThe set speed stored in memory should onlybe set again if prevailing road conditions andlegal speed limits permit. Possibleacceleration or deceleration differencesarising from returning to the preset speedcould cause an accident and/or serious injuryto you and others.

X Briefly pull the cruise control lever towardsyou ?.

X Remove your foot from the acceleratorpedal.DISTRONIC PLUS is activated. The firsttime it is activated, the current speed isstored. Otherwise, it sets the vehicle cruisespeed to the previously stored value.

Driving systems 167

Driv

ing

and

park

ing

Z

Setting the specified minimum distanceYou can set the specified minimum distancefor DISTRONIC PLUS by varying the time spanbetween one and two seconds. With thisfunction, you can set the minimum distancethat DISTRONIC PLUS keeps to the vehicle infront, dependent on vehicle speed. You cansee this distance in the multifunction display(Y page 168).

G WARNINGIt is up to the driver to exercise discretion toselect the appropriate setting given roadconditions, traffic, driver's preferred drivingstyle and applicable laws and drivingrecommendations for safe following distance.

X To increase: turn control ; in direction=.DISTRONIC PLUS then maintains a greaterdistance between your vehicle and thevehicle in front.

X To decrease: turn control ; indirection :.DISTRONIC PLUS then maintains a shorterdistance between your vehicle and thevehicle in front.

i Make sure that you maintain a sufficientand safe distance from the vehicle in front.Adjust the distance to the vehicle in front ifnecessary.

DISTRONIC PLUS displays in thespeedometer

When DISTRONIC PLUS is activated, one ortwo segments ; in the set speed range lightup.

i For design reasons, the speed displayedin the speedometer may differ slightly fromthe speed set for DISTRONIC PLUS.

If DISTRONIC PLUS detects a vehicle in front,segments ; between speed of the vehicle infront : and stored speed = light up.

DISTRONIC PLUS displays in themultifunction display

General notesYou can select the distance display in theAssistance menu (Y page 204) of the on-board computer.

Display when DISTRONIC PLUS isdeactivatedX Select the Distance Display function

using the on-board computer(Y page 204).

When DISTRONIC PLUS is deactivated, youwill see the following in the multifunctiondisplay:


ivin

g an

d pa

rkin

g

: Symbol for activated PRE-SAFE® Brake; Vehicle in front, if detected= Distance indicator, current distance to

the vehicle in front? Specified minimum distance to the

vehicle in front; adjustableA Own vehicle

Display when DISTRONIC PLUS isactivatedX Select the Distance Display function

using the on-board computer(Y page 204).

You will see the stored speed for about fiveseconds when you activate DISTRONIC PLUS.After this time, you will see the following inthe multifunction display while DISTRONICPLUS is activated:

: DISTRONIC PLUS activated; Own vehicle= Specified minimum distance to the

vehicle in front; adjustable? Vehicle in front, if detected

Deactivating DISTRONIC PLUS

There are several ways to deactivateDISTRONIC PLUS:X Briefly press the cruise control lever

forwards :.orX Brake, unless the vehicle is stationary.When you deactivate DISTRONIC PLUS, theDISTRONIC PLUS Off message is shown inthe multifunction display for approximatelyfive seconds.

i The last speed stored remains stored untilyou switch off the engine.

i DISTRONIC PLUS is not deactivated if youdepress the accelerator pedal. If youaccelerate to overtake, DISTRONIC PLUSadjusts the vehicle's speed to the lastspeed stored after you have finishedovertaking.

DISTRONIC PLUS is automaticallydeactivated if:Ryou apply the parking brake.Ryou are driving slower than

15 mph (25 km/h) and there is no vehiclein front, or if the vehicle in front is no longerdetected.RESP® intervenes or you deactivate ESP®.Rthe transmission is in the P, R or N position.Ryou switch off the radar sensor system

(Y page 208).Ryou pull the cruise control lever towards

you in order to pull away and the front-

Driving systems 169

Driv

ing

and

park

ing

Z

passenger door or one of the rear doors isopen.Rthe vehicle has skidded.If DISTRONIC PLUS is deactivated, you willhear a warning tone. The DISTRONIC PLUS Off message is shown in the multifunctiondisplay for approximately five seconds.If the vehicle has been stopped by DISTRONICPLUS and a malfunction occurs in the system,the Brake Immediately message appears inthe multifunction display. Depress the brakepedal immediately so that the vehicle doesnot roll away. DISTRONIC PLUS is thendeactivated, and the message disappears.

G WARNINGThe DISTRONIC PLUS switches off andreleases the brakes when the vehicledecelerates below the minimum speed of20 mph (30 km/h) by operation of the systemunless the DISTRONIC PLUS detects a vehicledirectly ahead of you. At that time the drivermust apply the brakes in order to reducevehicle speed further or bring it to a stop.

Tips for driving with DISTRONIC PLUS

Important safety notesThe following contains descriptions of certainroad and traffic conditions in which you mustbe particularly attentive. In such situations,brake if necessary. DISTRONIC PLUS is thendeactivated.

G WARNINGThe DISTRONIC PLUS works to maintain thespeed selected by the driver unless a movingobstacle proceeding directly ahead of it in thesame travel direction is detected (e.g.following another vehicle ahead of you at yourset distance).This means that:RYour vehicle can pass another vehicle after

you have changed lanes.RWhile in a sharp turn or if the preceding

vehicle is in a sharp turn, the DISTRONIC

PLUS could lose sight of the precedingvehicle. Your vehicle could then accelerateto the previously selected speed.

The DISTRONIC PLUS regulates only thedistance between your vehicle and thosedirectly ahead of it. It may not registerstationary objects in the road, e.g.:Ra stopped vehicle in a traffic jamRa disabled vehicleRan oncoming vehicleThe driver must always be alert, observe alltraffic and intercede as required by means ofsteering or braking the vehicle.

G WARNINGThe DISTRONIC PLUS should not be used insnowy or icy road conditions.

Cornering, going into and coming out of abend

The ability of DISTRONIC PLUS to detectvehicles when cornering is limited. Yourvehicle may brake unexpectedly or late.

Vehicles traveling on a different line


ivin

g an

d pa

rkin

g

DISTRONIC PLUS may not detect vehiclestraveling on a different line. The distance tothe vehicle in front will be too short.

Other vehicles changing lane

DISTRONIC PLUS has not detected thevehicle cutting in yet. The distance to thisvehicle will be too short.

Narrow vehicles

DISTRONIC PLUS has not yet detected thevehicle in front on the edge of the road,because of its narrow width. The distance tothe vehicle in front will be too short.

Obstructions and stationary vehicles

DISTRONIC PLUS does not brake forobstacles or stationary vehicles. If, forexample, the detected vehicle turns a cornerand reveals an obstacle or stationary vehicle,DISTRONIC PLUS will not brake for these.

Crossing vehicles

DISTRONIC PLUS may mistakenly detectvehicles that are crossing your lane.Activating DISTRONIC PLUS at traffic lightswith crossing traffic, for example, could causeyour vehicle to pull away unintentionally.

Dynamic handling package withsports mode

General notesThe most important part of the dynamichandling package with sports mode is theadjustable suspension system. Thisautomatically controls and adapts thesuspension to the respective drivingsituation.

Driving systems 171

Driv

ing

and

park

ing

Z

The calibration of the suspension dependson:Ryour driving styleRthe road surface conditionsRyour individual selection; see the following

descriptionIf your vehicle is equipped with automatictransmission, the dynamic handling packagewith sports mode also includes steeringwheel paddle shifters (Y page 145) with amanual drive program (Y page 147).

Example: position of dynamic handling packagewith sports mode buttonX Start the engine.

Sports tuningThe firmer setting of the suspension tuning insports mode ensures even better contactwith the road. Select this mode whenemploying a sporty driving style, e.g. onwinding country roads.Your selection remains stored until youswitch off the engine.X Press button ;.

Indicator lamp : lights up. Sportssuspension tuning is selected. Dependingon the engine output, the accelerator pedalis more responsive. On vehicles withautomatic transmission, drive program S isselected.

Comfort tuningIn Comfort mode, the driving characteristicsof your vehicle are more comfortable. Selectthis mode if you prefer a more comfortabledriving style, but also when driving fast onstraight roads, e.g. highways.X Press button ;.

Indicator lamp : goes out. Comfortablesuspension tuning is selected. On vehicleswith automatic transmission, driveprogram E is selected.

HOLD function

General notesThe HOLD function can assist the driver in thefollowing situations:Rwhen pulling away, especially on steep

slopesRwhen maneuvering on steep slopesRwhen waiting in trafficThe vehicle is kept stationary without thedriver having to depress the brake pedal.The braking effect is canceled and the HOLDfunction deactivated when you depress theaccelerator pedal to pull away.

Activation conditionsYou can activate the HOLD function if:Rthe vehicle is stationary.Rthe engine is running.Rthe driver's door is closed or your seat belt

is fastened.Rthe parking brake is not applied.Rthe hood is closed.Rthe transmission is in position D, R or N.RDISTRONIC PLUS is deactivated.


ivin

g an

d pa

rkin

g

Activating the HOLD functionX Make sure that the activation conditions

are met.X Depress the brake pedal.

X Quickly depress the brake pedal furtheruntil HOLD display : appears in themultifunction display.The HOLD function is activated. You canrelease the brake pedal.

i If depressing the brake pedal the firsttime does not activate the HOLD function,wait briefly and then try again.

G WARNINGThe vehicle's brakes are applied when theHOLD function is activated. For this reason,deactivate the HOLD function if the vehicle isto be set in motion by other means (e.g. in acar wash or by towing).

Deactivating the HOLD functionThe HOLD function is deactivatedautomatically if:Ryou accelerate and the transmission is in

position D or R.Ryou shift the transmission to position P.Ryou apply the brakes again with a certain

amount of pressure until HOLD disappearsfrom the multifunction display.Ryou activate DISTRONIC PLUS.

G WARNINGNever get out of the vehicle when the HOLDfunction is activated.The HOLD function must never be operatedor deactivated by a passenger or from outsidethe vehicle.

The HOLD function does not replace theparking brake and must not be used forparking.The braking effect of the HOLD function iscanceled and the vehicle could roll away if:Rthe HOLD function is deactivated by

depressing the accelerator pedal or thebrake pedal.Rthere is a malfunction in the system or an

interruption in the power supply, e.g.battery failure.Rthe electrical system in the engine

compartment, the battery or the fuses aretampered with.Rthe battery is disconnected.If you leave the vehicle or park it, deactivatethe HOLD function and secure the vehicleagainst rolling away.

You will see a warning message in themultifunction display if the HOLD function isactivated and:Rthe driver's door is open and the driver's

seat belt is unfastened.Rthe engine is switched off.Rthe hood is opened.Shift to 'P'X Move the selector lever to P to prevent the

vehicle from rolling away.The HOLD function is deactivated. Thewarning message in the multifunctiondisplay disappears.

A horn will also sound at regular intervals ifthe HOLD function is activated and you:Rswitch the engine off, open the driver's

door and take off your seat beltRopen the hoodThe sounding of the horn alerts you to the factthat the vehicle has been parked while theHOLD function is still activated. If you attemptto lock the vehicle, the tone becomes louder.The vehicle is not locked until the HOLDfunction is deactivated.

Driving systems 173

Driv

ing

and

park

ing

Z

i If the engine has been switched off, itcannot be started again until the HOLDfunction has been deactivated.

If there is a malfunction in the system orpower supply while the HOLD function isactivated, the Brake immediately messageis shown in the multifunction display.Immediately depress the brake firmly untilthe warning message in the multifunctiondisplay goes out.You can also shift the transmission to positionP. This deactivates the HOLD function.

RACE START

Important safety notesi RACE START is only available in AMG

vehicles.RACE START enables optimal accelerationfrom a standing start. The precondition forthis is a suitable high-grip road surface.

G WARNINGRACE START is only available when SPORThandling mode is activated. SPORT handlingmode only stabilizes the vehicle to a limitedextent in the event of swerving or wheelspin.RACE START should only be used on speciallydesignated roads. Always adapt your speedand driving style to the prevailing road andweather conditions.

Conditions for activationRACE START can be activated when:Rthe doors are closed.Rthe engine is running and it has reached an

operating temperature of approximately176 ‡ (80 †). This is the case when theengine oil temperature in the multifunctiondisplay stops flashing.RSPORT handling mode is activated.

(Y page 62)Rthe steering wheel is in the straight-ahead

position.

Rthe vehicle is stationary and the brakepedal is depressed (left foot).Rthe transmission is in position D.

Activating RACE STARTX Depress the brake pedal with your left foot,

and keep it depressed.X Turn the drive program selector clockwise

(Y page 144) until the RS lamp lights up.The multifunction display shows the RACE START Confirm: Paddle UP Cancel: Paddle DOWN message.

i If the conditions for activation are nolonger fulfilled, RACE START is canceled.The multifunction display shows the RACE START canceled message.

X To cancel: pull the left steering wheel shiftpaddle (Y page 145).

orX To confirm: pull the right steering wheel

shift paddle (Y page 145).The multifunction display shows the RACE START available Depress accelerator message.

i If you do not depress the acceleratorpedal fully within two seconds, RACESTART is canceled. The multifunctiondisplay shows the RACE START not possible See Operator's Manualmessage.

X Depress the accelerator pedal fully.The engine speed increases toapproximately 4000 rpm.The multifunction display shows the RACE START Release brake to startmessage.

i If you do not release the brake pedalwithin seven seconds, RACE START iscanceled. The multifunction display showsthe RACE START canceled message.

X Take your foot off the brake, but keep theaccelerator pedal depressed.The vehicle pulls away at maximumacceleration.


ivin

g an

d pa

rkin

g

The multifunction display shows the RACE START active message.

RACE START is deactivated when a speed ofapproximately 30 mph (Canada: 50 km/h) isreached. Drive program S+ is activated.SPORT handling mode remains activated.RACE START is deactivated immediately ifyou release the accelerator pedal duringRACE START or if any of the activationconditions are no longer fulfilled. Themultifunction display shows the RACE START not possible See Operator's Manualmessage.

i If RACE START is used repeatedly withina short period of time, it is only availableagain after the vehicle has been driven acertain distance.

4MATIC (permanent four-wheel drive)4MATIC ensures that all four wheels arepermanently driven. Together with ESP®, itimproves the traction of your vehiclewhenever a drive wheel spins due toinsufficient grip.

G WARNINGIf a drive wheel is spinning due to insufficienttraction:RWhile driving off, apply as little throttle as

possible.RWhile driving, ease up on the accelerator

pedal.RAdapt your speed and driving style to the

prevailing road conditions.Failure to observe these guidelines couldcause the vehicle to skid.The 4MATIC cannot prevent accidentsresulting from excessive speed.

! Never tow the vehicle with one axleraised. This may damage the transfer case.Damage of this sort is not covered by theMercedes-Benz Limited Warranty. Allwheels must remain either on the ground

or be fully raised. Observe the instructionsfor towing the vehicle with all wheels in fullcontact with the ground.

i In wintry driving conditions, the maximumeffect of 4MATIC can only be achieved ifyou use winter tires (M+S tires), with snowchains if necessary.

PARKTRONIC

Important safety notesi PARKTRONIC is only available in Canada.

G WARNINGThe PARKTRONIC is a supplemental system.It is not intended to, nor does it replace, theneed for extreme care. The responsibilityduring parking and other critical maneuversalways remains with the driver.

G WARNINGMake sure no persons or animals are in ornear the area in which you are parking/maneuvering. Otherwise, they could beinjured.

PARKTRONIC is an electronic parking aid withultrasonic sensors. It indicates visually andaudibly the distance between your vehicleand an object.PARKTRONIC is activated automatically whenyou:Rswitch on the ignitionRshift the transmission to position D, R or NRrelease the parking brakePARKTRONIC is deactivated at speeds above11 mph (18 km/h). It is reactivated at lowerspeeds.PARKTRONIC monitors the area around yourvehicle using six sensors in the front bumperand four sensors in the rear bumper.

Driving systems 175

Driv

ing

and

park

ing

Z

: Sensors in the front bumper, left-handside (example)

Range of the sensors

General notesThe sensors must be free of dirt, ice andslush; otherwise they may not functioncorrectly. Clean the sensors regularly, takingcare not to scratch or damage them(Y page 287).

Side view

Top view

Front sensors

Center Approximately 40 in(approximately 100 cm)

Corners Approximately 24 in(approximately 60 cm)

Rear sensors



! When parking, pay particular attention toobjects above or below the sensors, suchas flower pots or trailer drawbars.PARKTRONIC does not detect such objectswhen they are in the immediate vicinity ofthe vehicle. You could damage the vehicleor the objects.The sensors may not detect snow and otherobjects that absorb ultrasonic waves.Ultrasonic sources such as an automaticcar wash, the compressed-air brakes on atruck or a pneumatic drill could causePARKTRONIC to malfunction.PARKTRONIC may not function correctly onuneven terrain.

Minimum distance



If there is an obstacle within this range, therelevant warning displays light up and awarning tone sounds. If the distance fallsbelow the minimum, the distance may nolonger be shown.


ivin

g an

d pa

rkin

g

Warning displaysThe warning displays show the distancebetween the sensors and the obstacle. Thewarning display for the front area is locatedon the dashboard above the center air vents.The warning display for the rear area islocated on the headliner in the rearcompartment.

Warning display for the front area: Segments on the left-hand side of the

vehicle; Segments on the right-hand side of the

vehicle= Segments showing operational readiness

The warning display for each side of thevehicle is divided into five yellow and two redsegments. PARKTRONIC is operational ifyellow segments showing operationalreadiness = light up.The selected transmission positiondetermines which warning display is activewhen the engine is running.

Transmission position

Warning display

D Front area activated

R, N or the vehicleis rollingbackwards

Rear and front areasactivated

P No areas activated

One or more segments light up as the vehicleapproaches an obstacle, depending on thevehicle's distance from the obstacle.From the:Rsixth segment onwards, you will hear an

intermittent warning tone forapproximately two seconds.Rseventh segment onwards, you will hear a

warning tone for approximately twoseconds. This indicates that you have nowreached the minimum distance.

Deactivating/activating PARKTRONIC

: Indicator lamp; To deactivate/activate PARKTRONIC

If indicator lamp : lights up, PARKTRONIC isdeactivated. Parking Guidance is alsodeactivated.

i PARKTRONIC is automatically activatedwhen you turn the SmartKey to position 2in the ignition lock.

Driving systems 177

Driv

ing

and

park

ing

Z

Problems with PARKTRONIC


Only the red segmentsin the PARKTRONICwarning displays are lit.You also hear a warningtone for approximatelytwo seconds.PARKTRONIC isdeactivated afterapproximately20 seconds, and theindicator lamp in thePARKTRONIC buttonlights up.

PARKTRONIC has malfunctioned and has switched off.X If problems persist, have PARKTRONIC checked at a qualified


Only the red segmentsin the PARKTRONICwarning displays are lit.PARKTRONIC isdeactivated afterapproximately 20seconds.

The PARKTRONIC sensors are dirty or there is interference.X Clean the PARKTRONIC sensors (Y page 287).X Switch the ignition back on.

The problem may be caused by an external source of radio orultrasound waves.X See if PARKTRONIC functions in a different location.

Parking Guidance

Important safety notesi Parking Guidance is only available in

Canada.Parking Guidance is an electronic parking aidwith ultrasound. Ultrasound is used tomeasure the road on both sides of the vehicle.A suitable parking space is indicated by theparking symbol. You receive steeringinstructions when parking. You may also usePARKTRONIC (Y page 175).

G WARNINGParking Guidance is merely an aid and maydisplay parking spaces that are not suitablefor parking, for example:Rno-parking areasRparking spaces with unsuitable surfaces

(road surface)RdrivewaysRentrances and exitsParking Guidance detects and measurespotential parking spaces while driving past.Changes to the parking space after this pointare not taken into account, for example if thevehicle in front of or behind the parking spacechanges position or objects in the parkingspace are moved.Even when using Parking Guidance, you arestill responsible for driving carefully. If yourely on Parking Guidance alone, you could


ivin

g an

d pa

rkin

g

cause an accident and injure yourself andothers.Safety always remains your responsibility andyou must continue paying careful attention toyour immediate surroundings when parkingand maneuvering.

G WARNINGObjects located above the height range ofParking Guidance will not be detected whenthe parking space is measured. These objectsare not taken into account when the parkingprocedure is calculated, e.g. overhangingloads, tail sections or loading ramps of goodsvehicles. Under some circumstances, ParkingGuidance might therefore issue steeringinstructions too soon. This may lead to acollision. For this reason, you should avoidusing Parking Guidance in such situations.

G WARNINGMake sure that no persons or animals are inthe maneuvering range. Otherwise, theycould be injured.

! Pay particular attention to low objects orobjects with flat surfaces, such as trailerdrawbars, posts, cross beams and curbs.These types of objects cannot be detectedby Parking Guidance and may damage thevehicle.

When PARKTRONIC is deactivated, ParkingGuidance is also unavailable.Use Parking Guidance for parking spaces:Rthat are parallel to the direction of travelRthat are on straight roads, not bendsRthat are on the same level as the road, i.e.

not on the pavement, for example. ParkingGuidance may not detect flat curbs

Parking tips:Ron narrow roads, drive past the parking

space as close as possible.Rparking spaces that are littered, overgrown

or partially occupied by trailer drawbarsmight be identified incorrectly or not at all.

Rsnowfall or heavy rain may lead to a parkingspace being measured inaccurately.Rpay attention to the PARKTRONIC

(Y page 177) warning messages during theparking procedure.Rwhen transporting a load which protrudes

from your vehicle, you must not use ParkingGuidance.Rnever use Parking Guidance with snow

chains or an emergency spare wheelmounted.Rmake sure that the tire pressures are

always correct. This has a direct effect onthe steering instructions.Rthe way your vehicle is positioned in the

parking space after parking is dependenton various factors. These include theposition and shape of the vehicles parkedin front and behind it and the conditions ofthe location. In some cases, ParkingGuidance may guide you too far or not farenough into a parking space. In somecases, it may also lead you across or ontothe curb. If necessary, cancel the parkingprocedure with Parking Guidance.

! If unavoidable, you should drive overobstacles such as curbs slowly and not ata sharp angle. Otherwise, you may damagethe wheels or tires.

Detecting a parking space

: Detected parking space on the left; Parking symbol= Detected parking space on the right

Parking Guidance is automatically activatedwhen you drive forwards. The system isoperational at speeds of up to approximately22 mph (35 km/h). While in operation, the

Driving systems 179

Driv

ing

and

park

ing

Z

system independently locates and measuresparking spaces on both sides of the vehicle.When driving at speeds below 19 mph(30 km/h), you will see parking symbol ; asa status indicator in the instrument cluster.When a parking space has been detected, anarrow towards the right = or the left : alsoappears. Parking Guidance only displaysparking spaces on the front-passenger sideas standard. Parking spaces on the driver'sside are displayed as soon as the turn signalon the driver's side is activated. To park onthe driver's side, you must leave the driver'sside turn signal switched on until you haveengaged reverse gear.Parking Guidance will only detect parkingspaces:Rthat are parallel to the direction of travelRthat are at least 5 ft (1.5 m) wideRthat are at least 4.3 ft (1.3 m) longer than

your vehicleA parking space is displayed while you aredriving past it, and until you areapproximately 50 ft (15 m) away from it.

Parking

G WARNINGThe Parking Guidance is only an aid and maynot detect all obstacles. The ParkingGuidance does not relieve you of theresponsibility to pay attention. You are alwaysresponsible for safety and must continue topay attention to your immediate surroundingswhen parking and maneuvering. Otherwise,you could endanger yourself and others.

X Stop the vehicle when the parking spacesymbol shows the desired parking space inthe instrument cluster.

X Shift the transmission to position R.The following message appears in themultifunction display: Check vehicle surroundings Confirm with OK.

X Press the a button on the multifunctionsteering wheel to confirm.The multifunction display switches toParking Guidance.Depending on your distance from theparking space, the Please drive backwards message appears in themultifunction display.

X If necessary, reverse towards the parkingspace. This is indicated by an arrowpointing backwards.Continue backing up until you hear a tone.Stop – the parking position has beenreached. The arrow is white.The Please steer to the right orPlease steer to the left messageappears in the multifunction display.

X While the vehicle is stationary, turn thesteering wheel in the specified directionuntil the arrow is white and a warning tonesounds.

X To reverse into the parking space:maintain the steering wheel angle andreverse carefully.


ivin

g an

d pa

rkin

g

X Stop as soon as you hear a warning tone,The vehicle has reached the position inwhich you need to countersteer.The Please steer to the left orPlease steer to the right messageappears in the multifunction display.

X Countersteering: while the vehicle isstationary, turn the steering wheel in thespecified direction until the arrow is whiteand a warning tone sounds.

X To reverse into the parking space:maintain the steering wheel angle andreverse carefully.

X Stop as soon as you hear a warning tone,at the latest when PARKTRONIC sounds thecontinuous warning tone.The Parking Guidance finishedmessage appears in the multifunctiondisplay and a warning tone sounds. Youmay be asked to steer in a differentdirection and then change gear. In thiscase, further displays in the multifunctiondisplay will direct you to the final position.

X Maneuver if necessary.X Always observe the warning messages

displayed by PARKTRONIC (Y page 177).

Canceling Parking GuidanceX Press the PARKTRONIC button on the

center console (Y page 177).Parking Guidance is canceled immediatelyand PARKTRONIC is deactivated.

Parking Guidance is canceled automatically ifit is no longer possible to guide you into theparking space, or if a malfunction occurs.The parking space symbol goes out and awarning tone sounds. The Parking Guidance Canceled message appears in themultifunction display.

Rear view camera

Important safety notesThe rear view camera is an optical parking aid.It shows the area behind your vehicle in theCOMAND display.

G WARNINGMake sure that no persons or animals are inthe maneuvering range. Otherwise, theycould be injured.

The rear view camera is located in the handlestrip of the trunk lid.

: Rear view camera

View through the cameraThe area behind the vehicle is displayed in amirror-inverted manner, as in the rear-viewmirror.

G WARNINGThe rear view camera is only an aid and maydisplay obstaclesRfrom a distorted perspectiveRinaccuratelyRmay not display obstacles at allThe rear view camera does not relieve you ofthe responsibility to be cautious. Take careand pay careful attention. The rear viewcamera may not show objects which areRvery close to the rear bumperRunder the rear bumperRabove the trunk handle

Driving systems 181

Driv

ing

and

park

ing

Z

You are responsible for safety at all times andmust continue to pay attention to theimmediate surroundings when parking andmaneuvering. This includes the area behind,in front of, and beside the vehicle. Otherwiseyou could endanger yourself and/or others.

G WARNINGThe rear view camera will not function or willnot fully function if:Rthe trunk lid is openRit is raining or snowing strongly or if it is

foggyRit is night or if you are parking/

maneuvering your vehicle in a very darkareaRa very bright white light is affecting the

cameraRthe immediate vicinity is illuminated with

fluorescent light (the display of theCOMAND system can flicker)Rtemperature changes abruptly, for example

if you drive out of the cold into a heatedgarage (condensation on the lens)Rthe camera lens is dirty or coveredRthe rear of your vehicle is damaged

In this case, have the position and thesetting of the camera checked at aspecialist workshop. Mercedes-Benzrecommends that you consult a Mercedes-Benz Center for this purpose.

Do not use the rear view camera in thesesituations. You could otherwise injureyourself and other people and/or causedamage - including damage to your vehicle -while parking/maneuvering.

Activating the rear view cameraX Make sure that the SmartKey is in position

2 in the ignition lock.X Make sure that the "rear view camera"

function is selected in COMAND (see the

separate operating instructions forCOMAND).

X Engage reverse gear.The area behind the vehicle is shown in theCOMAND display.

ATTENTION ASSIST

Important safety notesATTENTION ASSIST helps you during long,monotonous journeys such as on freewaysand interstate highways. It is active in therange between 50 mph (80 km/h) and112 mph (180 km/h).If ATTENTION ASSIST detects typicalindicators of fatigue or increasing lapses inconcentration on the part of the driver, itsuggests you take a break.

G WARNINGATTENTION ASSIST is only an aid and maydetect your tiredness or lapses inconcentration too late or not at all. It is not asubstitute for a well-rested and attentivedriver.Fatigue may cause you to recognizehazardous situations too late, misjudge asituation or react more slowly. For thisreason, make sure you feel rested before youbegin driving and during your journey. Makesure that you take regular breaks in time,particularly on long journeys. Otherwise, youmay fail to recognize dangers in time, causean accident and injure yourself and others.

ATTENTION ASSIST assesses your level offatigue or lapses in concentration by takingthe following criteria into account:Ryour personal driving style, e.g. steering

characteristicsRdriving conditions, e.g. time, driving time


ivin

g an

d pa

rkin

g

The functionality of ATTENTION ASSIST isrestricted and warnings may be delayed ornot occur at all:Rif the road condition is poor, e.g. if the

surface is uneven or if there are potholesRif there is a strong side windRif you have adopted a sporty driving style

with high cornering speeds or high rates ofaccelerationRif you predominantly drive at speeds under

50 mph (80 km/h) or over 112 mph(180 km/h)Rif you are currently using COMAND or

making a telephone call with itRif the time has been set incorrectlyRin active driving situations, such as when

you change lanes or change your speed

Warning and display messages in themultifunction display

X Activate ATTENTION ASSIST using the on-board computer (Y page 205).Symbol : appears in the multifunctiondisplay.

If ATTENTION ASSIST is active, you will bewarned no sooner than 20 minutes after yourjourney has begun. You will then hear anintermittent warning tone twice, and theAttention Assist: Drowsiness Detected message appears in themultifunction display.X If necessary, take a break.X Press a to confirm the message.

On long journeys, take regular breaks in goodtime to allow yourself to rest properly. If youdo not take a break and ATTENTION ASSISTstill detects typical indicators of fatigue or

increasing lapses in concentration, you will bewarned again after 15 minutes at the earliest.ATTENTION ASSIST is reset when youcontinue your journey and starts assessingyour tiredness again if:Ryou switch off the engine.Ryou take off your seat belt and open the

driver's door, e.g. for a change of drivers orto take a break.

Lane Tracking package

General notesThe Lane Tracking package consists of BlindSpot Assist (Y page 183) and Lane KeepingAssist (Y page 185).

Blind Spot Assist

Important safety notesBlind Spot Assist uses a radar sensor systemto monitor the areas on both sides of yourvehicle. It supports you from speeds ofapproximately 20 mph (30 km/h). A warningdisplay in the exterior mirrors draws yourattention to vehicles detected in themonitored area. If you then switch on thecorresponding turn signal to change lane, youwill also receive an optical and audiblecollision warning. Blind Spot Assist usessensors in the rear bumper for monitoringpurposes.

G WARNINGBlind Spot Assist is only an aid designed toassist driving. It may fail to detect somevehicles and is no substitute for attentivedriving.Blind Spot Assist cannot detect road andtraffic conditions. It may fail to detect narrowvehicles, such as motorcycles or bicycles, ormay only detect them too late.Monitoring may be affected by dirty sensors,strong spray or poor visibility caused by snow,

Driving systems 183

Driv

ing

and

park

ing

Z

rain or mist, for example. In this case, vehiclesare detected late or not at all.Always pay attention to traffic conditions andyour surroundings. Otherwise, you may fail torecognize dangers in time, cause an accidentand injure yourself and others.


For Blind Spot Assist to assist you whendriving, the radar sensor system must beactivated (Y page 208) and operational.

Monitoring range of the sensorsBlind Spot Assist monitors the area shown inthe figure up to 10 ft (3 m) behind andimmediately adjacent to your vehicle.

G WARNINGBlind Spot Assist monitors certain areas in theimmediate vicinity of your vehicle. Vehicles

that approach and drive past at high speedsare not detected. There is no display and nowarning.If the lanes are very wide, it may not bepossible to monitor the complete width of theneighboring lane. For this reason, vehicles inthe next lane may not be detected, especiallyif they are driving in a staggered formation.This may be the case if vehicles are driving atthat edge of their lane which is furthest awayfrom your vehicle.Always pay attention to traffic conditions andyour surroundings. Otherwise, you may fail torecognize dangers in time, cause an accidentand injure yourself and others.

If the lanes are narrow, vehicles driving in thelane beyond the lane next to your vehicle maybe indicated, especially if the vehicles are notdriving in the middle of their lane. This maybe the case if the vehicles are driving on theinner side of their lane.Due to the nature of the system:Rwarnings may be issued in error when

driving close to crash barriers or similarsolid lane borders.Rwarnings may be interrupted when driving

alongside long vehicles, such as trucks, fora prolonged time.

The two sensors for Blind Spot Assist areintegrated into the sides of the rear bumper.Make sure that the bumper is free from dirt,ice or slush around the sensors. The rearsensors must not be covered, for example bybicycle racks or overhanging loads. Followinga severe impact or in the event of damage tothe bumpers, have the function of the radarsensors checked at a qualified specialistworkshop, e.g. an authorized Mercedes-BenzCenter. Blind Spot Assist may otherwise notwork properly.


ivin

g an

d pa

rkin

g

Indicator and warning display

: Yellow indicator lamp/red warning lamp

When Blind Spot Assist is activated, indicatorlamp : lights up yellow in the exteriormirrors up to a vehicle speed of 20 mph(30 km/h). When the vehicle speed exceeds20 mph (30 km/h), the indicator lamp goesout and Blind Spot Assist is ready for use.When your speed exceeds approximately20 mph (30 km/h), warning lamp : lights upred on the corresponding side whenever avehicle is detected in the blind spotmonitoring range. This warning is alwaysgiven when a vehicle enters the blind spotmonitoring range from behind or from theside. When you are passing another vehicle,the warning is emitted only if the differencein speed is less than 7 mph (12 km/h).The yellow indicator lamp goes out if reversegear is engaged. In this event, Blind SpotAssist is no longer active.The brightness of the indicator/warninglamps is adjusted automatically according tothe ambient light.

G WARNINGBlind Spot Assist is not active at speeds underapproximately 20 mph (30 km/h). Theindicator lamps in the exterior mirrors areyellow. Vehicles in the monitoring range arethen not indicated.Always pay attention to traffic conditions andyour surroundings. Otherwise, you may fail torecognize dangers in time, cause an accidentand injure yourself and others.

Collision warningIf a vehicle is detected in the monitoring rangeof Blind Spot Assist and you switch on the turnsignal, a double warning tone sounds. Redwarning lamp : flashes. If the turn signalremains on, detected vehicles are indicatedby the flashing of red warning lamp :. Thereare no further warning tones.

Switching on Blind Spot AssistX Make sure that the radar sensor system

(Y page 208) and Blind Spot Assist(Y page 205) are activated in the on-boardcomputer.

X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in theignition lock.Warning lamps : light up red in theexterior mirrors for approximately 1.5seconds and then turn yellow.

Lane Keeping Assist

Important safety notesLane Keeping Assist monitors the area infront of your vehicle by means of a camera atthe top of the windshield. Lane Keeping Assistdetects lane markings on the road and warnsyou before you leave your laneunintentionally.

: Lane Keeping Assist camera

If you have chosen the Display Unit Speed-/Odometer(Y page 206) function inthe on-board computer and select km as theunit of measurement, Active Lane KeepingAssist is active from speeds of 60 km/h. If

Driving systems 185

Driv

ing

and

park

ing

Z

the miles display unit is selected, theassistance range begins at 40 mph.

G WARNINGLane Keeping Assist does not keep yourvehicle in its lane. It is only an aid and maydetect the lane markings on the roadincorrectly or not at all.The system may be impaired or may notfunction if:Rthere is poor visibility, e.g. due to

insufficient illumination of the road, or dueto snow, rain, fog or spray.Rthere is glare, e.g. from oncoming traffic,

the sun, or reflection from other vehicles.Rthe windshield is dirty, fogged up or

covered, for instance by a sticker, in thevicinity of the camera.Rseveral or no lane markings for a single lane

are present.Rthe lane markings are worn away, dark or

covered up, e.g. by dirt or snow.Rthe distance to the vehicle in front is too

small and the lane markings thus cannot bedetected.Rthe lane markings on the road are unclear,

e.g. near roadworks.Rthe lane markings change quickly, e.g.

lanes branch off, cross one another ormerge.Rthe road is narrow and winding.Lane Keeping Assist cannot detect road andtraffic conditions. It is not a substitute forattentive driving. You are responsible for thevehicle's speed, braking in good time, andsteering correctly. Always adapt your drivingstyle to suit the prevailing road and weatherconditions. Always pay attention to trafficconditions and your surroundings. Otherwise,you may fail to recognize dangers in time,cause an accident and injure yourself andothers.

A warning can be given when a front wheelpasses over a lane marking. It will warn you

by means of intermittent vibration in thesteering wheel for up to 1.5 seconds.In order that you are warned only whennecessary and in good time if you cross thelane marking, the system recognizes certainconditions and warns you accordingly.The warning vibration occurs earlier if:Ryou approach the outer lane marking on a

bend.Rthe road has very wide lanes, e.g. a

freeway.Rthe system recognizes solid lane markings.The warning vibration occurs later if:Rthe road has narrow lanes.Ryou cut the corner on a bend.No warning vibration occurs if:Ryou clearly and actively steer, brake or

accelerate.Ryou cut the corner on a sharp bend.Ra driving safety system intervenes, e.g.

ABS, BAS or ESP®.Ryou switch on the turn signals. In this event,

the warnings are suppressed for a certainperiod of time.

Switching on Lane Keeping Assist

X Activate Lane Keeping Assist using the on-board computer (Y page 205).Symbol : appears in the multifunctiondisplay.If your speed exceeds 40 mph (60 km/h)and lane markings are detected,symbol : is shown in green. Lane KeepingAssist is ready for use.


ivin

g an

d pa

rkin

g

Active Driving Assistance package

General notesThe Active Driving Assistance packageconsists of DISTRONIC PLUS (Y page 161),Active Blind Spot Assist (Y page 187) andActive Lane Keeping Assist (Y page 190).

Active Blind Spot Assist

Important safety notesActive Blind Spot Assist uses a radar sensorsystem to monitor the side areas of yourvehicle which are in back of the driver. Awarning display in the exterior mirrors drawsyour attention to vehicles detected in themonitored area. If you then switch on thecorresponding turn signal to change lane, youwill also receive an optical and audiblecollision warning. If a risk of lateral collisionis detected, corrective braking may help youavoid a collision. To support the course-correcting brake application, Active BlindSpot Assist also uses the forward-facing radarsensor system. Active Blind Spot Assistsupports you from speeds of approximately20 mph (30 km/h).

G WARNINGActive Blind Spot Assist is only an aid, andmay detect vehicles/obstacles incorrectly ornot at all.The system may be impaired or may notfunction if:Rthere is poor visibility, e.g. due to snow,

rain, fog or spray.Rthe rear and/or front sensors are dirty.Active Blind Spot Assist may not detectnarrow vehicles, such as motorcycles orbicycles, or may only detect them too late. Itcannot detect vehicles that are overtaken ata small distance and then enter the blind spotarea.Active Blind Spot Assist cannot detect roadand traffic conditions. It is not a substitute forattentive driving. You are responsible for the

vehicle's speed, braking in good time, andsteering correctly. Always adapt your drivingstyle to suit the prevailing road and weatherconditions. Always pay attention to trafficconditions and your surroundings. Otherwise,you may fail to recognize dangers in time,cause an accident and injure yourself andothers.


For Active Blind Spot Assist to assist youwhen driving, the radar sensor system mustbe activated (Y page 208) and operational.

Monitoring areaActive Blind Spot Assist monitors the areashown in the figure up to 10 ft (3 m) behindand immediately adjacent to your vehicle. Forthis purpose, Active Blind Spot Assist usesradar sensors in the rear bumper.

Driving systems 187

Driv

ing

and

park

ing

Z

G WARNINGActive Blind Spot Assist monitors certainareas in the immediate vicinity of your vehicle.Vehicles that approach and drive past at highspeeds are not detected. No visual noraudible warnings are emitted and the systemdoes not brake the vehicle to correct yourcourse.If the lanes are very wide, it may not bepossible to monitor the complete width of theneighboring lane. For this reason, vehicles inthe next lane may not be detected, especiallyif they are driving in a staggered formation.This may be the case if vehicles are driving atthat edge of their lane which is furthest awayfrom your vehicle.Always pay attention to traffic conditions andyour surroundings. Otherwise, you may fail torecognize dangers in time, cause an accidentand injure yourself and others.

If the lanes are narrow, vehicles driving in thelane beyond the lane next to your vehicle maybe indicated, especially if the vehicles are notdriving in the middle of their lane. This maybe the case if there are vehicles driving at theinner edge of their lanes.Due to the nature of the system:Rwarnings may be issued in error when

driving close to crash barriers or similarsolid lane borders.Rwarnings may be interrupted when driving

alongside long vehicles, such as trucks, fora prolonged time.

Two Active Blind Spot Assist radar sensorsare integrated into the front and rear bumpersrespectively. An additional radar sensor islocated behind the cover in the radiator grill.Make sure that the sensor areas on thebumpers and the sensor cover in the radiatorgrill are free of dirt, ice and slush. The rearsensors must not be covered, for example bycycle racks or overhanging cargo. Followinga severe impact or in the event of damage tothe bumpers, have the function of the radarsensors checked at a qualified specialist

workshop. Blind Spot Assist may otherwisenot work properly.

Indicator and warning display

: Yellow indicator lamp/red warning lamp

When Active Blind Spot Assist is activated,indicator lamp : lights up yellow in theexterior mirrors up to a vehicle speed of20 mph (30 km/h). When the vehicle speedexceeds 20 mph (30 km/h), the indicatorlamp goes out and Active Blind Spot Assist isready for use.When your speed exceeds approximately20 mph (30 km/h), warning lamp : lights upred on the corresponding side whenever avehicle is detected in the blind spotmonitoring range. This warning is alwaysgiven when a vehicle enters the blind spotmonitoring range from behind or from theside. When you are passing another vehicle,the warning is emitted only if the differencein speed is less than 7 mph (12 km/h).The yellow indicator lamp goes out if reversegear is engaged. In this event, Active BlindSpot Assist is no longer active.The brightness of the indicator/warninglamps is adjusted automatically according tothe ambient light.

G WARNINGActive Blind Spot Assist is not active at speedslower than 20 mph (30 km/h). The indicatorlamps in the exterior mirrors are yellow.Vehicles in the monitoring range are then notindicated.


ivin

g an

d pa

rkin

g

Always pay attention to traffic conditions andyour surroundings. Otherwise, you may fail torecognize dangers in time, cause an accidentand injure yourself and others.

Visual and audible collision warningsIf you switch on the appropriate turn signalsand a vehicle is detected in the sidemonitoring range, you will receive a visual andacoustic collision warning. You will hear adouble warning tone and red warninglamp : flashes. If the turn signal remains on,vehicles detected are indicated by theflashing of red warning lamp :. There are nofurther warning tones.

Course-correcting brake applicationIf Active Blind Spot Assist detects a risk of alateral collision in the monitoring range, acourse-correcting brake application is carriedout. This is meant to assist you in avoiding acollision.The course-correcting brake application isavailable in the range between 20 mph(30 km/h) and 120 mph (200 km/h).If a course-correcting brake applicationoccurs, red warning lamp : flashes in theexterior mirror and the following is shown inthe multifunction display, for example:

G WARNINGActive Blind Spot Assist is only an aiddesigned to assist driving. It is not a substitutefor attentive driving. In some cases, thecourse-correcting brake application is notsufficient to avoid a collision. In such a case,you must steer, brake or accelerate.In very rare cases, the system mayerroneously detect a danger of collision in thearea of crash barriers or similar lane borders

and apply the brakes. Active Blind Spot Assistdoes not detect all traffic situations and roadusers. Always make sure that there issufficient distance on the side for other trafficor obstacles. An inappropriate brakeapplication may be interrupted at any time ifyou steer slightly in the opposite direction oraccelerate.You are responsible for driving at appropriatespeeds, braking in good time, and steeringcorrectly. Always adapt your driving style tosuit the prevailing road and weatherconditions. Always pay attention to trafficconditions and your surroundings. Otherwise,you may fail to recognize dangers in time,cause an accident and injure yourself andothers.

There will be either no or only a weak course-correcting brake application if:Rthere are vehicles or obstacles, e.g. crash

barriers, located on both sides of yourvehicle.Ra vehicle approaches you too closely at the

side.Ryou have adopted a sporty driving style with

high cornering speeds.Ryou clearly brake or accelerate.Ra driving safety system intervenes, e.g.

ESP® or PRE-SAFE® Brake.RESP® is switched off.Ra loss of tire pressure or a defective tire is

detected.

Switching on Active Blind Spot AssistX Make sure that the radar sensor system

(Y page 208) and Active Blind Spot Assist(Y page 205) are activated in the on-boardcomputer.

X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in theignition lock.Warning lamps : light up red in theexterior mirrors for approximately 1.5seconds and then turn yellow.

Driving systems 189

Driv

ing

and

park

ing

Z

Active Lane Keeping Assist

Important safety notesActive Lane Keeping Assist monitors the areain front of your vehicle by means of a cameraat the top of the windshield. Active LaneKeeping Assist detects lane markings on theroad and warns you before you leave yourlane unintentionally. If you do not react to thewarning, a lane-correcting application of thebrakes can bring the vehicle back into theoriginal lane.

: Active Lane Keeping Assist camera

If you have selected the Display Unit Speed-/Odometer(Y page 206) function inthe on-board computer and select km as theunit of measurement, Active Lane KeepingAssist is active from speeds of 60 km/h. Ifthe miles display unit is selected, theassistance range begins at 40 mph.

G WARNINGActive Lane Keeping Assist does not keepyour vehicle in its lane. It is only an aid andmay detect the lane markings on the roadincorrectly or not at all.The system may be impaired or may notfunction if:Rseveral or no lane markings for a single lane

are present.Rthere is poor visibility, e.g. due to

insufficient illumination of the road, or dueto snow, rain, fog or spray.Rthere is glare, e.g. from oncoming traffic,

the sun, or reflection from other vehicles.

Rthe windshield is dirty, fogged up orcovered, for instance by a sticker, in thevicinity of the camera.Rthe lane markings are worn away, dark or

covered up, e.g. by dirt or snow.Rthe distance to the vehicle in front is too

small and the lane markings thus cannot bedetected.Rthe lane markings on the road are unclear,

e.g. near roadworks.Rthe lane markings change quickly, e.g.

lanes branch off, cross one another ormerge.Rthe road is narrow and winding.Active Lane Keeping Assist cannot detectroad and traffic conditions. It is not asubstitute for attentive driving. You areresponsible for the vehicle's speed, braking ingood time, and steering correctly. Alwaysadapt your driving style to suit the prevailingroad and weather conditions. Always payattention to traffic conditions and yoursurroundings. Otherwise, you may fail torecognize dangers in time, cause an accidentand injure yourself and others.

Warning vibration in the steering wheelA warning can be given when a front wheelpasses over a lane marking. You will bewarned by means of intermittent vibration inthe steering wheel for up to 1.5 seconds.In order that you are warned only whennecessary and in good time if you cross thelane marking, the system recognizes certainconditions and warns you accordingly.The warning vibration occurs earlier if:Ryou approach the outer lane marking on a

bend.Rthe road has very wide lanes, e.g. a

freeway.Rthe system recognizes solid lane markings.The warning vibration occurs later if:Rthe road has narrow lanes.Ryou cut the corner on a bend.


ivin

g an

d pa

rkin

g

No warning vibration occurs if:Ryou clearly and actively steer, brake or

accelerate.Ryou cut the corner on a sharp bend.Ra driving safety system intervenes, e.g.

ABS, BAS or ESP®.Ryou switch on the turn signals. In this event,

the warnings are suppressed for a certainperiod of time.

Lane-correcting brake applicationIf you leave your lane under certaincircumstances the vehicle will brake brieflyon one side. This is meant to assist you inbringing the vehicle back to the original lane.This function is available in the range between40 mph and 120 mph (60 km/h to200 km/h).A lane-correcting brake application can onlybe made after driving over a solid,recognizable lane marking. Before this, awarning must be given by means ofintermittent vibration in the steering wheel.In addition, a lane with lane markings on bothsides must be recognized. The brakeapplication also slightly reduces vehiclespeed.If a lane-correcting brake application occurs,the following, for example, appears in themultifunction display:

i A further lane-correcting brakeapplication can only occur after yourvehicle has returned to the original lane.

G WARNINGActive Lane Keeping Assist does not keepyour vehicle in its lane. It is only an aiddesigned to assist driving. It is not a substitutefor attentive driving. In some cases, the lane-

correcting brake application is not sufficientto bring your vehicle back to the original lane.In such cases, you must steer the vehicleyourself to ensure that it does not leave thelane.Active Lane Keeping Assist does not detectroad and traffic conditions. Always make surethat there is sufficient distance to the side forother traffic or obstacles. In rare cases,unclear markings or particular structures onthe roadway can be recognized as solid lanemarkings. An inappropriate brake application,e.g. after intentionally driving over a solid lanemarking, may be interrupted at any time bysteering slightly in the opposite direction.Active Lane Keeping Assist cannot takeweather conditions into account.You are responsible for the driving atappropriate speeds, braking in good time, andsteering correctly. Always adapt your drivingstyle to suit the prevailing road and weatherconditions. Always pay attention to trafficconditions and your surroundings. Otherwise,you may fail to recognize dangers in time,cause an accident and injure yourself andothers.

No lane-correcting brake application occursif:Ryou clearly and actively steer, brake or

accelerate.Ryou cut the corner on a sharp bend.Ryou switch on the turn signals.Ra driving safety system intervenes, e.g.

ESP®, PRE-SAFE® Brake or Active BlindSpot Assist.Ryou have adopted a sporty driving style with

high cornering speeds or high rates ofacceleration.RESP® is switched off.Rthe transmission is not in position D.Ra loss of tire pressure or a defective tire has

been detected and displayed.

Driving systems 191

Driv

ing

and

park

ing

Z

Active Lane Keeping Assist does not detecttraffic situations or road users. Aninappropriate brake application may beinterrupted at any time if you:Rsteer slightly in the opposite direction.Ruse a turn signal.Rclearly brake or accelerate.A lane-correcting brake application isinterrupted automatically if:Ra driving safety system intervenes, e.g.

ESP®, PRE-SAFE® Brake or Active BlindSpot Assist.Rlane markings can no longer be recognized.

Switching on Active Lane Keeping Assist

X Switch on Active Lane Keeping Assist usingthe on-board computer (Y page 205).Symbol : appears in the multifunctiondisplay.If your speed exceeds 40 mph (60 km/h)and lane markings are detected,symbol : is shown in green. Active LaneKeeping Assist is ready for use.


ivin

g an

d pa

rkin

g

Useful information ............................ 194Important safety notes .................... 194Displays and operation .................... 194Menus and submenus ...................... 198Display messages ............................. 213Warning and indicator lamps in theinstrument cluster ............................ 239

193

On-b

oard

com

pute

r and

dis

play

s

Useful information




You will find an illustration of the instrumentcluster in the "At a glance" section(Y page 29).

G WARNINGA driver's attention to the road and trafficconditions must always be his/her primaryfocus when driving.For your safety and the safety of others,selecting features through the multifunctionsteering wheel should only be done by thedriver when traffic and road conditions permitit to be done safely.Bear in mind that at a speed of just 30 mph(approximately 50 km/h ), your vehicle iscovering a distance of 44 feet (approximately14 m) every second.

G WARNINGNo messages will be displayed if either theinstrument cluster or the multifunctiondisplay is inoperative.As a result, you will not be able to seeinformation about your driving conditions,such asRspeedRoutside temperatureRwarning/indicator lamps

Rmalfunction/warning messagesRfailure of any systemsDriving characteristics may be impaired.If you must continue to drive, do so with addedcaution. Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as possible.

G WARNINGMalfunction and warning messages are onlyindicated for certain systems and areintentionally not very detailed. Themalfunction and warning messages aresimply a reminder with respect to theoperation of certain systems. They do notreplace the owner's and/or driver'sresponsibility to maintain the vehicle'soperating safety. Have all requiredmaintenance and safety checks performed onthe vehicle. Bring the vehicle to an authorizedMercedes-Benz Center to address themalfunction and warning messages.

Displays and operation

Coolant temperature display

G WARNINGDriving when your engine is overheated cancause some fluids which may have leaked intothe engine compartment to catch fire. Youcould be seriously burned.Steam from an overheated engine can causeserious burns which can occur just by openingthe engine hood. Stay away from the engineif you see or hear steam coming from it.Stop the vehicle in a safe location away fromother traffic. Turn off the engine, get out of thevehicle and do not stand near the vehicle untilthe engine has cooled down.

The coolant temperature gauge is in theinstrument cluster on the left-hand side.Under normal operating conditions and withthe specified coolant level, the coolanttemperature may rise to 248 ‡ (120 †).

194 Displays and operationOn

-boa

rd c

ompu

ter a

nd d

ispl

ays

! If the coolant temperature is too high adisplay message is shown.If the coolant temperature rises above248 ‡(120 †), do not drive any further asthis could damage the engine.

TachometerThe red band in the tachometer indicates theengine's overrevving range.

! Do not drive in the overrevving range, asthis could damage the engine.

The fuel supply is interrupted to protect theengine when the red band is reached.

Outside temperature displayThe outside temperature display is in themultifunction display (Y page 196).

G WARNINGThe outside temperature indicator is notdesigned to serve as an ice-warning deviceand is therefore unsuitable for that purpose.Indicated temperatures just above thefreezing point do not guarantee that the roadsurface is free of ice. The road may still be icy,especially in wooded areas or on bridges.

Changes in the outside temperature aredisplayed after a short delay.

Speedometer with segmentsThe segments in the speedometer indicatewhich speed range is available.Cruise control (Y page 159) activated:The segments light up from the stored speedto the maximum speed.DISTRONIC PLUS (Y page 161) activated:One or two segments in the set speed rangelight up.DISTRONIC PLUS detects a vehicle in front:

The segments between the speed of thevehicle in front and the stored speed light up.

Operating the on-board computer

OverviewThe on-board computer is activated as soonas you turn the SmartKey to position 1 in theignition lock.You can control the multifunction display andthe settings in the on-board computer usingthe buttons on the multifunction steeringwheel.

: Multifunction display; To switch on the Voice Control System;

see the separate operating instructions= Right control panel? Left control panelA Back button

Displays and operation 195

On-b

oard

com

pute

r and

dis

play

s

Z

Left control panel

=

;

RCalls up the menu and menu bar

9

:

Press briefly:RScrolls through listsRSelects a submenu or functionRIn the Audio menu: selects a

stored station, an audio track ora video sceneRIn the Tel (telephone) menu:

switches to the phone book andselects a name or telephonenumber

9

:

Press and hold:RIn the Audio menu: selects the

previous/next station or selectsan audio track or a video sceneusing rapid scrollingRIn the Tel (telephone) menu:

starts rapid scrolling through thephone book

a RConfirms a selection/displaymessageRIn the Tel (telephone) menu:

switches to the telephone bookand starts dialing the selectednumberRIn the Audio menu: stops the

station search function at thedesired station

Right control panel

~ RRejects or ends a callRExits phone book/redial

memory

6 RMakes or accepts a callRSwitches to the redial memory

WX

RAdjusts the volume

8 RMute

Back button

% Press briefly:RBackRSwitches off the Voice Control

SystemRHides display messages or calls

up the last Trip menu functionusedRExits the telephone book/redial

memory

% Press and hold:RCalls up the standard display in

the Trip menu

Multifunction displayValues and settings as well as displaymessages are shown in the multifunctiondisplay.

: Description field; Menu bar= Drive program? Outside temperature or speed

(Y page 206)A Transmission position

196 Displays and operationOn

-boa

rd c

ompu

ter a

nd d

ispl

ays

X To show menu bar ;: press the =or ; button on the steering wheel.

The following messages may appear in themultifunction display:XjY Parking Guidance (Y page 178)_ Adaptive Highbeam Assist

(Y page 110)À ATTENTION ASSIST (Y page 182)Ã Lane Keeping Assist (Y page 185) or

Active Lane Keeping Assist(Y page 190)

HOLD HOLD function (Y page 172)Ä PRE-SAFE® Brake (Y page 65)

Displays and operation 197

On-b

oard

com

pute

r and

dis

play

s

Z

Menus and submenus

Menu overviewThe number of menus shown depends on the optional equipment in the vehicle.

Function: Trip menu (Y page 199)

; Navi menu (navigation details) (Y page 200)

= Audio menu (Y page 201)

? Tel menu (telephone) (Y page 202)

A DriveAssist menu (assistance) (Y page 204)

B Serv. menu (Y page 206)Rcalls up display messages (Y page 213)Rtire pressure loss warning system (Canada only) (Y page 317)Rtire pressure monitor (Y page 319)RASSYST PLUS service interval display (Y page 282)

C Sett. menu (Y page 206)

D AMG menu in AMG vehicles (Y page 210)

The Audio and Tel menus differ slightly in vehicles with an audio system and vehicles withCOMAND. The examples given in this Operator's Manual apply to vehicles equipped withCOMAND.

198 Menus and submenusOn

-boa

rd c

ompu

ter a

nd d

ispl

ays

Trip menu

Standard display

X Press and hold the % button on thesteering wheel until the Trip menu withodometer : and trip odometer ; isshown.

Trip computer "From start" or "Fromreset"The values in the From Start submenu arecalculated from the start of a journey, whilethe values in the From Reset submenu arecalculated from the last time the submenuwas reset (Y page 200).X Press the = or ; button on the

steering wheel to select the Trip menu.X Press the 9 or : button to selectFrom Start or From Reset.

Trip computer "From start" (example): Distance; Time= Average speed? Average fuel consumption

The From Start trip computer is resetautomatically if:

Rthe ignition has been switched off for morethan four hours.R999 hours have been exceeded.R9,999 miles have been exceeded.When 9,999 hours or 99,999 miles have beenexceeded, the trip computer is automaticallyreset From Reset.

Displaying the range and current fuelconsumptionX Press the = or ; button on the

steering wheel to select the Trip menu.X Press the 9 or : to select the

current fuel consumption16 and theapproximate range.

The approximate range that can be covereddepends on the fuel level and your currentdriving style. If there is only a small amountof fuel left in the fuel tank, the display showsa vehicle being refueled C instead of therange.

Digital speedometerX Press the = or ; button on the

steering wheel to select the Trip menu.X Press 9 or : to select the digital

speedometer.

: Digital speedometer

16 Not AMG vehicles.

Menus and submenus 199

On-b

oard

com

pute

r and

dis

play

s

Z

Resetting valuesYou can reset the values of the followingfunctions:RTrip odometerRTrip computer "From start"RTrip computer "From reset"X Press the = or ; button on the

steering wheel to select the Trip menu.X Press the 9 or : button to select the

function that you wish to reset.X Press a.

Resetting the trip computer "From start" (example)X Press : to select Yes and press a

to confirm.

Navigation system menu

Displaying navigation instructionsIn the Navi menu, the multifunction displayshows navigation instructions. For moreinformation, see the separate operatinginstructions.X Switch on COMAND (see the separate

operating instructions).X Press the = or ; button on the

steering wheel to select the Navi menu.

Route guidance inactive

: Direction of travel; Current road

Route guidance active

No change of direction announced

: Distance to the destination; Distance to the next change of direction= Current road? Symbol for "follow the road's course"

Change of direction announced without alane recommendation

: Road into which the change of directionleads

; Distance to change of direction and visualdistance display

= Current road? Symbol for change of direction

When a change of direction has beenannounced, you will see visual distancedisplay ; next to the symbol for change of


-boa

rd c

ompu

ter a

nd d

ispl

ays

direction ?. This decreases in size as youapproach the announced change of direction.

Change of direction announced with alane recommendationLane recommendations are only displayed ifthe relevant data is available on the digitalmap.

: Road into which the change of directionleads

; Distance to change of direction and visualdistance display

= Lane recommendation? Symbol for change of direction

On multi-lane roads, lane recommendation= may be shown for the next change ofdirection. Lanes may be added during achange of direction.

Lane recommendation display (example): Uninterrupted lane; New lane during a change of direction

Other status indicators of thenavigation systemRO : you have reached the destination or

an intermediate destination.RNew Route... or Calculating Route: a

new route is being calculated.

ROff Map or Off Mapped Road: the vehicleposition is outside the area of the digitalmap (off-map position).RNo Route: no route could be calculated to

the selected destination.

Audio menu

Selecting a radio stationi SIRIUS XM satellite radio acts like a

normal radio.For more information on satellite radiooperation, see the separate operatinginstructions.

You can only change the waveband and storenew stations using the audio system orCOMAND.X Switch on the audio system or COMAND

and select Radio (see the separateoperating instructions).

X Press the = or ; button on thesteering wheel to select the Audio menu.

: Waveband; Station17

X To select a stored station: briefly pressthe 9 or : button.

X To select a station from the station list: press and briefly hold the 9or : button.

X To select a station using station search18: press and briefly hold the 9or : button.

17 If the station has been stored, the memory position will also be displayed.18 Only if no station list is received.


On-b

oard

com

pute

r and

dis

play

s

Z

Operating audio player or audio mediaAudio data from various audio devices ormedia can be played, depending on theequipment installed in the vehicle.X Switch on the audio system or COMAND

and select the audio device or medium (seethe separate operating instructions).

X Press the = or ; button on thesteering wheel to select the Audio menu.

CD changer display (example): Current trackX To select the next/previous track:

briefly press the 9 or : button.X To select a track from the track list

(rapid scrolling): press and hold the9 or : button until the desired trackhas been reached.

If you press and hold the 9 or :button, the rapid scrolling speed is increased.Not all audio devices or media support thisfunction.If track information is stored on the audiodevice or medium, the multifunction displaywill show the number and name of the track.The current track does not appear in audioAUX mode (Auxiliary audio mode: externalaudio source connected).

Video DVD operationX Switch on COMAND and select video DVD

(see the separate operating instructions).X Press the = or ; button on the

steering wheel to select the Audio menu.

DVD changer display (example): Current sceneX To select the next or previous scene:

briefly press the 9 or : button.X To select a scene from the scene list

(rapid scrolling): press and hold the9 or : button until the desiredscene has been reached.

Telephone menu

IntroductionYou can establish a Bluetooth® connection tothe audio system or to COMAND (see theseparate operating instructions).

G WARNINGA driver's attention to the road must alwaysbe his/her primary focus when driving. Foryour safety and the safety of others, werecommend that you pull over to a safelocation and stop before placing or taking atelephone call. If you choose to use thetelephone while driving, please use the hands-free device and only use the telephone whenweather, road and traffic conditions permit.Some jurisdictions prohibit the driver fromusing a mobile phone while driving a vehicle.Bear in mind that at a speed of just 30 mph(approximately 50 km/h ), your vehicle iscovering a distance of 44 feet (approximately14 m) every second.

X Switch on the mobile phone and audiosystem or COMAND (see the separateoperating instructions).

X Press the = or ; button on thesteering wheel to select the Tel menu.


-boa

rd c

ompu

ter a

nd d

ispl

ays

You will see one of the following displaymessages in the multifunction display:RTelephone Ready or the name of the

network provider: the mobile phone hasfound a network and is ready to receive.RTelephone No Service: no network is

available, or the mobile phone is searchingfor a network.

Accepting a callIf someone calls you when you are in the Tel menu, a display message appears in themultifunction display, for example:

X Press the 6 button on the steeringwheel to accept an incoming call.

If you are not in the Tel menu, you can stillaccept a call.

Rejecting or ending a callX Press the ~ button on the steering

wheel.If you are not in the Tel menu, you can stillreject or end a call.

Dialing a number from the phone bookIf your mobile phone is able to receive calls,you can search for and dial a number from thephone book in the audio system or COMANDat any time.X Press the = or ; button on the

steering wheel to select the Tel menu.X Press the 9, : or a button to call

up the phone book.

X Press the 9 or : button to select thedesired name.To start scrolling rapidly, press and hold the9 or : button for longer than onesecond. After a short time, the rapid scrollspeeds up.Rapid scrolling stops when you release thebutton or reach the end of the list.

X If only one telephone number is stored for a name: press the 6 or a buttonto start dialing.

orX If there is more than one number for a

particular name: press the 6 or abutton to display the numbers.

X Press the 9 or : button to select thenumber you want to dial.

X Press the 6 or a button to startdialing.

orX If you do not want to make a call: press

the ~ or % button.

RedialingThe on-board computer saves the last namesor numbers dialed in the redial memory.X Press the = or ; button on the

steering wheel to select the Tel menu.X Press the 6 button to switch to the

redial memory.X Press the 9 or : button to select the

desired name or number.X Press the 6 or a button to start

dialing.orX If you do not want to make a call: press

the ~ or % button.


On-b

oard

com

pute

r and

dis

play

s

Z

Assistance menu

Introduction

In the DriveAssist. menu you can:Rshow the distance displayRactivate/deactivate ESP®

Ractivate/deactivate PRE-SAFE® BrakeRactivate/deactivate ATTENTION ASSISTRactivate/deactivate Blind Spot Assist or

Active Blind Spot AssistRactivate/deactivate Lane Keeping Assist or

Active Lane Keeping Assist

Showing the distance displayThis function is only available withDISTRONIC PLUS.X Press the = or ; button on the

steering wheel to select the DriveAssistmenu.

X Press the 9 or : button to selectDistance Display.

X Press a.The DISTRONIC PLUS distance display(Y page 168) appears in the multifunctiondisplay.

Deactivating/activating ESP®

G WARNINGUnder no circumstances should youdeactivate ESP® when the ÷ ESP®

warning lamp in the instrument clusterflashes. Proceed as follows:Rwhen driving off, apply as little throttle as

possible.Rwhile driving, ease up on the accelerator

pedal.Radapt your speed to suit the prevailing road

and weather conditions.Failure to observe these guidelines couldcause the vehicle to skid. ESP® cannotprevent accidents resulting from excessivespeed.

Activating/deactivating ESP® on AMGvehicles (Y page 62).For further information about ESP®, see(Y page 61).X Start the engine.X Press = or ; on the steering wheel

to select the Assist. menu.X Press the 9 or : button to selectESP.

X Press the a button.X To deactivate: press a again.

The å warning lamp in the instrumentcluster comes on.

G WARNINGWhen the å ESP® OFF warning lamp is lit,ESP® is deactivated.If the ÷ ESP® warning lamp and theå ESP® OFF warning lamp remain lit,ESP® is not available due to a malfunction.When ESP® is deactivated or not operational,vehicle stability in standard drivingmaneuvers is reduced.Adapt your speed and driving to the prevailingroad conditions and to the non-operatingstatus of the ESP®.


-boa

rd c

ompu

ter a

nd d

ispl

ays

X To activate: press a again.The å warning lamp in the instrumentcluster goes out.

Activating/deactivating PRE-SAFE®

BrakePRE-SAFE® Brake is only available in vehicleswith DISTRONIC PLUS.X Press the = or ; button on the


X Press 9 or : to select PRE-SAFE Brake.

X Press a.The current selection is displayed.

X To activate/deactivate: press aagain.

When PRE-SAFE® Brake (Y page 65) isactivated, the multifunction display showsthe Ä symbol as long as the HOLDfunction is not activated (Y page 172).Vehicles with Parking Guidance: ifPARKTRONIC is activated and you are drivingat a speed under 22 mph (35 km/h) the jsymbol for Parking Guidance is displayedinstead of the Ä symbol.

Activating/deactivating ATTENTIONASSISTX Press the = or ; button on the


X Press the 9 or : button to selectAttention Asst..

X Press a.The current selection is displayed.


When ATTENTION ASSIST (Y page 182) isactivated, the À symbol appears in themultifunction display when the ignition is on.

Activating/deactivating Blind SpotAssistYou can use the Blind Spot Asst. functionto activate or deactivate Blind Spot Assist(Y page 183) or Active Blind Spot Assist(Y page 187).X Press = or ; on the steering wheel

to select the DriveAssist menu.X Press 9 or : to select Blind Spot Asst..

X Press a.If the function is activated, the monitoredareas are shown in red in the multifunctiondisplay.


Activating/deactivating Lane KeepingAssistYou can use the Lane Keep. Asst. functionto activate/deactivate Lane Keeping Assist(Y page 185) or Active Lane Keeping Assist(Y page 190).X Press the = or ; button on the


X Press the 9 or : button to selectLane Keep. Asst..

X Press a.If the function is activated, the roadmarkings are shown in red in themultifunction display.


If Lane Keeping Assist or Active Lane keepingAssist is activated, the multifunction displayshows the Ã symbol when the ignition isswitched on.


On-b

oard

com

pute

r and

dis

play

s

Z

Service menu

In the Serv. menu you can:Rcall up display messages (Y page 213)Rrestart the tire pressure loss warning

system (Canada only) (Y page 317)Rcheck the tire pressure electronically

(Y page 319)Rcall up the service due date (Y page 282)

Settings menu

Introduction

The Sett. menu can be used for:Rchanging the instrument cluster settingsRchanging the light settingsRchanging the vehicle settingsRchanging the convenience settingsRrestoring the factory settings

Instrument cluster

Selecting the unit of measurement fordistanceThe Display Unit Speed-/Odometer:function allows you to choose whethercertain displays appear in kilometers or miles.

The selected unit of measurement fordistance applies to:Rthe digital speedometer in the Trip menuRthe odometer and the trip odometerRthe trip computerRthe current consumption and the rangeRthe navigation instruction in the Navi menuRDISTRONIC PLUSRASSYST PLUS service interval displayX Press the = or ; button on the

steering wheel to select the Settingsmenu.

X Press the : or 9 button to select theInstr. cluster submenu.

X Press the a button to confirm.X Press the : or 9 button to select theDisplay Unit Speed-/Odometerfunction.You will see the selected setting: km ormiles.

X Press the a button to save the setting.

Selecting the permanent display functionThe Permanent Display: function allowsyou to choose whether the multifunctiondisplay always shows the outsidetemperature or the speed in km/h (USA) ormph (Canada).X Press the = or ; button on the


X Press the : or 9 button to select theInstr. cluster submenu.

X Press the a button to confirm.X Press the : or 9 button to select thePermanent display function.You will see the selected setting Outside Temperature or Speedometer [km/h]:.



-boa

rd c

ompu

ter a

nd d

ispl

ays

Lights

Switching the daytime running lamps on/offThis function is not available in Canada.If you have activated the Day Lightsfunction and the light switch is in the c orÃ position, the daytime running lamps areswitched on automatically during the daywhen the engine is running.In the dark, the following also light up:Rthe low-beam headlampsRthe parking lampsRthe tail lampsRthe license plate lampRthe side marker lampsX Press the = or ; button on the

steering wheel to select the Sett. menu.X Press the : or 9 button to select theLights submenu.

X Press the a button to confirm.X Press the : or 9 button to select theDay Lights function.If the Daytime Running Lights: functionhas been switched on, the cone of light andthe W symbol in the multifunctiondisplay are shown in red.


Switching Adaptive Highbeam Assist on/offX Press the = or ; button on the


X Press the a button to confirm.X Press : or 9 to select the Adapt. Highbeam function.If the Adapt. Highbeam function has beenswitched on, the cone of light and the_ symbol in the multifunction displayare shown in red.


Activating/deactivating surroundlighting and exterior lighting delayedswitch-offIf you have activated the Surround Lighting function and the light switch is inthe c or Ã position, the followingfunctions are active when it is dark:RSurround lighting: the exterior lighting

remains lit for 40 seconds after unlockingwith the SmartKey. The exterior lightingswitches off when you open the driver'sdoor.RExterior lighting delayed switch-off: the

exterior lighting remains lit for 60 secondsafter the engine has been switched off. Ifyou close all the doors, the exterior lightinggoes off after 15 seconds.

If you activate the Surround Lightingfunction, the following light up depending onthe vehicle's equipment:Rthe parking lampsRthe fog lampsRthe daytime running lampsRthe side marker lampsRthe surround lighting in the exterior mirrorsX Press the = or ; button on the


X Press the a button to confirm.X Press the : or 9 button to select theSurround lighting function.When the Surround Lighting function isactivated, the light cone and the areaaround the vehicle are displayed in red inthe multifunction display.



On-b

oard

com

pute

r and

dis

play

s

Z

Deactivating delayed switch-off of theexterior lighting temporarily:X Before leaving the vehicle, turn the

SmartKey to position 0 in the ignition lock.X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the

ignition lock and back to position 0.The exterior lighting delayed switch-off isdeactivated.

Delayed switch-off of the exterior lighting isreactivated the next time you start theengine.

Activating/deactivating the interiorlighting delayed switch-offIf you activate the Light. delay function,the interior lighting remains on for 20seconds after you remove the SmartKey fromthe ignition lock.X Press the = or ; button on the


X Press the : or 9 button to select theLights submenu.

X Press the a button to confirm.X Press the : or 9 button to select theLight. Delay function.When the Light. Delay function isactivated, the vehicle interior is displayedin red in the multifunction display.


Vehicle

Activating/deactivating the automaticdoor locking featureIf you select the Auto. Door Locks function, the vehicle is centrally locked abovea speed of around 9 mph (15 km/h).

i For further information on the automaticlocking feature, see (Y page 78).

X Press the = or ; button on thesteering wheel to select the Settingsmenu.

X Press the : or 9 button to select theVehicle submenu.

X Press the a button to confirm.X Press the : or 9 button to select theAuto. Door Locks function.When the Auto. Door Locks function isactivated, the vehicle doors are displayedin red in the multifunction display.


Activating/deactivating the acousticlocking verification signalIf you activate the Acoustic Lock function,an audible signal sounds depending on thevehicle's date of manufacture:Rwhen locking

orRonce when unlocking and three times when

lockingX Press the = or ; button on the



X Press the a button to confirm.X Press the : or 9 button to select theAcoustic Lock function.If the Acoustic Lock function is activated,the & symbol in the multifunctiondisplay lights up red.


Activating/deactivating the radar sensorsystemThe following systems are switched off whenthe radar sensor system is deactivated:RDISTRONIC PLUS (Y page 161)RBAS PLUS (Y page 60)RPRE-SAFE® Brake (Y page 65)


-boa

rd c

ompu

ter a

nd d

ispl

ays

RBlind Spot Assist (Y page 183)RActive Blind Spot Assist (Y page 187)

i USA only: This device has been approvedby the FCC as a "Vehicular Radar System".The radar sensor is intended for use in anautomotive radar system only. Removal,tampering, or altering of the device will voidany warranties, and is not permitted by theFCC. Do not tamper with, alter, or use inany non-approved way.Any unauthorized modification to thisdevice could void the user's authority tooperate the equipment.

i Canada only:This device complies with RSS-210 ofIndustry Canada. Operation is subject tothe following two conditions:1. This device may not cause harmfulinterference, and2. this device must accept any interferencereceived, including interference that maycause undesired operation.Any unauthorized modification to thisdevice could void the user's authority tooperate the equipment.

X Press the = or ; button on thesteering wheel to select the Settingsmenu.


X Press the a button to confirm.X Press the 9 or : button to selectRadar Sensor (See Oper. Manual):.You will see the selected setting: Enabledor Disabled.


Convenience

Activating/deactivating the EASY-ENTRY/EXIT featureYou can use the Easy Entry/Exit: functionto activate or deactivate the EASY ENTRY/EXIT feature (Y page 100).

G WARNINGYou must make sure no one can becometrapped or injured by the moving steeringwheel when the easy-entry/exit feature isactivated.To stop steering wheel movement, movesteering wheel adjustment lever or press oneof the memory position buttons.Do not leave children unattended in thevehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle.Children could open the driver's door andunintentionally activate the easy-entry/exitfeature, which could result in an accidentand/or serious personal injury.

X Press the = or ; button on thesteering wheel to select the Sett. menu.

X Press the : or 9 button to select theConvenience submenu.

X Press the a button to confirm.X Press the : or 9 button to select theEasy Entry/Exit function.If the Easy Entry/Exit function isactivated, the vehicle steering wheel isdisplayed in red in the multifunctiondisplay.


Switching the fold-in mirrors whenlocking function on/offThis function is only available in Canada.If you switch on the Auto. Mirror Folding function, the exterior mirrors fold inwhen you lock the vehicle. If you unlock thevehicle and then open the driver's or front-passenger door, the exterior mirrors fold outagain.If you have switched the function on and youfold the exterior mirrors in using the buttonon the door (Y page 101), they will not foldout automatically. The exterior mirrors canthen only be folded out using the button onthe door.


On-b

oard

com

pute

r and

dis

play

s

Z

X Press the = or ; button on thesteering wheel to select the Sett. menu.

X Press the : or 9 button to select theConvenience submenu.

X Press the a button to confirm.X Press the : or 9 to select theAuto. Mirror Folding function.If the Auto. Mirror Folding function isactivated, the vehicle's exterior mirror isdisplayed in red in the multifunctiondisplay.


Resetting to factory settingsFor safety reasons, the Day Lights functionin the Lights submenu is only reset when thevehicle is stationary.X Press the = or ; button on the


X Press the : or 9 button to select theFactory Setting submenu.

X Press the a button to confirm.The Reset All Settings? messageappears.

X Press the : or 9 button to selectNo or Yes.

X Press the a button to confirm theselection.If you select Yes, the multifunction displayshows a confirmation message.

AMG menu in AMG vehicles

AMG displaysX Press = or ; on the steering wheel

to select the AMG menu.

: Digital speedometer; Gear indicator= Upshift indicator? Engine oil temperatureA Coolant temperature

Upshift indicator UP = indicates that theengine has reached the overrevving rangewhen in the manual gearshift program.Upshift indicator UP = fades out othermessages until you have shifted up.When the engine oil temperature is below80 †, the oil temperature is shown in blue.Avoid driving at full engine output during thistime.

SETUPSETUP shows the drive program, the ESP®

(Electronic Stability Program) mode and theSPORT handling mode.X Press = or ; on the steering wheel

to select the AMG menu.X Press the 9 button repeatedly until

SETUP is displayed.

: Drive program (C/S/S+/M); ESP® mode (ON/OFF) or SPORT handling

mode (SPORT)


-boa

rd c

ompu

ter a

nd d

ispl

ays

RACETIMER

Displaying and starting RACETIMERG WARNINGThe RACETIMER feature is only for use onroads and in conditions where high speeddriving is permitted. Racing on public roads isprohibited under all circumstances. The driveris and must always remain responsible forfollowing posted speed limits.

You can use the RACETIMER to store laptimes.X Press = or ; on the steering wheel

to select the AMG menu.X Press the 9 button repeatedly until the

RACETIMER is shown.

i If RACETIMER is selected, the menu barcannot be called up with the =and ; buttons.

: Lap; RACETIMER

You can start the RACETIMER when theengine is running or if the SmartKey is inposition 2 in the ignition lock.X To start: press the a button to start the

RACETIMER.

Displaying the intermediate time

X Press = or ; to select Interm. Time.

X Press the a button to confirm.The intermediate time is displayed for fiveseconds.

Starting a new lapIt is possible to store a maximum of sixteenlaps.X Press a to confirm New Lap.

: RACETIMER; Fastest lap time (best lap)= Lap

Stopping the RACETIMERX Press the % button on the steering

wheel.

X Press a to confirm YES.

The RACETIMER interrupts timing when youstop the vehicle and turn the SmartKey toposition 1 in the ignition lock. When you turnthe SmartKey to position 2 or 3 and thenpress the a to confirm Start, timing iscontinued.

Resetting the current lapX Stop the RACETIMER.X Press = or ; to select Reset Lap.X Press a to reset the lap time to "0”.


On-b

oard

com

pute

r and

dis

play

s

Z

Deleting all lapsIf you switch off the engine, the RACETIMERis reset to "0" after 30 seconds. All laps aredeleted.You cannot delete individual stored laps. Ifyou have stopped 16 laps, the current lapdoes not have to be reset.X Reset the current lap.X Press a to confirm Reset.Reset Race Timer? appears in themultifunction display.

X Press the : button to select Yes andpress the a button to confirm.All laps are deleted.

Overall evaluationThis function is shown if you have stored atleast one lap and stopped the RACETIMER.X Press = or ; on the steering wheel


overall evaluation is shown.

: RACETIMER overall evaluation; Total time driven= Average speed? Distance coveredA Top speed

Lap evaluationThis function is only available if you havestored at least two laps and have stopped theRACETIMER.X Press = or ; on the steering wheel


lap evaluation is shown.Each lap is shown in a separate submenu.The fastest lap is indicated by flashingsymbol :.

: Lap; Lap time= Average lap speed? Lap lengthA Top speed during lapX Press the 9 or : button to select a

different lap evaluation.


-boa

rd c

ompu

ter a

nd d

ispl

ays

Display messages

General notes

G WARNINGAll categories of messages contain important information which should be taken note of and,where a malfunction is indicated, addressed as soon as possible at an authorized Mercedes-BenzCenter.Failure to repair the condition noted may cause damage not covered by the Mercedes-BenzLimited Warranty, or result in property damage or personal injury.

Display messages appear in the multifunction display.Display messages with graphic displays may be shown in simplified form in the Operator'sManual and may differ from the messages shown in the multifunction display.Please respond in accordance with the display messages and follow the additional notes inthis Operator's Manual.Certain display messages are accompanied by an audible warning tone or a continuous tone.When you stop and park the vehicle, please observe the notes on the HOLD function(Y page 172) and parking (Y page 153).

Hiding display messagesYou can hide some display messages with a low priority.X Press the a or % button on the steering wheel to hide the display message.

The display message is cleared.Display messages with a high priority are shown in red.You cannot hide display messages of the highest priority. The multifunction display showsthese messages continuously until the causes for the messages have been remedied.

Message memoryThe message memory allows you to call up previous display messages.X Press = or ; on the steering wheel to select the Serv. menu.

If there are display messages, the multifunction display shows 2 Messages, for example.X Press the 9 or : button to select the entry, e.g. 2 Messages.X Confirm with a.X Press the 9 or : button to scroll through the display messages.

When the ignition is switched off, all display messages are deleted apart from some high-priority display messages. Once the causes of the high-priority display messages have beenrectified, the corresponding display messages are also deleted.

Display messages 213

On-b

oard

com

pute

r and

dis

play

s

Z

Safety systems

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

!÷Currently Unavailable See Operator's Manual

G Risk of accident

ABS (Anti-lock Braking System), ESP® (Electronic StabilityProgram), BAS (Brake Assist), the HOLD function and hill startassist are temporarily unavailable.BAS PLUS and PRE-SAFE® Brake may also have failed.In addition, the ÷, å and ! warning lamps light up inthe instrument cluster.The self-diagnosis function might not be complete, for example.ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated.The brake system continues to function normally, but without thefunctions listed above. The wheels could therefore lock if youbrake hard, for example.X Carefully drive a suitable distance making slight steering

movements at a speed above 12 mph (20 km/h).If the display message disappears, the functions mentionedabove are available again.

If the display message continues to be displayed:X Drive on carefully.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

G Risk of accident

ABS, ESP®, BAS, the HOLD function and hill start assist aretemporarily unavailable.BAS PLUS and PRE-SAFE® Brake may also have failed.In addition, the ÷, å and ! warning lamps light up inthe instrument cluster.For example, the on-board voltage may be insufficient.ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated.The brake system continues to function normally, but without thefunctions listed above. The wheels could therefore lock if youbrake hard, for example.X Drive on carefully.

If the display message disappears, the functions mentionedabove are available again.


214 Display messagesOn

-boa

rd c

ompu

ter a

nd d

ispl

ays


!÷Inoperative See Operator's Manual

G Risk of accident

ABS, ESP®, BAS, the HOLD function and hill start assist areunavailable due to a malfunction.BAS PLUS and PRE-SAFE® Brake may also have failed.The $ (USA only)/ J (Canada only), ÷, åand ! warning lamps in the instrument cluster also light up.The brake system continues to function normally, but without thefunctions listed above. The wheels could therefore lock if youbrake hard, for example.ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated.X Drive on carefully.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.

÷Currently Unavailable See Operator's Manual

G Risk of accident

ESP®, BAS, the HOLD function and hill start assist are temporarilyunavailable.BAS PLUS and PRE-SAFE® Brake may also have failed.In addition, the ÷ and å warning lamps light up in theinstrument cluster.The self-diagnosis function might not be complete, for example.ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated.The brake system continues to function normally, but without thefunctions listed above.X Carefully drive a suitable distance making slight steering

movements at a speed above 12 mph (20 km/h).If the display message disappears, the functions mentionedabove are available again.



On-b

oard

com

pute

r and

dis

play

s

Z


÷Inoperative See Operator's Manual

G Risk of accident

ESP®, BAS, the HOLD function and hill start assist are unavailabledue to a malfunction.BAS PLUS and PRE-SAFE® Brake may also have failed.In addition, the ÷ and å warning lamps light up in theinstrument cluster.ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated.The brake system continues to function normally, but without thefunctions listed above.X Drive on carefully.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

T!÷Inoperative See Operator's Manual

G Risk of accident

EBD (electronic brake force distribution), ABS, ESP®, BAS, theHOLD function and hill start assist are unavailable due to amalfunction.BAS PLUS and PRE-SAFE® Brake may also have failed.In addition, the ÷, å and ! warning lamps light up inthe instrument cluster and a warning tone sounds.ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated.The brake system continues to function normally, but without thefunctions listed above. The wheels could therefore lock if youbrake hard, for example.X Drive on carefully.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.

#Check Brake Pad Wear

The brake pads/linings have reached their wear limit.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

$(USA

only)J(Canadaonly)Release Parking Brake

You are driving with the parking brake applied. A warning tone alsosounds.X Release the parking brake.


-boa

rd c

ompu

ter a

nd d

ispl

ays


$(USA

only)J(Canadaonly)Brake Immediately

A malfunction has occurred while the HOLD function orDISTRONIC PLUS is active.A tone may also sound at regular intervals. The tone becomeslouder if you attempt to lock the vehicle.You cannot start the engine.X Paying attention to the traffic situation, immediately depress the

brake pedal firmly and hold until the display messagedisappears.

X Prevent the vehicle from rolling away before you leave it(Y page 294).You can restart the engine.

$(USA

only)J(Canadaonly)Check Brake Fluid Level

G Risk of accidentThere is not enough brake fluid in the brake fluid reservoir.Additionally, the red $ (USA only)/ J (Canada only)warning lamp lights up in the instrument cluster and a warningtone sounds.X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying

attention to road and traffic conditions. Do not continue drivingunder any circumstances.

X Engage the parking brake.X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.X Do not add brake fluid. This will not rectify the malfunction.

G WARNINGDriving with the message Check Brake Fluid Level displayed can result in an accident. Haveyour brake system checked immediately.Do not add brake fluid before checking the brake system. Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir canresult in spilling brake fluid on hot engine parts and the brake fluid catching fire. You can beseriously burned.


On-b

oard

com

pute

r and

dis

play

s

Z


GTele Aid Inoperative

USA only: one or more of the main functions in the mbrace systemare malfunctioning.Canada only: one or more of the main functions of the TELEAIDsystem are malfunctioning.X USA only: have the mbrace system checked at a qualified

specialist workshop.X Canada only: have the TELEAID system checked at a qualified


PRE-SAFEFunction Currently Limited See Oper. Manual

G Risk of accident

PRE-SAFE® Brake is temporarily inoperative if:Rthe DISTRONIC PLUS cover in the radiator grill is dirty.Rthe sensors in the bumpers are dirty.Rits function is impaired due to heavy rain or snow.Rthe radar sensor system is temporarily inoperative, e.g. due to

electromagnetic radiation emitted by nearby TV or radiostations or other sources of electromagnetic radiation.Ryou switch off ESP® (AMG vehicles only).Rthe system is outside the operating temperature range.Rthe on-board voltage is too low.PRE-SAFE® Brake is operational again and the display messagedisappears if:Rthe dirt (e.g. slush) drops away while the vehicle is in motion.Rthe system detects that the sensors are fully available again.Ryou switch ESP® on again (AMG vehicles only).Rthe system is within the operating temperature range.If the display message continues to be displayed:X Clean the DISTRONIC PLUS cover in the radiator grill

(Y page 287).X Clean the bumpers (Y page 287).X Restart the engine.X Wait until the battery is sufficiently charged.

PRE-SAFEFunctions Limited See Operator's Manual

G Risk of accident

PRE-SAFE® Brake is defective. BAS PLUS or the distance warningsignal may also have failed.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.


-boa

rd c

ompu

ter a

nd d

ispl

ays


6SRS Malfunction Service Required

G Risk of injuryThere is a malfunction in the SRS (Supplemental RestraintSystem). The 6 warning lamp also lights up in the instrumentcluster.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

6Front Left Malfunction Service Required orFront Right Malfunction Service Required

G Risk of injurySRS has malfunctioned at the front on the left or right. The 6warning lamp also lights up in the instrument cluster.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

6Rear Left Malfunction Service Required orRear Right Malfunction Service Required

G Risk of injurySRS has malfunctioned at the rear on the left or right. The 6warning lamp also lights up in the instrument cluster.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

6Rear Center SRS Malfunction Service Required

G Risk of injurySRS has malfunctioned at the rear center. The 6 warning lampalso lights up in the instrument cluster.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

6Left Side Curtain Airbag Malfunction Service Required orRight Side Curtain Airbag Malfunction Service Required

G Risk of injuryThere is a malfunction in the left-hand and/or right-hand windowcurtain air bag. The 6 warning lamp also lights up in theinstrument cluster.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

G WARNINGIn the event a malfunction of the SRS is indicated as outlined above, the SRS may not beoperational.For your safety, we strongly recommend that you contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Centerimmediately to have the system checked. Otherwise the SRS may not be activated when neededin an accident, which could result in serious or fatal injury, or it might deploy unexpectedly andunnecessarily which could also result in injury.


On-b

oard

com

pute

r and

dis

play

s

Z


Front Passenger Airbag EnabledSee Operator's Manual

The front-passenger air bag is enabled during the journey, eventhough:Ra child, a small adult or an object weighing less than the

system's weight threshold is located on the front-passengerseat.Rthe front-passenger seat is unoccupied.The system may detect objects or forces applying additionalweight on the seat.X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying

attention to road and traffic conditions.X Engage the parking brake.X Switch off the ignition.X Open the front-passenger door.X Remove the child and the child restraint system from the front-

passenger seat.X If necessary, secure the child in a child restraint system on a

suitable rear seat.X Make sure that there are no objects on the seat adding to the

weight.The system may otherwise detect the additional weight andinterpret the seat occupant's weight as greater than it actuallyis.

X Keep the seat unoccupied, close the front-passenger door andswitch on the ignition.

Observe the 45(Y page 42) indicator lamp and themultifunction display and check the following:Seat unoccupied and ignition switched on:Rthe 45 indicator lamp must light up and remain lit. When

the indicator lamp is on, OCS (Y page 42) has deactivated thefront-passenger air bag.Rthe Front Passenger Airbag Enabled See Operator's Manual or Front Passenger Airbag Disabl'd See Operator's Manual display messages must not appear in themultifunction display. Wait for a period of at least 60 secondsuntil the necessary system checks have been completed and tomake sure that the display messages do not appear in themultifunction display.

If these conditions are fulfilled, the front-passenger seat can beoccupied again. Whether the 45 indicator lamp remains litor goes out depends on how OCS classifies the occupant.If the conditions are not fulfilled, the system is not operatingcorrectly.


-boa

rd c

ompu

ter a

nd d

ispl

ays

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M SolutionsX Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.

G WARNINGIf the 45 indicator lamp remains off even after performing the above corrective steps, donot have any children 12 years old and under and other small individuals use the front-passengerseat until the system has been repaired.


Front Passenger Airbag Disabl'dSee Operator's Manual

The front-passenger air bag is deactivated during the journey eventhough an adult or a person larger than a certain size is occupyingthe front-passenger seat. If additional forces are applied to theseat, the system may interpret the occupant's weight as lowerthan it actually is.X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying

attention to road and traffic conditions.X Engage the parking brake.X Switch off the ignition.X Have the occupant get out of the vehicle.X Keep the seat unoccupied, close the front-passenger door and

switch on the ignition.Observe the 45(Y page 42) indicator lamp and themultifunction display and check the following:Seat unoccupied and ignition switched on:Rthe 45 indicator lamp must light up and remain lit. When

the indicator lamp is on, OCS (Y page 42) has deactivated thefront-passenger air bag.Rthe Front Passenger Airbag Enabled See Operator's Manual or Front Passenger Airbag Disabled See Operator's Manual display messages must not appear in themultifunction display. Wait for a period of at least 60 secondsuntil the necessary system checks have been completed and tomake sure that the display messages do not appear in themultifunction display.

If these conditions are fulfilled, the front-passenger seat can beoccupied again. Whether the 45 indicator lamp remains litor goes out depends on how OCS classifies the occupant.If the conditions are not fulfilled, the system is not operatingcorrectly.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.


On-b

oard

com

pute

r and

dis

play

s

Z

G WARNINGIf the 45 indicator lamp remains lit with an adult occupant on the front-passenger seateven after performing the above corrective steps, do not have any passenger use the front-passenger seat until the system has been repaired.

Lightsi Display messages about LEDs:

This display message will only appear if all LEDs have failed.


bCheck Left Cornering Light or Check Right Cornering Light

The left or right-hand cornering light is defective.X Check whether you are permitted to change the bulb yourself

(Y page 113).orX Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

bCheck Left Low Beam or Check Right Low Beam

The left or right-hand low-beam headlamp is defective.X Check whether you are permitted to change the bulb yourself


bCheck Rear Left Turn Signal or Check Rear Right Turn Signal

The rear left-hand or rear right-hand turn signal is defective.X Check whether you are permitted to change the bulb yourself


bCheck Front Left Turn Signal or Check Front Right Turn Signal

The front left-hand or front right-hand turn signal is defective.X Check whether you are permitted to change the bulb yourself



-boa

rd c

ompu

ter a

nd d

ispl

ays


bCheck Left Mirror Turn Signal or Check Right Mirror Turn Signal

The turn signal in the left-hand or right-hand exterior mirror isdefective.X Check whether you are permitted to change the bulb yourself


bCheck Center Brake Lamp

The high-mounted brake lamp is faulty.X Check whether you are permitted to change the bulb yourself


bCheck Left Tail and Brake Lamps or Check Right Tail and Brake Lamps

The left or right-hand tail lamp/brake lamp is defective.X Check whether you are permitted to change the bulb yourself


bCheck Left High Beam or Check Right High Beam

The left or right-hand high beam is defective.X Check whether you are permitted to change the bulb yourself


bCheck Left Fog Lamp or Check Right Fog Lamp

The left-hand or right-hand front fog lamp is defective.X Check whether you are permitted to change the bulb yourself


bRear Fog Lamp

The rear fog lamp is defective.X Check whether you are permitted to change the bulb yourself



On-b

oard

com

pute

r and

dis

play

s

Z


bCheck Front Left Parking Lamp or Check Front Right Parking Lamp

The front left or front right parking or standing lamp is defective.X Check whether you are permitted to change the bulb yourself


bBackup Light

The backup lamp is defective.X Check whether you are permitted to change the bulb yourself


bCheck Front Left Sidemarker Lamp or Check Front Right Sidemarker Lamp

The left or right front side marker lamp is defective.X Check whether you are permitted to change the bulb yourself


bCheck Rear Left Sidemarker Lamp or Check Rear Right Sidemarker Lamp

The rear left or right side marker lamp is defective.X Check whether you are permitted to change the bulb yourself


bCheck Left Daytime Running Light or Check Right Daytime Running Light

The left or right-hand daytime running lamp is defective.X Check whether you are permitted to change the bulb yourself


bActive Headlamps Inoperative

The active light function is defective.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

bMalfunction See Operator's Manual

The exterior lighting is defective.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.


-boa

rd c

ompu

ter a

nd d

ispl

ays


bAUTO Lamp Function Inoperative

The light sensor is defective.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

bSwitch Off Lights

The lights are still switched on when you leave the vehicle. Awarning tone also sounds.X Turn the light switch to c or Ã.

Adaptive Highbeam Assist Inoperative

Adaptive Highbeam Assist is faulty.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Adaptive Highbeam Assist Currently Unavailable See Operator's Manual

Adaptive Highbeam Assist is deactivated and temporarilyinoperative. Possible causes are:Rthe windshield in the camera's field of vision is dirty.Rvisibility is impaired due to heavy rain, snow or fog.X Clean the windshield.If the system detects that the camera is fully functional again, theAdaptive Highbeam Assist Now Available display messageis shown.Adaptive Highbeam Assist is operational again.

Engine


+Check Coolant Level See Operator's Manual

The coolant level is too low.X Add coolant, observing the warning notes when doing so

(Y page 280).X If coolant needs to be added more often than usual, have the

engine coolant system checked at a qualified specialistworkshop.

G WARNINGDo not spill antifreeze on hot engine parts. Antifreeze contains ethylene glycol which may burnif it comes into contact with hot engine parts. You could be seriously burned.

! The coolant level is too low. Avoid making long journeys with too little coolant in the coolingsystem. The engine will otherwise be damaged.The display messages and the corresponding symbol that indicate that the coolant level istoo low must not be ignored.


On-b

oard

com

pute

r and

dis

play

s

Z


?Coolant Level Low Stop Vehicle Turn Engine Off

The coolant is too hot.X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely and switch off the engine,

paying attention to road and traffic conditions.X Make sure that the air supply to the engine radiator is not

blocked, e.g. by snow, slush or ice.X Wait until the display message disappears before restarting the

engine. Otherwise, there is a risk of engine damage.X Pay attention to the coolant temperature display.X If the temperature increases again, visit a qualified specialist

workshop immediately.

G WARNINGDriving when your engine is overheated can cause some fluids which may have leaked into theengine compartment to catch fire. You could be seriously burned.Steam from an overheated engine can cause serious burns which can occur just by opening theengine hood. Stay away from the engine if you see or hear steam coming from it.Stop the vehicle in a safe location away from other traffic. Turn off the engine, get out of thevehicle and do not stand near the vehicle until the engine has cooled down.

! If the coolant temperature exceeds 248 ‡(120 †) do not continue driving. The engine willotherwise be damaged.


-boa

rd c

ompu

ter a

nd d

ispl

ays


? The engine fan is defective.X At coolant temperatures under 248 ‡ (120 † ), drive to the next

qualified specialist workshop.X Avoid subjecting the engine to heavy loads, e.g. driving in

mountainous terrain, and stop-and-go traffic.

# The battery is not being charged.Possible causes are:Ra defective alternatorRa torn poly-V-beltRa malfunction in the electronicsX Pull over and stop the vehicle safely and switch off the engine,

paying attention to road and traffic conditions.X Open the hood.X Check whether the poly-V-belt is torn.If the poly-V-belt is torn:! Do not continue driving. The engine could otherwise overheat.X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.If the poly-V-belt is not damaged:X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

4Check Engine Oil At Next Refueling

The oil level has dropped to the minimum level.A warning tone also sounds.X Check the oil level, at the latest when next refueling

(Y page 279).X If necessary, add engine oil (Y page 279).X Have the engine checked at a qualified specialist workshop if

engine oil needs to be added more often than usual.

Information on approved engine oils can be obtained from any qualified specialist workshopor on the Internet at http://www.mbusa.com (USA only).

! The oil level is too low. Avoid long journeys with too little engine oil. There is a risk ofengine damage.The display messages and the corresponding symbol that indicate that the oil level is toolow must not be ignored.


On-b

oard

com

pute

r and

dis

play

s

Z


8Fuel Level Low

The fuel level has dropped into the reserve range.X Refuel at the nearest gas station.

C There is only a very small amount of fuel in the fuel tank.X Refuel at the nearest gas station without fail.

8Gas Cap Loose

The fuel system pressure is too low. The fuel filler cap is not closedcorrectly or the fuel system is leaking.X Check that the fuel filler cap is correctly closed.

If the fuel filler cap is not correctly closed:X Close the fuel filler cap.

If the fuel filler cap is correctly closed:X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Driving systems


ÀAttention Assist: Pause!

Based on specific criteria, ATTENTION ASSIST has determined thatthe driver is tired or paying less attention. A warning tone alsosounds.X If necessary, take a break.During long journeys, take regular breaks in good time so you getenough rest.

ÀAttention Assist Inoperative

ATTENTION ASSIST has failed.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

HOLDOff

The HOLD function is deactivated. The vehicle is skidding.A warning tone also sounds.X Reactivate the HOLD function later (Y page 172).

The HOLD function is deactivated. When the brake pedal is firmlydepressed, an activation condition is not fulfilled.A warning tone also sounds.X Check the activation conditions for the HOLD function

(Y page 172).


-boa

rd c

ompu

ter a

nd d

ispl

ays


Radar SensorsDeactivated See Operator's Manual

The radar sensor system is deactivated.X Switch on the radar sensor system (Y page 208).

Lane Keeping Assist Currently Unavailable. See Operator's Manualor Lane Keeping Assist Currently Unavailable. See Operator's Manual

Lane Keeping Assist or Active Lane Keeping Assist is deactivatedand temporarily inoperative if:Rthe windshield is dirty in the camera's field of vision.Rvisibility is impaired due to heavy rain, snow or fog.Rthere are no lane markings for a longer period.Rthe lane markings are worn, dark or covered, for example by dirt

or snow.Lane Keeping Assist or Active Lane Keeping Assist is operationalagain and the display message disappears if:Rthe dirt (e.g. slush) drops away while the vehicle is in motion.Rthe system recognizes that the camera is fully operational again.If the display message continues to be displayed:X Clean the windshield.

Lane Keeping Assist Inoperativeor Active Lane Keeping Assist Inoperative

Lane Keeping Assist or Active Lane Keeping Assist is defective.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.


On-b

oard

com

pute

r and

dis

play

s

Z


Blind Spot Assist Currently Unavailable See Operator's Manualor Active Blind Spot Assist Currently Unavailable See Operator's Manual

Blind Spot Assist or Active Blind Spot Assist is temporarilyinoperative if:Rthe sensors are dirty.Rits function is impaired due to heavy rain or snow.Rthe radar sensor system is outside the operating temperature

range.Rthe radar sensor system is temporarily inoperative, e.g. due to

electromagnetic radiation emitted by nearby TV or radiostations or other sources of electromagnetic radiation.

The yellow 9 indicator lamps also light up in the exteriormirrors.Blind Spot Assist or Active Blind Spot Assist is operational againand the display message disappears if:Rthe dirt (e.g. slush) drops away while the vehicle is in motion.Rthe system detects that the sensors are fully available again.Rthe radar sensor system is back within the operating

temperature range.If the display message continues to be displayed:X Clean the sensors (Y page 287).X Restart the engine.

Blind Spot Assist Inoperative orActive Blind Spot Assist Inoperative

Blind Spot Assist or Active Blind Spot Assist is defective.The yellow 9 indicator lamps also light up in the exteriormirrors.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Parking Guidance Inoperative

Parking Guidance is malfunctioning (Y page 178).X Restart the engine.If the display message continues to be displayed:X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.


-boa

rd c

ompu

ter a

nd d

ispl

ays


Parking Guidance Canceled

Parking Guidance has been deactivated because:Rthe vehicle is skidding.Rthe sensors are dirty.Ra malfunction has occurred.A warning tone also sounds.X Reactivate Parking Guidance later (Y page 178).If the parking space symbol is not displayed in the multifunctiondisplay when you are driving at a speed of less than 19 mph(30 km/h):X Clean the sensors (Y page 287).X Restart the engine.If the parking space symbol is still not displayed in themultifunction display when you are driving at a speed of less than19 mph (30 km/h):X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Parking Guidance has been deactivated because you are no longerfollowing the recommended path.X Park again and, while doing so, observe the display messages

in the multifunction display.

Parking Guidance Finished

The vehicle is parked. A warning tone also sounds.The display message disappears automatically.

DISTRONIC PLUSOff

DISTRONIC PLUS has been deactivated (Y page 161). If it wasdeactivated automatically, a warning tone also sounds.

DISTRONIC PLUSNow Available

DISTRONIC PLUS is operational again after having beentemporarily unavailable. You can now reactivate DISTRONIC PLUS(Y page 161).


On-b

oard

com

pute

r and

dis

play

s

Z


DISTRONIC PLUSCurrently Unavailable See Operator's Manual

DISTRONIC PLUS is deactivated and is temporarily inoperative if:Rthe DISTRONIC PLUS cover in the radiator grill is dirty.Rits function is impaired due to heavy rain or snow.Rthe sensors in the bumpers are dirty.Rthe radar sensor system is temporarily inoperative, e.g. due to

electromagnetic radiation emitted by nearby TV or radiostations or other sources of electromagnetic radiation.Rthe system is outside the operating temperature range.Rthe on-board voltage is too low.A warning tone also sounds.DISTRONIC PLUS is operational again and the display messagedisappears if:Rthe dirt (e.g. slush) drops away while the vehicle is in motion.Rthe system detects that the sensors are fully available again.Rthe system is within the operating temperature range.If the display message continues to be displayed:X Clean the DISTRONIC PLUS cover in the radiator grill

(Y page 287).X Clean the bumpers (Y page 287).X Restart the engine.

DISTRONIC PLUSInoperative

DISTRONIC PLUS is defective. BAS PLUS (Brake Assist PLUS) andPRE-SAFE® Brake may be inoperative as well.A warning tone also sounds.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

DISTRONIC PLUSOverride

You have depressed the accelerator pedal. DISTRONIC PLUS is nolonger controlling the speed of the vehicle.X Take your foot off the accelerator pedal.

DISTRONIC PLUS --- mph

An activation condition for DISTRONIC PLUS is not fulfilled.X Check the activation conditions for DISTRONIC PLUS

(Y page 161).


-boa

rd c

ompu

ter a

nd d

ispl

ays


Cruise ControlInoperative

Cruise control is defective.A warning tone also sounds.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Cruise Control--- mph

A condition for activating cruise control has not been fulfilled.You attempted to save a speed of less than 20 mph (30 km/h).X If the situation allows, drive faster than 20 mph (30 km/h) and

save the speed.X Check the activation conditions for cruise control

(Y page 159).

Tires

G WARNINGDo not drive with a flat tire. A flat tire affects the ability to steer or brake the vehicle. You maylose control of the vehicle. Continued driving with a flat tire will cause excessive heat build-upand possibly a fire.

G WARNINGFollow recommended tire inflation pressures.Do not underinflate tires. Underinflated tires wear excessively and/or unevenly, adversely affecthandling and fuel economy, and are more likely to fail from being overheated.Do not overinflate tires. Overinflated tires can adversely affect handling and ride comfort, wearunevenly, increase stopping distance, and result in sudden deflation (blowout) because they aremore likely to become punctured or damaged by road debris, potholes etc.


On-b

oard

com

pute

r and

dis

play

s

Z


Check TirePressure Soon

G Risk of accidentThe tire pressure loss warning system has detected a significantloss in pressure.A warning tone also sounds.X Stop the vehicle without making any sudden steering or braking

maneuvers. Pay attention to the traffic conditions as you do so.X Check the tires and, if necessary, change the wheel

(Y page 334).X Check the tire pressures and, if necessary, set to the correct

tire pressure.X Restart the tire pressure loss warning system when the tire

pressure is correct (Y page 317).

Check Tire PressureThen Restart Run Flat Indicator

The tire pressure loss warning system generated a displaymessage and has not been restarted since.X Set the correct tire pressure in all four tires.X Restart the tire pressure loss warning system (Y page 317).

Run Flat IndicatorInoperative

The tire pressure loss warning system is defective.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Tire pressureswill be displayed after driving a few minutes

The tire pressure monitor is measuring the tire pressure.X Drive on.

The tire pressures appear in the multifunction display after youhave been driving for a few minutes.

Tire Press. MonitorInoperative

The tire pressure monitor is defective.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Tire Press. MonitorInoperative No Wheel Sensors

The wheels mounted do not have a suitable tire pressure sensor.The tire pressure monitor is deactivated.X Mount wheels with suitable tire pressure sensors.

The tire pressure monitor is activated automatically after drivingfor a few minutes.


-boa

rd c

ompu

ter a

nd d

ispl

ays


CheckTires

G Risk of accidentThe tire pressure in one or more tires has dropped significantly.The wheel position is displayed in the multifunction display.A warning tone also sounds.X Stop the vehicle without making any sudden steering or braking

maneuvers. Pay attention to the traffic conditions as you do so.X Correct the tire pressure (Y page 319).X If necessary, change a wheel (Y page 334).

Caution:Tire Malfunction

G Risk of accidentThe tire pressure in one or more tires has dropped suddenly. Thewheel position is displayed in the multifunction display.X Stop the vehicle without making any sudden steering or braking

maneuvers. Pay attention to the traffic conditions as you do so.X If necessary, change a wheel (Y page 334).

CorrectTire Pressure

The tire pressure is too low in at least one of the tires or the tirepressure difference between the wheels is too great.X Check the tire pressures at the next opportunity. If necessary,

correct the tire pressure (Y page 319).X Restart the tire pressure monitor (Y page 321).

Tire Press.Sensor(s) Missing

There is no signal from the tire pressure sensor of one or severalwheels. The pressure of the affected tire is not displayed in themultifunction display.X Have the defective tire pressure sensor replaced at a qualified


Tire Press. MonitorCurrently Unavail.

Due to a source of radio interference, no signals can be receivedfrom the wheel sensors. The tire pressure monitor is temporarilymalfunctioning.X Drive on.

The tire pressure monitor restarts automatically as soon as theproblem has been solved.

hTire Press. Warning Caution Tire Malfunction

G Risk of accidentThe tire pressure in one or more tires has dropped suddenly.A warning tone also sounds.X Stop the vehicle without making any sudden steering or braking

maneuvers. Pay attention to the traffic conditions as you do so.X If necessary, change a wheel (Y page 334).


On-b

oard

com

pute

r and

dis

play

s

Z


hCheck Tire Pressure

G Risk of accidentThe tire pressure in one or more tires has dropped significantly.X Stop the vehicle without making any sudden steering or braking

maneuvers. Pay attention to the traffic conditions as you do so.X If necessary, change a wheel (Y page 334).X Check the tire pressure. If necessary, correct the tire pressure

(Y page 319).

hCorrect Tire Pressure

The tire pressure is too low in at least one of the tires or the tirepressure difference between the wheels is too great.X Check the tire pressures at the next opportunity. If necessary,

correct the tire pressure (Y page 319).

Vehicle


Shift to 'P' or 'N'to Start Engine

You have attempted to start the engine with the transmission inposition R or D.X Shift the transmission to position P or N.

PShift to 'P'

You have attempted to stop the engine with the Start/Stop buttonwhile the transmission was not in position P.X Shift the transmission to position P.

While the HOLD function or DISTRONIC PLUS is active, you have:Ropened the driver's door and released the seat belt orRswitched off the engine orRopened the hoodA tone may also sound at regular intervals. The tone becomeslouder if you attempt to lock the vehicle.You cannot start the engine.X Shift the transmission to position P.

You can restart the engine.

N The trunk lid is open.X Close the trunk lid.


-boa

rd c

ompu

ter a

nd d

ispl

ays


M G Risk of accidentThe hood is open.X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying

attention to road and traffic conditions.X Apply the parking brake.X Close the hood.

C At least one door is open.X Close all the doors.

_Rear Left Backrest Not Latched or Rear Right Backrest Not Latched

G Risk of injuryThe backrest in the rear is not engaged on the left-hand and/orright-hand side.X Push the backrest back until it engages.

DPower Steering Malfunction See Operator's Manual

G Risk of accidentThe power steering is malfunctioning.You will need to use more force to steer.A warning tone also sounds.X Check whether you are able to apply the extra force required.X If you are able to steer safely: carefully drive on to a qualified

specialist workshop.X If you are unable to steer safely: do not drive on. Contact the

nearest qualified specialist workshop.

Phone No Service Your vehicle is outside the network provider's transmitter/receiver range.X Wait until the mobile phone operational readiness symbol

appears in the multifunction display.

¥Check Washer Fluid

The washer fluid level in the washer fluid reservoir has droppedbelow the minimum.X Add washer fluid (Y page 281).


On-b

oard

com

pute

r and

dis

play

s

Z

SmartKey


ÂKey Does Not Belong to Vehicle

You have put the wrong SmartKey in the ignition lock.X Use the correct SmartKey.

ÂTake Your Key from Ignition

The SmartKey is in the ignition lock.X Remove the SmartKey.

ÂObtain a New Key

The SmartKey needs to be replaced.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

ÂReplace Key Battery

The batteries of the KEYLESS-GO key are discharged.X Change the batteries (Y page 74).

ÂDon't Forget Your Key

The display message is shown for a maximum of 60 seconds andis only a reminder.You have opened the driver's door with the engine switched off.The KEYLESS-GO key is not in the ignition lock.X Remember to take the KEYLESS-GO key with you when you

leave the vehicle.

ÂKey Not Detected(red display message)

The KEYLESS-GO key is not in the vehicle.A warning tone also sounds.If the engine is switched off, you can no longer lock the vehiclecentrally or start the engine.X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying

attention to road and traffic conditions.X Apply the parking brake.X Locate the KEYLESS-GO key.

The KEYLESS-GO key is not detected while the engine is runningbecause there is interference from a strong source of radio waves.A warning tone also sounds.X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying

attention to road and traffic conditions.X Engage the parking brake.X Operate the vehicle with the SmartKey in the ignition lock.


-boa

rd c

ompu

ter a

nd d

ispl

ays


ÂKey Not Detected(White displaymessage)

The KEYLESS-GO key cannot be detected at present.X Change the location of the key with the KEYLESS-GO functions

in the vehicle.

If the KEYLESS-GO key is still not detected:X Operate the vehicle with the SmartKey in the ignition lock.

ÂKey Detected in Vehicle

The KEYLESS-GO key has been detected inside the vehicle duringlocking.X Remove the KEYLESS-GO key from the vehicle.

ÂRemove 'Start' Button and Insert Key

KEYLESS-GO is temporarily malfunctioning or is defective. Awarning tone also sounds.X Insert the SmartKey into the ignition lock and turn it to the

desired position.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

ÂClose Doors to Lock Vehicle

At least one door is open. A warning tone also sounds.X Close all doors and lock the vehicle again.

Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster

Seat belt


7

After starting theengine, the red seatbelt warning lamp lightsup for six seconds.

The seat belt warning lamp reminds the driver and front passengerto fasten their seat belts.X Fasten your seat belt (Y page 48).

7

After starting theengine, the red seatbelt warning lamp lightsup. In addition, awarning tone soundsfor up to six seconds.

G Risk of injuryThe driver's seat belt is not fastened.X Fasten your seat belt (Y page 48).

The warning tone ceases.

Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster 239

On-b

oard

com

pute

r and

dis

play

s

Z


7

The red seat beltwarning lamp lights upafter the engine starts,as soon as the driver'sor the front-passengerdoor is closed.

G Risk of injuryThe driver or front passenger has not fastened their seat belt.X Fasten your seat belt (Y page 48).

The warning lamp goes out.

G Risk of injuryThere are objects on the front-passenger seat.X Remove the objects from the front-passenger seat and stow

them in a secure place.The warning lamp goes out.

7

The red seat beltwarning lamp flashesand an intermittentaudible warningsounds.

G Risk of injuryThe driver or front passenger has not fastened their seat belt. Inaddition, you are driving faster than 15 mph (25 km/h) or you havebriefly driven faster than 15 mph (25 km/h).X Fasten your seat belt (Y page 48).

The warning lamp goes out and the intermittent warning toneceases.

G Risk of injuryThere are objects on the front-passenger seat. In addition, you aredriving faster than 15 mph (25 km/h) or you have briefly drivenfaster than 15 mph (25 km/h).X Remove the objects from the front-passenger seat and stow

them in a secure place.The warning lamp goes out and the intermittent warning toneceases.

240 Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument clusterOn

-boa

rd c

ompu

ter a

nd d

ispl

ays

Safety systems


$ (USA only)J (Canada only)The red brake systemwarning lamp comes onwhile the engine isrunning. A warning tonealso sounds.

G Risk of accidentThere is not enough brake fluid in the brake fluid reservoir.X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying

attention to road and traffic conditions. Do not continue drivingunder any circumstances.

X Engage the parking brake.X Consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately.X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction

display.Do not add brake fluid. This will not rectify the malfunction.

G WARNINGDriving with the brake warning lamp illuminated can result in an accident. Have your brake systemchecked immediately if the brake warning lamp stays on. Do not add brake fluid before checkingthe brake system.Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir can result in spilling brake fluid on hot engine parts and thebrake fluid catching fire. You can be seriously burned.


On-b

oard

com

pute

r and

dis

play

s

Z


!

The yellow ABS warninglamp is lit while theengine is running.

G Risk of accidentABS (Anti-lock Brake System) is deactivated due to a malfunction.BAS (Brake Assist), BAS PLUS, ESP® (Electronic StabilityProgram), PRE-SAFE® Brake, the HOLD function and hill startassist are therefore also deactivated, for example.The brake system continues to function normally, but without thefunctions listed above. The wheels could therefore lock if youbrake hard, for example.ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated.X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction

display.X Drive on carefully.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.If the ABS control unit is faulty, there is also a possibility that othersystems, such as the navigation system or the automatictransmission, will not be available.

!

The yellow ABS warninglamp is lit while theengine is running.

G Risk of accident

ABS is temporarily unavailable. BAS, BAS PLUS, ESP®, EBD(electronic brake force distribution), PRE-SAFE® Brake, the HOLDfunction, hill start assist are therefore also deactivated, forexample.Self diagnosis is not yet complete or the on-board voltage may beinsufficient, for example.The brake system continues to function normally, but without thefunctions listed above. The wheels could therefore lock if youbrake hard, for example.ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated.X Carefully drive a suitable distance making slight steering

movements at a speed above 12 mph (20 km/h).The functions mentioned above are available again when thewarning lamp goes out.

If the warning lamp is still on:X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction

display.X Drive on carefully.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.


-boa

rd c

ompu

ter a

nd d

ispl

ays


!

The yellow ABS warninglamp is lit while theengine is running. Awarning tone alsosounds.

G Risk of accident

EBD is faulty. Therefore, ABS, BAS, BAS PLUS, ESP®, PRE-SAFE®,PRE-SAFE® Brake, the HOLD function and hill start assist areunavailable, for example.The brake system continues to function normally, but without thefunctions listed above. The wheels could therefore lock if youbrake hard, for example.ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated.X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction


$ (USA only)J (Canada only)÷å!

The red brake warninglamp, the yellow ESP®

and ESP® OFF warninglamps and the yellowABS warning lamp arelit while the engine isrunning.

G Risk of accident

ABS and ESP® are faulty. Therefore, BAS, BAS PLUS, EBD, PRE-SAFE® Brake, the HOLD function and hill start assist, for example,are unavailable due to a malfunction.The brake system continues to function normally, but without thefunctions listed above. The wheels could therefore lock if youbrake hard, for example.ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated.X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction


÷

The yellow ESP®

warning lamp flasheswhile the vehicle is inmotion.

G Risk of accident

ESP® or traction control has intervened because there is a risk ofskidding or at least one wheel has started to spin.Cruise control or DISTRONIC PLUS is deactivated.X Only depress the accelerator pedal as far as necessary when

pulling away.X Ease off the accelerator pedal while the vehicle is in motion.X Adapt your driving style to suit the road and weather conditions.X Do not deactivate ESP®.

Exceptions: (Y page 61).


On-b

oard

com

pute

r and

dis

play

s

Z


å

The yellow ESP® OFFwarning lamp is lit whilethe engine is running.

G Risk of accident

ESP® is deactivated. ESP® will not stabilize the vehicle if it startsto skid or if a wheel starts to spin.X Reactivate ESP®.

Exceptions: (Y page 61).X Adapt your driving style to suit the road and weather conditions.

If ESP® cannot be activated:X Have ESP® checked at a qualified specialist workshop.

M

AMG vehicles only:The yellow SPORThandling mode warninglamp is lit while theengine is running.

G Risk of accident

SPORT handling mode is activated. ESP® only stabilizes the vehiclein extreme situations. ESP® intervention may not be able toprovide sufficient assistance in such situations and the vehiclemay start to skid.X Reactivate ESP®.

Exceptions: (Y page 61).

If ESP® cannot be activated:X Have ESP® checked at a qualified specialist workshop.

÷å

The yellow ESP® andESP® OFF warninglamps are lit while theengine is running.

G Risk of accident

ESP®, BAS, BAS PLUS, PRE-SAFE® Brake, the HOLD function andhill start assist are not available due to a malfunction. ESP® willnot stabilize the vehicle if it starts to skid or if a wheel starts tospin.The brake system continues to function normally, but without thefunctions listed above.ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated.X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction



-boa

rd c

ompu

ter a

nd d

ispl

ays


÷å

The yellow ESP® andESP® OFF warninglamps are lit while theengine is running.

G Risk of accident

ESP®, BAS, the HOLD function and hill start assist are temporarilyunavailable.BAS PLUS and PRE-SAFE® Brake may also have failed.ESP® will not stabilize the vehicle if it starts to skid or if a wheelstarts to spin.Self diagnosis is not yet complete.The brake system continues to function normally, but without thefunctions listed above. The wheels could therefore lock if youbrake hard, for example.ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated.X Carefully drive a suitable distance making slight steering

movements at a speed above 12 mph (20 km/h).The functions mentioned above are available again when thewarning lamp goes out.

If the warning lamp is still on:X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction


$ (USA only)J (Canada only)The red brake systemwarning lamp comes onwhile the vehicle ismoving. A warning tonealso sounds.

You are driving with the parking brake applied.X Release the parking brake

The warning lamp goes out and the warning tone ceases.

6

The red SRS warninglamp is lit while theengine is running.

G Risk of injuryThe restraint systems are malfunctioning. The air bags or ETDsmay either be triggered unintentionally or, in the event of anaccident, not be triggered at all.X Drive on carefully.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.

G WARNINGIn the event a malfunction of the SRS is indicated as outlined above, the SRS may not beoperational.


On-b

oard

com

pute

r and

dis

play

s

Z

For your safety, we strongly recommend that you contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Centerimmediately to have the system checked. Otherwise the SRS may not be activated when neededin an accident, which could result in serious or fatal injury, or it might deploy unexpectedly andunnecessarily which could also result in injury.

Engine


;

The yellow CheckEngine warning lamplights up while theengine is running.

There may be a malfunction, for example:Rin the engine managementRin the fuel injection systemRin the exhaust systemRin the ignition systemRin the fuel systemThe emission limit values may be exceeded and the engine maybe running in emergency mode.X Have the vehicle checked as soon as possible at a qualified


i In some states, you are required by law to immediately visit aqualified specialist workshop as soon as the yellow CheckEngine warning lamp lights up. If in doubt, check whether suchlegal regulations apply in the state/province in which you arecurrently driving.

8

The yellow reserve fuelwarning lamp flasheswhile the vehicle is inmotion. In addition, theyellow Check Enginewarning lamp ;may light up.

The fuel system pressure is too low. The fuel filler cap is not closedcorrectly or the fuel system is leaking.X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction

display.X Check that the fuel filler cap is correctly closed.X If the fuel filler cap is not correctly closed: close the fuel filler

cap.X If the fuel filler cap is closed: visit a qualified specialist

workshop.

8

The yellow reserve fuelwarning lamp lights upwhile the engine isrunning.

The fuel level has dropped into the reserve range.X Refuel at the nearest gas station.


-boa

rd c

ompu

ter a

nd d

ispl

ays


?

The red coolantwarning lamp lights upwhile the engine isrunning and the coolanttemperature gauge isat the start of the scale.

The temperature sensor for the coolant temperature gauge isdefective.The coolant temperature is no longer being monitored. There is arisk of engine damage if the coolant temperature is too high.X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely and switch off the engine,

paying attention to road and traffic conditions. Do not continuedriving under any circumstances.

X Apply the parking brake.X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.


On-b

oard

com

pute

r and

dis

play

s

Z


?

The red coolantwarning lamp comes onwhile the engine isrunning.

The coolant level is too low.If the coolant level is correct, the airflow to the engine radiatormay be blocked or the electric engine radiator fan may bemalfunctioning.The coolant is too hot and the engine is no longer being cooledsufficiently.X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction

display.X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely and switch off the engine,

paying attention to road and traffic conditions.X Allow the engine and coolant to cool.X Check the coolant level and add coolant (Y page 280). Observe

the warning notes.X If you need to add coolant more often than usual, have the

engine coolant system checked.X Make sure that the air supply to the engine radiator is not

blocked, e.g. by snow, slush or ice.X At coolant temperatures under 248 ‡ (120 † ), drive to the next



?

The red coolantwarning lamp comes onwhile the engine isrunning. A warning tonealso sounds.

The coolant temperature has exceeded 248 ‡ (120 † ). Theairflow to the engine radiator may be blocked or the coolant levelmay be too low.The engine is not being cooled sufficiently and may be damaged.X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction

display.X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely and switch off the engine,

paying attention to road and traffic conditions.X Allow the engine and coolant to cool.X Check the coolant level and add coolant (Y page 280). Observe

the warning notes.X If you need to add coolant more often than usual, have the

engine coolant system checked.X Make sure that the air supply to the engine radiator is not

blocked, e.g. by snow, slush or ice.X At coolant temperatures under 248 ‡ (120 † ), drive to the next




-boa

rd c

ompu

ter a

nd d

ispl

ays

G WARNINGDriving when your engine is overheated can cause some fluids which may have leaked into theengine compartment to catch fire. You could be seriously burned.Steam from an overheated engine can cause serious burns which can occur just by opening theengine hood. Stay away from the engine if you see or hear steam coming from it.Stop the vehicle in a safe location away from other traffic. Turn off the engine, get out of thevehicle and do not stand near the vehicle until the engine has cooled down.

! If the coolant temperature exceeds 248 ‡(120 †) do not continue driving. The engine willotherwise be damaged.

Driving systems


·

The red distancewarning lamp lights upwhile the vehicle is inmotion. A warning tonealso sounds.

G Risk of accidentThe warning is issued if you approach a stationary vehicle or avehicle driving ahead of you at too high a speed.X Be prepared to brake immediately.X Pay careful attention to the traffic situation. You may have to

brake or take evasive action.More information about DISTRONIC PLUS (Y page 161) andPRE-SAFE® Brake (Y page 65).


On-b

oard

com

pute

r and

dis

play

s

Z

Tires


h

USA only:The yellow tire pressuremonitor warning lamp(pressure loss/malfunction) is lit.Canada only:The yellow tire pressuremonitor warning lamp(pressure loss) is lit.

G Risk of accidentThe tire pressure monitor has detected a loss of pressure in atleast one of the tires.X Stop the vehicle without making any sudden steering or braking

maneuvers. Pay attention to the traffic conditions as you do so.X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction

display.X Check the tire pressure. If necessary, correct the tire pressure

(Y page 319).X If necessary, change a wheel (Y page 334).

h

USA only:The yellow tire pressuremonitor warning lamp(pressure loss/malfunction) flashes for60 seconds and thenremains lit.

The tire pressure monitor is faulty.X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction

display.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

G WARNINGEach tire, including the spare (if provided), should be checked at least every two weeks whencold and inflated to the pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer on the Tire andLoading Information placard on the driver's door B-pillar or, if available, the tire pressure labelon the inside of the fuel filler flap. If your vehicle has tires of a different size than the size indicatedon the Tire and Loading Information placard or the tire pressure label, you should determine theproper tire pressure for those tires.As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been equipped with a tire pressure monitoringsystem (TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when one or more of your tires aresignificantly underinflated. Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale illuminates, you shouldstop and check your tires as soon as possible, and inflate them to the proper pressure. Drivingon a significantly underinflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure.Underinflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect the vehicle's handlingand stopping ability. Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire maintenance,and it is the driver's responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure, even if underinflation hasnot reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire pressure telltale.USA only:Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when thesystem is not operating properly. The TPMS malfunction indicator is combined with the low tirepressure telltale. When the system detects a malfunction, the telltale will flash for approximately1 minute and then remain continuously illuminated. This sequence will be repeated every time


-boa

rd c

ompu

ter a

nd d

ispl

ays

the vehicle is started as long as the malfunction exists. When the malfunction indicator isilluminated, the system may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure as intended.TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety of reasons, including the installation of incompatiblereplacement or alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS from functioningproperly. Always check the TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one or more tires or wheelson your vehicle to ensure that the replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS tocontinue to function properly.


On-b

oard

com

pute

r and

dis

play

s

Z

Useful information ............................ 254Loading guidelines ............................ 254Stowage areas .................................. 254Features ............................................. 259

253

Stow

ing

and

feat

ures

Useful information



Loading guidelines

G WARNINGAlways fasten items being carried as securelyas possible using fastening materialsappropriate for the weight and size of theload.In an accident, during hard braking or suddenmaneuvers, loose items will be thrown aroundinside the vehicle. This can cause injury tovehicle occupants unless the items aresecurely fastened in the vehicle.To help avoid personal injury during a collisionor sudden maneuver, exercise care whentransporting cargo. Do not pile luggage orcargo higher than the seat backrests.The trunk is the preferred place to carryobjects. Do not place anything on the rear-window shelf.Never drive a vehicle with the trunk open.Deadly carbon monoxide (CO) gases mayenter vehicle interior resulting inunconsciousness and death.

The handling characteristics of a ladenvehicle are dependent on the distribution ofthe load within the vehicle. For this reason,you should observe the following notes whentransporting a load:Rwhen transporting a load, never exceed the

maximum permissible gross vehicle weight

or the gross axle weight rating of thevehicle (including occupants). The valuesare specified on the vehicle identificationplate on the B-pillar of the driver's door.Rposition heavy loads as far forwards as

possible and as low down in the trunk aspossible.Rthe load must not protrude above the upper

edge of the seat backrests.Ralways place the load against the rear or

front seat backrests. Make sure that theseat backrests are securely locked intoplace.Ralways place the load behind unoccupied

seats if possible.Rsecure the load with sufficiently strong and

wear-resistant tie down. pad sharp edgesfor protection.

Stowage areas

Stowage compartments


G WARNINGTo help avoid personal injury during a collisionor sudden maneuver, exercise care whenstoring objects in the vehicle. Put luggage orcargo in the trunk if possible.Do not pile luggage or cargo higher than theseat backrests.Keep compartment lids closed. This will helpto prevent stored objects from being thrownabout and injuring vehicle occupants duringRbrakingRvehicle maneuversRan accident

Stowage compartments in the front

Glove boxi The glove box can be cooled

(Y page 132).

254 Stowage areasSt

owin

g an

d fe

atur

es

X To open: pull handle : and open glove boxflap ;.

X To close: fold glove box flap ; upwardsuntil it engages.

The glove box can only be locked andunlocked using the mechanical key.

X To lock: insert the mechanical key into thelock and turn it 90° clockwise to position2.

X To unlock: insert the mechanical key intothe lock and turn it 90° counter-clockwiseto position 1.

Eyeglasses compartmentThere is a compartment to stow eyeglassesin the headliner on the driver's side.

X To open: pull down eyeglassescompartment : by the handle.

Stowage compartment under the armresti Depending on the vehicle's equipment, a

USB connection and an AUX IN connectionor a Media Interface are installed in thestowage compartment. A Media Interfaceis a universal interface for mobile audioequipment, e.g. for an iPod® or MP3 player(see the separate COMAND operatinginstructions).

X To open: press left-hand button ; or right-hand button :.The stowage compartment opens.

Stowage areas 255

Stow

ing

and

feat

ures

Z

Stowage compartment under the frontseats

X To open: pull handle : up and foldcover ; forwards.

Stowage compartments in the rear

Stowage compartment in the rear! Do not sit or lean your bodyweight on the

armrests when they are folded out as youcould damage them.

! Close the cover of the stowagecompartment before folding the rear seatarmrest back into the seat backrest.

X To open: fold down seat armrest ;.X Fold cover : of the armrest upwards.

Stowage pocketsG WARNINGStorage bags are intended for storing light-weight items only.Heavy objects, objects with sharp edges orfragile objects may not be transported in the

storage bag. In an accident, during hardbraking, or sudden maneuvers, they could bethrown around inside the vehicle and causeinjury to vehicle occupants.Storage bags cannot protect transportedgoods in the event of an accident.

Storage bags are located in the rearcompartment on the driver's and front-passenger seat backrests.

Parcel nets

G WARNINGParcel nets are intended for storing light-weight items only, such as road maps, mail,etc.Heavy objects, objects with sharp edges, orfragile objects may not be transported in theparcel nets. In an accident, during hardbraking, or sudden maneuvers, they could bethrown around inside the vehicle and causeinjury to vehicle occupants.Parcel nets cannot protect transported goodsin the event of an accident.

Parcel nets are located in the front-passengerfootwell and on the left-hand side of the trunk.

Rear bench seat through-loadingfeature


G WARNINGWhen expanding the cargo volume, alwaysfold the seat backrests fully forward.Unless you are transporting cargo, the seatbackrests must remain properly locked in theupright position.In an accident, during hard braking or suddenmaneuvers, loose items will be thrown aroundinside the vehicle. This can cause injury tovehicle occupants unless the items aresecurely fastened in the vehicle.

256 Stowage areasSt

owin

g an

d fe

atur

es

Always use the cargo tie-down rings.

The left-hand and right-hand rear seatbackrests can be folded down separately toincrease the trunk capacity.

Folding the seat backrest forward

X Move the driver's or front-passenger seatforward if necessary.

X Open the trunk.X Pull right-hand or left-hand rear seat

backrest release handle :.The corresponding rear seat backrest isreleased.

X Fully insert the rear seat backrest headrestraints.

X Fold rear seat backrest ; forwards.X Move the driver's or front-passenger seat

back if necessary.

Folding the seat backrest back

X Move the driver's or front-passenger seatforward if necessary.

! Make sure that the seat belt does notbecome trapped when folding the rear seatbackrest back. Otherwise, it could bedamaged.

X Fold rear seat backrest : back until itengages.

G WARNINGAlways lock the seat backrest in its uprightposition when the rear seat bench isoccupied, or the extended cargo volume is notin use.Check for secure locking by pushing andpulling on the seat backrest.In an accident, during hard braking or suddenmaneuvers, loose items will be thrown aroundinside the vehicle. This can cause injury tovehicle occupants unless the items aresecurely fastened in the vehicle.To help avoid personal injury during a collisionor sudden maneuver, exercise care whentransporting cargo.

i You should always engage the rear seatbackrests if you do not need the through-loading feature. This will preventunauthorized access to the trunk from thevehicle interior.

Stowage areas 257

Stow

ing

and

feat

ures

Z

X Adjust the head restraints if necessary(Y page 96).

X Move the driver's or front-passenger seatback if necessary.

Securing cargo

Cargo tie-down ringsObserve the following notes on securingloads:Rsecure the load using the cargo tie down

rings.Rdo not use elastic straps or nets to secure

a load, as these are only intended as ananti-slip protection for light loads.Rdo not route tie downs across sharp edges

or corners.Rpad sharp edges for protection.There are four cargo tie down rings in thetrunk.

Vehicle with through-loading feature in the rearbench seat: Cargo tie down rings

Bag hooks! The bag hook can bear a maximum load

of 11 lbs (5 kg). Do not use it to secure aload.

: Bag hook

Stowage well under the trunk floorThe TIREFIT kit, the vehicle tool kit, etc. arelocated in the stowage compartment.

X To open: pull handle : upwards.

X Hook handle : into rain trough ;.

! Unhook the handle before again beforeclosing the trunk lid and clip it in securelyto prevent the handle flap from protruding.Otherwise, you could damage the handle.

258 Stowage areasSt

owin

g an

d fe

atur

es

Roof carrier


G WARNINGOnly use roof racks approved by Mercedes-Benz for your vehicle model to avoid damageto the vehicle.Follow the manufacturer's installationinstructions. Otherwise, an improperlyattached roof rack system or its load couldbecome detached from the vehicle.Do not exceed the maximum roof load of220 lb (100 kg).Take into consideration that when the roofrack is loaded, the handling characteristicsare different from those when operating thevehicle without the roof rack loaded.

! Mercedes-Benz recommends that youonly use roof carriers that have been testedand approved for Mercedes-Benz vehicles.This helps to prevent damage to thevehicle.Position the load on the roof carrier in sucha way that the vehicle will not sustaindamage even when it is in motion.Depending on the vehicle equipment,ensure that when the roof carrier isinstalled you can:Rraise the sliding sunroof fullyRopen the panorama roof with power tilt/

sliding panel fullyRopen the trunk lid fully

! To avoid damaging or scratching thecovers, do not use metallic or hard objectsto open them.

Attaching the roof carrier

X Open covers : carefully in the direction ofthe arrow.

X Fold covers : upwards.X Only secure the roof carrier to the

anchorage points under covers :.X Observe the manufacturer's installation

instructions.

Features

Cup holders


G WARNINGIn order to help prevent spilling liquids onvehicle occupants and/or vehicle equipment,only use containers that fit into the cupholder. Use lids on open containers and donot fill containers to a height where thecontents, especially hot liquids, could spillduring braking, vehicle maneuvers, or in anaccident. Liquids spilled on vehicle occupantsmay cause serious personal injury. Liquidsspilled on vehicle equipment may causedamage not covered by the Mercedes-BenzLimited Warranty.When not in use, keep the cup holder closed.An open cup holder may cause injury to youor others when contacted during braking,vehicle maneuvers, or in an accident.Keep in mind that objects placed in the cupholder may come loose during braking,vehicle maneuvers, or in an accident and be

Features 259

Stow

ing

and

feat

ures

Z

thrown around in the vehicle interior. Objectsthrown around in the vehicle interior maycause an accident and/or serious personalinjury.

Cup holder in the front-compartmentcenter console

: Cup holders

Cup holder in the rear seat armrest! Do not sit on or support your body weight

on the rear seat armrest when it is foldeddown, as you could otherwise damage it.

! Close the cup holder before folding therear seat armrest up. Otherwise, the cupholder could be damaged.

X Fold down the rear seat armrest.X To open: raise the rear seat armrest cover.X Press release catch :.

Cup holder ; folds out forwards.

X Swing the rear seat armrest cover backdown, if necessary.

X To close: raise the rear seat armrest cover.Swing cup holder ; back until it engages.

Sun visors

Overview of sun visors

G WARNINGDo not use the vanity mirror while driving.Keep the vanity mirrors in the sun visorsclosed while the vehicle is in motion.Reflected glare can endanger you and others.

: Mirror light; Bracket= Retaining clip, e.g. for a car park ticket? Vanity mirrorA Mirror cover

Vanity mirror in the sun visorMirror light : only functions if the sun visoris clipped into retainer ; and mirror coverA has been folded up.

Glare from the sideX Fold down the sun visor.X Pull the sun visor out of retainer ;.X Swing the sun visor to the side.

260 FeaturesSt

owin

g an

d fe

atur

es

X Pull or push the sun visor in the direction ofthe arrow.

Sunblinds on the rear side windows

X To extend: pull the roller sunblind out bytab : and hook it onto retainers ; at thetop of the window.

! Always guide the roller sunblind by hand.Do not let it snap back suddenly as thiswould damage the automatic rollermechanism.

! Do not drive the vehicle with the rollersunblind hooked in and the side windowsopened simultaneously. The roller sunblindcan jump out of the retainers and springback suddenly when driving at high speeds,e.g. when driving on the freeway. This coulddamage the inertia reel. Therefore, eitherclose the side window or retract the rollersunblind before driving at high speeds.

Rear window roller sunblind (Sedan)






G WARNINGWhen adjusting a roller sunblind, the rollerblind moves up or down. You might becometrapped in the process.In the event of danger, briefly press the buttonfor the roller sunblind to change the rollerblind's direction of movement.

Extending/retracting the rollersunblind! Make sure that the roller sunblind can

move freely. Otherwise, the roller sunblindor other objects could be damaged.

Features 261

Stow

ing

and

feat

ures

Z


X To extend or retract: briefly pressbutton :.The roller sunblind fully extends or fullyretracts.

Ashtray

Ashtray in the front-compartmentcenter consolei You can remove the ashtray insert and

use the resulting compartment forstowage.

! The stowage space under the ashtray isnot heat resistant. Before placing litcigarettes in the ashtray, make sure thatthe ashtray is properly engaged. Otherwise,the stowage space could be damaged.

X To open: slide cover : forwards until itengages.

X To remove insert: hold insert = by theribbing at the sides and lift it up ; and out.

X To re-install the insert: press insert =into the holder until it engages.

X To close: press cover : briefly at thefront.The cover moves back.

Ashtray in the rear-compartment centerconsole

X To open: pull cover ; out by its top edge.X To remove the insert: press release

button = and lift the insert up and out.X To install the insert: put insert : from

above into the holder and press down intothe holder until it engages.

Cigarette lighter



vehicle equipment that can be operated

262 FeaturesSt

owin

g an

d fe

atur

es

even if the SmartKey is removed from theignition lock or removed from the vehicle,such as seat adjustment, steering wheeladjustment, or the memory function


G WARNINGNever touch the heating element or sides ofthe lighter; they are extremely hot. Hold theknob only.Make sure any children traveling with you donot injure themselves or start a fire with thehot cigarette lighter.


X To open: slide cover : forwards until itengages.

X Press in cigarette lighter ;.Cigarette lighter ; will pop outautomatically when the heating element isred-hot.

X To close: press cover : briefly at thefront.The cover moves back.

12 V sockets

Points to observe before useThe sockets can be used for accessories, e.g.lamps or mobile phone chargers with amaximum current draw of 180 W (15 A).If you use the sockets for long periods whenthe engine is switched off, the battery maydischarge.X Turn the SmartKey to position 1 in the

ignition lock.

i An emergency cut-out ensures that theon-board voltage does not drop too low. Ifthe on-board voltage is too low, the powerto the sockets is automatically cut. Thisensures that there is sufficient power tostart the engine.

Socket in the rear-compartment centerconsole

X Pull cover ; out by its top edge.X Lift up the cover of socket :.

115 V power socket

G WARNINGThe 115V AC socket operates at high voltage.Use the 115V AC socket in the vehicle withthe same caution and prudence that youexercise when using power outlets at home.Keep any fluids away from the 115V ACsocket. Do not clean the socket with fluids ortapered objects. Keep the 115V AC socket

Features 263

Stow

ing

and

feat

ures

Z

cover in the closed position, when not in use.Otherwise, you could suffer an electric shockand be seriously or even fatally injured.

G WARNINGAny device that you connect must have asuitable plug and meet U.S. standards. Neverpull at a cable to disconnect a plug from a115 V AC power socket. Never use a damagedconnection cable. The 115 V AC power socketmust never be connected to another 115 VAC power source. Do not use a converter withan earthed plug for the 115 V AC powersocket. This could cause serious injury to youand/or other people.

G WARNINGIf the 115V AC socket is damaged or torn outof the trim, do not use or touch the 115V ACsocket. Using a 115V AC socket that isdamaged or torn out of the trim could causeserious personal injury to you and/or others.

115 V socket : provides an alternatingvoltage of 115 V, so that small electronicdevices can be connected. These devices,such as games consoles, chargers andlaptops, together should not consume morethan a maximum of 150 W.Requirements for operation of these devices:Rthe plug of the electronic device must be

inserted fully into 115 V power socket :.Rthe maximum wattage of the device to be

connected must not exceed 150 W.

Rthe on-board power supply is within apermissible volt range.Rthe 12 V socket in the rear is operational

(Y page 263).X Open flap =.X Insert the plug of the electronic device into

115 V power socket :.Indicator lamp ; lights up.If indicator lamp ; does not light up,consult the section on malfunctions.

X To turn off: disconnect the plug from 115 Vpower socket :.Ensure that you do not pull on the cord.

X Close flap =.

Possible causes of malfunction:Rthe on-board power supply is not within a

permissible volt range.Rthe temperature of the DC/AC converter is

temporarily too high.Rsome small electronic devices have a

constant nominal power of less than150 W, but a very high inrush current.These devices will not work. If you connectsuch a device, 115 V power socket : willnot supply it with power.

If indicator lamp ; still does not light up,contact a specialist workshop, e.g. anauthorized Mercedes-Benz Center.

mbrace

Important safety notes! A license agreement must exist in order

to activate the mbrace service. Ensure thatyour system is activated and ready for use,and press the ï MB Info call button toregister. If any of the steps mentioned isnot carried out, the system may not beactivated.

264 FeaturesSt

owin

g an

d fe

atur

es

If you have questions about the activation,contact one of the following telephoneassistance services:RUSA: Mercedes-Benz Customer

Assistance Center under1-800-FOR-MERCedes(1-800-367-6372) or 1-888-990-9007RCanada: Customer Service at

1-888-923-8367Shortly after successfully registering with thembrace service, a user ID and password willbe sent to you by post. You can use thispassword to log in to the mbrace sectionunder "Owners Online" at http://www.mbusa.com19.The mbrace system is available if:Rit has been activated and is operational.Rthe corresponding mobile phone network

is available for transmitting data to theCustomer Center.Ra service subscription is available.Rthe starter battery is sufficiently charged.

i Determining the location of the vehicle ona map is only possible if there is sufficientGPS reception and the vehicle position canbe forwarded to the Customer Center.

The mbrace systemThe mbrace system provides differentservices, e.g.:Rautomatic and manual emergency callRRoadside Assistance callRMB Info callTo adjust the volume during an mbrace call,proceed as follows:X Press the W or X button on the

multifunction steering wheel.orX Use the volume controller of the audio

system.

You can find further information and adescription of all available features under"Owners Online" at http://www.mbusa.com20.

System self-testAfter you have switched on the ignition, thesystem carries out a self-diagnosis.

G WARNINGA malfunction in the system has beendetected if one of the following conditionsoccurs:Rthe indicator lamp in the SOS button does

not light up during the system self-diagnosis.Rthe indicator lamp in the F Roadside

Assistance button does not light up duringthe system self-diagnosis.RThe indicator lamp in the ï information

button does not light up during self-diagnosis of the system.Rthe indicator lamp in the SOS button,F Roadside Assistance button or ïinformation button continues to be lit redafter the system self-diagnosis.RThe Tele Aid Inoperative or Tele Aid Not Activated message appears in themultifunction display after the system self-test.

If a malfunction is indicated as outlined above,the system may not operate as expected. Inthe event of an emergency, assistance mustbe summoned by other means.Have the system checked at the nearestauthorized Mercedes-Benz Center or contactthe following service hotlines:RUSA: Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance

Center under1-800-FOR-MERCedes(1-800-367-6372)or 1-888-990-9007RCanada: Customer Service at

1-888-923-8367

19 USA only.20 USA only.

Features 265

Stow

ing

and

feat

ures

Z

Emergency call

Important safety notes! A license agreement must exist in order

to activate the mbrace service. Ensure thatyour system is activated and ready for use,and press the ï MB Info call button toregister. If any of the steps mentioned isnot carried out, the system may not beactivated.If you have questions about the activation,contact one of the following telephoneassistance services:RUSA: Mercedes-Benz Customer

Assistance Center under1-800-FOR-MERCedes(1-800-367-6372) or 1-888-990-9007RCanada: Customer Service at

1-888-923-8367An emergency call is dialed automatically ifan air bag or Emergency Tensioning Device istriggered.

i An mbrace emergency call that has beeninitiated automatically cannot beterminated by the customer.

An emergency call can also be initiatedmanually.As soon as the emergency call has beeninitiated, the indicator lamp in the SOS buttonflashes. The Connecting Call messageappears on the multifunction display.The audio output is muted.Once a connection has been established, theCall Connected message appears in themultifunction display.All important information on the emergencyis transmitted, for example:Rcurrent location of the vehicle (as

determined by the GPS system)Rvehicle identification numberRinformation on the type of emergencyShortly after the emergency call has beeninitiated, a voice connection is automaticallyestablished between the Mercedes-Benz

Customer Assistance Center and the vehicleoccupants. If the vehicle occupants respond,the Mercedes-Benz Customer AssistanceCenter attempts to get more information onthe emergency.

i If no vehicle occupant answers, anambulance is immediately sent to thevehicle.

G WARNINGIf the indicator lamp in the SOS button isflashing continuously and no voiceconnection to the Mercedes-Benz CustomerAssistance Center was established, then thembrace system could not initiate anemergency call (e.g. the relevant cellularphone network is not available).The message Call Failed appears in themultifunction display for approximately10 seconds.Should this occur, assistance must besummoned by other means.

Making an emergency call

X To initiate an emergency call manually: press cover : briefly to openit.

X Press SOS button ; briefly.The indicator lamp in SOS button ;flashes until the emergency call isconcluded.

266 FeaturesSt

owin

g an

d fe

atur

es

X Wait for a voice connection to theMercedes-Benz Customer AssistanceCenter.

X After the emergency call is ended, closecover :.

G WARNINGIf you feel in any way in jeopardy when in thevehicle (e.g. smoke or fire in the vehicle,vehicle in a dangerous road location), pleasedo not wait for voice contact after you havepressed the SOS button. Carefully leave thevehicle and move to a safe location. TheMercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Centerwill automatically contact local emergencyofficials with the vehicle's approximatelocation if they receive an automatic SOSsignal and cannot make voice contact with thevehicle occupants.

Roadside Assistance button

X Press and hold Roadside Assistancebutton : for more than two seconds.This initiates a call to the Mercedes-BenzCustomer Assistance Center. The indicatorlamp in Roadside Assistance button :flashes while the call is active. TheConnecting Call message appears in themultifunction display. The audio output ismuted.

If a connection can be established, the Call Connected message appears in themultifunction display.

If a cellular phone network is available andthere is sufficient GPS reception, the mbracesystem transmits data to the Mercedes-BenzCustomer Assistance Center, for example:Rcurrent location of the vehicleRvehicle identification number

i The display of the audio system orCOMAND shows that an mbrace call isactive. During the call, you can change tothe navigation menu by pressing the NAVIbutton on COMAND, for example.Voice output is not available.

A voice connection is established betweenthe Mercedes-Benz Customer AssistanceCenter and the vehicle occupants.X Describe the type of assistance needed.The Mercedes-Benz Customer AssistanceCenter either sends a qualified Mercedes-Benz technician or organizes for your vehicleto be transported to the nearest authorizedMercedes-Benz Center. You may be chargedfor services such as repair work and/ortowing. Further details are available in yourmbrace manual.

i The mbrace system failed to initiate aRoadside Assistance call if:Rthe indicator lamp in Roadside

Assistance button : is flashingcontinuously.Rno voice connection to the Mercedes-

Benz Customer Assistance Center wasestablished.

This may be because the correspondingmobile phone network is not available.The Call Failed message appears in themultifunction display.

X To end a call: press the ~ button on themultifunction steering wheel.

orX Press the corresponding button for ending

a phone call on the audio system or onCOMAND.

Features 267

Stow

ing

and

feat

ures

Z

MB Info call button

X Press and hold MB Info call button : formore than two seconds.This initiates a call to the Mercedes-BenzCustomer Assistance Center. The indicatorlamp in MB Info call button : flashes whilethe connection is being established. TheConnecting Call message appears in themultifunction display. The audio output ismuted.

If a connection can be established, the Call Connected message appears in themultifunction display.If a cellular phone network is available andthere is sufficient GPS reception, the mbracesystem transmits data to the Mercedes-BenzCustomer Assistance Center, for example:Rcurrent location of the vehicleRvehicle identification number

i The display of the audio system orCOMAND shows that an mbrace call isactive. During the call, you can change tothe navigation menu by pressing the NAVIbutton on COMAND, for example.Voice output is not available.

A voice connection is established betweenthe Mercedes-Benz Customer AssistanceCenter and the vehicle occupants. You canobtain information on how to operate yourvehicle's systems, on the location of thenearest authorized Mercedes-Benz Center,

and on further products and services offeredby Mercedes-Benz USA.Further details on the mbrace system can befound under http://www.mbusa.com21.Log in under "Owners Online".

i The mbrace system failed to initiate anMB Info call if:Rthe indicator lamp in MB Info call

button : is flashing continuously.Rno voice connection to the Mercedes-

Benz Customer Assistance Center wasestablished.

This may be because the correspondingmobile phone network is not available.The Call Failed message appears in themultifunction display.

X To end a call: press the ~ button on themultifunction steering wheel.

orX Press the corresponding button for ending

a phone call on the audio system or onCOMAND.

Call priorityWhen service calls are active, e.g. RoadsideAssistance or MB Info calls, an emergencycall can still be initiated. In this case, anemergency call will take priority and overrideall other active calls.The indicator lamp of the respective buttonflashes until the call is ended. An emergencycall can only be terminated by the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center. All othercalls can be ended by pressing the ~button on the multifunction steering wheel orthe corresponding button for ending atelephone call on the audio system or onCOMAND.

i If an mbrace call is initiated, audio outputis muted. The mobile phone is no longerconnected to COMAND. However, if youwant to use your mobile phone, we

21 USA only.

268 FeaturesSt

owin

g an

d fe

atur

es

recommend that you do this only when thevehicle is stationary and in a safe location.

Downloading destinations in COMANDi Information on the components and

operating principles of COMAND can befound in the separate COMAND operatinginstructions.

i You can only use the DestinationDownload function if the vehicle isequipped with a navigation system.

Destination Download gives you access to adatabase with over 15 million points ofinterest (POIs)/important destinations thatcan be downloaded onto the navigationsystem of your vehicle. If you know thedestination, you can download the address orobtain the location of points of interest(POIs)/important destinations in thesurrounding area.You are prompted to confirm route guidanceto the address entered.The system calculates the route andsubsequently starts the route guidance withthe address entered.

i If you select No, the address can be storedin the address book.

i The Destination Download function isavailable if the corresponding mobilephone network is available and datatransfer is possible.

Route AssistanceThis service is part of the mbrace PLUSPackage and cannot be purchasedseparately.

i You can also use the Route Assistancefunction if your vehicle is not equipped witha navigation system.

Within the framework of this service, youreceive a professional and reliable form ofnavigation support without having to leaveyour vehicle.

The customer service representativedetermines a suitable driving route based onyour current vehicle position and the desireddestination and guides you live through thecurrent sections of the route.

Search & Send"Search & Send" is a destination entryservice. You can find further information on"Search & Send" in the separate COMANDoperating instructions.

Remote vehicle unlockingIf you have unintentionally locked yourvehicle (e.g. the SmartKey is still in thevehicle) and a replacement SmartKey is notavailable, the vehicle can be opened by aMercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center.The vehicle can be opened remotely up to fourdays after the ignition was last switched off.X Contact the following service hotlines:RUSA: Mercedes-Benz Customer

Assistance Center under 1-800-FOR-MERCedes(1-800-367-6372) or1-888-990-9007RCanada: Customer Service at

1-888-923-8367You will be asked for your password.

X Return to your vehicle at the time agreedupon with the Mercedes-Benz CustomerAssistance Center.

X Pull the trunk lid handle for at least 20seconds until the indicator lamp in the SOSbutton (Y page 266) flashes.The Connecting Call message appearson the multifunction display.

Alternatively, the vehicle can also be openedvia the Internet or an iPhone in the "OwnersOnline" section using your ID number andpassword22.

i Vehicle remote unlocking is only possibleif the corresponding mobile phone networkis accessible.

22 USA only.

Features 269

Stow

ing

and

feat

ures

Z

The SOS button flashes and theConnecting Call message appears in themultifunction display to confirm that thecommand for vehicle remote unlocking hasbeen received.If you pull the trunk handle for more than20 seconds before receiving authorizationfor remote unlocking, you must wait 15minutes before you can pull the trunk lidhandle again.

Remote vehicle lockingIf you forget to lock your vehicle but are nolonger in the vicinity of the vehicle, it can belocked for you by the Mercedes-BenzCustomer Assistance Center.The vehicle can be locked remotely up to fourdays after the ignition was last switched off.X Contact the following service hotlines:RUSA: Mercedes-Benz Customer

Assistance Center under 1-800-FOR-MERCedes(1-800-367-6372) or1-888-990-9007RCanada: Customer Service at

1-888-923-8367You will be asked for your PIN.

The next time you are in your vehicle andswitch on the ignition, the Tele Aid Doors locked by remote control messageappears in the multifunction display.Alternatively, the vehicle can also be lockedvia the Internet or an iPhone in the "OwnersOnline" section using your ID number andpassword.

i The vehicle valet locking feature isavailable when the relevant mobile phonenetwork is available and data connection ispossible.

Service for recovering a stolen vehicleIf your vehicle has been stolen:X Notify the police.

The police will issue a numbered incidentreport.

X This number will be forwarded to theMercedes-Benz Customer AssistanceCenter together with your PIN.The Mercedes-Benz Customer AssistanceCenter then attempts to locate the mbracesystem. The Mercedes-Benz CustomerAssistance Center contacts you and thelocal law enforcement agency if the vehicleis located. However, only the lawenforcement agency is informed of thelocation of the vehicle.

i If the anti-theft alarm system is active forlonger than 30 seconds, mbraceautomatically informs the Mercedes-BenzCustomer Assistance Center.

Garage door opener

Important safety notesThe HomeLink® garage door openerintegrated in the rear-view mirror allows youto operate up to three different door and gatesystems.

i Certain garage door drives areincompatible with the integrated garagedoor opener. If you have difficultyprogramming the integrated garage dooropener, contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center or call one of the followingtelephone hotlines:RUSA: Mercedes-Benz Customer

Assistance Center at1-800-FOR-MERCedesRCanada: Customer Service at

1-800-387-0100

G WARNINGBefore programming the integrated remotecontrol to a garage door opener or gate

270 FeaturesSt

owin

g an

d fe

atur

es

operator, make sure people and objects areout of the way of the device to preventpotential harm or damage. Whenprogramming a garage door opener, the doormoves up or down. When programming a gateoperator, the gate opens or closes.Do not use the integrated remote control withany garage door opener that lacks safety stopand reverse features as required by U.S.federal safety standards (this includes anygarage door opener model manufacturedbefore April 1, 1982). A garage door thatcannot detect an object - signaling the doorto stop and reverse - does not meet currentU.S. federal safety standards.When programming a garage door opener,park vehicle outside the garage.Do not run the engine while programming theintegrated remote control. Inhalation ofexhaust gas is hazardous to your health. Allexhaust gas contains carbon monoxide (CO),and inhaling it can cause unconsciousnessand possible death. All exhaust gas containscarbon monoxide (CO), and inhaling it cancause unconsciousness and possible death.

i USA only:This device complies with Part 15 of theFCC Rules. Operation is subject to thefollowing two conditions:1. This device may not cause harmfulinterference, and2. this device must accept any interferencereceived, including interference that maycause undesired operation.Any unauthorized modification to thisdevice could void the user's authority tooperate the equipment.FCC ID: CB2HMIHL4

i Canada only:This device complies with RSS-210 ofIndustry Canada. Operation is subject tothe following two conditions:1. This device may not cause interference,and

2. this device must accept any interferencereceived, including interference that maycause undesired operation of the device.Any unauthorized modification to thisdevice could void the user's authority tooperate the equipment.IC: 279B-HMIHL4

Programming the integrated garagedoor opener on the rear-view mirror

ProgrammingG WARNINGOnly press the transmitter button on theintegrated garage door opener if there are nopersons or objects present within the sweepof the garage door. People could otherwise beinjured by the movement of the door.

Integrated garage door opener on the rear-viewmirror

Garage door remote control A is not part ofthis integrated garage door opener.

i To achieve the best result, insert newbatteries in garage door remote controlA before programming.

X Before programming for the first time, clearthe memory of the integrated garage dooropener (Y page 274).


Features 271

Stow

ing

and

feat

ures

Z

X Press and hold one of transmitterbuttons ; to ? on the integrated garagedoor opener.Indicator lamp : starts to flash yellowafter a short period.

i Indicator lamp : flashes yellowimmediately after the transmitter buttonhas been stored for the first time. If thetransmitter button has already beenprogrammed, indicator lamp : does notflash yellow until 10 seconds have elapsed.

X Release the transmitter button.X Point transmitter button B of garage door

remote control A towards the transmitterbuttons on the rear-view mirror at adistance of 2 to 8 inches (5 to 20 cm).

i The distance required between garagedoor remote control A and the integratedgarage door opener depends on the systemof the garage door drive. You might requireseveral attempts. You should test everyposition for at least 25 seconds beforetrying another position.

X Press and hold transmitter button B ongarage door remote control A untilindicator lamp : lights up green.Programming is complete if indicatorlamp : lights up or flashes green.

X Release transmitter button ;, = or ? onthe integrated garage door opener and thetransmitter button on garage door remotecontrol B.

If indicator lamp : lights up red:X Repeat the programming procedure for the

transmitter button. When doing so, vary thedistance between the garage door remotecontrol and the rear-view mirror.

i If the indicator lamp flashes green aftersuccessful programming, the garage doorsystem is operating on a rolling code. Afterprogramming, you must synchronize thegarage door opener integrated in the rear-

view mirror with the receiver of the garagedoor system.

Synchronizing the rolling codeYour vehicle must be within range of thegarage or gate opener drive. Make sure thatneither your vehicle nor any persons/objectsare present within the sweep of the door orgate.Observe the safety notes when performingthe rolling code synchronization.X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the

ignition lock.X Press the programming button of the door

or gate drive (see the door or gate driveoperating instructions, e.g. under"Programming of additional remotecontrols").

i You now normally have 30 seconds toinitiate the next step.

X Press the previously programmedtransmitter button of the HomeLink®

integrated garage door opener repeatedlyin succession until the door opens.The rolling code synchronization is thencomplete.

Notes on programming the remotecontrolCanadian radio frequency laws require a"break" (or interruption) of the transmissionsignals after broadcasting for a few seconds.These signals may not therefore last longenough for the integrated garage door openerto recognize the signal during programming.Comparable with Canadian law, some U.S.garage door openers also have a built-in"interruption".If you live in Canada or have difficultiesprogramming the garage door opener(regardless of where you live) when using theprogramming steps (see above), proceed asfollows:

272 FeaturesSt

owin

g an

d fe

atur

es

X Press and hold one of transmitterbuttons ; to ? of the integrated garagedoor opener.Indicator lamp : starts to flash yellowafter a short period.

X Release the transmitter button.X Press transmitter button B of the garage

door remote control and hold for twoseconds, then release for two seconds,then press again and hold for two seconds.

X Repeat this sequence on transmitterbutton B of the garage door remotecontrol until indicator lamp : is green.Repeat the process if indicator lamp :turns red.

X Continue with the other programmingsteps (see above).

Problems when programmingIf you are experiencing problemsprogramming the integrated garage dooropener on the rear-view mirror, take note ofthe following instructions:Rcheck the transmission frequency of

garage door remote control A (usuallyfound on the reverse side of the remotecontrol).The integrated garage door opener iscompatible with devices that can beoperated with units in a frequency range of280 to 390 MHz.Rchange the batteries in garage door remote

control A. This increases the probabilitythat garage door remote control A willsend a strong and precise signal to theintegrated garage door opener on the rear-view mirror.Rwhen programming, hold garage door

remote control A at different distancesand angles from the transmitter button thatyou are programming. Try different anglesat a distance between 2 and 12 inches (5to 30 cm) or the same angle at varyingdistances.

Rif another remote control for the samegarage door drive is available, repeat thesame programming steps with this remotecontrol. Before you perform the steps of theoperation, make sure that there are newbatteries in the garage door remotecontrol.Rnote that some remote controls only

transmit for a limited amount of time (theindicator lamp on the remote control goesout). Press the remote control button againbefore it stops transmitting.Ralign the antenna cable of the garage door

opener unit. This can improve signalreception/transmission.

Opening/closing the garage doorOnce programmed, the integrated garagedoor opener will assume the function of thegarage door system's remote control. Pleasealso read the operating instructions for thegarage door system.X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the

ignition lock.X Press transmitter button ;, = or ? in the

overhead control panel that you haveprogrammed to operate the garage door.Garage door system with a fixed code:indicator lamp : lights up green.Garage door system with a rolling code:indicator lamp : flashes green.

i The transmitter will transmit a signal foras long as the transmitter button is beingpressed. After a maximum of ten seconds,transmission is terminated and indicatorlamp : flashes yellow. Press thetransmitter button again, if necessary.

Features 273

Stow

ing

and

feat

ures

Z

Clearing the memory of the integratedgarage door opener on the rear-viewmirrorX Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the

ignition lock.X Press transmitter buttons ; and ?.

The indicator lamp lights up yellow.X Press and hold transmitter buttons ;

and ? until the indicator lamp turns green.

i Make sure that you clear the memory ofthe integrated garage door opener beforeselling the vehicle.

274 FeaturesSt

owin

g an

d fe

atur

es

Frequencies for the garage door openerThe radio type approval number and the frequency range for the garage door opener can befound on the Internet at: http://www.mercedes-benz.de/betriebsanleitung.

Compass

Calling up the compassThe compass shows which direction thevehicle is currently traveling in: N, NE, E, SE,S, SW, W or NW.

To obtain a correct display in rear-viewmirror :, the compass must be calibratedand the magnetic field zone must be set.

Setting the compassX Determine your position using the following

zone maps.

North America zone map

South America zone mapX Press a round pin into opening=(Y page 275) for approximately threeseconds.The currently selected zone appears incompass display ;(Y page 275).

X To select the zone: press a round pin intoopening =(Y page 275) repeatedly untilthe desired zone is selected.The zone has been selected when compassdisplay ;(Y page 275) shows the heading.This takes a few seconds.

Features 275

Stow

ing

and

feat

ures

Z

Calibrating the compassX Make sure that there is sufficient space for

you to drive in a circle without impeding theremaining traffic.

In order to calibrate the compass correctly,observe the following points:Rcalibrate the compass in the open and not

in the vicinity of steel constructions or high-voltage transmission lines.Rswitch off electrical consumers, for

example, the climate control, windshieldwipers or rear window defroster.Rclose all doors and the trunk lid.X Switch the ignition on.X Press a round pin into opening =

(Y page 275) for approximately six secondsuntil the C symbol appears in compassdisplay ; (Y page 275).

X Drive a full circle at approximately 3 mph(5 km/h) to 6 mph (10 km/h).Once the calibration has been successfullycompleted, the current direction appears incompass display ; (Y page 275).

Floormat on the driver's side

G WARNINGWhenever you are using a floormat, make surethere is enough clearance and that thefloormat is securely fastened.The floormat should always be securelyfastened using the fastening equipment.Before driving off, check that the floormat issecurely in place and adjust it if necessary. Aloose floormat could slip and hinder properfunctioning of the pedals.Do not place several floormats on top of eachother as this may impair pedal movement.

X Slide the seat backwards.X To install: place the floormat in the

footwell.X Press studs : onto retainers ;.

X To remove: pull the floormat offretainers ;.

X Remove the floormat.

276 FeaturesSt

owin

g an

d fe

atur

es

Useful information ............................ 278Engine compartment ........................ 278Maintenance ...................................... 282Care .................................................... 283

277

Mai

nten

ance

and

car

e

Useful information



Engine compartment

Hood

Opening the hood

G WARNINGDo not pull the release lever while the vehicleis in motion. Otherwise, the hood could beforced open by passing air flow.This could cause the hood to come loose andinjure you and/or others.

G WARNINGDo not open the hood when the engine isoverheated. You could be seriously injured.Observe the coolant temperature gauge todetermine whether the engine may beoverheated. If you see flames or smokecoming from the engine compartment, moveaway from the vehicle. Wait until the enginehas cooled. If necessary, call the firedepartment.

G WARNINGThere is a risk of injury if the hood is open,even if the engine is not running.Some engine components can become veryhot.To avoid the risk of burns, only touch thosecomponents described in the Operator'sManual and observe the relevant safety notes.

G WARNINGTo help prevent personal injury, stay clear ofmoving parts when the hood is open and theengine is running.The radiator fan may continue to run forapproximately 30 seconds or may evenrestart after the engine has been turned off.Stay clear of fan blades.

G WARNINGThe engine is equipped with a transistorizedignition system. Because of the high voltage,it is dangerous to touch any components(ignition coils, spark plug sockets, diagnosticsocket) of the ignition system:Rwith the engine runningRwhile starting the engineRwhen the ignition is switched on and the

engine is turned manually

X Make sure that the windshield wipers areswitched off.

G WARNINGThe windshield wipers and wiper linkagecould be set in motion.When the hood is open, you or others couldbe injured by the wiper linkage.Make sure that the windshield wipers areswitched off. Remove the SmartKey or makesure that no ignition position has beenselected with KEYLESS-GO. All indicatorlamps must be off in the instrument cluster.

278 Engine compartmentM

aint

enan

ce a

nd c

are

X Pull release lever : for the hood.The hood is released.

! Make sure that the windshield wipers arenot folded away from the windshield. Youcould otherwise damage the windshieldwipers or the hood.

X Reach into the gap, pull hood catchhandle ; up and lift the hood.Once you have lifted the hood about15 inches (40 cm), it is automaticallyopened the rest of the way and held openby the gas-filled struts.

Closing the hood

G WARNINGWhen closing the hood, use extreme cautionnot to catch hands or fingers. Be careful thatyou do not close the hood on anyone.Make sure the hood is securely engagedbefore driving off. Do not continue driving ifthe hood can no longer engage after anaccident, for example. The hood couldotherwise come loose while the vehicle is inmotion and injure you and/or others.

X Lower the hood and let it fall from a heightof approximately 8 inches (20 cm).

X Check that the hood has engaged properly.If the hood can be raised slightly, it is notproperly engaged. Open it again and closeit with a little more force.

Engine oil

Notes on the oil levelDepending on the driving style, the vehicleconsumes up to 0.9 US qts. (0.8 l) of oil overa distance of 600 miles (1000 km). The oilconsumption may be higher than this whenthe vehicle is new or if you frequently drive athigh engine speeds.

Checking the oil level using the oildipstick

X Park the vehicle on a level surface.To check the oil level with the engine atnormal operating temperature, switch theengine off and wait for approximately fiveminutes.

X Pull oil dipstick : out of the dipstick guidetube.

X Wipe off oil dipstick :.X Slowly slide oil dipstick : into the guide

tube to the stop, and take it out again.If the level is between MIN mark = andMAX mark ;, the oil level is correct.

X If the oil level has sunk to MIN mark = orbelow, add0.55 to 1.1 US qt(0.5 to 1.0 liter) engine oil.

Adding engine oil

G WARNINGIf engine oil comes into contact with hotengine parts, it may ignite and you could burn

Engine compartment 279

Mai

nten

ance

and

car

e

Z

yourself. Do not spill any engine oil on hotengine parts.

H Environmental noteWhen adding oil, take care not to spill any. Ifoil enters the soil or waterways, it is harmfulto the environment.

! Use only engine oils and oil filters thathave been approved for vehicles equippedwith a service system. A list of the engineoils and oil filters tested and approved inaccordance with the Mercedes-BenzSpecifications for Service Products can becalled up by visiting http://www.mbusa.com (USA only). Moreinformation about tested and approvedengine oils and oil filters is available fromany authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.Damage to the engine or exhaust system iscaused by the following:Rusing engine oils and oil filters which

have not been specifically approved forthe service system.Rreplacing the engine oil or oil filter after

the replacement interval required by theservice system has elapsedRusing engine oil additives.

! Do not add too much oil. If the oil level isabove the "max" mark on the dipstick, toomuch oil has been added. This can lead todamage to the engine or the catalyticconverter. Have excess oil siphoned off.

Example: engine oil cap

X Turn cap : counterclockwise and removeit.

X Add engine oil.If the oil level is at or below the MIN markon the oil dipstick,add 0.55 to 1.1 US qt (0.5 to 1.0 l) engineoil.

X Replace cap : on the filler neck and turnclockwise.Ensure that the cap locks into placesecurely.

X Check the oil level again with the oildipstick (Y page 279).

Further information on engine oil(Y page 349).

Checking and adding other serviceproducts

Checking the coolant levelOnly check the coolant level when the vehicleis on a level surface and the engine has cooleddown.X Turn the SmartKey to position

2 (Y page 137) in the ignition lock.On vehicles with KEYLESS-GO, press theStart/Stop button twice (Y page 137).

X Check the coolant temperature display inthe instrument cluster.The coolant temperature must be below158 ‡ (70 †).

G WARNINGIn order to avoid any potentially serious burns:Ruse extreme caution when opening the

hood if there are any signs of steam orcoolant leaking from the cooling system, orif the coolant temperature display indicatesthat the coolant is overheated.Rdo not remove the pressure cap on the

coolant reservoir if the coolant temperatureis above 158 ‡ (70 †). Allow the engine tocool down before removing the cap. The

280 Engine compartmentM

aint

enan

ce a

nd c

are

coolant reservoir contains hot fluid and isunder pressure.Rusing a rag, slowly turn the cap

approximately 1/2 turn to relieve excesspressure. If opened immediately, scaldinghot fluid and steam will be blown out underpressure.Rdo not spill antifreeze on hot engine parts.

Antifreeze contains ethylene glycol whichmay burn if it comes into contact with hotengine parts.

X Slowly turn cap : half a turn counter-clockwise and allow excess pressure toescape.

X Turn cap : further counter-clockwise andremove it.If the coolant is at the level of marker bar= in the filler neck when cold, there isenough coolant in coolant expansiontank ;.If the coolant is approximately 0.6 in(1.5 cm) above marker bar = in the fillerneck when warm, there is enough coolantin coolant expansion tank ;.

X If necessary, add coolant that has beentested and approved by Mercedes-Benz.

X Replace cap : and turn it clockwise as faras it will go.

For further information on coolant, see(Y page 350).

Windshield washer system andheadlamp cleaning systemThe washer fluid reservoir is used for both thewindshield washer system and the headlampcleaning system.

i Vehicle components and their serviceproducts must match. You should,therefore, only use products that have beentested and approved by Mercedes-Benz.Information on tested and approvedproducts can be obtained at any authorizedMercedes-Benz Center or on the Internet athttp://www.mbusa.com (USA only).

G WARNINGWasher solvent/antifreeze is highlyflammable. Do not spill washer solvent/antifreeze on hot engine parts, because it mayignite and burn. You could be seriouslyburned.

! At temperatures below freezing: alwaysfill the washer fluid reservoir with a mix ofwater and windshield washer concentrate(e.g. MB WinterFit). There is otherwise arisk of damaging the windshield washersystem/headlamp cleaning system.

! Only use washer fluid concentrate whichis suitable for plastic lenses. Unsuitablewasher fluid concentrate could damage theplastic lenses of the headlamps.

! Do not add distilled or de-ionized water tothe washer fluid container. Otherwise, thelevel sensor may be damaged.

i Add windshield washer concentrate, e.g.MB SummerFit, to the washer fluid all yearround.

Engine compartment 281

Mai

nten

ance

and

car

e

Z

Example: washer fluid reservoirX Mix the windshield washer fluid in a

container beforehand.X At temperatures above freezing: fill the

washer fluid reservoir with a mix of waterand windshield washer concentrate (e.g.MB SummerFit).

X At temperatures below freezing: fill thewasher fluid reservoir with a mix of waterand windshield washer concentrate (e.g.MB WinterFit). Adapt the mixing ratio to theoutside temperature. For information onthe mixing ratio (Y page 351).

X To open: pull cap : upwards by the tab.X Add the premixed washer fluid.X To close: press cap : onto the filler neck

until it engages.

Brake fluid level! If you notice that the brake fluid level in

the brake fluid reservoir has fallen to theMIN mark or less, check the brake systemimmediately for leaks. Also check thethickness of the brake linings. Contact aqualified specialist workshop, e.g. anauthorized Mercedes-Benz Centerimmediately.Do not add brake fluid. This does notcorrect the error.

Only check the brake fluid level when thevehicle is stationary and on a level surface.

The brake fluid level is correct if it is betweenMIN marking ; and MAX marking : on thebrake fluid reservoir.

Maintenance

Service interval display

Service messagesInformation on the type of service and serviceintervals (see separate Service Booklet).You can obtain further information from anauthorized Mercedes-Benz Center or athttp://www.mbusa.com (USA only).The service interval display informs you of thenext service due date.If a service due date has been exceeded, youalso hear an acoustic signal.The multifunction display shows a servicemessage for a few seconds, e.g.Next service A due in .. daysService A dueService A overdue by ... daysThe letter indicates which service is due. Astands for a minor service and B for a majorservice. A number or another letter may bedisplayed after the letter. This figure indicatesany necessary additional maintenance workto be performed.You can obtain further information from anauthorized Mercedes-Benz Center.The service interval display does not take intoaccount any periods of time during which thebattery is disconnected.

282 MaintenanceM

aint

enan

ce a

nd c

are

Maintaining the time-dependent serviceschedule:X Note down the service due date displayed

in the multifunction display beforedisconnecting the battery.

orX Subtract the battery disconnection periods

from the service date shown on the displayafter reconnecting the battery.

i The service interval display does notprovide any information regarding theengine's oil level. Observe the notes on theengine oil level (Y page 279).

Hiding a service messageX Press the % or a button on the

steering wheel.

Displaying service messagesX Switch on the ignition.X Press = or ; on the steering wheel

to select the Serv. menu.X Press 9 or : to select the ASSYST PLUS submenu and press a to confirm.The service due date appears in themultifunction display.

Please bear the following in mind

Resetting service interval displayIf the qualified specialist workshop, e.g. aMercedes-Benz Center, carried out themaintenance work, the service intervaldisplay will be reset.Further information, on maintenance forexample, can be obtained at an authorizedMercedes-Benz Center or directly fromMercedes-Benz.

! If the service interval display has beenreset unintentionally, have the settingcorrected at a Mercedes-Benz Center.Have service work carried out as describedin the Service Booklet. This may otherwise

lead to increased wear and damage to themajor assemblies or the vehicle.

Driving abroadAn extensive Mercedes-Benz Service networkis also available in other countries. You canobtain further information from anyauthorized Mercedes-Benz Center.

Care

Notes on careRegular care of your vehicle is a condition forretaining the quality in the long term.Use care products and cleaning agentsrecommended and approved by Mercedes-Benz.

G WARNINGMany cleaning products can be hazardous.Some are poisonous, others are flammable.Always follow the instructions on theparticular container. Always open yourvehicle's doors or windows when cleaning theinside.Never use fluids or solvents that are notdesigned for cleaning your vehicle.Always lock away cleaning products and keepthem out of reach of children.

! For cleaning your vehicle, do not use anyof the following:Rdry, rough or hard clothsRabrasive cleaning agentsRsolventsRcleaning agents containing solventsDo not scrub.Do not touch the surfaces or protectivefilms with hard objects, e.g. a ring or icescraper. You could otherwise scratch ordamage the surfaces and protective film.

Care 283

Mai

nten

ance

and

car

e

Z

H Environmental noteDispose of empty packaging and cleaningcloths in an environmentally responsiblemanner.

! Do not park the vehicle for an extendedperiod straight after cleaning it, particularlyafter having cleaned the wheels with wheelcleaner. Wheel cleaners could causeincreased corrosion of the brake discs andbrake pads/linings. For this reason, youshould drive for a few minutes aftercleaning. Braking heats the brake discs andthe brake pads/linings, thus drying them.The vehicle can then be parked.

Exterior care

Automatic car wash

G WARNINGBraking efficiency is reduced after washingthe vehicle. This could cause an accident. Forthis reason, you must drive particularlycarefully after washing the vehicle until thebrakes have dried.

You can wash the vehicle in an automatic carwash from the very start.

! Never clean your vehicle in a TouchlessAutomatic Car Wash as these use specialcleaning agents. These cleaning agents candamage the paintwork or plastic parts.

If the vehicle is very dirty, pre-wash it beforecleaning it in an automatic car wash.

! Make sure that the automatictransmission is in position N when washingyour vehicle in a tow-through car wash. Thevehicle could be damaged if thetransmission is in another position.

! Make sure that:

Rthe side windows and the sliding sunroofare fully closed.Rthe ventilation/heating is switched off

(the OFF button has been pressed).Rthe windshield wiper switch is in position

0.Otherwise, the vehicle might be damaged.

After using an automatic car wash, wipe offwax from the windshield and the wiperblades. This will prevent smears and reducewiping noises caused by residue on thewindshield.

Washing by handIn some countries, washing by hand is onlyallowed at specially equipped washing bays.Observe the legal requirements in allcountries concerned.X Do not use hot water and do not wash the

vehicle in direct sunlight.X Use a soft sponge to clean.X Use a mild cleaning agent, such as a car

shampoo approved by Mercedes-Benz.X Thoroughly hose down the vehicle with a

gentle jet of water.X Do not point the water jet directly towards

the air inlet.X Use plenty of water and rinse out the

sponge frequently.X Rinse the vehicle with clean water and dry

thoroughly with a chamois.X Do not let the cleaning agent dry on the

paintwork.When using the vehicle in winter, remove alltraces of road salt deposits carefully and assoon as possible.

Power washers

G WARNINGDo not use power washers with circular-jetnozzles (dirt grinders) to clean your vehicle, inparticular the tires. You could otherwisedamage the tires and cause an accident.

284 CareM

aint

enan

ce a

nd c

are

! Always maintain a distance of at least11.8 in (30 cm) between the vehicle and thepower washer nozzle. Information aboutthe correct distance is available from theequipment manufacturer.Move the power washer nozzle aroundwhen cleaning your vehicle.Do not aim directly at any of the following:RtiresRdoor gaps, roof gaps, joints etc.Relectrical componentsRbatteryRconnectorsRlightsRsealsRtrim elementsRventilation slotsDamaged seals or electrical componentscan lead to leaks or failures.

Cleaning the wheels! Do not use acidic wheel cleaning products

to remove brake dust. This could damagewheel bolts and brake components.

! Do not park the vehicle for an extendedperiod straight after cleaning it, particularlyafter having cleaned the wheels with wheelcleaner. Wheel cleaners could causeincreased corrosion of the brake discs andbrake pads/linings. For this reason, youshould drive for a few minutes aftercleaning. Braking heats the brake discs andthe brake pads/linings, thus drying them.The vehicle can then be parked.

Cleaning the paintworkScratches, corrosive deposits, areas affectedby corrosion and damage caused byinadequate care cannot always be completelyrepaired. In such cases, visit a qualifiedspecialist workshop, e.g. an authorizedMercedes-Benz Center.

X Remove impurities immediately, wherepossible, whilst avoiding rubbing too hard.

X Soak insect remains with insect removerand rinse off the treated areas afterwards.

X Soak bird droppings with water and rinseoff the treated areas afterwards.

X Remove coolant, brake fluid, tree resin,oils, fuels and greases by rubbing gentlywith a cloth soaked in petroleum ether orlighter fluid.

X Use tar remover to remove tar stains.X Use silicone remover to remove wax.

! Do not affix:RstickersRfilmsRmagnetic plates or similar itemsto painted surfaces. You could otherwisedamage the paintwork.

If water no longer forms "beads" on the paintsurface, use the paint care productsrecommended and approved by Mercedes-Benz. This is the case approximately everythree to five months, depending on theclimate conditions and the care product used.If dirt has penetrated the paint surface or thepaint has become dull, the paint cleanerrecommended and approved by Mercedes-Benz should be used.Do not use these care products in the sun oron the hood while the hood is hot.X Use a suitable touch-up stick, e.g. MB

Touch-Up Stick, to correct smaller areas ofpaint damage quickly and provisionally.

Matte finish careIf your vehicle has a clear matte finish,observe the following instructions in order toavoid damage to the paintwork due toincorrect care.These notes also apply to light alloy wheelswith a clear matte finish.

Care 285

Mai

nten

ance

and

car

e

Z

! Never polish the vehicle or the light alloywheels. Polishing causes the finish toshine.

! The following may cause the paint tobecome shiny and thus reduce the matteeffect:RVigorous rubbing with unsuitable

materials.RFrequent use of car washes.RWashing the vehicle in direct sunlight.

! Never use paint cleaner, buffing orpolishing products, or gloss preserver, e.g.wax. These products are only suitable forhigh-gloss surfaces. Their use on vehicleswith matte finish leads to considerablesurface damage (shiny, spotted areas).Always have paintwork repairs performedat a qualified specialist workshop, e.g. anauthorized Mercedes-Benz Center.

! Do not use wash programs with a hot waxtreatment under any circumstances.

i The vehicle should preferably be washedby hand using a soft sponge, car shampooand plenty of water.

i Use only insect remover and car shampoofrom the range of recommended andapproved Mercedes-Benz care products.

Cleaning the windows

G WARNINGBefore cleaning the windshield or wiperblades, switch off the windshield wipers andremove the SmartKey from the ignition lock.On vehicles with KEYLESS-GO, press theStart/Stop button repeatedly until allindicator lamps in the instrument cluster havegone out. The windshield wipers couldotherwise move and injure you.

! Only fold the windshield wipers away fromthe windshield when vertical. Otherwise,you will damage the hood.

X Clean the inside and outside of thewindows with a damp cloth and a cleaningagent that is recommended and approvedby Mercedes-Benz.

! Do not use dry cloths, abrasive products,solvents or cleaning agents containingsolvents to clean the inside of the windows.Do not touch the insides of the windowswith hard objects, e.g. an ice scraper orring. There is otherwise a risk of damagingthe windows.

! Clean the water drainage channels of thewindshield and the rear window at regularintervals. Deposits such as leaves, petalsand pollen may under certaincircumstances prevent water from drainingaway. This can lead to corrosion damageand damage to electronic components.

Cleaning the wiper blades

G WARNINGBefore cleaning the windshield or wiperblades, switch off the windshield wipers andremove the SmartKey from the ignition lock.On vehicles with KEYLESS-GO, press theStart/Stop button repeatedly until allindicator lamps in the instrument cluster havegone out. The windshield wipers couldotherwise move and injure you.

! Only fold the windshield wipers away fromthe windshield when vertical. Otherwise,you will damage the hood.

! Do not pull the wiper blade. Otherwise,the wiper blade could be damaged.

! Do not clean wiper blades too often anddo not rub them too hard. Otherwise, thegraphite coating could be damaged. Thiscould cause wiper noise.

286 CareM

aint

enan

ce a

nd c

are

X Fold the wiper arms away from thewindshield.

X Carefully clean the wiper blades with adamp cloth.

X Fold the windshield wipers back againbefore switching on the ignition.

! Hold the wiper arm securely when foldingback. The windshield could be damaged ifthe wiper arm smacks against it suddenly.

Cleaning the exterior lightingX Clean the plastic lenses of the exterior

lights with a wet sponge and a mild cleaningagent, e.g. Mercedes-Benz car shampoo orcleaning cloths.

! Only use cleaning agents or cleaningcloths which are suitable for plastic lightlenses. Unsuitable cleaning agents orcleaning cloths could scratch or damagethe plastic light lenses.

Cleaning the sensors

X Clean sensors : of the driving systemswith water, car shampoo and a soft cloth.

! When cleaning the sensors with a powerwasher, maintain a distance between thevehicle and the nozzle of the power washerof at least 11.8 in (30 cm). Information

about the correct distance is available fromthe equipment manufacturer.

Cleaning the rear view camera

X Use clear water and a soft cloth to cleancamera lens :.

! Do not clean the camera lens and the areaaround the rear view camera with a powerwasher.

Cleaning the exhaust tail pipesImpurities combined with the effects of roadgrit and corrosive environmental factors maycause flash rust to form on the surface. Youcan restore the original shine of the exhausttail pipe by cleaning it regularly, especially inwinter and after washing.

! Do not clean the exhaust tail pipes withalkaline-based cleaning agents, such aswheel cleaner.

X Clean the exhaust tail pipes with a chromecare product tested and approved byMercedes-Benz.

Care 287

Mai

nten

ance

and

car

e

Z

Interior care

Cleaning the displayX Before cleaning the display, make sure that

it is switched off and has cooled down.X Clean the display surface using a

commercially-available microfiber clothand TFT/LCD display cleaner.

X Dry the display surface using a drymicrofiber cloth.

! For cleaning, do not use any of thefollowing:Ralcohol-based thinner or gasolineRabrasive cleaning agentsRcommercially-available household

cleaning agentsThese may damage the display surface. Donot put pressure on the display surfacewhen cleaning. This could lead toirreparable damage to the display.

Cleaning the plastic trim

G WARNINGWhen cleaning the steering wheel boss anddashboard, do not use cockpit sprays orcleaning agents containing solvents. Cleaningagents containing solvents cause the surfaceto become porous, and as a result, plasticparts may break away and be thrown aroundthe interior when an air bag is deployed, whichmay result in severe injuries.

! Do not affix the following to plasticsurfaces:RstickersRfilmsRscented oil bottles or similar itemsYou can otherwise damage the plastic.

! Do not allow cosmetics, insect repellentor sunscreen to come into contact with theplastic trim. This maintains the high-qualitylook of the surfaces.

X Wipe the plastic trim with a damp, lint-freecloth, e.g. a microfiber cloth.

X Heavy soiling: use car care and cleaningproducts recommended and approved byMercedes-Benz.The surface may change color temporarily.Wait until the surface is dry again.

Cleaning the steering wheel and gear orselector leverX Thoroughly wipe with a damp cloth or use

leather care agents that have beenrecommended and approved by Mercedes-Benz.

Cleaning genuine wood and trimelementsX Wipe the wooden trim and trim pieces with

a damp, lint-free cloth, e.g. a microfibercloth.

X Heavy soiling: use car care and cleaningproducts recommended and approved byMercedes-Benz.

! Do not use solvent-based cleaning agentssuch as tar remover, wheel cleaners,polishes or waxes. There is otherwise a riskof damaging the surface.

! Do not use chrome polish on trim pieces.The trim pieces have a chrome look but aremostly made of anodized aluminum andcan lose their shine if chrome polish isused. Use a damp, lint-free cloth insteadwhen cleaning the trim pieces.If the chrome-plated trim pieces are verydirty, you can use a chrome polish. If youare unsure as to whether the trim piecesare chrome-plated or not, consult anauthorized Mercedes-Benz Center.

Cleaning the seat covers! Do not use microfiber cloths to clean

genuine leather, artificial leather orAlcantara® covers. If used often, these candamage the cover.

288 CareM

aint

enan

ce a

nd c

are

! Observe the following when cleaning:Rclean genuine leather covers carefully

with a damp cloth and then wipe thecovers down with a dry cloth. Make surethat the leather does not becomesoaked. It may otherwise become roughand cracked. Only use leather careagents that have been tested andapproved by Mercedes-Benz. You canobtain these from a qualified specialistworkshop, e.g. a Mercedes-Benz Servicecenter.Rclean artificial leather covers with a cloth

moistened with a solution containing 1%detergent (e.g. dish washing liquid).Rclean cloth covers with a microfiber cloth

moistened with a solution containing 1%detergent (e.g. dish washing liquid). Rubcarefully and always wipe entire seatsections to avoid leaving visible lines.Leave the seat to dry afterwards.Cleaning results depend on the type ofdirt and how long it has been there.Rclean Alcantara® covers with a damp

cloth. Make sure you wipe entire seatsections to avoid leaving visible lines.

i Note that regular care is essential toensure that the appearance and comfort ofthe covers is retained over time.

Cleaning the seat beltsX Use clean, lukewarm water and soap

solution.

! Do not clean the seat belts using chemicalcleaning agents. Do not dry the seat beltsby warming them above 176 ‡ (80 †) orplacing them in direct sunlight.

G WARNINGDo not bleach or dye seat belts as this mayseverely weaken them. In a crash, they maynot be able to provide adequate protection.

Cleaning the headliner and carpetsX Headliner: use a soft brush or a cleaning

agent recommended and approved byMercedes-Benz to remove heavy soiling.

X Carpets: use the carpet and textilecleaning agents recommended andapproved by Mercedes-Benz.

Care 289

Mai

nten

ance

and

car

e

Z

Useful information ............................ 292Where will I find...? ........................... 292Flat tire .............................................. 293Battery ............................................... 298Jump-starting .................................... 301Towing and tow-starting .................. 302Fuses .................................................. 305

291

Brea

kdow

n as

sist

ance

Useful information



Where will I find...?

First-aid kitDepending on the vehicle's equipment, thefirst-aid kit is located either in an openstowage space or behind the cover on the leftside.X Open the trunk lid.

Example: first-aid kit behind the side trim panelX To open the cover: turn rotary knob : in

the direction of the arrow and fold downcover ;.

X Remove the first-aid kit.

Example: first-aid kit in an open stowage spaceX Remove first-aid kit :.

i Check the expiration date on the first-aidkit at least once a year. Replace thecontents if necessary, and replace missingcontents.

Vehicle tool kitThe vehicle tool kit can be found in thestowage well under the trunk floor.X Lift the trunk floor up (Y page 258).

: Vehicle tool kit tray; Stowage well= Spare wheel/"Minispare" emergency

spare wheelThe vehicle tool kit contains:Rfolding wheel chockRfuse allocation chartRjackRone pair of gloves

292 Where will I find...?Br

eakd

own

assi

stan

ce

Rlug wrenchRtowing eye

"Minispare" emergency spare wheelThe "Minispare" emergency spare wheel canbe found in the stowage well under the trunkfloor.X Lift the trunk floor up (Y page 258).

X Remove tool kit tray :.X Turn stowage well ; counterclockwise

and remove it.X Remove "Minispare" emergency spare

wheel =.

For further information on changing a wheeland mounting the spare wheel, see(Y page 293).

Flat tire

Preparing the vehicleYour vehicle may be equipped with a"Minispare" emergency spare wheel orMOExtended tires (tires with run-flatproperties) (Y page 297).

i Vehicle preparation is not necessary onvehicles with MOExtended tires.

X Stop the vehicle as far away as possiblefrom traffic on solid, non-slippery and levelground.

X Switch on the hazard warning lamps.

X Firmly depress the parking brake.X Bring the front wheels into the straight-

ahead position.X Vehicles with manual transmission:

engage first or reverse gear.X Vehicles with automatic transmission:

move the selector lever to P.X Switch off the engine.X Vehicles without KEYLESS-GO: remove

the SmartKey from the ignition lock.X Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO: open the

driver's door.The on-board electronics have status 0,which is the same as the SmartKey havingbeen removed.

X Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO: remove theStart/Stop button from the ignition lock(Y page 137).

X All occupants must get out of the vehicle.Make sure that they are not endangered asthey do so.

X Make sure that no one is near the dangerarea while a wheel is being changed.Anyone who is not directly assisting in thewheel change should, for example, standbehind the barrier.

X Get out of the vehicle. Pay attention totraffic conditions when doing so.

X Close the driver's door.

Changing a wheel and mounting thespare wheel

Preparing the vehicle

G WARNINGThe wheel and tire size of the emergencyspare wheel/spare wheel may differ to that ofthe damaged wheel. When using anemergency spare wheel/spare wheel thehandling characteristics of the vehicle maychange.Adapt your style of driving accordingly.

Flat tire 293

Brea

kdow

n as

sist

ance

Z

Never operate the vehicle with more than oneemergency spare wheel/spare wheel thatdiffers in size.Only use an emergency spare wheel/sparewheel of a differing size briefly and do notswitch off ESP®.When using an emergency spare wheel, youmust not exceed the maximum speed of50 mph (80 km/h).

G WARNINGHave the emergency spare wheel/sparewheel replaced with a new wheel as soon aspossible at a qualified specialist workshopwhich has the necessary specialist knowledgeand tools to carry out the work required.Mercedes-Benz recommends that you use anauthorized Mercedes-Benz Center for thispurpose. In particular, work relevant to safetyor on safety-related systems must be carriedout at a qualified specialist workshop.

i Vehicles without a spare wheel/emergency spare wheel are not equippedwith a tire-change tool kit at the factory. Formore information on which tools arerequired to perform a wheel change on yourvehicle, e.g. wheel chock, lug wrench oralignment bolt, consult an authorizedMercedes-Benz Center.

X Prepare the vehicle as described(Y page 293).

X Remove the following items (depending onthe vehicle's equipment) from the stowagewell under the trunk/trunk floor:Rthe emergency spare wheelRthe folding wheel chockRthe lug wrenchRthe jack

X Secure the vehicle to prevent it from rollingaway.

Securing the vehicle to prevent it fromrolling away

G WARNINGOnly jack up the vehicle on level ground or onslight inclines/declines. The vehicle couldotherwise fall off the jack and injure you orothers.

If your vehicle is equipped with a wheel chock,it can be found in the vehicle tool kit(Y page 292).The folding wheel chock is an additionalsecuring measure to prevent the vehicle fromrolling away, for example when changing awheel.

X Fold both plates upwards :.X Fold out lower plate ;.X Guide the lugs on the lower plate fully into

the openings in base plate =.

Securing the vehicle on level groundX On level ground: place chocks or other

suitable items under the front and rear of

294 Flat tireBr

eakd

own

assi

stan

ce

the wheel that is diagonally opposite thewheel you wish to change.

Securing the vehicle on slight downhill gradientsX On downhill gradients: place chocks or

other suitable items in front of the wheelsof the front and rear axle.

Raising the vehicle

G WARNINGWhen jacking up the vehicle, only use the jackwhich has been specifically approved byMercedes-Benz for your vehicle.The jack is designed exclusively for jacking upthe vehicle at the jacking points built into bothsides of the vehicle. The jack saddle must beplaced centrally under the jacking point. Thejack must always be vertical when in use,especially on inclines or declines.The jack is intended only for lifting the vehiclebriefly for wheel changes. It is not suited forperforming maintenance work under thevehicle. To help avoid personal injury, use thejack only to lift the vehicle during a wheelchange.Never get beneath the vehicle while it issupported by the jack. Keep hands and feetaway from the area under the lifted vehicle.Always lower the vehicle onto sufficientcapacity jackstands before working under thevehicle.Always firmly engage the parking brake andblock the wheels with wheel chocks or othersizable objects before raising the vehicle with

the jack. Do not disengage the parking brakewhile the vehicle is raised.Make sure that the ground on which thevehicle is standing and where you place thejack is solid, level and not slippery. Ifnecessary, use a large underlay. On slipperysurfaces, such as tiled floors, you should usea non-slip underlay, for example a rubber mat.Do not use wooden blocks or similar objectsas a jack underlay. Otherwise, the jack maynot be able to achieve its load-bearingcapacity if it is not at its full height.Never start the engine when the vehicle israised.Also observe the notes on the jack.

X Using lug wrench :, loosen the bolts onthe wheel you wish to change by about onefull turn. Do not unscrew the boltscompletely.

The jacking points are located just behind thewheel housings of the front wheels and justin front of the wheel housings of the rearwheels (arrows).

Flat tire 295

Brea

kdow

n as

sist

ance

Z

G WARNINGThe jack is designed exclusively for jacking upthe vehicle at the jacking points. The jacksaddle must be placed centrally under thejacking point.If you do not position the jack correctly in thejacking point, the vehicle can fall off the jackand seriously or fatally injure you or others.

! The jack is designed exclusively forjacking up the vehicle at the jacking points.Otherwise, your vehicle could be damaged.

X Position jack = at jacking point ;.

X Make sure that the base of the jack ispositioned directly under the jacking point.

X Turn crank ? clockwise until jack = sitscompletely on jacking point ; and thebase of the jack lies evenly on the ground.

X Turn crank ? until the tire is raised amaximum of 1.2 inches (3 cm) off theground.

Removing a wheelX Unscrew the wheel bolts.

! Do not place wheel bolts in sand or on adirty surface. The bolt and wheel hubthreads could otherwise be damaged whenyou screw them in.

X Remove the wheel.

Mounting a new wheel

G WARNINGAlways replace wheel bolts that are damagedor rusted.Never apply oil or grease to wheel bolts.Damaged wheel hub threads should berepaired immediately. Do not continue todrive under these circumstances! Contact anauthorized Mercedes-Benz Center or callRoadside Assistance.Incorrect wheel bolts or improperly tightenedwheel bolts can cause the wheel to come off.This could cause an accident. Make sure touse the correct wheel bolts.

G WARNINGOnly use genuine Mercedes-Benz wheel bolts.Other wheel bolts may come loose.Do not tighten the wheel bolts when thevehicle is raised. Otherwise, the vehicle couldfall off the jack.

G WARNINGMake sure to use the original length wheelbolts when remounting the original wheelafter it has been repaired.

X Clean the wheel and wheel hub contactsurfaces.

! To prevent damage to the paintwork, holdthe wheel securely against the wheel hubwhile screwing in the first wheel bolt.

296 Flat tireBr

eakd

own

assi

stan

ce

X Place the emergency spare wheel on thewheel hub and push it on.

X Tighten the wheel bolts until they arefinger-tight.

Lowering the vehicleX Turn the crank of the jack counter-

clockwise until the vehicle is once againstanding firmly on the ground.

X Place the jack to one side.

X Tighten the wheel bolts evenly in acrosswise pattern in the sequenceindicated (: to A). The tightening torquemust be 96 lb-ft (130 Nm).

G WARNINGHave the tightening torque checkedimmediately after a wheel is changed. Thewheels could come loose if they are nottightened to a torque of 96 lb/ft (130 Nm).

X Turn the jack back to its initial position andstore it together with the rest of the tire-

change tool kit in the trunk/cargocompartment.

X Transport the defective wheel in the trunk/cargo compartment.

orX Depending on the size of the wheel, you

may also be able to secure the defectivewheel in the spare wheel well. In this case,you will have to remove the stowage wellcasing from the spare wheel well and stowit securely in the trunk/cargocompartment.

i USA only: when you are driving with theemergency spare wheel mounted, the tirepressure monitoring system cannotfunction reliably. Only restart the tirepressure monitoring system when thedefective wheel has been replaced with anew wheel.All wheels mounted must be equipped withfunctioning sensors. The defective wheelshould no longer be in the vehicle.

MOExtended tires (tires with run-flatproperties)

MOExtended tires (tires with run-flatproperties) allow you to continue driving yourvehicle even if one or more tires are entirelydeflated.MOExtended tires may only be used inconjunction with the activated tire pressureloss warning system or with the activated tirepressure monitoring system.The maximum permissible distance whichcan be driven in run-flat mode depends on theload in the vehicle. You can drive 50 miles(80 km) if the vehicle is partially laden and18 miles (30 km) if it is fully laden.The maximum permissible distance whichcan be driven in run-flat mode is counted fromthe moment the tire pressure loss warningappears in the multifunction display.You must not exceed a maximum speed of50 mph (80 km/h).

Flat tire 297

Brea

kdow

n as

sist

ance

Z

G WARNINGThe handling characteristics of your vehicledeteriorate in run-flat mode, for example:Rwhen corneringRwhen brakingRwhen accelerating rapidlyAdapt your driving style accordingly and avoidsudden changes in direction and suddenacceleration, as well as driving over obstacles(i.e. curbs, potholes), and driving off-road.This is particularly the case when the vehicleis heavily laden.The maximum permissible distance that canbe driven in run-flat mode depends to a largeextent on the loads placed on the vehicle. Itcan be shorter due to high speeds, a heavyload, sudden changes in direction, the roadsurface condition, outside temperature, etc.,or further if you drive carefully andconservatively.Do not continue to drive in run-flat mode if:Ryou hear banging noises.Rthe vehicle starts to shake.Ryou see smoke and smell rubber.RESP® is intervening constantly.Rthere are tears in the sidewalls of the tire.After driving in run-flat mode, you must havethe wheel(s) checked for damage at aqualified specialist workshop which has thenecessary specialist knowledge and tools tocarry out the work required. The defective tiremust be replaced in every case.Mercedes-Benz recommends that you use anauthorized Mercedes-Benz Center for thispurpose. In particular, work relevant to safetyor on safety-related systems must be carriedout at a qualified specialist workshop.

i When replacing one or all tires, make surethat you only use tires markedMOExtended and of the specified size forthe vehicle.

Battery

Important safety notesIn order for the battery to achieve themaximum possible service life, it must alwaysbe sufficiently charged.

! Have the battery checked regularly at aqualified specialist workshop, such as anauthorized Mercedes-Benz Center.Adhere to the service intervals indicated inthe service booklet or ask a qualifiedspecialist workshop, such as an authorizedMercedes-Benz Center.

Have the battery charge checked morefrequently if you use the vehicle mainly forshort trips or if you leave it standing idle fora lengthy period.Only replace a battery with a battery that hasbeen recommended by Mercedes-Benz.Consult an authorized Mercedes-Benz Centerif you wish to leave your vehicle parked for along period of time.

G WARNINGComply with safety precautions and takeprotective measures when handling batteries.

Risk of explosion

Fire, naked flames andsmoking are prohibitedwhen handling the battery.Avoid creating sparks.Battery acid is caustic.Avoid contact with the skin,eyes or clothing.Wear suitable protectiveclothing, in particulargloves, an apron and a facemask.Immediately rinse acidsplashes off with cleanwater. Consult a doctor ifnecessary.

298 BatteryBr

eakd

own

assi

stan

ce

Wear eye protection.

Keep children away.

Observe this Operator'sManual.

H Environmental noteBatteries contain dangeroussubstances. It is against thelaw to dispose of them withthe household rubbish. Theymust be collected separatelyand recycled to protect theenvironment.Dispose of batteries in anenvironmentally friendlymanner. Return dischargedbatteries to a qualifiedspecialist workshop, e.g. anauthorized Mercedes-BenzCenter, or to a specialcollection point for oldbatteries.

G WARNINGFailure to follow these instructions can resultin severe injury or death.Never lean over batteries while connecting.You might get injured.Battery fluid contains sulfuric acid. Do notallow this fluid to come in contact with eyes,skin or clothing. In case it does, immediatelyflush affected area with water and seekmedical help if necessary.A battery will also produce hydrogen gas,which is flammable and explosive. Keepflames or sparks away from battery, avoidimproper connection of jumper cables,smoking etc.

G WARNINGDo not place any metal objects on the batteryas this could result in a short circuit.Use leak-proof batteries only to avoid the riskof acid burns in the event of an accident.Take care that you do not become staticallycharged, e.g. by wearing synthetic clothing orrubbing against textiles. For this reason, youalso should not pull or push the battery overcarpets or other synthetic materials.Never touch the battery first. First, touch theoutside body of the vehicle in order to releaseany possible electrostatic charges.Do not rub the battery with rags or cloths. Thebattery could explode if touched due toelectrostatic charge or due to sparkformation.

! Before working on the battery, e.g.loosening the battery terminals, switch offthe engine and remove the SmartKey fromthe ignition. On vehicles with KEYLESS-GO,make sure that the ignition is switched off.Check that all the indicator lamps in theinstrument cluster are off. You mayotherwise destroy electronic components,such as the alternator.

! Like other batteries, the vehicle batterymay discharge over time if you do not usethe vehicle. In this case have the batterychecked at a qualified specialist workshop,such as an authorized Mercedes-BenzCenter. You can also charge the batterywith a charger recommended by Mercedes-Benz. Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center for more information.The battery and the cover of the positiveterminal clamp must be installed securelyduring operation.

i Remove the SmartKey if you park thevehicle and do not require any electricalconsumers. The vehicle will then use verylittle energy, thus conserving batterypower.

Battery 299

Brea

kdow

n as

sist

ance

Z

Mercedes-Benz recommends that you do notcarry out work on batteries yourself, e.g.removing or charging. Always have this workperformed at a qualified specialist workshop,e.g. an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.

i If the power supply has been interrupted,e.g. if the battery has been reconnected,you must carry out the following tasks:Rset the clock; see the separate operating

instructions.Rreset the function for automatically

folding the exterior mirrors in/out byfolding the mirrors out once(Y page 102)23

Charging the battery

G WARNINGNever charge a battery still installed in thevehicle unless a battery charger unit approvedby Mercedes-Benz is being used. Gases mayescape during charging and cause explosionsthat may result in paint damage, corrosion orpersonal injury.A battery charger unit specially adapted forMercedes-Benz vehicles and tested andapproved by Mercedes-Benz is available as anaccessory. It permits the charging of thebattery in its installed position. Contact anauthorized Mercedes-Benz Center for furtherinformation and availability.Charge the battery in accordance with theseparate instructions for the battery charger.

G WARNINGThere is a risk of acid burns during thecharging process due to the gases whichescape from the battery. Do not lean over thebattery during the charging process.

G WARNINGBattery acid is caustic. Avoid contact with theskin, eyes or clothing.

! Only charge the installed battery with abattery charger which has been tested andapproved by Mercedes-Benz. These batterychargers allow the battery to be chargedwhile still installed.

! Only use battery chargers with amaximum charging voltage of 14.8 V.

! Only charge the battery using the jump-starting connection point.

The jump-starting connection point is in theengine compartment (Y page 301).X Open the hood (Y page 278).X Connect the battery charger to the positive

terminal and earth point in the same orderas when connecting the donor battery inthe jump-starting procedure(Y page 301).

X Read the battery charger's operatinginstructions before charging the battery.

23 This function is only available in vehicles for Canada.

300 BatteryBr

eakd

own

assi

stan

ce

Jump-starting

G WARNINGFailure to follow these directions will cause damage to the electronic components, and can leadto a battery explosion and severe injury or death.Never lean over batteries while connecting or jump starting. You might get injured.Battery fluid contains sulfuric acid. Do not allow this fluid to come in contact with eyes, skin orclothing. In case it does, immediately flush affected area with water, and seek medical help ifnecessary.A battery will also produce hydrogen gas, which is flammable and explosive. Keep flames orsparks away from battery, avoid improper connection of jumper cables, smoking, etc.Attempting to jump start a frozen battery can result in it exploding, causing personal injury.Read all instructions before proceeding.

! Avoid repeated and lengthy starting attempts. Otherwise, non-combusted fuel maydamage the catalytic converter24 and create a risk of fire.Do not use a rapid-charging device to start the engine.Make sure the jumper cables are not damaged.Make sure the jumper cables are not touching any other metal objects when they areconnected to the battery.

If your vehicle's battery is discharged, the engine can be jump-started from another vehicleor from a second battery using jumper cables.Observe the following points:X The battery is not accessible in all vehicles. If the other vehicle's battery is not accessible,

jump-start the vehicle using a second battery or a jump-starting device.X Only jump-start the vehicle when the engine is cold and the catalytic converter system has

cooled down25.X Do not start the engine if the battery is frozen. Let the battery thaw first.X Jump-starting may only be performed from batteries with a nominal voltage of 12 V.X Only use jumper cables which have a sufficient cross-section and insulated terminal clamps.X Make sure that the jumper cables cannot come into contact with parts, such as the pulley

or the fan. These parts move when the engine is started and while it is running.X If the battery is fully discharged, leave the battery that is being used to jump-start connected

for a few minutes before attempting to start. This charges the empty battery a little.

i Jumper cables and further information about jump-starting can be obtained from anyauthorized Mercedes-Benz Center, for example.

X Make sure that the two vehicles do not touch.X Apply the parking brake firmly.X Manual transmission: engage neutral.X Automatic transmission: move the selector lever to P.

24 Only vehicles with a gasoline engine.25 Only vehicles with a gasoline engine.

Jump-starting 301

Brea

kdow

n as

sist

ance

Z

X Switch off all electrical consumers (e.g. radio, blower, etc.).X Open the hood (Y page 278).

Position number B identifies the charged battery of the other vehicle or an equivalent jump-starting device.X Slide cover : of positive terminal ; in the direction of the arrow.X Connect positive terminal ; on your vehicle to positive terminal = of donor battery B

using the jumper cable, beginning with your own battery.X Start the engine of the donor vehicle and run it at idling speed.X Connect negative terminal ? of donor battery B to earth point A of your vehicle using

the jumper cable, connecting the jumper cable to donor battery B first.X Start the engine.X Allow the engine to run for a few minutes before disconnecting the jumper cable.X First, remove the jumper cable from earth point A and negative terminal ?, then from

positive terminal ; and positive terminal =, each time disconnecting from the contactson your own vehicle first.

X After removing the jumper cable, close cover : on positive terminal ;.X Have the battery checked at a qualified specialist workshop, e.g. an authorized Mercedes-

Benz Center. The jump-starting procedure is not a standard operating state; therefore, havethe battery checked.

Towing and tow-starting


G WARNINGIf you tow the vehicle, you must use a rigidtowing bar if:

Rthe engine is not running.Rthere is a brake system malfunction.Rthere is a malfunction in the power supply

or the vehicle's electrical system.The power assistance for the steering and thebrake force booster do not work when the

302 Towing and tow-startingBr

eakd

own

assi

stan

ce

engine is not running. You will need moreforce to steer and brake, you may have todepress the brake pedal with maximum force.Before towing away, make sure that thesteering can be moved and is not locked.If you tow or tow-start another vehicle, itsweight must not exceed the maximumpermissible gross vehicle weight of yourvehicle.

G WARNINGThe vehicle is braked when the HOLD functionor DISTRONIC PLUS is activated. Therefore,deactivate HOLD and DISTRONIC PLUS if thevehicle is to be towed.

It is better to have the vehicle transportedthan to have it towed.

! You may only tow the vehicle a maximumdistance of 30 miles (50 km). A towingspeed of 30 mph (50 km/h) must not beexceeded.For towing distances over 30 miles(50 km), the vehicle must loaded onto atransporter.

! Only secure the tow rope or tow bar at thetowing eyes. Otherwise, the vehicle couldbe damaged.

! Do not use the towing eye for recovery,as this could damage the vehicle. If indoubt, recover the vehicle with a crane.

! When towing, pull away slowly andsmoothly. If the tractive power is too high,the vehicles could be damaged.

! Do not tow with sling-type equipment.This could damage the vehicle.

! On vehicles with KEYLESS-GO, use theSmartKey instead of the Start/Stopbutton. Turn the SmartKey to position 2 inthe ignition lock and shift the automatictransmission to N. Then, turn the SmartKeyback to 0 and leave it in the ignition lock.

The automatic transmission must be inposition N when the vehicle is being towed.

The battery must be connected and charged.Otherwise, you:Rcannot turn the SmartKey to position 2 in

the ignition lockRcannot shift the automatic transmission to

position NRelease the selector lever lock manually tomove it out of position P (Y page 149).

i Before the vehicle is towed, switch off theautomatic locking feature (Y page 78). Youcould otherwise be locked out whenpushing or towing the vehicle.

Installing/removing the towing eye

Installing the towing eyeX Remove the towing eye from the vehicle

tool kit (Y page 292).

G WARNINGThe exhaust tail pipe may be hot. You couldburn yourself if you touch the tail pipe. Beparticularly careful when removing the rearcover.

The mountings for the removable towing eyesare located in the bumpers. They are at thefront and at the rear, under the covers.

Towing and tow-starting 303

Brea

kdow

n as

sist

ance

Z

X Press the mark on cover : inwards in thedirection of the arrow.

X Take cover : off the opening.X Screw the towing eye in clockwise to the

stop and tighten it.

Removing the towing eyeX Loosen the towing eye and unscrew it.X Attach cover : to the bumper and press

until it engages.X Place the towing eye in the vehicle tool kit.

Towing the vehicle with the rear axleraised

Only possible on vehicles without 4MATIC.When towing your vehicle with the rear axleraised, it is important that you observe thesafety instructions (Y page 302).

! The ignition must be switched off if youare towing the vehicle with the rear axleraised. Intervention by ESP® couldotherwise damage the brake system.

X Switch on the hazard warning lamps(Y page 109).

X Turn the SmartKey to position 0 in theignition lock and remove the SmartKeyfrom the ignition lock.

X When leaving the vehicle, take theSmartKey or the KEYLESS-GO key with you.

Towing a vehicle with both axles onthe ground

When having your vehicle towed, observe theimportant safety notes (Y page 302).

G WARNINGThe power assistance for the steering and thebrake force booster do not work when theengine is not running. You will then needmuch more effort to brake and steer the

vehicle. Adapt your style of drivingaccordingly.

X Switch on the hazard warning lamps(Y page 109).

i When towing with the hazard warninglamps switched on, use the combinationswitch as usual to signal a change ofdirection. In this case, only the turn signalsfor the desired direction flash. When thecombination switch is reset, the hazardwarning lamps start flashing again.


X When the vehicle is stationary, depress thebrake pedal and keep it depressed.

X Shift the automatic transmission toposition N.

X Release the brake pedal.X Release the parking brake.

Transporting the vehicleThe towing eye can be used to pull the vehicleonto a trailer or transporter for transportingpurposes.X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the

ignition lock.X Shift the automatic transmission to

position N.

As soon as the vehicle is loaded:X Prevent the vehicle from rolling away by

applying the parking brake.X Move the selector lever to P.X Turn the SmartKey to position 0 in the

ignition lock and remove the SmartKeyfrom the ignition lock.

X Secure the vehicle.

! Only lash the vehicle down by the wheelsor wheel rims, not by parts of the vehiclesuch as axle or steering components.Otherwise, the vehicle could be damaged.

304 Towing and tow-startingBr

eakd

own

assi

stan

ce

Notes for 4MATIC vehicles! Vehicles with 4MATIC must not be towed

with either the front or the rear axle raised,as doing so will damage the transmission.

If the vehicle has transmission damage ordamage to the front or rear axle, have ittransported on a transporter or trailer.In the event of damage to the electrical systemIf the battery is defective, the automatictransmission will be locked in position P. Toshift the automatic transmission to positionN, you must provide power to the vehicle'selectrical system in the same way as whenjump-starting (Y page 301).Have the vehicle transported on a transporteror trailer.

Tow-starting (emergency starting)! Vehicles with automatic transmission

must not be started by tow-starting. Thiscould otherwise damage the transmission.

Fuses

Important safety notesThe fuses in your vehicle serve to close downfaulty circuits. If a fuse blows, all thecomponents on the circuit and their functionsstop operating.

G WARNINGOnly use fuses approved by Mercedes-Benzwith the specified amperage for the system inquestion and do not attempt to repair orbridge a blown fuse. Using other thanapproved fuses or using repaired or bridgedfuses may cause an overload leading to a fire,and/or cause damage to electricalcomponents and/or systems. Have the causedetermined and remedied by an authorizedMercedes-Benz Center.

Blown fuses must be replaced with fuses ofthe same rating, which you can recognize bythe color and value. The fuse ratings are listedin the fuse allocation chart. An authorizedMercedes-Benz Center will be happy toadvise you.

i If a fuse has blown, contact a breakdownservice or an authorized Mercedes-BenzCenter.

If the newly inserted fuse also blows, have thecause traced and rectified at a qualifiedspecialist workshop, e.g. an authorizedMercedes-Benz Center.

! Only use fuses that have been approvedfor Mercedes-Benz vehicles and whichhave the correct fuse rating for the systemconcerned. Otherwise, components orsystems could be damaged.

Before changing a fuseX Park the vehicle and apply the parking

brake.X Switch off all electrical consumers.X Remove the SmartKey from the ignition

lock.The fuses are located in various fuse boxes:Rfuse box on the driver's side of the

dashboardRfuse box in the engine compartment on the

left-hand side of the vehicle, when viewedin the direction of travelRfuse box in the trunk on the right-hand side

of the vehicle, when viewed in the directionof travel

The fuse allocation chart is located in thevehicle tool kit (Y page 292) in the stowagecompartment under the trunk floor.

Dashboard fuse box! Do not use a pointed object such as a

screwdriver to open the cover in the

Fuses 305

Brea

kdow

n as

sist

ance

Z

dashboard. You could damage thedashboard or the cover.

X To open: pull out cover : slightly at thebottom in the direction of arrow =.

X Pull cover : outwards in the direction ofarrow ; and remove it.

X To close: clip in cover : on the front ofthe dashboard.

X Fold cover : inwards until it engages.

Fuse box in the engine compartmentX Make sure that the windshield wipers are

turned off.

G WARNINGMake sure that the windshield wipers areswitched off and that the SmartKey isremoved from the ignition lock before youopen the cover of the fuse box. Otherwise, thewindshield wipers and the wiper rods abovethe cover could be set in motion. This couldlead to you or others being injured by thewiper rods.

X Open the hood (Y page 278).

X Remove any existing moisture from thefuse box using a dry cloth.

X Take lines ; from the guides.X To open: open clamps :.X Remove the fuse box cover forwards.

! Make sure that no moisture can enter thefuse box when the cover is open.

X To close: check whether the rubber seal islying correctly in the cover.

X Insert the cover at the rear of the fuse boxinto the retainer.

X Fold down the cover and close clamps :.X Secure lines ; in the guides.

! The cover must be seated properly,otherwise moisture or dirt could impair thefunction of the fuses.

X Close the hood (Y page 279).

Fuse box in the trunkX Open the trunk lid (Y page 80).

306 FusesBr

eakd

own

assi

stan

ce

X To open: turn rotary catch : clockwise.X Open cover ; downwards in the direction

of the arrow.

Fuses 307

Brea

kdow

n as

sist

ance

Z

Useful information ............................ 310Important safety notes .................... 310Operation ........................................... 310Winter operation ............................... 312Tire pressure ..................................... 313Loading the vehicle .......................... 322Maximum load rating ....................... 325Uniform Tire Quality GradingStandards .......................................... 326Tire labeling ....................................... 327Definition of terms for tires andloading ............................................... 331Changing a wheel ............................. 334Wheel and tire combinations ........... 335

309

Whe

els

and

tires

Useful information




Consult an authorized Mercedes-Benz Centerif you require information on approved andrecommended tires and wheels for summerand winter operation. Advice on purchasingand caring for tires is also available there.

G WARNINGReplace rims or tires with the samedesignation, manufacturer and type as shownon the original part. For further informationcontact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.If incorrectly sized rims and tires aremounted, the wheel brakes or suspensioncomponents can be damaged. Also, theoperating clearance of the wheels and thetires may no longer be correct.

G WARNINGWorn, old tires can cause accidents. If the tiretread is worn to minimum tread depth, or ifthe tires have sustained damage, replacethem.When replacing rims, only use genuineMercedes-Benz wheel bolts specified for theparticular rim type. Failure to do so can resultin the bolts loosening and possibly anaccident.Retreaded tires are not tested orrecommended by Mercedes-Benz, sinceprevious damage cannot always be

recognized on retreads. The operating safetyof the vehicle cannot be assured when suchtires are used.

G WARNINGIf you feel a sudden significant vibration orride disturbance, or you suspect that possibledamage to your vehicle has occurred, youshould turn on the hazard warning flashers,carefully slow down, and drive with caution toan area which is a safe distance from the road.Inspect the tires and the vehicle underbodyfor possible damage. If the vehicle appearsunsafe, have the vehicle towed to the nearestauthorized Mercedes-Benz Center or tiredealer for repairs.

G WARNINGDo not drive with a flat tire. A flat tire affectsthe ability to steer or brake the vehicle. Youmight lose control of the vehicle. Continueddriving with a flat tire or driving at high speedwith a flat tire will cause excessive heat build-up and possibly a fire.

i Further information about Tires andwheels can be obtained from anyauthorized Mercedes-Benz Center.

Operation

Notes on drivingRIf the vehicle is heavily laden, check the tire

pressures and correct them if necessary.RWhen parking your vehicle, make sure that

the tires do not get deformed by the curbor other obstacles. If it is necessary to driveover curbs, speed humps or similarelevations, try to do so slowly and at anobtuse angle. Otherwise, the tires,particularly the sidewalls, can getdamaged.

310 OperationW

heel

s an

d tir

es

Notes on regularly inspecting wheelsand tires

G WARNINGRegularly check the tires for damage.Damaged tires can cause tire inflationpressure loss. As a result, you could losecontrol of your vehicle.Worn, old tires can cause accidents. If the tiretread is worn to minimum tread depth, or ifthe tires have sustained damage, replacethem.

RRegularly check the wheels and tires ofyour vehicle for damage (e.g. cuts,punctures, tears, bulges on tires anddeformation or cracks or severe corrosionon wheels) at least once a month, as wellas after driving off-road or on rough roads.Damaged wheels can cause a loss of tirepressure.RRegularly check the tire tread depth and

the condition of the tread across the wholewidth of the tire (Y page 311). If necessary,turn the front wheels to full lock in order toinspect the inner side of the tire surface.RAll wheels must have a valve cap to protect

the valve against dirt and moisture. Do notmount anything onto the valve (such as tirepressure monitoring systems) other thanthe standard valve cap or other valve capsapproved by Mercedes-Benz for yourvehicle.RRegularly check the pressure of all the tires

including the emergency spare wheel or thespare wheel, particularly prior to long trips,and correct the pressure as necessary(Y page 313).

Tire tread

G WARNINGAlthough the applicable federal motor vehiclesafety laws consider a tire to be worn whenthe tread wear indicators (TWI) becomevisible at approximately 1/16 in (1.6 mm), we

recommend that you do not allow your tiresto wear down to that level. As tread depthapproaches 1/8 in (3 mm), the adhesionproperties on a wet road are sharply reduced.Depending upon the weather and/or roadsurface (conditions), the tire traction varieswidely.

Do not use tires that are excessively worn asthe tire traction on wet road surfacesdecreases significantly when the tread depthis less than 1/8 inch (3 mm).Tread wear indicators (TWI) are required bylaw. Six indicators are positioned on the tiretread. They become visible as soon as a treaddepth of approximately 1/16 inch (1.6 mm)has been reached. If this is the case, the tireis so worn that it must be replaced.The recommended tread depth for summertires is at least 1/8 inch (3 mm). Therecommended tread depth for winter tires isat least 1/6 inch (4 mm).

Bar marking : for tread wear is integratedinto the tire tread.

Notes on selecting, mounting andreplacing tiresROnly mount tires and wheels of the same

type and make.ROnly mount tires of the correct size onto

the wheels.RAfter mounting new tires, run them in at

moderate speeds for the first 60 miles

Operation 311

Whe

els

and

tires

Z

(100 km) as they only reach their fullperformance after this distance.RDo not use tires that are excessively worn

as the tire traction on wet road surfacesdecreases significantly when the treaddepth is less than 1/8 inch (3 mm).RReplace the tires after six years at the

latest, regardless of wear. This also appliesto the spare wheel/emergency sparewheel.

The service life of tires depends on thefollowing factors amongst other things:Rdriving styleRtire pressureRmileage

MOExtended tires (tires with run-flatproperties)

MOExtended tires (tires with run-flatproperties) allow you to continue driving yourvehicle even if one or more tires are entirelydeflated.MOExtended tires may be used only inconjunction with the activated tire pressureloss warning system or the activated tirepressure monitoring system and only onwheels specifically tested by Mercedes-Benz.You will find notes on driving withMOExtended tires in the "Breakdownassistance" section (Y page 297).

Winter operation

Please bear the following in mindAt the onset of winter, have your vehiclewinterproofed at a qualified specialistworkshop, e.g. at an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.Observe the notes in the "Changing a wheel"section (Y page 334).

Driving with summer tiresAt temperatures below 45 ‡ (+7 †), theelasticity of summer tires and therefore alsotraction and braking capability are reducedconsiderably — equip your vehicle withM+S tires. Using summer tires at very coldtemperatures could cause tears to form,thereby damaging the tires permanently.Mercedes-Benz cannot accept responsibilityfor this type of damage.

M+S tiresAt temperatures below 45 ‡(+7 †), usewinter tires or all-season tires. Both types oftire are identified by the M+S marking.Only winter tires bearing the i snowflakesymbol in addition to the M+S markingprovide the best possible grip in wintry roadconditions. Only these tires will allow drivingsafety systems such as ABS and ESP® tofunction optimally in winter. These tires havebeen developed specifically for driving insnow.Use M+S tires of the same make and tread onall wheels to maintain safe handlingcharacteristics.

G WARNINGM+S tires with a tread depth of less than1/6 inch (4 mm) must be replacedimmediately. They are no longer suitable foruse in winter.

Always observe the maximum permissiblespeed specified for the M+S tires you havemounted.When you have mounted M+S tires:X Check the tire pressures (Y page 317).X Vehicles for Canada: restart the tire

pressure loss warning system(Y page 317).

X Vehicles for USA: restart the tire pressuremonitor (Y page 319).

312 Winter operationW

heel

s an

d tir

es

G WARNINGIf you use your spare wheel when M+S tiresare mounted on the other wheels, be awarethat the difference in tire characteristicsimpairs cornering ability and reduces drivingstability. Adapt your driving style accordingly.Have the spare wheel replaced by a normalwheel with an M+S tire at the nearestMercedes-Benz Center.

Snow chainsFor safety reasons, Mercedes-Benzrecommends that you only use snow chainswhich have been specially approved for yourvehicle by Mercedes-Benz, or are of acorresponding standard of quality.

! There is not enough space for snowchains on some wheel sizes. Observe theinformation under "Tires and wheels" in the"Technical Data" section to avoid damageto the vehicle or the wheels.ROnly use snow chains when driving on

roads completely covered by snow. Do notexceed the maximum permissible speed of30 mph (50 km/h). Remove the snowchains as soon as possible when you are nolonger driving on snow-covered roads.RLocal regulations may restrict the use of

snow chains. Applicable regulations mustbe observed if you wish to mount snowchains.RSnow chains must not be mounted on

emergency spare wheels.If you intend to mount snow chains, pleasebear the following points in mind:Ryou may not attach snow chains to all

wheel-tire combinations; see theinformation under "Wheel and tirecombinations" in the "Wheels and tires"section.Rmount snow chains only in pairs and only

to the rear wheels. Observe themanufacturer's installation instructions.

! If snow chains are mounted on the frontwheels, the snow chains could grindagainst the bodywork or components of thechassis. This could result in damage to thevehicle or the tires.

! Vehicles with steel wheels: if you wishto mount snow chains on steel wheels,make sure that you remove the respectivewheels' hubcaps first. The hubcaps mayotherwise be damaged.

i You may wish to deactivateESP®(Y page 61) when pulling away withsnow chains mounted. This way you canallow the wheels to spin in a controlledmanner, achieving an increased drivingforce (cutting action).

Tire pressure

Tire pressure specifications

G WARNINGFollow recommended tire inflation pressures.Do not underinflate tires. Underinflated tireswear excessively and/or unevenly, adverselyaffect handling and fuel economy, and aremore likely to fail from being overheated.Do not overinflate tires. Overinflated tires canadversely affect handling and ride comfort,wear unevenly, increase stopping distance,and result in sudden deflation (blowout)because they are more likely to becomepunctured or damaged by road debris,potholes etc.Do not overload the tires by exceeding thespecified load limit as indicated on the Tireand Loading Information placard on thedriver's door B-pillar. Overloading the tirescan overheat them, possibly causing ablowout. Overloading the tires can also resultin handling or steering problems, or brakefailure.

The recommended tire pressures for the tiresmounted at the factory can be found on thelabels described here.

Tire pressure 313

Whe

els

and

tires

Z

Option 1) Tire and Loading Information placard on the B-pillar on the driver's side ofthe vehicle (Y page 322).The Tire and Loading Information placardcontains the recommended tire pressures forcold tires on a fully loaded vehicle and for themaximum permissible vehicle speed.

i The specifications given on the followingTire and Loading Information placard areexamples. Tire pressure specifications arevehicle-specific and may deviate from thedata shown here. The tire pressuresapplicable to your vehicle can be found onthe Tire and Loading Information placard onyour vehicle.

: Recommended tire pressures

Option 2) Tire pressure table on the insideof the fuel filler flap.The tire pressure table contains therecommended pressures for cold tires forvarious operating conditions, i.e. differingload and speed conditions.

i Specifications shown in the examples oftire pressure tables are for illustrationpurposes only. Tire pressure specificationsare vehicle-specific and may deviate fromthe data shown here. Tire pressurespecifications applicable to your vehicleare located in your vehicle's tire pressuretable.

Example: tire pressure table for all tires approvedex-works for this vehicle

If a tire size precedes a tire pressure, the tirepressure information following is only validfor that tire size. The load conditions "partiallyladen" and "fully laden" are defined in thetable for different numbers of passengers andamounts of luggage. The actual number ofseats may differ.

Example: tire pressure table with tire dimensions

Some tire pressure tables show only the rimdiameters instead of the full tire size, e.g.R18. The rim diameter is part of the tire sizeand can be found on the tire sidewall(Y page 328).

314 Tire pressureW

heel

s an

d tir

es

If the tire pressures have been set to thelower values for lighter loads and/or lowerroad speeds, the pressures should be resetto the higher values:Rif you want to drive with an increased load

and/orRif you want to drive at higher road speeds.

i The tire pressures for increased loadsand/or higher road speeds, shown in thetire pressure table, may have a negativeeffect on driving comfort.

Option 3) The tire pressure for the emergency/collapsible spare wheel(depending on vehicle equipment) can befound:Rprinted in yellow on the rim of the

emergency/collapsible spare wheelRin the "Wheel and tire combinations"

section (Y page 335) in this manualRon the Tire and Loading Information placard

on the B-pillar on the driver's side.If the tire pressure is not set correctly, thiscan lead to an excessive build up of heat anda sudden loss of pressure.For further information, consult a qualifiedspecialist workshop, e.g. an authorizedMercedes-Benz Center.

Important notes on tire pressure

G WARNINGShould the tire pressure drop repeatedly:Rcheck the tire for foreign bodies.Rcheck whether the wheel is losing air or the

valve is leaking.Rmake sure that only a valve cap approved

by Mercedes-Benz is used on the tire valve.Tire pressures that are too low have anegative effect on vehicle safety, which couldlead you to cause an accident.

To test tire pressure, use a suitable tirepressure gauge. The outer appearance of atire does not permit any reliable conclusionabout the tire pressure. On vehicles equippedwith the electronic tire pressure monitoringsystem, the tire pressure can be checkedusing the on-board computer.The tire temperature and pressure increasewhen the vehicle is in motion. This isdependent on the driving speed and the load.Therefore, you should only correct tirepressures when the tires are cold.The tires are cold:Rif the vehicle has been parked without

direct sunlight on the tires for at least threehours andRif the vehicle has not been driven more than

1 mile (1.6 km).The tire temperature changes depending onthe outside temperature, the vehicle speedand the tire load. If the tire temperaturechanges by 18 ‡ (10 † ), the tire pressurechanges by approximately 10 kPa (0.1 bar/1.5 psi). Take this into account whenchecking the pressure of warm tires and onlycorrect the tire pressure if it is too low for thecurrent operating conditions. If you check thetire pressure when the tires are warm, theresulting value will be higher than if the tireswere cold. This is normal. Do not reduce thetire pressure to the value specified for coldtires. The tire pressure would otherwise betoo low.

Tire pressure 315

Whe

els

and

tires

Z

Observe the recommended tire pressures forcold tiresRon the Tire and Loading Information placard

on the B-pillar on the driver's side,Rin the tire pressure table on the inside of

the fuel filler flap,Rprinted in yellow on the rim of the

emergency/collapsible spare wheel(depending on vehicle equipment).

Underinflated or overinflated tires

Underinflated tires

G WARNINGFollow recommended tire inflation pressures.Do not underinflate tires. Underinflated tireswear excessively and/or unevenly, adverselyaffect handling and fuel economy, and aremore likely to fail from being overheated.

Underinflated tires can:Rwear excessively and/or unevenlyRadversely affect fuel economyRfail from being overheatedRadversely affect handling

Overinflated tires

G WARNINGFollow recommended tire inflation pressures.Do not overinflate tires. Overinflated tires canadversely affect handling and ride comfort,wear unevenly, increase stopping distance,and result in sudden deflation (blowout)because they are more likely to becomepunctured or damaged by road debris,potholes etc.

Overinflated tires can:Radversely affect handlingRwear excessively and/or unevenlyRbe more likely to become damaged

Radversely affect ride comfortRincrease stopping distance

Maximum tire pressure

G WARNINGNever exceed the maximum tire inflationpressure. Follow recommended tire inflationpressures.Do not underinflate tires. Underinflated tireswear excessively and/or unevenly, adverselyaffect handling and fuel economy, and aremore likely to fail from being overheated.Do not overinflate tires. Overinflated tires canadversely affect handling and ride comfort,wear unevenly, increase stopping distance,and result in sudden deflation (blowout)because they are more likely to becomepunctured or damaged by road debris,potholes etc.

: Maximum permitted tire pressure(example)

i The actual values for tires are specific toeach vehicle and may deviate from thevalues in the illustration.

When adjusting the tire pressures alwaysobserve the recommended tire pressure foryour vehicle (Y page 313).

316 Tire pressureW

heel

s an

d tir

es

Checking the tire pressures


G WARNINGFollow recommended tire inflation pressures.Do not underinflate tires. Underinflated tireswear excessively and/or unevenly, adverselyaffect handling and fuel economy, and aremore likely to fail from being overheated.Do not overinflate tires. Overinflated tires canadversely affect handling and ride comfort,wear unevenly, increase stopping distance,and result in sudden deflation (blowout)because they are more likely to becomepunctured or damaged by road debris,potholes etc.Do not overload the tires by exceeding thespecified load limit as indicated on the Tireand Loading Information placard on thedriver's door B-pillar. Overloading the tirescan overheat them, possibly causing ablowout. Overloading the tires can also resultin handling or steering problems, or brakefailure.

Check the tire pressure at least once a month.Only check and correct tire pressures whenthe tires are cold (Y page 313).

Checking tire pressure manuallyTo determine and set the correct tirepressure, proceed as follows:X Remove the valve cap of the tire that is to

be checked.X Press the tire pressure gauge securely onto

the valve.X Read the tire pressure and compare it with

the recommended value on the Tire andLoading Information placard on theB-pillar on the driver's side of your vehicle.

X If necessary, increase the tire pressure tothe recommended value (Y page 313).

X If the tire pressure is too high, release airby pressing down the metal pin in the valveusing the tip of a pen, for example. Then

check the tire pressure again using the tirepressure gauge.

X Screw the valve cap onto the valve.X Repeat these steps for the other tires.

Tire pressure loss warning system(Canada only)

Important safety notesWhile the vehicle is in motion, the tirepressure loss warning system monitors theset tire pressure using the rotational speed ofthe wheels. This enables the system to detectsignificant pressure loss in a tire. If the speedof rotation of a wheel changes as a result ofa loss of pressure, a corresponding warningmessage will appear in the multifunctiondisplay.

G WARNINGIf the Check Tire Pressure Soon messageappears in the multifunction display, one ormore tires are significantly underinflated.Stop the vehicle as soon as possible andinflate the tires to the pressure specified onthe vehicle's Tire and Loading Informationplacard or (where available) in the tirepressure table.Driving on a significantly underinflated tirecauses the tire to overheat and can lead totire failure. Underinflation also reduces fuelefficiency and tire tread life, and may affectthe vehicle's handling and stopping ability.Check all tires when cold, including the sparetire, at least once a month. The tires shouldbe inflated to the recommended pressure.This information can be found:Ron the Tire and Loading Information placard

on the B-pillar on the driver's sideorRin the table for the tire pressure on the

inside of the fuel filler flap

Tire pressure 317

Whe

els

and

tires

Z

G WARNINGThe tire pressure loss warning system doesnot provide a warning for wrongly selected tireinflation pressures. Always adjust tireinflation pressure according to the Tire andLoading Information placard on the driver'sdoor B-pillar or on the tire inflation pressurelabel located on the inside of the fuel filler flap.The tire pressure loss warning system doesnot replace regular checks of the tire inflationpressures since a gradual pressure loss inmore than one tire cannot be detected by thetire pressure loss warning system.The tire pressure loss warning system is notable to issue a warning due to a suddendramatic loss of tire inflation pressure (e.g.tire blowout caused by a foreign object). Inthis case bring the vehicle to a halt by carefullyapplying the brakes and avoiding abruptsteering maneuvers.

The function of the tire pressure loss warningsystem is limited or delayed if:Rsnow chains are mounted to your vehicle's

tires.Rroad conditions are wintry.Ryou are driving on sand or gravel.Ryou adopt a very sporty driving style

(cornering at high speeds or driving withhigh rates of acceleration).Ryou are driving with a heavy load (in the

vehicle or on the roof).

Restarting the tire pressure losswarning systemRestart the tire pressure loss warning systemif you have:Rchanged the tire pressureRchanged the wheels or tiresRmount new wheels or tiresX Before restarting, consult the Tire and

Loading Information placard on theB-pillar on the driver's side or the tirepressure table on the inside of the fuel fillerflap to ensure the tire pressure in all four

tires is set correctly for the currentoperating conditions.

X Observe the notes in the section on tirepressures (Y page 313).

G WARNINGThe tire pressure loss warning system canonly give reliable warnings if you have set thecorrect tire pressure.If an incorrect tire pressure is set, theseincorrect values will be monitored.A tire with insufficient pressure results invehicle instability when driving, thusincreasing the risk of an accident.

X Make sure that the SmartKey is inposition 2 (Y page 137) in the ignition lock.

X Press the = or ; button to select theService menu.

X Press the 9 or : button to selectTire Pressure.

X Press the a button.The Run Flat Indicator Active Press 'OK' to Restart messageappears in the multifunction display.

If you wish to confirm the restart:X Press the a button.

The Tire Pressure Now OK? messageappears in the multifunction display.

X Press 9 or : to select Yes.X Press the a button.

The Run Flat Indicator Restartedmessage appears in the multifunctiondisplay.After a teach-in period, the tire pressureloss warning system will monitor the settire pressures of all four tires.

If you wish to cancel the restart:X Press the % button.orX If the Tire Pressure Now OK? message

appears, press 9 or : to selectCancel.

318 Tire pressureW

heel

s an

d tir

es

X Press the a button.The tire pressure values stored at the lastrestart will continue to be monitored.

Tire pressure monitor

Important safety notesIf a tire pressure monitor system is installed,the vehicle's wheels have sensors thatmonitor the tire pressures in all four tires. Thetire pressure monitor warns you if thepressure drops in one or more of the tires. Thetire pressure monitor only functions if thecorrect wheel electronics units are installedon all wheels.The tire pressure monitor has a yellowwarning lamp in the instrument cluster forindicating pressure loss/malfunctions (USA)or pressure loss (Canada). Whether thewarning lamp flashes or lights up indicateswhether a tire pressure is too low or the tirepressure monitoring system ismalfunctioning:Rif the warning lamp is lit continuously, the

tire pressure on one or more tires issignificantly too low. The tire pressuremonitor is not malfunctioning.RUSA only: if the warning lamp flashes for

60 seconds and then remains lit constantly,the tire pressure monitor is malfunctioning.

G WARNINGEach tire, including the spare (if provided),should be checked at least once a monthwhen cold and inflated to the pressurerecommended by the vehicle manufactureron the Tire and Loading Information placardon the driver's door B-pillar or the tirepressure label on the inside of the fuel fillerflap. If your vehicle has tires of a different sizethan the size indicated on the Tire and LoadingInformation placard or the tire pressure label,you should determine the proper tire pressurefor those tires.

As an added safety feature, your vehicle hasbeen equipped with a tire pressure monitoringsystem (TPMS) that illuminates a low tirepressure telltale when one or more of yourtires are significantly underinflated.Accordingly, when the low tire pressuretelltale illuminates, you should stop and checkyour tires as soon as possible, and inflatethem to the proper pressure. Driving on asignificantly underinflated tire causes the tireto overheat and can lead to tire failure.Underinflation also reduces fuel efficiencyand tire tread life, and may affect the vehicle'shandling and stopping ability.Please note that the TPMS is not a substitutefor proper tire maintenance, and it is thedriver's responsibility to maintain correct tirepressure, even if underinflation has notreached the level to trigger illumination of theTPMS low tire pressure telltale.USA only:Your vehicle has also been equipped with aTPMS malfunction indicator to indicate whenthe system is not operating properly. TheTPMS malfunction indicator is combined withthe low tire pressure telltale. When thesystem detects a malfunction, the telltale willflash for approximately one minute and thenremain continuously illuminated. Thissequence will be repeated every time thevehicle is started as long as the malfunctionexists.When the malfunction indicator is illuminated,the system may not be able to detect or signallow tire pressure as intended. TPMSmalfunctions may occur for a variety ofreasons, including the installation ofincompatible replacement or alternate tiresor wheels on the vehicle that prevent theTPMS from functioning properly. Alwayscheck the TPMS malfunction telltale afterreplacing one or more tires or wheels on yourvehicle to ensure that the replacement oralternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS tocontinue to function properly.

i USA only:

Tire pressure 319

Whe

els

and

tires

Z

If the tire pressure monitor ismalfunctioning, it may take more than10 minutes for the tire pressure warninglamp to inform you of the malfunction byflashing for 60 seconds and then remaininglit.When the malfunction has been rectified,the tire pressure warning lamp goes outafter driving for a few minutes.

Information on tire pressures is displayed inthe multifunction display. After a few minutesof driving, the current tire pressure of eachtire is shown in the multifunction display.

i The tire pressure values indicated by theon-board computer may differ from thosemeasured at a gas station with a pressuregauge. The tire pressures shown by the on-board computer refer to those measured atsea level. At high altitudes, the tire pressurevalues indicated by a pressure gauge arehigher than those shown by the on-boardcomputer. In this case, do not reduce thetire pressures.

i The operation of the tire pressure monitorcan be affected by interference from radiotransmitting equipment (e.g. radioheadphones, two-way radios) that may bebeing operated in or near the vehicle.

i USA only:This device complies with Part 15 of theFCC Rules. Operation is subject to thefollowing two conditions:1. This device may not cause interference,and2. this device must accept any interferencereceived, including interference that maycause undesired operation.Any unauthorized modification to thisdevice could void the user’s authority tooperate the equipment.

i Canada only:This device complies with RSS-210 ofIndustry Canada. Operation is subject tothe following two conditions:

1. This device may not cause interference,and2. this device must accept any interferencereceived, including interference that maycause undesired operation of the device.Any unauthorized modification to thisdevice could void the user’s authority tooperate the equipment.

Checking tire pressure electronicallyX Make sure that the SmartKey is in position

2 (Y page 137) in the ignition lock.X Press the = or ; button on the

steering wheel to select the Servicemenu.


X Press the a button.The current tire pressure for each wheel willbe displayed in the multifunction display.

If the vehicle has been parked for longer than20 minutes, the Tire pressures will be displayed after driving a few minutes message appears in the display.After a teach-in period, the tire pressuremonitor automatically recognizes new wheelsor new sensors. If a clear allocation of the tirepressure values to the individual wheels is notpossible, the Tire Pressure Monitor Active message is shown instead of the tirepressure display. The tire pressures arealready being monitored.

i If a spare wheel/emergency spare wheelis mounted, the system may continue toshow the tire pressure of the wheel that hasbeen removed for a few minutes. If thisoccurs, note that the value displayed forthe position where the spare tire ismounted is not the same as the sparewheel/emergency spare wheel's currenttire pressure.

320 Tire pressureW

heel

s an

d tir

es

Tire pressure monitor warningmessagesIf the tire pressure monitor detects asignificant pressure loss on one or more tires,a warning message is shown in themultifunction display. A warning tone alsosounds and the tire pressure warning lamplights up in the instrument cluster.Each tire that is affected by a significant lossof pressure is highlighted with a color.If the Correct Tire Pressure messageappears in the multifunction display:X Check the tire pressure on all four wheels

and correct it if necessary.

i If the wheel positions on the vehicle areinterchanged, the tire pressures may bedisplayed for the wrong positions for ashort time. This is rectified after a fewminutes of driving, and the tire pressuresare displayed for the correct positions.

Restarting the tire pressure monitor

G WARNINGIt is the driver's responsibility to set the tirepressure to the recommended cold tirepressure. Underinflated tires affect the abilityto steer or brake the vehicle. You might losecontrol over the vehicle.

When you restart the tire pressure monitor,all existing warning messages are deleted andthe warning lamps go out. The monitor usesthe currently set tire pressures as thereference values for monitoring. In mostcases, the tire pressure monitoring systemrecognizes the new reference valuesautomatically.However, you can also define referencevalues manually as described here:X Set the tire pressure (Y page 313) to the

value recommended for the correspondingdriving situation on the Tire and LoadingInformation placard on the driver's sideB-pillar.

Additional tire pressure values for drivingat high speeds or with heavy loads can befound in the tire pressure table on theinside of the fuel filler flap.

X Make sure that the tire pressure is correcton all four wheels.

X Make sure that the SmartKey is in position2 in the ignition lock.

X Press the = or ; button on thesteering wheel to select the Servicemenu.


X Press the a button.The multifunction display shows thecurrent tire pressure of the individual tiresor the Tire pressures will be displayed after driving a few minutes message.

X Press the : button.The Use Current Pressures as New Reference Values message appears inthe multifunction display.

If you wish to confirm the restart:X Press the a button.

The Tire Press. Monitor Restartedmessage appears in the multifunctiondisplay.After driving for a few minutes, the systemchecks whether the current tire pressuresare within the specified range. The new tirepressures are then accepted as referencevalues and monitored.

If you wish to cancel the restart:X Press the % button.

The tire pressure values stored at the lastrestart will continue to be monitored.

Tire pressure 321

Whe

els

and

tires

Z

Loading the vehicle

Instruction labels for tires and loads

G WARNINGDo not overload the tires by exceeding thespecified load limit as indicated on the Tireand Loading Information placard on thedriver's door B-pillar. Overloading the tirescan overheat them, possibly causing ablowout. Overloading the tires can also resultin handling or steering problems, or brakefailure.

Two instruction labels on your vehicle showthe maximum possible load.(1) The Tire and Loading Information placard

on the B-pillar on the driver's side. TheTire and Loading Information placardshows the maximum permissible numberof occupants and the maximumpermissible vehicle load. It also containsdetails of the tire sizes andcorresponding pressures for tiresmounted at the factory.

(2) The vehicle identification plate is on theB-pillar on the driver's side. The vehicleidentification plate informs you of thegross vehicle weight rating. It is made upof the vehicle weight, all vehicleoccupants, the fuel and the cargo. Youcan also find information about themaximum gross axle weight rating on thefront and rear axle.The maximum gross axle weight rating isthe maximum weight that can be carriedby one axle (front or rear axle). Neverexceed the maximum load or themaximum gross axle weight rating for thefront or rear axle.

: B-pillar, driver's side

Maximum permissible gross vehicleweight rating

i The specifications shown on the Tire andLoading Information placard in theillustration are examples. The maximumpermissible gross vehicle weight rating isvehicle-specific and may differ from that inthe illustration. You can find the validmaximum permissible gross vehicle weightrating for your vehicle on the Tire andLoading Information placard.

X The Tire and Loading Information placardgives you details on maximum permissiblegross vehicle weight rating :: "The grossweight of occupants and luggage mustnever exceed XXX kilograms or XXXpounds."

The gross weight of all vehicle occupants,cargo, luggage and trailer load/noseweight (ifapplicable) must not exceed the specifiedvalue.

322 Loading the vehicleW

heel

s an

d tir

es

Number of seatsi The specifications shown on the Tire and

Loading Information placard in theillustration are examples. The number ofseats is vehicle-specific and can differ fromthe details shown. The number of seats inyour vehicle can be found on the Tire andLoading Information placard.

Maximum number of seats : determines themaximum number of occupants allowed totravel in the vehicle. This information can befound on the Tire and Loading Informationplacard.

Determining the correct load limit

Step-by-step instructionsThe following steps have been developed asrequired of all manufacturers under Title 49,Code of U.S. Federal Regulations, Part 575pursuant to the "National Traffic and MotorVehicle Safety Act of 1966".X Step 1: Locate the statement "The

combined weight of occupants and cargoshould never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs." onyour vehicle’s Tire and Loading Informationplacard.

X Step 2: Determine the combined weight ofthe driver and passengers that will be ridingin your vehicle.

X Step 3: Subtract the combined weight ofthe driver and passengers from XXXkilograms or XXX lbs.

X Step 4: The resulting figure equals theavailable amount of cargo and luggage loadcapacity. For example, if the "XXX" amountequals 1400 lbs and there will be five150 lbs passengers in your vehicle, theamount of available cargo and luggage loadcapacity is 650 lbs (1400 - 750 (5 x 150) =650 lbs).

X Step 5: Determine the combined weight ofluggage and cargo being loaded on thevehicle. That weight may not safely exceedthe available cargo and luggage loadcapacity calculated in step 4.

X Step 6 (if applicable): If your vehicle willbe towing a trailer, load from your trailerwill be transferred to your vehicle. Consultthis manual to determine how this reducesthe available cargo and luggage loadcapacity of your vehicle (Y page 325).

Loading the vehicle 323

Whe

els

and

tires

Z

Example: step 1 to 3The following table shows examples on how to calculate total and cargo load capacities withvarying seating configurations and number and size of occupants. The following examples usea load limit of 1500 lbs. This is for illustration purposes only. Make sure you are using theactual load limit for your vehicle stated on the vehicle’s Tire and Loading Information placard(Y page 323).

Example 1 Example 2 Example 3

Step 1 Combined maximum weight of occupants and cargo (data from the Tire and Loading Information placard)

1500 lbs(680 kg)

1500 lbs(680 kg)

1500 lbs(680 kg)


Step 2 Number of people in the vehicle (driver and occupants)

5 3 1

Distribution of the occupants

Front: 2Rear: 3

Front: 1Rear: 2

Front: 1

Weight of the occupants

Occupant 1:150 lbs (68 kg)Occupant 2:180 lbs (82 kg)Occupant 3:160 lbs (73 kg)Occupant 4:140 lbs (63 kg)Occupant 5:120 lbs (54 kg)

Occupant 1:200 lbs (91 kg)Occupant 2:190 lbs (86 kg)Occupant 3:150 lbs (68 kg)

Occupant 1:150 lbs (68 kg)

Gross weight of all occupants

750 lbs (340 kg) 540 lbs (245 kg) 150 lbs (68 kg)

324 Loading the vehicleW

heel

s an

d tir

es


Step 3 Permissible cargo and trailer load/noseweight (maximum gross vehicle weight rating from the Tire and Loading Information placard minus the gross weight of all occupants)

1500 lbs(680 kg) -750 lbs (340 kg)= 750 lbs(340 kg)

1500 lbs(680 kg) -540 lbs (245 kg)= 960 lbs(435 kg)

1500 lbs(680 kg) -150 lbs (68 kg) =1350 lbs(612 kg)

The higher the weight of all the occupants, the smaller the maximum load for luggage.Further information can be found under "Towing a trailer" (Y page 325).

Vehicle identification plateEven if you have calculated the total loadcarefully, you should still make sure that thegross vehicle weight rating and the gross axleweight rating are not exceeded. Details canbe found on the vehicle identification plate onthe B-pillar on the driver's side (Y page 322).Gross vehicle weight: the gross weight ofthe vehicle, all passengers, cargo and trailerload/noseweight (if applicable) must notexceed the permissible gross vehicle weight.Gross axle weight rating: the maximumpermissible load that can be carried by oneaxle (front or rear axle).To ensure that your vehicle does not exceedthe maximum permissible values (grossvehicle weight and maximum gross axleweight rating), have your loaded vehicle(including driver, occupants, cargo, and fulltrailer load if applicable) weighed on asuitable vehicle weighbridge.

Trailer load/noseweightThe trailer load/noseweight affects the grossweight of the vehicle. If a trailer is attached,the trailer load/noseweight is included in theload along with occupants and luggage. Thetrailer load/noseweight is usually

approximately 10% of the gross weight of thetrailer and its load.Your Mercedes-Benz has been designedprimarily to carry passengers and theirluggage. Mercedes-Benz does notrecommend towing a trailer with your vehicle.

Maximum load rating


Maximum load rating 325

Whe

els

and

tires

Z

i The actual values for tires are specific toeach vehicle and may deviate from thevalues in the illustration.

Maximum tire load : is the maximumpermitted weight for which the tire isapproved.Further information on tire loads(Y page 327).

Uniform Tire Quality GradingStandards

Overview of Tire Quality GradingStandards

The Uniform Tire Quality Grading is a U.S.Government requirement. Their purpose is toprovide drivers with consistent and reliableinformation regarding tire performance. Tiremanufacturers are required to grade tiresusing three performance factors: treadwear :, tire traction ;, and temperatureresistance =. Although not a Government ofCanada requirement, all tires made for sale in

North America have these grades branded onthe sidewall.

i The actual values for tires are vehicle-specific and may deviate from the values inthe illustration.

Where applicable, the tire gradinginformation can be found on the tire sidewallbetween the tread shoulder and maximumtire width.For example:

Tread wear Traction Temperature

200 AA A

All passenger car tires must conform to thestatutory safety requirements in addition tothese grades.

Tread wearThe tread wear grade is a comparative ratingbased on the wear rate of the tire when testedunder controlled conditions on a specifiedU.S. Government test course. For example, atire graded 150 would wear one and one-halftimes as well on the government course as atire graded 100.The relative performance of tires dependsupon the actual conditions of their use,however, and may depart significantly fromthe norm, due to variations in driving habits,service practices and differences in roadcharacteristics and climate conditions.

Traction

G WARNINGThe traction grade assigned to this tire isbased on straight-ahead braking tractiontests, and does not include acceleration,cornering, hydroplaning, or peak tractioncharacteristics.

The traction grades, from highest to lowest,are AA, A, B, and C. Those grades represent

326 Uniform Tire Quality Grading StandardsW

heel

s an

d tir

es

the tire's ability to stop on a wet surface asmeasured under controlled conditions onspecified government test surfaces of asphaltand concrete. A tire marked C may have poortraction performance.

G WARNINGIf ice has formed on the road, tire traction willbe substantially reduced. Under such weatherconditions, drive, steer and brake withextreme caution.

The safe speed on a wet, snow covered or icyroad is always lower than on dry roadsurfaces.You should pay special attention to roadconditions when temperatures are aroundthe freezing point.Mercedes-Benz recommends a minimum tiretread depth of 1/6 in (4 mm) for all four wintertires (Y page 312) to maintain normal drivingcharacteristics in winter. Winter tires canreduce the braking distance on snow coveredsurfaces in comparison to summer tires.Stopping distance, however, is stillconsiderably greater than when the road isnot covered with ice or snow. Takeappropriate care when driving.

! Avoid wheelspin. This can lead to damageto the drive train.

Temperature

G WARNINGThe temperature grade for this tire isestablished for a tire that is properly inflatedand not overloaded. Excessive speed,underinflation, or excessive loading, eitherseparately or in combination, can causeexcessive heat build-up and possible tirefailure.

The temperature grades are A (the highest),B, and C. These represent the tire'sresistance to the generation of heat and itsability to dissipate heat when tested under

controlled conditions on a specified indoorlaboratory test wheel. Sustained hightemperature can cause the material of the tireto degenerate and reduce tire life, andexcessive temperature can lead to suddentire failure. The grade C corresponds to a levelof performance which all passenger car tiresmust meet under the Federal Motor VehicleSafety Standard No. 109. Grades B and Arepresent higher levels of performance on thelaboratory test wheel than the minimumrequired by law.

Tire labeling

Tire labeling overviewThe following markings are on the tire inaddition to the tire name (sales designation)and the manufacturer's name:

: Uniform tire Quality Grading Standard(Y page 331)

; DOT, Tire Identification Number(Y page 330)

= Maximum tire load (Y page 325)? Maximum tire pressure (Y page 316)A ManufacturerB Tire material (Y page 331)C Tire size designation, load-bearing

capacity and speed rating (Y page 328)

Tire labeling 327

Whe

els

and

tires

Z

D Load index (Y page 330)E Tire name

i Tire data is vehicle-specific and maydeviate from the data in the example.

Tire size designation, load-bearingcapacity and speed rating

: Tire width; Nominal aspect ratio in %= Tire code? Rim diameterA Load bearing indexB Speed rating


General: depending on the manufacturer'sstandards, the size imprinted in the tire wallmay not contain any letters or may containone letter that precedes the size description.If there is no letter preceding the sizedescription (as shown above): these arepassenger vehicle tires according toEuropean manufacturing standards.If "P" precedes the size description: these arepassenger vehicle tires according to U.S.manufacturing standards.If "LT" precedes the size description: theseare light truck tires according to U.S.manufacturing standards.If "T" precedes the size description: these arecompact emergency spare wheels at high tire

pressure, to be used only temporarily in anemergency.Tire width: tire width : shows the nominaltire width in millimeters.Nominal aspect ratio: aspect ratio ; is thesize ratio between the tire height and the tirewidth and is shown in percent. The aspectratio is calculated by dividing the tire width bythe tire height.Tire code: tire code = specifies the tire type."R" represents radial tires. "D" representsdiagonal tires, "B" represents diagonal radialtires.Optionally, tires with a maximum speed ofover 149 mph (240 km/h) may have "ZR" inthe size description depending on themanufacturer (e.g. 245/40 ZR 18).Rim diameter: rim diameter ? is thediameter of the bead seat, not the diameterof the rim flange. The rim diameter isspecified in inches (in).Load bearing index: load bearing index Ais a numerical code which specifies themaximum load-bearing capacity of a tire.

G WARNINGThe tire load rating must always be at leasthalf of the GAWR of your vehicle. Otherwise,sudden tire failure may be the result whichcould cause an accident and/or serious injuryto you or others.Always replace rims and tires with rims andtires having the same specifications(designation, manufacturer and type) asshown on the original part.


328 Tire labelingW

heel

s an

d tir

es

Example:The load bearing index 91 is equivalent to amaximum load of 1356 lbs (615 kg) that thetire can carry. For further information on themaximum tire load in kilograms and pounds,see (Y page 325).For further information on the load bearingindex, see Load index (Y page 330).Speed rating: speed rating B specifies theapproved maximum speed of the tire.

G WARNINGEven when permitted by law, never operate avehicle at speeds greater than the maximumspeed rating of the tires.Exceeding the maximum speed for which tiresare rated can lead to sudden tire failure,causing loss of vehicle control and possiblyresulting in an accident and/or seriouspersonal injury and possible death, for youand for others.

Regardless of the speed rating alwaysobserve the speed limits. Drive carefully andadapt your driving style to the trafficconditions.

Summer tires

Index Speed rating

Q Up to 100 mph (160 km/h)

R Up to 106 mph (170 km/h)

S Up to 112 mph (180 km/h)

T Up to 118 mph (190 km/h)

H Up to 130 mph (210 km/h)

V Up to 149 mph (240 km/h)

W Up to 168 mph (270 km/h)

Y Up to 186 mph (300 km/h)

ZR...Y Up to 186 mph (300 km/h)

Summer tires

Index Speed rating

ZR...(..Y) Above 186 mph (300 km/h)

ZR Above 149 mph (240 km/h)

ROptionally, tires with a maximum speed ofover 149 mph (240 km/h) may have "ZR"in the size description depending on themanufacturer (e.g. 245/40 ZR 18).The service specifications consist of loadbearing index A and speed rating B.RIf the size description of your tire includes

"ZR" and there are no servicespecifications, ask the tire manufacturer inorder to find out the maximum speed.If a service specification is available, themaximum speed is limited according to thespeed rating in the service specification.Example: 245/40 ZR 18 97 Y. In thisexample, "97 Y" is the service specification.The letter "Y" represents the speed ratingand the maximum speed of the tire islimited to 186 mph (300 km/h).REvery tire that has a maximum speed above

186 mph (300 km/h) must have "ZR" in thesize description and the servicespecification must be given in brackets.Example: 275/40 ZR 18 (99 Y). The speedrating "(Y)" shows that the maximum speedof the tire is above 186 mph (300 km/h).Ask the tire manufacturer to find out themaximum speed.

All-weather tires and winter tires

Index Speed rating

Q M+S26 Up to 100 mph (160 km/h)

T M+S26 Up to 118 mph (190 km/h)

H M+S26 Up to 130 mph (210 km/h)

V M+S26 Up to 149 mph (240 km/h)

26 Or M+Si for winter tires.

Tire labeling 329

Whe

els

and

tires

Z

i Not all tires that have the M+Sidentification offer the drivingcharacteristics of winter tires. Winter tireshave, in addition to the M+S identification,the i snow flake symbol on the tiresidewall. Tires with this identification fulfillthe requirements of the RubberManufacturers Association (RMA) and theRubber Association of Canada (RAC)regarding the tire traction on snow andhave been especially developed for drivingon snow.

An electronic speed limiter prevents yourvehicle from exceeding the following speeds:RAll vehicles (except AMG vehicles):

130 mph (210 km/h)RAMG vehicles: 155 mph (250 km/h)RAMG vehicles with increased top speed:

174 mph (280 km/h)The speed rating of tires mounted at thefactory may be higher than the maximumspeed that the electronic speed limiterpermits.Make sure that your tires have the requiredspeed rating as specified in the "Tires"section (Y page 335), e.g. if you buy newtires.Further information about reading tire datacan be obtained from any qualified specialistworkshop, e.g. an authorized Mercedes-BenzCenter.

Load index


In addition to the load bearing index, loadindex : may be imprinted after the lettersthat identify speed rating B (Y page 328) onthe sidewall of the tire.RIf no specification is given: no text (as in the

example above), represents a standardload (SL) tireRXL or Extra Load: represents a reinforced

tireRLight load: represents a light load tireRC, D, E: represents a load range that

depends on the maximum load that the tirecan carry at a certain pressure

DOT, Tire Identification Number (TIN)U.S. tire regulations prescribe that everymanufacturer of new tires or retreader has toimprint a TIN in or on the sidewall of each tireproduced.

The TIN is a unique identification number. TheTIN enables the tire manufacturers to informpurchasers of recalls and other safety-relevant matters. It makes it possible for thepurchaser to easily identify the affected tires.The TIN is made up of manufactureridentification code ;, tire size =, tire typecode ? and manufacturing date A.


330 Tire labelingW

heel

s an

d tir

es

DOT (Department of Transportation): tiresymbol : indicates that the tire complieswith the requirements of the U.S. Departmentof Transportation.Manufacturer identification code: manufacturer identification code ; providesdetails on the tire manufacturer. New tireshave a code with two symbols. Retreadedtires have a code with four symbols.Further information about retreaded tires(Y page 310).Tire size: identifier = describes the tire size.Tire type code: tire type code ? can beused by the manufacturer as a code todescribe specific characteristics of the tire.Date of manufacture: date of manufactureA provides information about the age of atire. The first and second positions representthe week of manufacture, starting with "01"for the first calendar week. Positions threeand four represent the year of manufacture.For example, a tire that is marked with"3208", was manufactured in week 32 in2008.

Tire characteristics


This information describes the tire cord andthe number of layers in sidewall : and underthe tread ;.

Definition of terms for tires andloading

Tire ply composition and materialused

Describes the number of plies or the numberof layers of rubber-coated fabric in the tiretread and sidewall. These are made of steel,nylon, polyester and other materials.

BarMetric unit for tire pressure. There are14.5038 pounds per square inch (psi) to1 bar; there are 100 kilopascals (kPa) to1 bar.

DOT (Department of Transportation)DOT marked tires fulfill the requirements ofthe United States Department ofTransportation.

Normal occupant weightThe number of occupants the vehicle isdesigned to seat, multiplied by 68 kilograms(150 lbs).

Uniform Tire Quality GradingStandards

A uniform standard to grade the quality oftires with regards to tread quality, tire tractionand temperature characteristics. Ratings aredetermined by tire manufacturers using U.S.government testing procedures. The ratingsare molded into the sidewall of the tire.

Recommended tire pressureThe recommended tire pressure applies tothe tires mounted at the factory.The Tire and Loading Information placardcontains the recommended tire pressures for

Definition of terms for tires and loading 331

Whe

els

and

tires

Z

cold tires on a fully loaded vehicle and for themaximum permissible vehicle speed.The tire pressure table contains therecommended tire pressures for cold tiresunder various operating conditions, i.e.differing load and speed conditions.

Increased vehicle weight due tooptional equipment

This is the combined weight of all standardand optional equipment available for thevehicle, regardless of whether it is actuallyinstalled on the vehicle or not.

RimThis is the part of the wheel on which the tireis mounted.

GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating)The GAWR is the maximum permissible axleweight. The actual load on an axle must neverexceed the gross axle weight rating. Thegross axle weight rating can be found on thevehicle identification plate on the B-pillar onthe driver's side.

Speed ratingThe speed rating is part of the tireidentification. It specifies the speed range forwhich the tire is approved.

GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight)The gross vehicle weight comprises theweight of the vehicle including fuel, tools, thespare wheel, accessories installed,occupants, luggage and the drawbarnoseweight, if applicable. The gross vehicleweight must not exceed the gross vehicleweight rating GVWR as specified on the

vehicle identification plate on the B pillar onthe driver's side.

GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rating)The GVWR is the maximum permissible grossweight of a fully loaded vehicle (the weight ofthe vehicle including all accessories,occupants, fuel, luggage and the drawbarnoseweight, if applicable). The gross vehicleweight rating is specified on the vehicleidentification plate on the B-pillar on thedriver's side.

Maximum loaded vehicle weightThe maximum weight is the sum of the curbweight of the vehicle, the weight of theaccessories, the total load limit and theweight of the optional equipment installed atthe factory.

Kilopascal (kPa)Metric unit for tire pressure. 6.9 kPa is theequivalent of 1 psi. Another unit for tirepressure is bar. There are 100 kilopascals(kPa) to 1 bar.

Load indexIn addition to the load bearing index, the loadindex may also be imprinted on the sidewallof the tire. This specifies the load bearingcapacity more precisely.

Curb weightThe weight of a vehicle with standardequipment including the maximum capacityof fuel, oil and coolant. It also includes the air-conditioning system and optional equipmentif these are installed in the vehicle, but doesnot include passengers or luggage.

332 Definition of terms for tires and loadingW

heel

s an

d tir

es

Maximum load ratingThe maximum load rating in kilograms orpounds is the maximum weight for which atire is approved.

Maximum permissible tire pressureMaximum permissible tire pressure for onetire.

Maximum load on one tireMaximum load on one tire. This is calculatedby dividing the maximum axle load of one axleby two.

PSI (pounds per square inch)A standard unit of measure for tire pressure.

Aspect ratioRelationship between tire height and tirewidth in percent.

Tire pressureThis is pressure inside the tire applying anoutward force to each square inch of the tire'ssurface. The tire pressure is specified inpounds per square inch (psi), in kilopascal(kPa) or in bar. The tire pressure should onlybe corrected when the tires are cold.

Tire pressure of cold tiresThe tires are cold:Rif the vehicle has been parked without

direct sunlight on the tires for at least threehours andRif the vehicle has not been driven more than

1 mile (1.6 km).

TreadThe part of the tire that comes into contactwith the road.

BeadThe tire bead ensures that the tire sitssecurely on the wheel. There are several steelwires in the bead to prevent the tire fromcoming loose from the wheel rim.

SidewallThe part of the tire between the tread and thebead.

Weight of optional extrasThe combined weight of those optional extrasthat weigh more than the replaced standardpart and more than 2.3 kilograms (5 lbs).These optional extras, such as high-performance brakes, level control, a roof rackor a high-performance battery, are notincluded in the curb weight and accessoryweight.

TIN (Tire Identification Number)This is a unique identifier which can be usedby a tire manufacturer to identify tires, forexample for a product recall, and thus identifythe purchasers. The TIN is made up of themanufacturer's identity code, tire size, tiretype code and the manufacturing date.

Load bearing indexThe load bearing index (also load index) is acode that contains the maximum load bearingcapacity of a tire.

Definition of terms for tires and loading 333

Whe

els

and

tires

Z

TractionTraction is the result of friction between thetires and the road surface.

Treadwear indicatorsNarrow bars (tread wear bars) that aredistributed over the tire tread. If the tire treadis level with the bars, the wear limit of 1/16 in(1.6 mm) has been reached.

Occupant distributionThe distribution of occupants in a vehicle attheir designated seating positions.

Total load limitRated cargo and luggage load plus68 kilograms (150 lbs) times the vehicle'sdesignated seating capacity.

Changing a wheel

Flat tireThe "Breakdown assistance" section(Y page 293) contains information and noteson how to deal with a flat tire. It also providesinstructions on changing a wheel or mountingthe spare wheel/emergency spare wheel.

Interchanging the wheels

G WARNINGRotate front and rear wheels only if the tiresare of the same dimension.If your vehicle is equipped with mixed-sizetires (different tire dimensions front vs. rear),tire rotation is not possible.

G WARNINGHave the tightening torque checked afterchanging a wheel. Wheels could become

loose if not tightened with a torque of96 lb-ft (130 Nm).Only use genuine Mercedes-Benz wheel boltsspecified for your vehicle's rims.

The wear patterns on the front and rear tiresdiffer, depending on the operating conditions.Rotate the wheels before a clear wear patternhas formed on the tires. Front tires typicallywear more on the shoulders and the rear tiresin the center.If your vehicle's tire configuration allows, youcan rotate the wheels according to theintervals in the tire manufacturer's warrantybook in your vehicle documents. If this is notavailable, the tires should then be replacedevery 3000 to 6000 miles(5000 to 10,000 km), or earlier if the tire wearrequires this. Do not change the direction ofwheel rotation.Clean the contact surfaces of the wheel andthe brake disc thoroughly every time a wheelis interchanged. Check the tire pressures.Information on changing a wheel andmounting the spare wheel (Y page 293).

! On vehicles equipped with a tire pressuremonitor, electronic components arelocated in the wheel.Tire-mounting tools should not be usednear the valve. This could damage theelectronic components.Always have the tires changed at a qualifiedspecialist workshop, e.g. an authorizedMercedes-Benz Center.

Direction of rotationTires with a specified direction of rotationhave additional benefits, e.g. if there is a riskof hydroplaning. You will only gain thesebenefits if the correct direction of rotation ismaintained.An arrow on the sidewall of the tire indicatesits correct direction of rotation.

334 Changing a wheelW

heel

s an

d tir

es

You may mount a spare wheel/emergencyspare wheel against the direction of rotation.Observe the time restriction on use as well asthe speed limit specified on the spare wheel/emergency spare wheel.

Storing wheelsStore wheels that are not being used in a cool,dry and preferably dark place. Protect thetires from oil, grease, gasoline and diesel.

Cleaning the wheels

G WARNINGDo not use power washers with circular-jetnozzles (dirt grinders) to clean your vehicle, inparticular the tires. You could otherwisedamage the tires and cause an accident.

Wheel and tire combinations

Please bear the following in mind! For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz

recommends that you only use Tires andwheels which have been approved byMercedes-Benz specifically for yourvehicle.These tires have been specially adapted foruse with the control systems, such as ABSor ESP®, and are marked as follows:RMO = Mercedes-Benz OriginalRMOE = Mercedes-Benz Original Extended

(tires featuring run-flat characteristics)RMO1 = Mercedes-Benz Original (only

certain AMG tires)Mercedes-Benz Original Extended tiresmay only be used on wheels that have beenspecifically approved by Mercedes-Benz.Only use tires, wheels or accessoriestested and approved by Mercedes-Benz.Certain characteristics, e.g. handling,vehicle noise emissions or fuelconsumption, may otherwise be adversely

affected. In addition, when driving with aload, tire dimension variations could causethe tires to come into contact with thebodywork and axle components. This couldresult in damage to the tires or the vehicle.Mercedes-Benz accepts no liability fordamage resulting from the use of tires,wheels or accessories other than thosetested and approved.Further information about tires, wheels andapproved combinations can be obtainedfrom any authorized Mercedes-BenzCenter.

i The recommended tire pressures forvarious operating conditions can be found:Ron the Tire and Loading Information

placard with the recommended tirepressures on the B-pillar on the driver'ssideRin the tire pressure table on the inside of

the fuel filler flap.Observe the instructions about therecommended tire pressure and thevarious operating conditions (Y page 313).Check tire pressures regularly, and onlywhen the tires are cold. Comply with themaintenance recommendations of the tiremanufacturer in the vehicle documentwallet.

i Notes on the vehicle equipment – alwaysequip the vehicle:Rwith tires of the same size on a given axle

(left/right)Rwith the same type of tires at a given time

(summer tires, winter tires, MOExtendedtires)

i On the following pages, you can findinformation on approved wheel rims andtire sizes for equipping your vehicle withwinter tires. Winter tires are not availableex factory as standard equipment oroptional extras.If you wish to mount approved winter tireson your vehicle, you may, in certain

Wheel and tire combinations 335

Whe

els

and

tires

Z

circumstances, require wheel rims of theappropriate size. The sizes of the approvedwinter tires may differ from those of theoriginal tires. This is dependent on themodel and the equipment installed at thefactory.The tires and wheel rims, as well as furtherinformation, can be obtained at a qualifiedspecialist workshop, e.g. at an authorizedMercedes-Benz Center.

i Overview of abbreviations used in thefollowing tire tables:RBA: both axlesRFA: front axleRRA: rear axle

In the following table, the wheel/tirecombinations are allocated to the vehiclemodels through variants, e.g. V1, V2 etc.:

V1 C 250, C 250 4MATIC

V2 C 300 4MATIC

V3 C 350, C 350 4MATIC

V4 C 63 AMG

i Not all wheel and tire combinations areavailable ex factory for all countries.

336 Wheel and tire combinationsW

heel

s an

d tir

es

Tires

Summer tires Alloy wheels V1 V2 V3 V4

BA 225/45 R17 91 WMOExtended27, 28

7.5 J x 17 H2Wheel offset: 1.85 in (47 mm)

# # # —

FA RA

225/45 R17 91 WMOExtended27

245/40 R17 91 WMOExtended27, 29

7.5 J x 17 H2Wheel offset: 1.85 in (47 mm)8.5 J x 17 H2Wheel offset: 2.28 in (58 mm)

# # # —

FA RA

225/40 R18 92 Y XL 255/35 R18 94 Y XL29


# # # —

FA RA

225/40 R18 92 Y XL 255/35 R18 94 Y XL29


# # # —

FA RA

225/40 ZR18 92 Y XL 255/35 ZR18 94 Y XL29


# # # —

FA RA

235/40 ZR18 95 Y XL 255/35 ZR18 94 Y XL29


— — — #

FA RA

235/35 ZR19 XL 255/30 ZR19 XL29


— — — #

27 MOExtended tires (tires with run-flat characteristics) only in combination with an activated tire pressure losswarning system or tire pressure monitor.

28 Not in combination with sports suspension code 486, dynamic handling package code 483 or Sports packagecode 950/952.

29 Use of snow chains is not permitted. Observe the notes in the "Snow chains" section.


Whe

els

and

tires

Z

All-weather tires Alloy wheels V1 V2 V3 V4

BA 205/55 R16 91 H M+S30 7 J x 16 H2Wheel offset: 1.69 in (43 mm)

# — — —

BA 225/45 R17 91 H M+S28 7.5 J x 17 H2Wheel offset: 1.85 in (47 mm)

# # — —

FA RA

225/45 R17 91 H M+S 245/40 R17 91 H M+S29


# # # —

Winter tires Alloy wheels V1 V2 V3 V4

BA 205/55 R1 6 91 HM+Si30

7 J x 16 H2Wheel offset: 1.69 in (43 mm)

# — — —

BA 225/45 R17 91 H M+Si 7.5 J x 17 H2Wheel offset: 1.85 in (47 mm)

# # # —

BA 225/45 R17 91 HM+SiMOExtended27


# # # —

BA 225/40 R18 92 V XLM+Si


— — — #

BA 235/40 R18 95 V XLM+Si29


— — — #

FA RA

235/40 R18 95 V XLM+Si255/35 R18 94 V XLM+Si29


— — — #

30 Not in combination with Sports package code 950/952.28 Not in combination with sports suspension code 486, dynamic handling package code 483 or Sports package

code 950/952.29 Use of snow chains is not permitted. Observe the notes in the "Snow chains" section.27 MOExtended tires (tires with run-flat characteristics) only in combination with an activated tire pressure loss

warning system or tire pressure monitor.

338 Wheel and tire combinationsW

heel

s an

d tir

es

"Minispare" emergency spare wheel29

Tires Wheels V1 V2 V3 V4

T 125/90 R16 98 MTire pressure: 420 kPa (4.2 bar/61 psi)

3.5 B x 16 H2Wheel offset: 0.79 in (20 mm)

# # — —



— — # —



— — — #

i The specified tire pressure is printed in yellow on the emergency/collapsible spare wheel.

29 Use of snow chains is not permitted. Observe the notes in the "Snow chains" section.


Whe

els

and

tires

Z

Useful information ............................ 342Notes on technical data ................... 342Genuine Mercedes-Benz parts ......... 342Warranty ............................................ 343Identification plates ......................... 343Service products and capacities ..... 344Vehicle data ...................................... 351

341

Tech

nica

l dat

a

Useful information



Notes on technical data

i The data stated here specifically refers toa vehicle with standard equipment. Consultan authorized Mercedes-Benz Center forthe data for all vehicle variants and trimlevels.

Genuine Mercedes-Benz parts

All Mercedes-Benz Centers maintain a supplyof genuine Mercedes-Benz parts fornecessary service and repair work. Inaddition, strategically located parts deliverycenters provide for quick and reliable partsservice.There are more than 300,000 differentgenuine Mercedes-Benz parts available forMercedes-Benz models.Genuine Mercedes-Benz parts are subject tostrict quality control. Each part has beenspecially developed, manufactured orselected for Mercedes-Benz vehicles andfine-tuned for them.Therefore, only genuine Mercedes-Benz partsshould be used.

G WARNINGDriving safety may be impaired if non-approved parts, tires and wheels or safety-relevant accessories are used.This could lead to malfunctions in safety-relevant systems, e.g. the brake system. Thiscould cause you to lose control of your vehicleand cause an accident.For this reason, Mercedes-Benz recommendsthat you use genuine Mercedes-Benz parts orparts of equal quality. Only use tires, wheelsand accessories that have been specificallyapproved for your vehicle.

! Air bags and Emergency TensioningDevices, as well as control units andsensors for these restraint systems may beinstalled in the following areas of yourvehicle:RdoorsRdoor pillarsRdoor sillsRseatsRdashboardRinstrument clusterRcenter consoleDo not install accessories such as audiosystems in these areas. Do not carry outrepairs or welding. You could impair theoperating efficiency of the restraintsystems.Have aftermarket accessories installed ata qualified specialist workshop. Mercedes-Benz recommends that you use anauthorized Mercedes-Benz Center for thispurpose.

H Environmental noteDaimler AG also supplies reconditioned majorassemblies and parts which are of the samequality as new parts. They are covered by thesame Limited Warranty entitlements as newparts.

Always specify the vehicle identificationnumber (VIN) (Y page 343) and the engine

342 Genuine Mercedes-Benz partsTe

chni

cal d

ata

number (Y page 344) when ordering genuineMercedes-Benz parts.

Warranty

The Service and Warranty Informationbooklet contains detailed information aboutthe warranties covering your vehicle.Your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center willexchange or repair any defective partsoriginally installed in the vehicle inaccordance with the terms of the followingwarranties:RNew Vehicle Limited WarrantyREmission System WarrantyREmission Performance WarrantyRCalifornia, Connecticut, Maine,

Massachusetts, New York, Pennsylvania,Rhode Island and Vermont EmissionControl Systems WarrantyRState Warranty Enforcement Laws (Lemon

Laws)Replacement parts and accessories arecovered by the Mercedes-Benz Parts andAccessories warranties. You can obtaininformation about this from any authorizedMercedes-Benz Center.

i Should you lose your Service andWarranty Information booklet, have anauthorized Mercedes-Benz Center arrangefor a replacement. It will be mailed to you.

Identification plates

Vehicle identification plate withvehicle identification number (VIN)and paint code number

X Open the driver's door.You will see vehicle identification plate :.

Example: vehicle identification plate (USA only); VIN= Paint code

Example: vehicle identification plate (Canada only); VIN= Paint code

Identification plates 343

Tech

nica

l dat

a

Z

i The data shown on the identification plateis example data. This data is different forevery vehicle and can deviate from the datashown here. You can find the dataapplicable to your vehicle on the vehicle'sidentification plate.

Vehicle identification number (VIN)The vehicle identification number (VIN) canbe found in the following locations:Ron the vehicle identification plate

(Y page 343)Ron the lower edge of the windshield

(Y page 344)In addition to being stamped on the vehicleidentification plate, the vehicle identificationnumber (VIN) is also stamped onto the vehiclebody.It is located on the floor in front of the right-hand front seat.

X Slide the right-hand front seat to itsrearmost position.

X Fold floor covering : upwards.You will see vehicle identification number(VIN) ;.

Engine number

: Emission control information plate,including the certification of both federaland Californian emissions standards

; Engine number (stamped into thecrankcase)

= VIN (on the lower edge of the windshield)

Service products and capacities

Important safety notesService products include the following:Rfuels (e.g. gasoline, diesel)Rlubricants (e.g. engine oil, transmission oil)RcoolantRbrake fluidRwindshield washer fluidVehicle components and their respectivelubricants must match. You should thereforeonly use products that have been tested andapproved by Mercedes-Benz.Information on tested and approved productscan be obtained at a Mercedes-Benz Centeror on the Internet at http://www.mbusa.com (USA only).

G WARNINGComply with all valid regulations with respectto handling, storing and disposing of servicefluids. Otherwise, you could endangerpersons or the environment.Keep service fluids out of the reach ofchildren.

344 Service products and capacitiesTe

chni

cal d

ata

For health reasons, you should preventservice fluids from coming into direct contactwith your skin or clothing.If a service fluid is swallowed, contact aphysician immediately.

Service products and capacities 345

Tech

nica

l dat

a

Z

CapacitiesMissing values were not available at time of going to print.

Model Capacity Fuel, coolant,lubricants, etc.

Engine oil and filter

C 250 5.8 US qt (5.5 l) Approved engineoils

C 250 4MATIC31

C 300 4MATIC7.4 US qt (7.0 l)

C 350C 350 4MATIC31

C 63 AMG32 9.0 US qt (8.5 l)

Cooling system C 250 Approximately 7.6 US qt(7.2 l)

MB 325.0 orMB 326.0antifreeze/corrosion inhibitorC 250 4MATIC31

C 300 4MATICApproximately 8.9 US qt(8.4 l)

C 350C 350 4MATIC31

C 63 AMG Approximately 12.4 US qt(11.7 l)

Tank capacity C 250 15.6 US gal (59.0 l) Premium-gradeunleaded gasoline(at least 91 octane,average valuebetween 96 RON/86 MON)

All models exceptC 250

17.4 US gal (66.0 l)

Reserve All models exceptAMG vehicles

Approximately 2.1 US gal(8.0 l)

C 63 AMG Approximately 3.7 US gal(14.0 l)

Windshield/headlamp cleaning system

C 250C 350C 350 4MATIC31

C 63 AMG

3.7 US qt (3.5 l) MB windshieldwasherconcentrate33

(Y page 351)Mixing ratio forwasher fluid(Y page 351)

C 250 4MATIC31

C 300 4MATIC6.3 US qt (6.0 l)

31 Canada only.32 Including external oil cooler.33 Mixed with water or premixed washer fluid with antifreeze protection.


chni

cal d

ata

Fuel


G WARNINGGasoline is highly flammable and poisonous.It burns violently and can cause seriouspersonal injury.Never allow sparks, flames or smokingmaterials near gasoline.Turn off the engine before refueling.Whenever you are around gasoline, avoidinhaling fumes and any skin or clothingcontact.Direct skin contact with fuels and theinhalation of fuel vapors are damaging to yourhealth.

Premium-grade unleaded gasoline! To ensure the longevity and full

performance of the engine, only premium-grade unleaded gasoline may be used.If there is no premium-grade unleadedgasoline available and regular-gradeunleaded gasoline may be used; pleaseobserve the following precautions:Ronly fill the fuel tank to half full with

regular-grade unleaded gasoline and fillthe rest with premium-grade unleadedgasoline as soon as possible.Rdo not drive at the maximum speed.Ravoid sudden acceleration.Rif the vehicle is carrying a light load, e.g.

two passengers without luggage, do notallow the engine to rev above3,000 rpm.Rif the vehicle is fully loaded or is being

operated in mountainous terrain, do notdepress the accelerator pedal furtherthan Ô of the pedal travel.

Flexible fuel vehicles

Important safety notesFlexible fuel vehicles can be recognized bythe sticker on the inside of the filler flap.Flexible fuel vehicles can be operated withpremium-grade unleaded gasoline andethanol (E85) or a mixture of both. Ethanolfuel (E85) is a mixture of approximately 85%ethanol and 15% unleaded gasoline.

G WARNINGEthanol fuel (E85) and its vapors are highlyflammable, poisonous and highlycombustible. Ethanol fuel causes seriousinjury if it ignites, if it comes into contact withyour skin or if you inhale the vapors. Avoidinhaling ethanol vapors and ethanol cominginto contact with your skin. Before refueling,extinguish all naked flames. Never allowsparks or smoking materials near ethanol.

Changing the fuel typeFor best performance and drivability, it isrecommended that you use either one or theother fuel. Avoid alternating regularlybetween the two different types of fuel.When changing between the fuel types,ensure that the following conditions are met:Rthe fuel level is below half full.Rthe fuel level is above the reserve level. This

is identifiable by the fuel tank reservewarning lamp not being lit.Ryou add more than 5 gallons (20 liters) of

fuel.Ryou switch off the engine before refueling.Rthe engine is started and runs for at least

five minutes immediately after refueling.These precautions should prevent thepossibility of engine difficulties arising fromchanging to a different fuel type.If the engine still doesn't run correctly, refuelwith at least 3 US gal (12 l) of premium-gradeunleaded gasoline. This may improve therunning of the engine.


Tech

nica

l dat

a

Z

Fuel consumptionEthanol (E85) contains less energy per gallonthan gasoline. To ensure that the engineperformance with ethanol (E85) is similar tothat when using gasoline, the engine mustburn more ethanol. As a result, it is to beexpected that fuel consumption will increasewhen using ethanol fuel (E85), compared togasoline.

MaintenanceInform your authorized Mercedes-BenzCenter that you are operating or haveoperated the vehicle with ethanol (E85).

Low outside temperaturesStarting times may significantly increase attemperatures below 32 ‡ (0 † ). At lowoutside temperatures, Mercedes-Benzrecommends the use of an auxiliary heater.For further information, consult an authorizedMercedes-Benz Center.Rough idling may also be experienced at lowoutside temperatures until the engine is fullywarmed up.Ethanol (E85) is unsuitable for use if outsidetemperatures fall below 14 ‡ (-10 † ).

High outside temperaturesAt outside temperatures above 95 ‡ (35 † ),the time required for the starting proceduremay increase and be accompanied by roughidling following the start.

Fuel requirementsUse only premium-grade unleaded gasoline.The octane number should be at least 91.Details can be found on the gas pump. Theoctane number is the average value of theResearch Octane Number (RON) and theMotor Octane Number (MON): (RON +MON) / 2, also known as knock resistance.

Reformulated gasoline (RFG) and/orunleaded gasoline with additives can be used.However, the concentration of additives inthe fuel must be less than 10%, e.g.REthanolRTAMERETBERIPARTBAFor MTBE, the concentration should notexceed 15%.The concentration of methanol in gasolineincluding other additives must not exceed 3%.Using mixtures of methanol and ethanol is notpermitted. Gasohol, a mixture of 10% ethanoland 90% unleaded gasoline, can be used.All of these mix fuels must fulfill the fuelrequirements, e.g.:Rknock resistanceRboiling pointRvapor pressure

Additives in gasolineOne of the main problems of poor fuel qualityis the forming of deposits that are createdduring the gasoline combustion process.Mercedes-Benz recommends that you usefuel brands that have the additives.Deposits may form if you use fuels withoutadditives over a longer period of time. Thesedeposits are most likely to form on the inletvalves and in the combustion chamber.This could lead to engine problems, e.g.:Rlonger engine warm-up phaseRuneven idleRengine noiseRmisfiringRloss of powerCarbon deposits may form if the availabilityof gasoline with relevant additives isinsufficient (in certain regions). In this case,Mercedes-Benz recommends the use of


chni

cal d

ata

additives that have been approved forMercedes-Benz vehicles.Consult an authorized Mercedes-Benz Centeror go to the Internet sitehttp://www.mbusa.com (USA only) for a listof approved products. Comply with theinstructions for use on the product label.Do not mix other fuel additives with fuel. Thiscauses unnecessary costs and could damagethe engine.

! Do not refuel with low-grade fuel and donot use fuel additives that are not testedand approved for Mercedes-Benz vehicles.Damage to or malfunctions of the fuelsystem may otherwise occur.

Engine oil

Please bear the following in mindThe engine oils are matched to theperformance of Mercedes-Benz engines andservice intervals. You should therefore onlyuse engine oils and oil filters that areapproved for vehicles with maintenancesystems.For a list of approved engine oils and oil filters,consult an authorized Mercedes-BenzCenter. Or visit http://www.mbusa.com(USA only).

! Never use engine oil or an oil filter of aspecification other than is necessary tofulfill the prescribed service intervals. Donot change the engine oil or oil filter inorder to achieve longer replacementintervals than those prescribed. You couldotherwise cause engine damage or damageto the exhaust gas aftertreatment.Follow the instructions in the serviceinterval display regarding the oil change.Otherwise, you may damage the engine andthe exhaust gas aftertreatment.

The table shows which engine oils have beenapproved for your vehicle.Missing values were not available at time ofgoing to print.

Model Enginemodel

MBApproval

C 250 271 229.3,229.5,229.51

C 250 4MATIC34

C 300 4MATIC272 229.5

C 350C 350 4MATIC34

276

C 63 AMG 156 229.535

i MB approval is indicated on the oilcontainers.

Additives! Do not use any additives in the engine oil.

This could damage the engine.

Engine oil viscosityViscosity describes the flow characteristicsof a fluid. If an engine oil has a high viscosity,this means that it is thick; a low viscositymeans that it is thin.Select an engine oil with an SAE (viscosity)classification suitable for the prevailingoutside temperatures. The following tableshows the correct SAE classification to beused. The low-temperature characteristics ofengine oils can deteriorate significantly, e.g.as a result of aging, soot and fuel deposits. Itis therefore strongly recommended that youcarry out regular oil changes using anapproved engine oil with the appropriate SAEclassification.

34 Canada only.35 Restriction: only SAE 0W-40 or SAE 5W-40 engine oils may be used.


Tech

nica

l dat

a

Z

Refrigerant of the air-conditioningsystem

The air-conditioning system is filled withR134a refrigerant and a special PAGlubricant.

! Never use refrigerant R 12 (CFC) ormineral lubricants. Otherwise, you coulddamage the air-conditioning system.

Brake fluid

G WARNINGOver a period of time, the brake fluid absorbsmoisture from the air; this lowers its boilingpoint.If the boiling point of the brake fluid is too low,vapor pockets may form in the brake systemwhen the brakes are applied hard (e.g. whendriving downhill). This would impair brakingefficiency.You should have the brake fluid renewed atregular intervals. The brake fluid changeintervals can be found in the Service Booklet.

Only use brake fluid approved by Mercedes-Benz. Information about approved brakefluids can be obtained from any authorizedMercedes-Benz Center or on the Internet athttp://bevo.mercedes-benz.com.

Coolant

Important safety notesThe coolant is a mixture of water andantifreeze/corrosion inhibitor. It performsthe following tasks:Rcorrosion protectionRantifreeze protectionRraising the boiling pointThe engine cooling system is filled at thefactory with coolant that contains anantifreeze/corrosion inhibitor that ensuresprotection down to approximately -35 ‡(-37 †).

! Only add coolant that has been premixedwith the desired antifreeze protection.Otherwise, the engine could be damaged.Further information on coolants and onfilling can be found in the Mercedes-BenzSpecifications for Service Products, MBApproval 310.1, e.g. on the Internet athttp://bevo.mercedes-benz.com. You canalso consult an authorized Mercedes-BenzCenter.

! Always use a suitable coolant mixture,even in countries where high temperaturesprevail.Otherwise, the engine cooling system is notsufficiently protected from corrosion andoverheating.

If the coolant has antifreeze protection downto -35 ‡ (-37 †), the boiling point of thecoolant under operating conditions isapproximately 266 ‡ (130 †).Your vehicle has a range of aluminumcomponents. Aluminum components in theengine make it necessary to use antifreeze/corrosion inhibitor coolant that has beenspecifically formulated to protect thealuminum parts. Using other antifreeze/corrosion inhibitors without thesecharacteristics affects the service life.The coolant must be used throughout the yearin order to maintain the necessary corrosion


chni

cal d

ata

protection and to provide protection fromoverheating. In the Service Booklet, you canfind information on the intervals for renewal.The renewal interval is determined by thecoolant type and the engine cooling systemdesign. The renewal interval in the ServiceBooklet is only valid if the coolant is renewedor filled up with Mercedes-Benz approvedproducts. Therefore, only use MB 325.0 or326.0 anticorrosion/antifreeze or anotherMercedes-Benz approved product of thesame specification.Information on other products with the samespecifications that are approved byMercedes-Benz can be obtained at anauthorized Mercedes-Benz Center or on theInternet at http://bevo.mercedes-benz.com.The coolant is checked at every maintenanceinterval at an authorized Mercedes-BenzCenter.The antifreeze/corrosion inhibitorconcentration in the engine cooling systemshould:Rbe at least 50%. This will protect the engine

cooling system against freezing down toapproximately -35 ‡ (-37 † ).Rnot exceed 55% (antifreeze protection to

-49 ‡ [-45 † ]); otherwise, heat will notdissipate as effectively.

If the coolant level is too low, MB 325.0 or326.0 anticorrosion/antifreeze should beadded. Have the engine cooling systemchecked for possible leaks.

Windshield/headlamp cleaningsystem

G WARNINGWasher solvent/antifreeze is highlyflammable. Do not spill washer solvent/antifreeze on hot engine parts, because it mayignite and burn. You could be seriouslyburned.

Use MB SummerFit windshield washerconcentrate at temperatures above freezing:X Mix 1 part MB SummerFit with 100 parts

water.

Use MB WinterFit windshield washerconcentrate at temperatures below freezing:X At temperatures down to 14 ‡ (Ò 10 †):

mix 1 part MB WinterFit with 2 parts water.X At temperatures down to Ò 4 ‡ (Ò 20 †):

mix 1 part MB WinterFit with 1 part water.X At temperatures down to Ò 20.2 ‡

(Ò 29 †): mix 2 parts MB WinterFit with 1part water.

! Only SummerFit and WinterFit can bemixed. Otherwise, the jets could becomeblocked.

Vehicle data

Please note that for the specified vehicledata:Rthe heights specified may vary as a result

of:- tires- load- condition of the suspension- optional equipment

Missing values were not available at time ofgoing to print.

All models

Vehicle length 182.3 in (4630 mm)

Vehicle width including exterior mirrors

79.1 in (2008 mm)

Vehicle height 56.9 in (1444 mm)

Wheelbase 108.7 in (2760 mm)

Front track 60.7 in (1541 mm)

Rear track 60.8 in (1544 mm)

Vehicle data 351

Tech

nica

l dat

a

Z

All models

Turning circle 35.57 ft (10.84 m)

Maximum roof load

Maximum trunk load

Maximum 220lb(100kg)

C 63 AMG

Vehicle length 185.5 in (4712 mm)

Vehicle width including exterior mirrors

79.1 in (2008 mm)

Vehicle height 56.4 in (1433 mm)

Wheelbase 108.9 in (2765 mm)

Front track 61.8 in (1569 mm)

Rear track 60.0 in (1525 mm)

Turning circle 36.42 ft (11.10 m)

352 Vehicle dataTe

chni

cal d

ata

Publication detailsInternet

Further information about Mercedes-Benzvehicles and about Daimler AG can be foundon the following websites:http://www.mbusa.com (USA only)http://www.mercedes-benz.ca (Canadaonly)

Editorial office

Not to be reprinted, translated or otherwisereproduced, in whole or in part, without thewritten permission of Daimler AG.

As at 15.03.2011

Order no. 6515 0749 13 Part no. 204 584 35 82 Edition A 2012

É2045843582ÇËÍ2045843582

Mercedes Benz C250 Car Full Manual

Documents

Transcript of Mercedes Benz C250 Car Full Manual